Home

Goodwin`s Market Aggregate Store Sales

1. ty kB kB kB Checkstand 1 Checkstand 2 Checkstand 3 Checkstand n 209 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 RETAIL 7 r Manual ADMINISTRATION Close Store The Store Close form is used to execute the BHS store close process This process transfers se ProcD ate Timestamp Emp Activity Description tep A Run Now i 11 5 2007 11 5 2007 2 45 01 PM 0 Store Close Cashier 1 on checkstand 2006TES T still signed on data from the cl lent system S checkstands and 11 5 2007 11252007 2 45 01 PM 0 Store Close Store Close cannot continue 1 Refresh 11 4 2007 1124 2007 9 15 19 4M 1 Store Cl Store Close Finished S fully for 11 04 2007 10 updates the Back End server databases It also MALO TUMAOISIEUAAM 1 SC Corera y Ca 11 4 2007 11242007 9 15 04 4M 1 Store Close All checkstands have been checked out 1 Calcu lates the prod uct m ovem ent sales 5 and 1144 2007 1124 2007 9 15 04 AM 1 Store Close Calculating Store Sales 1 Help 11 3 2007 11 3 2007 9 02 40 AM 1 Store Close Store Close Finished Successfully for 11 03 2007 10 u pd ates the histo ry files This process sS hould 11 3 2007 11 3 2007 9 0224AM 1 Store Close Connecting checkstands 1 Oo 11 3 2007 11232007 9 02 24 AM 1 Store Close All checkstands have been checked out 1 be run on a daily basis If for some reason it is 11 3 2007 11 3 2007 9 0224AM 1 Store Close Calculating Store Sales i 11 2 2007 1122 2007 8 57 55 AM 1 Store
2. Note Points for all customers can be reset to a certain level by using the Reset Frequent Shopper Points function This could be used to support a special promotion where all customers need to start from a specific point RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 65 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Electronic Coupons RETAIL gives you the ability to create Electronic Coupons for your customers either for their current SIR Bolu gt e als purchase or for their next purchase The coupons Pice Reduction 6 are processed automatically through the i i Checkstand when the customer s Card Number is a son scanned or entered mE E Coupon Link NOTE If you would like electronic coupons to be applied to all customers with or without a customer card go to POS Information Select Yes in the Upe Link field E Coupons for All mide iaa Beer n CA v Description 3 Open Electronic Coupons Press Add E on the E m A toolbar You can now enter the information related in Ord a i o to the coupon you want to add i Siats Ee The various criteria entered for the coupon are as follows Triggers The various fields contained in the left portion of the coupon form are the fields available to trigger the use of the coupon at the checkstand Coupons can be triggered based one of the following e Purchase of a specific produ
3. Note entries cannot be modified Enter in an offsetting entry if an entry needs to be adjusted Table 30 4 Contains a description of each field contained in the Safe Adjustments form SAFE ADJUSTMENTS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD Tenders Adjustment Memo ADJUSTMENTS LIST List of adjustments made for the day Lists Modified By person making adjustment and Date Modified date adjustment entered Table 30 4 Make Review a Bank Deposit The Deposits form allows the user to create new deposits or review existing deposits This form allows the user to make deposits for any tender that has been flagged as depositable Depositable attribute for the Tender set to M in the Tender Maintenance function Deposits cannot be modified only created or displayed To adjust an existing deposit an offsetting deposit either negative or positive would have to be created Under the Deposit Totals tab the totals for the deposit are displayed Scroll through the deposits for a day by clicking on the scroll arrows next to the Deposit No field This form is displayed when the Make a Deposit button is selected on the Safe Statistics and Balancing form or when the Review a Bank Deposit function is selected from the Point of Sales menu RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Make Deposits ala aleja als Process Date Deposit No Time Stamp Print Slip Print Checks 11 5 2007 1 34 21 PM Deposit Totals
4. Deposits 5 249 55 317 22 20 99 0 00 208 00 Reconcile 5 249 55 317 22 20 99 2 50 26 00 Loans 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Adjustments 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Opening Pickups 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 182 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 2 50 0 00 zl Totals 0 00 182 00 0 00 5 611 26 5 795 76 2 50 Note double click on the column heading for the Adjustments Pickups Loans and Deposits columns to display detailed data for these columns A security level of 10 is required to view this data Note Each day s safe balance must be saved in order to ensure that subsequent days will be calculated properly This is critical since the ending balance of one day becomes the starting balance of the next day System generated bank deposit information is displayed and the actual safe contents can be entered under the Balance Info tab The deposit information is calculated by the system and a variance is displayed if one exists compared to the actual deposits entered The safe can be counted down and the amounis entered in the Safe Contents portion of this form A safe audit can then be performed see Toolbar section to correct any variances in the safe Note The safe content labels represent a target amount that is to be stored in the safe The user can configure these labels Refer to the Toolbar section Safe Statistics and Balancing e BIB elma Led Current Safe A
5. Print Front End Service Report This function will produce a Front End Service report PaE listing key checkstand statistics for the selected time period The layout of this report is contained in Appendix F The Checkstand Service Report form will be select Dates for the Report displayed when the Print Front End Service Report Start Date 11 5 2007 i function is selected from the Point of Sales menu This Cancel form will accept entry of a start and end date for EndDate 11 5 2007 l selection on the report Help Note This report can be run for current day sales even prior to a store close run Note Definition of items scanned used in calculating percentage of Items Scanned is configurable via the POS Information function The default definition is any valid UPC scanned or hand keyed into the system is defined as an item scanned RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 248 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Print Front End Service Report continued Table 30 13 contains a description of each field contained in the Front End Service Report as well as the database fields used by the report REPORT FIELD DESCRIPTION FORMAT CALCULATION Start Date Start date for the period selected Date Time None End Date End date of the period selected Date Time None Name Employee name Text None Total Hrs On Total hours logged in Text None Total Hrs On Percentage of report total Percent Over Short Over an
6. wsl ale Active wv Tender Code must be setup Example if a Peso deere Ll a ma aab associated to the Peso currency must be entered Tender Type CA Ello in order for it to be used at the Checkstand Add Cunency Peso eso ini E the new tender using the Tender Maintenance He m E Tan z function Make sure to select the appropriate An currency in the Currency field Reqied F Ma so Min 0 00 Overall Max 2 000 00 Negative Amount Required T E y currency has been setup a Peso tender Depostabie Seconda z z 5 A When setting up the tender take into consideration how change should be given for the tender If you wish to give change back in the foreign currency click M the Accept for Change field 7 19 2007 11 08 00 AM Modified By Jane Smith RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 309 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX C FOREIGN CURRENCIE Tender Setup continued Tender Setup continued This will allow the tender to be selected as the Change General Limits Miscellaneous Electronic Service Tender under the Limits tab of the form Examples If you are setting up a Peso tender and would like to E give change back in Pesos select Peso as the Change i Tender Overall Max o E If you want to give change back in the local currency e g dollars then select CA cash tender as the change tender The system will automatically calculate Allow Pickups amp Loa
7. ES 2 tooloar The Card Number field is an important piece of information for customers Cardo Ft Middle Las eny This is the number that is entered on the Main Checkstand screen of the Front End module to enable the system to track sales to a customer The system tracks the Birth Date 11 2 1966 v cir 911111111 Customer Photo Sex Male v Expiration Date 8 2 2020 y Customer Address Marital Status Married v Type PC v Customer Link sac Email es Area 906 Customer Secondary Ids customer sales applies frequent shopper a j PE Attributes points coupons and also verifies check a a gt L 8 R oe pivieges chalge privileges based on Frequent Shopper v Points Earned 1810 Current Balance 0 00 Allowed Purchasers the Card Number entered Fill in General information Birth Date Type PC ET ECU ay Preferred Customer which allows Electronic A Fe RE E Coupons or REG Regular Driver license Se ee and so on Click Customer Photo field and save a customer s picture in the system Click Customer Address and enter the mailing billing and e mail address for the customer When an e mail address has been entered you may click Customer e mail to send an e mail message to the customer Set up the customer s charge account information and their check writing privileges In edit mode click Show Bad Check History to display a list of bad checks that have been entered in the system for the
8. RETAIL 7 356 RETAIL 7 User Manual Upc Description Vendor 0000000000222 D F BULK COFFEE 321 0007232300060 D F COLOMBIA COFFEE 321 0007232300061 D F DECAF FRENCH 321 0007232300062 D F DECAF REGULAR 321 0007232300063 D F ESPRESSO ROAST 321 0007232300064 D F FRENCH ROAST 321 0007232300065 DF GUATE ANTIGUA WHL 321 0007232300066 D F KONA BLEND WHL BN 321 0007232300067 D F MOKA JAVA 321 0007232300068 D F OWN FAMILY BLND 321 0007232300070 D F VIENNA ROAST 321 0007232300073 DF DCAF FRN VAN WHL 321 0007232300074 D F DECAF AU CHOC 321 0007232300078 D F CAFE FR VAN WHL 321 0007232300080 D F CAFE AU CHOC 321 0007232300088 DF HAWAII HZLNUT WHL 321 0007232300333 DF COLOMBIA SUPREME 321 0007232300334 D F VANILLA NUT 321 0007232300335 D F CINN HAZELNUT 321 0007232300336 D F FRENCH ROAST 321 0007232300338 D F HAWAIIAN BLEND 321 0007232300340 D F HAWAIIAN HAZEL 321 0007232300357 D F CAFE VAN NUT WHL 321 0007232300358 DF CARAMEL CREME 321 0007232300359 D F CAFE FR CARAMEL 321 0007232300360 DF DECAF VANILLA NUT 321 0007232300361 D F DECAF CINN HAZEL 321 0007232300362 D F DECAF FR CARM WHL 321 0007232300363 D F DECAF HAWAII HAZ 321 0007232300364 D F CAFE CINN HZL WHL 321 0007232300376 D F ESPRESSO 321 0007232300467 D F BUTTERSCOTCH 321 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 35 PM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Dept me h i ee A MA ek lek lek lek lek lk Ck ll A A MA ek lC hb hb hb hb hb hb ob ek lk
9. S1 100 3300 80 Show Customers 12 Week Department CLEANING SUPPLIES 0 10 Distribution is clicked mal To Sa saa sam FISH GENERAL MERCHANDISE 64 19 61 73 64 85 78 76 GIFT CARD 12 00 GROCERY 274 39 83 78 177 59 148 57 118 14 GROCERY TAX 274 39 83 78 177 59 148 57 118 14 MICE 4 73 PET SUPPLIES 4 73 Table 10 7 contains a description of each field contained in the Department Distribution History for a Customer form DEPARTMENT DISTRIBUTION HISTORY FOR A CUSTOMER COLUMN DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Department Displays the name of the Departments as entered in Department Maintenance Week Month or Year The sales totals for the weeks month or year as per the user s selection are displayed Table 10 7 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 138 RETAIL 7 r Manual Customer Focus continued Customer Group The Customer Group form is used to group your top 100 customers Thank you letters or gift certificates can then be printed for each customer in the group Electronic Coupons can be attached to these top customers The criteria used in the Customer Focus form are the same criteria used on this form to display the customers that can be categorized This form is displayed when the Group Customers button is pressed from the toolbar on the Customer Focus form If the Preferred Customers option is selected as the Select Type then the top of the form will change as depicted to the
10. Savings Msq Change Not Taxable Sub Total Tax A Tax B Tax E Tax D Tender Amount Total Cust Disc Customer ID MsgCustSurch Frequent Shopper Points Item Disco Desc 1 entered on coupon form Desc 2 entered on coupon form Desc 3 entered on coupon form Desc 4 entered on coupon form PLA PLS Message You Saved Change Not Taxable Sub Total Tax A Tax B Tax E Tax D Tender Amount Total Setup POS Information POS information Discounts Tax Plans Tax Plan lA X Using Tax Rate Using Tax Table Cust Disc Customer ID Cost Plus Frequent Shopper Points ltem Disco Descl EnteredOnCouponForm Desc2EnteredOnCouponForm Desc3EnteredOnCouponForm Desc4EnteredOnCouponForm PLA PLS Message You Saved Formating Only Formating Only Formating Only Formating Only Formating Only Formating Only Formating Only Formating Only Formating Only Tax Rate 10 00 Repeat Range Repeat Tax APPENDIX A INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM 296 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX A INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM Step 1 Setup System Setup Information continued Tax Table Setup Example of 7 00 Tax Table Beginning Value Ending Value Tax Amount Difference Beginning Ending o ICI E Eo IO E IO E IO E E E E IO E IO E E IO E IO E ss A3 S 2 10 2 14 NO al NO 00 S SA AAA E O EA ETA A EA 9 S eS ae AAA A
11. Table 28 2 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 218 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Reports continued Selection Criteria Select all products for the selected department Select all products for the selected section Select all products for the selected vendor Select all products that are flagged as DSD Direct Store Delivery Select all products in the selected product group DSD or all the products Total Store a oY Sort Criteria This report is sorted by department name This report is sorted by section name This report is sorted by vendor name This report is sorted by DSD vendors names This report is sorted by vendor name Total Store or DSD or UPC Product Group Print Labels The Print Products Label form is displayed when the Ham ar label check box is set for a product on the Product Maintenance form or when the Print Labels function is nap selected from the Products Menu This form will allow A A you to select the type of label to be printed for the product a aa being maintained on the Product Maintenance form If Seafood Labels EE you select the Print Labels function from the Products Menu it will allow you to select the type of labels you want printed for all the products matching the selected criteria That is Regular DSD Ad Seafood or Discontinued Note Retail supports custom label printing through its interface with Bar Tender by Seagull See the
12. Void key VD through the keyboard b Followed by the product code ENTER Voiding a Product to a Section a Press the Void key VD through the keyboard b Followed by the product price c Press the Section key SE through the keyboard d Following by a Section number ENTER Example from the keyboard VD500SE100 ENTER Void 5 00 for a product from section 100 Voiding an Entire Sale a Press the Void key VD through the keyboard then press the Total key TL ENTER through the keyboard all items will be voided b Key 0 then press the Cash key CA through the keyboard to finalize the transaction Example from the keyboard VDTL ENTER Void the entire sale Refunding a Product to a Department a Press the Refund key RF through the keyboard b Followed by the product price c Followed by a department key ENTER Note If this is the only transaction press the Total key TL through the keyboard key in 0 and press the Cash key CA through the keyboard to clear the transaction Example from the keyboard RF500DP10 ENTER Refund 5 00 for a product from department 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 4 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Voiding and Refunding continued Refunding a Product through Key Entry a Press the Refund key RF through the keyboard b Followed by the p
13. 10 01 20 00 8 8 2007 9 04 48 4M they are entered To delete an entry select the entry at a ae in the list and click Delete 30 01 40 00 10 22 2007 10 15 29 AM 40 01 50 00 10 22 2007 10 15 34 4M 50 01 60 00 10 22 2007 10 15 40 4M 60 01 70 00 10 22 2007 10 15 45 4M 70 01 80 00 10 22 2007 10 15 50 AM 80 01 90 00 10 22 2007 10 15 56 AM 30 01 100 00 10 22 2007 10 16 01 4M 100 01 110 00 10 22 2007 10 16 16 AM 110 01 120 00 10 22 2007 10 16 27 AM 120 01 130 00 10 22 2007 10 16 36 AM 42M F140 nN 112222007 10 17 45 AM Table 6 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Frequent Shopper Point Ranges form Amount Maximum amount of purchase of a level range Points Number of points earned within a purchase range Modified Date and time stamped by system when the point range was created modified By Person who created or the last person who modified the range Save Button Use to save the information Delete Button Use to delete a desired point range Close Button Click to exit this function or form the same as button on the tool bar Help Button Click to access Help file for this function Range List From Amount Displays the minimum amount of the point range Amount Displays the maximum amount of the point range Points Displays the points earned for each point range Modified Displays the date and time modified for each point range Modified By Displays the Number of the Employee who modified created each ran
14. 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 OUO O Wo OO O WoW Y O O O wo O O O O O O O O O O QQ O O 0O 0 O O O O O O0 O O OQO O O O QO OQO O O O OQO OQO OQO O OQO OQO QO O 10 16 00 Sections RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 3 0 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Stock on Hand Report Section BEVERAGE Fizzy Drinks GROCERY Canned Goods Cereal GROCERY GROCERY GROCERY GROCERY GROCERY GROCERY Packaged Foods Packaged Foods Potato Chips NON FOOD Books UPC 0000000001001 0000000000163 0000000022022 0000000000079 0000000000159 0000000000164 00000000001 71 0000000000666 0000000000777 0000000003434 0000
15. 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 20 00 Crestline Card 20 00 Crestline Card 20 00 Crestline Card 20 00 Crestline Card 20 00 Crestline Card 20 00 Crestline Card 20 00 Crestline Card 20 00 Crestline Card 20 00 Crestline Card 20 00 Crestline Card 20 00 Crestline Card 20 00 Crestline Card 20 00 Crestline Card 20 00 Crestline Card Tuesday November 01 2005 05 47 PM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Date 11 1 2005 Home Phone D L 0041000000030 0041000000028 0041000000108 0041000000114 0041000000127 0041000000128 0041000000130 0041000000131 0041000000135 0041000000137 0041000000138 0041000000142 0041000000144 0041000000528 0041000000529 0041000000531 0041000000534 0041000000535 0041000000536 0041000000539 0041000000540 0041000000541 0041000000545 0041000000548 0041000000549 0041000000550 0040200000141 0040200000004 0040200000007 0040200000015 004020000001 7 0040200000018 0040200000020 0040200000102 0040200000103 0040200000104 0040200000105 0040200000106 0040200000108 0040200000109 Current Balance 100 00 100 00 69 49 86 90 88 27 0 08 100 00 100 00 12 90 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 8 35 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 72 19 48 62 1
16. 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 Special Cost 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 2 95 Special Price 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 3 00 2 6 00 Normal Special Margin Margin 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 27 32 1 67 Product Mixmatch Report 361 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Product Normal Batch Report UPC 0002820000127 0002820000156 0002820000159 0002820000160 0002820000161 0002820000162 0002820000163
17. 401 453 82 14 370 29 14 370 29 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Safe Change 4 915 00 0 00 165 00 7 528 58 8 171 48 268 901 12 447 810 90 25 287 10 31 026 95 9 633 23 22 253 79 8 895 17 9 598 81 95 355 65 95 718 28 562 01 100 01 0 00 110 384 09 144 617 66 30 333 95 28 951 95 20 58 120 797 43 126 462 04 60 50 938 378 52 0 00 0 00 Manager James Henderson James Henderson James Henderson James Henderson James Henderson James Henderson James Henderson Donna Anderson Donna Anderson Jaime Henderson James Henderson James Henderson James Henderson Barbara Carter Barbara Carter James Henderson James Henderson James Henderson James Henderson James Henderson James Henderson James Henderson James Henderson James Henderson James Henderson James Henderson Larry Martin Larry Martin Larry Martin Safe Audii 367 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Safe Statistics Report Goodwin s Market Safe Statistics Balance Date 10 12 2005 System Generated Deposit Total Sales OverShort Paid Ins Paid Outs Received On Acct Atm Credit Mfg Coupons Non Depositables Safe Adjustments To be Deposited 32 115 7 1 95 0 00 0 0 0 0 17 152 17 241 81 1 570 40 Mr m 0 00 13 149 4 ALLA IAP IA AOA AON COAL A Oo ma lj SS SST STS SSI SISI STS STSHS O Oln
18. Avg Price Displays the average price of the products in the department section Avg Order Displays the average number of items per order Customers Displays the number of customers purchasing products in the department section Table 19 1 Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the tool bar located on the Show Stores Sales form Button Description Use to exit the current window Use this button to print a Store Sales report Refer to the Store Sales Report topic in this section Use this button to display the Store Sales report on the screen Refer to the Store Sales Report topic in this section Use these buttons to toggle between displaying sales by section or by department ll G Fe Re Esil Use this button to display the sales data in graph form Refer to the Store Sales Graph topic in this section Use this button to maintain memo information for the sales data Refer to Store Sales Memo topic in this section Use this button to display the department taxable sales data and the corresponding sales taxes Use this button to print Aggregate Store Sales report Refer to the Aggregate Store Sales Report in this section Use this button to activate the context sensitive help in this dialogue di E al E EJES RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 16 RETAIL 79 r Manual Show Store Sales continued Store Sales Report POINT OF SALES TORE SA
19. Stand In Approval Flag to indicate if stand in approval is allowed for the Electronic Tender Require Luhn Check Flag to indicate if luhn check is to be done locally for the Electronic Tender Table 38 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 280 RETAIL 7 User Manual Tender Maintenance continued Toolbar ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on the Tender Maintenance form Button Exit the current window Press to Add a Tender Press to Edit a Tender 3 le 0 AAA E la E Activates the context sensitive help Set Defaults There are several pre configured tenders included in RETAIL CA Cash CK Check CC Credit Card DC Debit Card FS Food Stamps CP Coupons MI In store Charge WC WIC Wic CVV Wic CVV Vouchers SN Store Coupons EP Electronic Food stamps and EC Electronic Cash and CE Check that has been electronically converted used with Telecheck or Solupay Default settings for these tenders can be reset at any time by clicking SetDetaults button This will prompt a message refer to the dialogue box figure on the right to confirm the resetting of the tender attributes Note SN is no longer used as a tender Store Coupons are now applied as discounts in Retail This can be flagged Inactive RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RE
20. related to that log will now be displayed Jane Smith 10 22 2007 11 27 42 AM Update ECoupons LESLIE OUpdates 129 Add New 0 Deleted Jane Smith 10722 2007 11 25 24 AM Update ECoupons 2006TEST OUpdates 2 Add New 0 Deleted Jane Smith 10 22 2007 11 25 24 AM Update ECoupons LESLIE OUpdates 2 Add New O Deleted Click the Close selection of the Log menu to close Jane Smith 10 22 2007 11 22 23 AM Update Products LESLIE E50Updates 1 Add New 9 Deleted E Jane Smith 1022222007 11 22 234M Update Products 2006TEST 651Updates 0 Add New 9 Deleted this form and return to the main menu dane Smith 10142242007 11 22 23 AM Lndate Produrts 2MMATFST 11 Indates N Add New Deleted lt gt RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 94 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END DOCUMENTATION Backend Detail Documentation Purpose The purpose of this section of the document is to provide the reader with a high level understanding of the Back End module of RETAIL The detail documentation included in this section contains the following types of documents e Form flow documents for each menu section for example customers employees products e Snapshots of all forms used in the Back End module e A brief description of the form s use and functions supported e Detailed descriptions of form fields e Report definitions and layouts The Back End detail documentation is broken up into sections for each menu function contained in the Back End module RETAI
21. 0 00 0 00 0 00 Safe Adjustment 0 00 Pick2 0 00 0 00 0 00 Pickup 0 00 0 00 0 00 System Deposits 2 793 72 Tari rma 54 04 Actual Deposits 0 00 Total Sales 2 793 72 Till Totals 0 00 2 793 72 2 793 72 Safe Variance 2 793 72 Note The Total Sales amount displayed on this form is calculated using the same calculation as Till Statistics amp Balancing Total Sales including taxes amp excluding coupons Coupon Multiples e g double coupon amounts Discounts customer line item amp order level Electronic Coupons Table 30 8 contains a description of each field contained in the Balancing Overview form BALANCING OVERVIEW FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Balance Date Sales System Gen Deposit Total Sales Over Shorts Paid Ins Paid Outs Received on Acct Electronic Tenders Mfr Coupons NonDepositables Safe Variance Safe Adjustments Total Actual Deposits Variance TILLS SECTION Over Shorts Totals Table 30 8 Date the data pertains to This section contains a list of all departments and their sales created for the specified balance date Sum of sales coming from Sales Section tax field Over shorts for the day from the Till Statistics form Sum of paid ins received from the Till Statistics form Sum of paid outs from the Till Statistics form Sum of customer payments received on account from the Till Statistics form Sum of ATM s and Credit Cards from checker tab
22. 0007800000383 0007800000269 0007800000579 0007800000530 0007800000830 0007800000400 0005020000125 0007686000000 0004300000690 0007686000002 Description 7 UP SODA 6 PACK DIET 7 UP SODA 6 PACK A amp W DIET RT BEER 6 PK A amp W ROOT BEER 6 PACK DIET RITE COLA 6 PACK DIET RITE RASP 6 PACK DIET SUNKIST 6 PACK SUNKST ORANGE 6 PAK A amp W CRM SODA 6 PACK RC COLA SODA 6 PACK DIET RTE WHT GRP 6 PAK DIET A amp W CRM SDA 6 PAK 7 UP UPSIDE DWN 6 PAK CHERRY 7 UP 6 PACK DIET CHRY 7 UP 6 PACK HAWAIIAN PUNCH 6 PAK SUNNY DELIGHT 6 PACK WELCHS GRAPE 6 PACK CNTRY TME LMNADE 6 PK WELCHS STRAW 6 PACK Total Tuesday November 01 2005 05 38 PM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Goodwin s Market Product Group 7 UP 6 PACK 12 OZ Normal Cost 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 1 83 36 60 Normal Price 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 2 39 47 80 Normal Gross 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 23 43 Special Cost Special Price Special Gross FS Pro
23. 1 856 49 18 571 42 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Goodwin s Market Till Statistics Start Date 11 1 2005 Average Order 0 11 26 06 22 00 5 26 2 34 16 27 23 32 21 07 24 64 21 23 19 34 20 08 Customers 2 17 263 60 18 92 144 47 98 88 96 925 Rings Items Scanned Minute 2 00 177 00 2 391 00 110 00 29 00 654 00 1 300 00 409 00 978 00 650 00 763 00 7 463 00 0 00 94 35 94 19 87 27 96 55 93 88 90 08 90 22 93 05 93 69 95 81 1 73 11 28 13 36 14 07 21 38 12 02 13 85 12 47 12 34 12 85 15 06 12 76 APPENDIX E Till Statistics End Date 11 1 2005 Refunds 0 00 2 99 8 46 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 20 1 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 13 65 Coupon 0 00 0 00 9 79 0 00 0 00 2 00 3 35 1 00 7 00 1 00 0 30 24 44 Coupon Count h A O BADOOOO CO N Ol Voids 0 00 0 00 63 53 4 69 0 79 0 00 17 24 0 00 2 69 9 44 38 84 137 22 Over Shorts 245 22 688 08 6 731 25 560 77 287 20 1 941 43 3 802 87 1 435 27 2 659 44 2 113 40 2 451 49 LS DD DD ODD OD AS 22 916 42 376 RETAIL 7 User Manual Goodwin s Market Start Date 11 29 2005 Employee Name Tender Name Linda Harrison Cash Credit Card Check Coupons Debit Card Elec Foodstamps Food Stamps InStore Charges Store Coupons Tuesday Novembe
24. 5 43 q i 1 2030 Pc sco O E 0 00 0 00 0 00 10 300 00 0 000 822 50 calculations for each Janelle Morgan 9 0 00 l i i Beatrix Potter 14 0 00 0 00 163 05 637 1 00 0 03 1820 0 71 2 0 25 0 000 118 00 461 178 40 697 166 1540 25 8310226 1 Cash Balance The cashier s till amount if over or short as calculated in Till Statistics and Balancing is displayed 2 Voids Errors The sum of the cashier s voided amounts and error corrects a void entered immediately after the product is rung up 3 Store Coupons The sum of all Store Coupons rung up by the cashier 4 Vendor Coupons The sum of all Vendor Coupons rung up by the cashier 5 Canceled Transactions The number of canceled transactions Canceled transactions are logged when the cashier presses the Cancel CN button after ringing up items 6 No Sale Number of times the cashier pressed the No Sale key to open the cash drawer independent of a transaction for example to give a customer change 7 Refunds The dollar amount and percentage of refunds made by the cashier 8 Open Dept Amount Total dollar amount entered into Open Departments 9 Open Dept Percentage Total amount entered into Open Departments divided by Total Sales 10 Trans Total The total number of transactions for the time period 11 Avg Trans The average dollar amount of the transactions for the time period 12 Total Sales
25. Cost Calculator topic in the Product Maintenance section Note When the vendor has a set percentage up charge the unit price printed in the invoice would reflect the up charged retail price the unit price in the Receive an Invoice form reflects the actual unit price RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 148 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Receive an Invoice continued Table 13 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Receive an Invoice form RECEIVE AN INVOICE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Vendor Displays the name of the vendor or supplier Acct Displays the vendor s general ledger account number as entered in the accounting module P O No Displays all the available purchase order numbers not received for that vendor Date Displays the date of the invoice this is usually the date when the PO was created Address Displays the vendor s address as entered in the vendors form UPC Enter the UPC of the product to update in the product list Toggle to item code by clicking UPC button Description Displays the description of the product Department Displays the department of the product Pack Size Displays the pack units in a case Size displays the size of the individual products Unit Units of quantity ordered either units pieces or cases Qty Ordered Quantity ordered for the product If a pack size exists for the product then the default quantity ordered is in cases otherwise it is in units Qt
26. DR Discount Removal BS Department Store Debit D DT Discount Line ltem 11 Stamps 12 Flowers 13 Good Stuff 14 Paid In 4 15 Paid In 5 MC Coupon Establish security levels limits and reason codes for the Front End manager functions For each Front End Manager Function designate the security level required to complete the function and indicate if reasons are required when using the function Enter reason codes by clicking on the Reason Code button The Reason Code field will only be available on certain functions If it is grayed out reasons cannot be assigned to that specific function RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Security Administration ng al paeeccssesccssseossvesscssssenssosessssssensesssensseseeses Transaction Key Blind Till General Description NS No Sale Ma Mones Nas Checkstand Functions Manager Functions l Function Add Customer General Description Add Customer Add Product Check Override Check List Loan In Account Limit Override Media Swap Pickup Resume Transaction Security Level Screen Lock Override Sign off Override Suspend Transaction Training Mode Till Status 274 RETAIL 7 User Manual ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Department Maintenance The Department Maintenance form is used to enter and maintain data related to departments An unlimited number of departments can be
27. Description of the product Normal price of the product as entered in the Product Maintenance function Special price of the product as entered on the batch Special cost of the product as entered on the batch Quantity sold of the product during the ad batch period Sales volume of the product during the ad batch period Cost of sales for the product Profit made on sales during the ad batch period Markdown amount for the product during the ad batch period RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Text Text Text Text Currency Currency Currency Text Currency Currency Currency Currency OF Cancel Calculation None None None None None None None None None None Sales Cost Normal Price Special Price Quantity Sold 216 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Batch Priority Management The Batch Priority Management form is used EA to manage product price change batches that ogee exist in the system This form will allow the user Description Sap Aivat to immediately activate a particular batch or to O io ea set priorities on batches when a product or a Fin uo pe a a EEEE group of products have multiple price changes i n e 1 A a a e Peo reate 11 2 20078 19 244M effective during a given time period The priority i one 1 price changes take place during the merge O Start and End dates The priority two 2 price EndDate ff SSCSCS S S changes go into effect once the t
28. Displays the total cost of all items queried in this category Displays the total number of items sold for the queried category Displays the number of customers buying the products in the queried category Displays the gross profit for the selected category sales cost Display the gross margin for the selected category profit sales Indicates if sales for products having the same item code should be included in totals Section Vendor Other Total Cost Quantity Customers Profit Margin Include Related Products Zero Movers Only PRODUCTS LIST UPC ltem Code Cost Price Qty Total Cost Profit Margin Customer Revenue Table 20 1 Flag to display only the products without sales during the time period List all products found for the specified category Displays the UPC or PLU of the product Displays the item code of the product Displays the cost for the product Displays the price for the product Displays the quantity sold of the product for the time period Displays the total cost cost quantity of the product sold for the time period Displays the total profit made for the product during the time period Displays the gross margin percentage for the product Displays the number of customers who purchased the product Displays the gross sales of the product in the selected time period RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 171 RETAIL 7 r Manual POINT OF SALES STORE SALE Show Product Sales continued
29. Goodwin s Market Allowances Allowance Start End Description Date Date Allowance 8 24 2005 9 7 2005 Allowance 8 24 2005 9 7 2005 Allowance 11 14 2005 11 21 2005 Allowance 11 14 2005 11 21 2005 Vendor N O A A Retail Price 1 90 2 87 2 50 1 75 Amount 0 10 0 20 0 25 0 33 Allowances 322 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Allowance Report Goodwin s Market Allowance Report Upc Description Item Code Amount Start Date End Date CERTIFIED FROZEN FOOD 0000000001007 Allowance 0 10 08 24 05 09 07 05 0000000001008 Allowance 0 20 08 24 05 09 07 05 0 30 Total 9 30 Monday November 14 2005 11 29AM Page 1 Allowance Reborl RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 323 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Bad Checks Report Goodwin s Market Bad Checks Names Card Number Date Check Amount Fee Total Balance 0016569 08 07 94 3495 51 75 20 00 71 75 0026981 03 12 93 9063 105 31 20 00 125 31 125 31 0026981 03 12 93 9064 134 03 20 00 154 03 154 03 0026981 03 13 93 9069 231 53 20 00 251 53 251 53 0026981 03 17 93 9070 178 00 20 00 198 00 198 00 0096487 06 30 95 262 231 40 20 00 251 40 0099351 01 01 01 351 0 00 0099351 10 18 95 115 18 75 20 00 38 75 0099351 02 06 95 3595 7 52 20 00 27 52 0144961 05 27 95 0 124 28 20 00 144 28 0144961 01 01 01 961 0161992 10 23 93 2325 37 98 20 00 57 98 0167345 05 14 96 3240 55 99 0 00 55 99 0 00 0227645 09 19 93 1993 40
30. Note Movement for weighted items is tracked either by total weight sold or by number sold based on the setting Track Weighted Items Count in the System Information function If the setting is 47 then weighted items are tracked based on number sold instead of total weight sold Refer to the System Information section for more information Tool Bar The following describes the functions supported by the tool bar located on the Product Sales form U c O m Description Use to exit the current window Use this button to print a Product Sales report Refer to the Product Sales Report topic in this section Use this button to display the Product Sales report on the screen Refer to the Product Sales Report topic in this section Use this button to jump to the Show Product Movement function Refer to Show Product Movement section Use this button to maintain memo information for the selected product Refer to the Product Memo topic contained in the Product Changes section Use this button to refine the selection of data displayed Refer to the Sales Filter topic in this section Al e lol a E E Use this button to activate the context sensitive help in this dialogue Ed RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 172 RETAIL 7 r Manual POINT OF SALES STORE SALE Show Product Sales continued Product Sales Report This function will produce a Product Sales report
31. OOO Note When deleting an inventory count an entry will be created in the user activity log in order to provide an audit trail of data deleted from the system Refer to the User Activity Tracking topic in the General Topics section Table 11 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Inventory Count form INVENTORY COUNT FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION PRODUCT INFO Category UPC Description Label Qty Description Section Vendor Pack Size Cost Price PRODUCT LIST INFO Multiple occurrences of the following UPC Description Qty Count Date Dept Section Vendor DSD Cost Price Pack Size Table 11 1 Category becomes the Inventory ID The UPC or PLU of the product for which the count is entered Displays the description of the product being counted Flag to enable printing of a label for the product being counted The quantity of the product being counted Displays the description of the product being counted Displays the section number of the product being counted Displays the primary vendor of the product being counted Displays the pack and size of the product being counted Displays the cost of the product being counted Displays the price of the product being counted Displays the various products for which a count was entered for the day Displays the UPC or PLU of the product Displays the description of the product Displays the quantity of the product Displays the
32. The customer will be prompted to slide the card If successful the amount will show up on the front end and the customer will pay for the card f Aprocessing message will appear on the screen while the transaction is being processed Note The card is activated before the customer pays for it For this reason if the cashier tries to Void or Cancel the order the customer will need to slide the card again and the card will be Deactivated so that it will have no value g The customer and merchant copies of the receipt will print out h If you do not want to print a merchant copy enter SkipPrintMerchant 1 in the ros ini i The customer will keep the customer copy and the checker will save the merchant copy for balancing at the end of the shift RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 45 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Tendering continued Manual Electronic Tender All Electronic Tenders n Enter items and total order o If applicable calculate food stamp balance press the Food Stamp Toggle key FN through the keyboard followed by the Total Key TL ENTER through the keyboard p The food stamp eligibility amount will be highlighted at the bottom of the form q Press the Credit Manual CM ENTER through the keyboard r Select the appropriate tender for the transaction Follow the process for each tender as described above s A message box will appear prompting the cus
33. Type the free format text Memo Created 11 5 2007 11 10 34 AM A in the Memo field click OK to save the memo Modified By Jane Smith Table 23 14 contains a description of each field contained in the Product Memo form PRODUCT MEMO FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION UPC Displays the UPC or PLU number of the product Description Displays the description of the product Created Date the memo was created Text Section Miscellaneous information entered for the product Modified Date of last modification By Person who last created or modified the information Table 23 14 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 200 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCT Product Maintenance continued Product Miscellaneous Use the Product Miscellaneous form to enter ZTU additional descriptions for a product Click the Misc button to access the Product Maintenance form eee I This is where the Zero Pricing Details are entered Long Description Canca You must also have Allow Zero Pricing flagged in System Information If the price is 0 00 for the current UPC these fields will be enabled E Detoritn Zero Pricing Details V Zero Price Eligible Negative Price Eligible Allow Only when Scanned Prompt for Price Table 23 15 contains a description of each field contained in the Product Miscellaneous form PRODUCT MISCELANEOUS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Long Description Long
34. UPC Displays the UPC or PLU of each product added to the current product group Description Displays the description corresponding to each product within this product group Table 24 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 203 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Group Maintenance continued Toolbar and Form Buttons The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar and buttons located on the Product Groups form Button Description Exit the current window Print a Product Group report Refer to the Print Product Group Report topic in this section Display the Product Group report on the screen Refer to the Print Product Group Report topic in this section Ky Delete a Product Group Enter a memo Refer to the Product Memo topic in the Product Maintenance section k Activates the context sensitive help Move a selected product from to the product list and product group list boxes gt gt lt lt Move all products from to the product list and product group list boxes Product Group Report The Product Group Report function will produce a Product Group report listing all products for the selected group This function is executed when or is selected from the Product Group Maintenance form Table 24 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Product Group Report Reportfield_ Description _ s Formats Calculation _ Description Product group descript
35. Vendor Vendor ID for the product Number Section Section for the product Number Dept Department for the product Number Table 25 2 Selection Criteria Products selected for update in the Mass Product Changes form Sort Criteria UPC Ascending Analyze Product Categories The Analyze Product Categories form is selected from the Point Of Sales menu This function is used to analyze Product Category Department GROCERY ea El ale eoan products for a specific department section vendor or other me Sa RN user defined categories Enter the criteria desired and click eh ee el the button that applies to the criteria entered Products on EE cia matching the criteria entered will be displayed in the bottom jpa E ai ma A ram portion of the form The program will calculate the n a uni sah cumulated gross margin percentage for all of the items in Goutajo SEDER Tota TR the category selected and will display the total number of o Tian PT SPA SS SP items in the category A 5 on vn vr Or ZERKRKCHITKSR Seeenueeeege 5655665585885 A EOR CR B 5554 0500 Note Table 23 1 in Product Maintenance earlier in this section contains a description of each field contained in the Analyze Product Categories form Toolbar See Product Maintenance earlier in this section for a description of each of the toolbar functions RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 208 RETAI
36. View Signatures In Electronic Journal highlight a Credit Card or Electronic Check CE transaction and press View Signature The signature is displayed and the Customer Copy of the receipt is included in the signature viewer You can easily see if the card was slid or entered manually S for swipe or M for manual are displayed in front of the card number the type of card the authorization number and the sequence number On the Front End if the cashier did NOT accept the signature the signature form is displayed with a message Signature was rejected A paper copy was printed To capture signatures enter UseSignaCapture 1 in the ros ini You can also choose to skip the printing of the merchant copy by entering SkipPrintMerchant 1 Electronic Journal Transaction Signature Electronic Journal Transaction Signature CUSTOMER COPY CUSTOMER COPY IT Retail i T Retail IT Retai IT Retai 5041 La Mart 5041 La Mart 5041 La Mart 5041 La Mart Riverside CA 92507 Riveside CA 92507 Riverside CA 92507 Riveside CA 92507 951 682 6277 951 682 6277 991 662 6277 Purchase 68 88 951 662 6277 Purchase 7 89 VISA HOKARARARAKAAS L 114 Master Card SXXXXXXXXXXXXOO16 Auth 12345678 Exp Date Auth 12345678 Exp Date Lane 12 Checker 1 Lane 12 Checker 1 01 19 10 11 37 RefSeq 0987654321 01 19 10 11 47 RefSeq 0987654321 EPS Sequence 120183 EPS Sequence 120184 Date amp Time 1 19 2010 11 38 16 4M Date amp Time 1 19 2010
37. Who Created Displays the name of the person who applied the current batch BATCH LIST BatchNo Displays the batch ID Description Displays the batch description StartDate Displays the date when the batch starts EndDate Displays the date when the batch ends Priority Displays the priority of the batch Type Displays the batch type PB or PU Table 2 7 1 Processing Specifications If the Activate button is clicked the system will perform the following steps 1 Determines the priority of price changes when there is a pricing conflict and store any required pricing changes for later use in a Pending file which is then processed by the Store Close routine 2 Updates price changes to the Products table if necessary 3 Appends the old price and cost to the Price Changes History file 4 Updates the batch as applied If the Delete button is clicked the system will delete the batch from the system RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 217 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Reports The Product Reports form is used to create reports HA listing product information for a specific selection The available selections are Departments Sections Vendors and Other which include Total Store DSD e Direct Service Delivery products or other product categories Click the desired tab and a list of available eel selections will be displayed Click the Include Hash Help Departments field and hash dep
38. _ HF Include Hash Department Include Non Movers M Task Triggers At 8 00 4M every day starting 4 24 2009 Schedule Task Frequency HEHH HM Reporting Services Settings Windows User Account for Scheduling Tasks OK User Name gt lt P10 itretail Cancel Sica e XXXXXXXXXXXXK Apply Help E mail Settings User Information Name Jane Doe E mail Address idoe itretail com Server Information SMTP Server mail itretail com Logon Information SMTP Server Requires Authentication Y User Name idoe itretail com Password Task Store Sales Enabled Report Store Sales Task Name E mail Information E mail ta janedoe hotmail com Subject Daily Store Sales Report 289 RETAIL 7 User Manual Select Report Parameters In Report Parameters select from the drop down the criteria for generating the report in the Schedule Report field You can choose from Current Day Previous Day s Previous Weeks s Previous Calendar Month s Previous Calendar Year s or a Custom range of dates Depending on your selection in the previous field the remaining fields may or may not be enabled If the field is grayed out it is not available for editing For example if you select Current Day for the Store Sales report then none of the additional fields are available If you select Custom dates then the Start Date and End Date fields will be available for editing If you select Previous Day s
39. data deleted from the system Refer to the User Activity Tracking topic in the General Topics section RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 182 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Maintenance continued Table 23 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Product Maintenance form PRODUCT INFO UPC Description Item Code Depts Section Vendor Others Product s UPC or PLU 13 digits Description of the product Wholesaler s code for the product Product s department In Analyze Product Categories function this becomes a list box for selection Product s section In Analyze Product Categories function this becomes a list box for selection of a section Product s vendor In Analyze Product Categories function this becomes a list box for selection of a vendor Displays the name of the Product Group the product belongs to joined via Product Group Maintenance In Analyze Product Categories function this becomes a list box for selection of other categories NORMAL PRICING Pricing Method Select from four pricing methods Unit Pricing Split Package Pricing Group Threshold Group Adjusted Limited Pricing Cost for the product Retail price for the product Quantity for this product to be priced under group pricing Group pricing applied to this product Target gross margin percentage for a product Gross margin percentage for a product System generated once you have entered th
40. displays an accumulation of the charges MI A transaction key and payments RA transaction cer rome rom es te key data entered from the checkstand Sai Par A apple EES 5 oar a 8 23 2007 Charge 5 00 15 9 7 2007 Paid 1 1 284 223 Additional entries for example charges a a ne HA payments credit memos and finance charges can be entered through this form All entries pertaining to the customers are displayed in the bottom grid Table 2 8 contains a description of each field contained in the In store Charge Maintenance form FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Customer Type a customer s card number click Search to find a customer or click any column row of the grid where Card No Search by Card No customers are listed to work on specific customer desired Min Bal Entered amount sets the minimum limit of customers balance of customers to be displayed in the bottom grid Blanking the field includes customers with zero or negative balances Field s default is 0 01 Max Bal Entered amount sets the maximum limit of customers balance of customers to be displayed on the bottom grid Field s default is blank Leaving the field blank includes every customer with outstanding balance Proc Date Field s default is current date Entered From date has grid display charge customers transactions with the From From Proc Date entered and onward To Entered To date has grid display charge customers transactions with dates bef
41. for more information The Processing Date for Milk 3 22 TFA the transaction is displayed in the lower right You Saved 0 78 hand corner This date will be the same as the Milk 3 22 VD current date displayed at the bottom of the form unless you are operating a 24 hour store 30 X 0 01Ibs savinos roa Ibs MA 2 00 MM 8 47 ES Jennifer A item Count 1 FoodstampTotal 0 00 12 11 2006 11 45 AM Note RETAIL 7 offers three different screen modes Please see the Installation Guide for more details As you can see on the form a lot of information related to a customer order is displayed The receipt header information setup through the Receipt Banners function is displayed at the top of the form followed by the transaction lines The main Checkstand form can display up to 12 transaction lines The transaction lines are color coded for ease of identification Voided transactions or refunded items are displayed in red Transactions related to items that are an advertised special special pricing in effect are displayed in green RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 18 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Main Checkstand Form continued The transaction line displays the following information which can be configured through the POS Information function e Product description e UPC e Transaction amount e Up to 2 tax schedules for the product entered on the Tax tab of the POS Information function
42. or 1 tax schedule and the discount category for the product A or B or C if A and B selected for the product discount category will print after the Foodstamp Eligibility e Foodstamp Eligibility for the product Displays as F The bottom portion of the Checkstand form also displays the weight for a weighted item a running total of the customer s savings a running total for the order and a running total of the number of items purchased The name of the employee signed on to the system is displayed on the top of the Checkstand form Options are available through the POS Information function to display not display these items Refer to the POS Configuration topic in this section Important Note if there is a problem with the software license file RETAIL lic the licensee name from the license file will print in lieu of the receipt header information Contact your solution provider if there is a problem with the license Stand Alone Mode If the system is unable to communicate or connect sRetail _ to the server the Checkstand will automatically CR I ROC shift into stand alone mode An indication will E ae display in the lower left hand corner of the form when the system is in stand alone While in stand alone mode transactions will be written to the local Mei 4 40 FA database on the Checkstand machine Certain processes will not function in stand alone mode including Certain Manager functions A message will
43. phone Customer phone Text None P O Date P O date Date Time None P O Requisition Ship Via Terms UPC Item Code Quantity Unit Description POH Person requisitioning goods Ship via Terms UPC UPL number of product Item Code of product Product quantity Unit description Product description Number Text Text Text Number Text Number Text Text None None None None None None None None None Gross Profit Number Price Cost Gross Margin Number Price Cost Price Product price Currency None Cost of product Number None Ext RETAIL TM Extended RETAIL price Number Price Units Purchased Total Total due Currency None Adjustment Adjustment amount Currency Total of all Adjustments Total Net total Currency Sum of total adjustment Vendor Total Vendor total on vendor s invoice Currency None Table 12 3 Selection Criteria All products within the selected PO Sort Criteria None RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 146 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Multiple Vendor Cost You can use the Multiple Vendor Cost form to display Multiple Vendor Cos the different vendors and costs that exist for the current product entered or selected on a PO This form is CAMBRIDGE HOUSE displayed when the View Vendor Cost button is clicked from the Open a New Review a Purchase Order form Table 12 4 contains a description of each field contained in the Multiple Vendor Cost form MULTIPLE VENDOR COST FIE
44. which indicates whether a manager can override the amount Security levels NOT entered will be allowed amounts up to the maximum specified on the General tab Only the highest level can be deleted for a transaction key This will insure that no security level gaps exist Note If you enter security level 20 for a checkstand function a manager will NOT be able to override the transaction key if the amount is greater than the amount listed in Security Levels Security Administration Transaction Key Blind Tills General Description Blind Tills Cancel Transaction Discount Category 4 Discount Category B Department Gift DebitDes Discount Line Item Discount Removal S Department Store Debit D Discount Line ltem Stamps Flowers Good Stuff Paid In 4 Paid In 5 Coupon No Sale Security Administration e alal Checkstand Functions Manager Functions Transaction Key 4 Security Level Require Mar Vv ag A Override Discount Category 4 General Security Levels Description Blind Tills Cancel Transaction Discount Category 4 Discount Category B Department Gift DebitDes Discount Line Item Discount Removal La Department Store Debit D Discount Line ltem Stamps Flowers Good Stuff Paid In 4 Paid In 5 Coupon No Sale Mecos Nos Level Amount 5 00 10 00 15 00 20 00 100 00 Note For transaction keys where no amount is involved
45. 0 Add New 0 Deleted Jane Smith 12 6 2006 8 59 03 AM Update PLevels 2006TEST 539Updates 0 Add New O Deleted Jane Smith 12 6 2006 8 59 03 AM Update PLevels ITROIPOSO1 4Updates 55 Add New 0 Deleted e Smith 127672NNK ARINI AM Indate Pl evels ANNAT FST 449 Indates N Add New N Delete i Table 31 1 contains a description of each field contained in the View System Log Files form VIEW SYSTEM LOG FILES FIELD DESCRIPTIONS STORE CLOSE LOG Employee Displays the name of the employee performing the store close Date Displays the date of the store close Execute Time Displays the time when the step was executed Activity Displays the name of the executed activity Step Displays the number of the step executed Description Displays the description of the step executed UPDATE CHECKSTAND LOG Employee Displays the name of the employee who executed the update Time Displays the date and time of the update Activity Displays the name of the executed activity Displays the name of the checkstand updated Displays the status of the update Displays the workstation ID of the workstation where the update was executed HISTORY BACKUP LOG Employee Backup Time Status From DATABASE ERROR LOG Time Error No Source Description USER ACTIVITY LOG Employee Date Time Work Station Action Performed Key Value Text ID Table 31 1 Displays the name of the employee who executed the history backup Displays the date and time of the Poshist mdb backup D
46. 00 50 00 0 00 0 150 9 00 98 33 0 00 Gross Margin SP Price SPCost Cost 1 350 1 000 1 000 1 000 1 220 Description ltem Code Price Cinnamon Raisin Swirl Coca Cola Sprite Root Beer Cheddar Cheese Green Soup s Festo Sauce Flaming Doritos Cool Doritos Hot Doritos Red Beef Broth 0000000000001 oooooo0000007 000000000008 000000000009 0000000000011 0000000000013 000000000001 4 0000000000016 0000000000017 0000000000018 0000000000019 4 40 2 00 2 00 2 00 4 00 2 00 2 00 2 00 1 000 1 000 1 000 Modified 10 15 2007 10 06 35 AM Modified By Greta Garbo Created 12 29 2005 5 20 33 PM Created By Greta Garbo Statistical data for products matching your selection is displayed in the bottom portion of the screen Total data including gross margin and total items for the category you selected is displayed in the upper portion of the form RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 78 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manage Products continued Track Product Sales How about Product sales What are your best products To view product sales select the Show Product Sales function under the STORE SALES section of the Point of Sales menu You can display product sales for a specific product or for a particular category for example department section vendor total store Enter the start and end dates for the time peri
47. 12 20 00 60 12 0 00 0227645 07 24 94 2301 99 38 99 38 0 00 0227645 02 11 95 2490 69 85 20 00 89 85 0227645 01 12 96 2763 74 04 0 00 74 04 0 00 0230662 01 01 01 662 0 00 0256272 10 04 93 615 100 00 20 00 120 00 0 00 0369269 09 12 93 853 60 00 55 00 0 00 0369269 09 14 93 854 60 00 55 00 0 00 0369269 09 15 93 857 60 00 20 00 75 00 0 00 0369269 09 16 93 858 55 00 20 00 75 00 0 00 0369269 12 29 95 1124 8 87 20 00 28 87 0 00 0369269 12 28 95 1123 11 72 20 00 31 72 0 00 0369269 12 30 95 1125 5 89 20 00 25 89 0 00 0377052 10 25 94 335 24 59 24 59 0387805 02 18 94 805 4 00 20 00 24 00 0401376 03 05 93 7509 26 00 20 00 46 00 0416186 03 29 94 7002 103 82 20 00 123 82 0479572 12 08 94 2222 25 97 20 00 0 00 0537089 06 23 96 1240 49 12 20 00 69 12 0 00 0550230 08 19 93 162 33 30 20 00 53 30 53 30 0550230 01 01 01 338 49 47 20 00 69 00 0675512 02 10 95 1319 40 00 20 00 60 00 0688224 05 17 92 1062 54 85 20 00 74 85 0688224 06 06 92 1106 40 00 0 00 40 00 0688224 06 07 92 1107 40 00 0 00 40 00 0688224 06 07 92 1108 22 58 0 00 22 58 0688224 07 04 92 1093 54 20 20 00 74 20 0688224 07 06 92 1096 61 35 20 00 81 35 0764748 12 22 93 137 64 55 20 00 84 55 0781973 10 29 94 952 14 00 14 00 0 00 Bad Checks RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 324 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Bad Checks Letter 1 Goodwin s Market 24089 Lake Gregory Drive PO Box 3269 Crest
48. 15 24 15 24 15 24 15 24 15 24 15 24 15 29 33 29 33 29 33 29 33 29 33 29 33 24 15 29 33 24 15 24 15 24 15 24 15 24 15 24 15 29 33 29 33 Special Gross Ad Loss 28 28 26 07 26 07 26 07 26 07 26 07 26 07 26 07 26 07 26 07 26 07 26 07 26 07 26 07 26 07 26 07 27 40 27 40 27 40 27 40 27 40 27 40 26 07 27 40 26 07 26 07 26 07 26 07 26 07 26 07 27 40 27 40 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Sold 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Product Ad Batch Gavina 357 APPENDIX E Product Ad Batch RETAIL 7 User Manual Normal Special Normal Special Normal Special Upc Description Vendor Dept Section Cost Cost Price Price Diff Gross Gross Ad Loss Sold 0007232300524 DF NW DARK ROAST 321 1 133 3 95 3 55 5 29 4 89 0 40 25 33 27 40 0 00 0 00 0007232301118 DF DECAF COLOMBIAN 321 1 133 3 95 3 55 5 29 4 89 0 40 25 33 27 40 0 00 0 00 Price Total 162 55 146 65 215 46 199 56 15 90 0 00 0 00 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 35 PM Page 2 Product Ad Batch Gavina RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAI
49. 16 26 1 466 51 384 87 205 86 172 19 8 00 145 36 61 66 15 58 144 61 6 44 1 144 57 Monitor Tills 354 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Outstanding Purchase Orders Goodwin s Market Outstanding Purchase Orders Total Store Start Date 11 14 2005 End Date 11 29 2005 PO Date PO Number Total Cost Total Price Gross Margin Gross Profit A J GRIFFITHS 11 14 05 0000000027 120 00 205 39 41 57 85 39 120 00 205 39 85 39 AMIZETTA WINERY 11 14 05 0000000026 127 83 250 84 49 04 123 01 127 83 250 84 123 01 Total 247 83 456 23 208 40 Outstandina Purchase Orders Total Store 309 Tuesday November 29 2005 11 07 AM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Price Changes History Goodwin s Market Price Changes History Start Date 11 1 2005 End Date 11 1 2005 Deal Date Cost Price Method Price Qty Special Modified Who Modified 0000000000222 D F BULK COFFEE 5 30 7 39 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 21 Gary Parker 0000000000403 RUSSET POTATOES 0 29 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 160 Leslie Morris 0000000000404 POTATOES 10 LBS 2 10 2 59 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 160 Leslie Morris 0000000000553 TANGERINES 0 50 0 69 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 160 Leslie Morris 0001111178040 AXE SHOWER GEL UNL 2 51 3 99 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 30 Larry Johnson 0001254667151 TRID STRAW F
50. 29 Entering a Surcharge for entire order for products categorized as A ccccccssccccesssseeeeesseeeeessseeeeesssseeeeessneeeeessaaes 30 Entering a Surcharge for entire order for products categorized as B oooooccccnococoncnoooocnnconoonnnnonononnnnononnnnnnononnnnnnnnnnnos 30 CUSTOMER PROCESSING sita iaa 31 Tracking Gu stomer Trans aclare ii 31 Adang CUSTOMS sarta iii ds 32 GRECKSTAND FUNCTIONS sans diria 32 Overall OROEK FUN CHOIIS A A de laaleasene ea 32 Tax exemp on enire Order O eg ead gad ied E 32 Eneiniog ele SCT SO ld Me e oc oia 33 As una ata nah emabdusinc ouee utauoac sual ata aut Zamabduuin outa utauoae uatgcemetecnsed 33 Convert AMOUNT IO a Orea CUNGNCY sc AAA 33 Processing VVC MSTA ti A aches Laven elas see Suter ed AU AA ii 33 Accepting Canceling HALOS LALOS Vit cuicos 33 Re print Checkstand Recetario a a A a a E a a A a 33 Clear Message from SCree n cccsccccssccsssecesseecsssecsseecesseecsseeceseeecsatecsesecesseacsaseceuseecsatacesseessaeecsetscesseacsaeecseeeeesaeecseeeeenes 34 Ce iC asa DW A e E S 34 Canceling a Mans aci dd ee 34 A A O AP o Sere ERR oe ane Renee a 34 Age Verca utensilio aiii ases 34 asocio A o A E ieee emer ee mer cer eee eee eenn rere 35 Seo 810 Sauer eee anne O O O eee ee Cen O O A 35 o A O 35 Keying n a Prceeand DEAN e 36 Kemo ina Picsand Seci esasi a a ene eee 36 Manually Overriding a PriC cccscccsssccsssseesseecsssecssseesessecseeessaeeceseecsneecsas
51. 38 44 81 112 19 Goodwin s Market Store Sales Cost of Sales Open Section Sales 0 42 0 09 0 27 1 24 0 66 0 89 0 23 0 05 0 20 0 28 0 24 0 29 0 41 0 73 0 16 0 40 End Date 10 31 2005 Gross Margin ltems 20 00 8 00 58 00 184 00 161 00 151 00 50 00 7 00 26 00 33 00 21 00 51 00 54 00 128 00 126 00 11 00 Avg Price Avg Order 5 94 1 11 3 27 2 00 1 31 1 93 1 90 2 16 1 16 2 12 1 59 1 57 1 28 1 92 2 20 1 40 2 17 1 08 2 36 1 14 3 26 1 17 1 59 2 32 2 15 1 74 1 62 1 58 0 36 4 20 10 20 1 22 Customers 18 4 30 85 76 96 26 5 24 29 18 22 31 81 30 9 Store Sales 373 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Store Sales Tax Detail R Goodwin s Market Store Sales Tax Detail Start Date 10 31 2005 End Date 10 31 2005 Taxable Tax Exempt FSTax Exempt TaxID Description Sales Taxes Sales Amount Amount BAKERY 3 1 TAX 7 75 5 65 0 44 0 44 643 20 DELI 8 1 TAX 7 75 808 88 62 61 62 61 1 352 15 GENERAL MERCHANDISE 7 1 TAX 7 75 1 945 83 150 61 150 61 1 979 80 GIFTS 10 1 TAX 7 75 792 33 61 33 61 33 801 24 GROCERY 1 1 TAX 7 75 5 411 30 418 83 418 83 19 766 94 PHOTO 2 1 TAX 7 75 25 65 1 99 1 99 25 65 PRODUCE 4 1 TAX 7 75 81 40 6 30 6 30 2 009 67 WINE LIQUOR 6 1 TAX 7 75 1 351 28 104 59 104 59 1 351 28 Total 80
52. 4 4 J a a Concord EFT Runs on Windows snore on Concord ER Processing based PC supplied hardware Center gt Request lt q Response Note all data is passed directly via socket connection between all 3 systems Note in order for transactions to be processed correctly all three systems must be up and running and able to communicate over the network Specific installation and setup instructions for the RETAIL Concord Host program are contained in the RETAIL Installation manual Concord Transaction Flow When an EFT transaction is processed using Concord a number of different transaction records record types are passed directly between the various system components The most common transaction flow for an EFT transaction is as follows Step i Checkstand Display Record Type 2 RETAIL Host sends transaction to Concord EFT Manager 200 AAA 4 EFT Manager receives response from processing center and Processing 0210 responds to RETAIL Host 5 RETAIL Host sends response to checkstand Approved or 0210 Refer to Concord Response Mapping topic Denied or Error 6 Checkstand confirms receipt of response from RETAIL Host 0680 Records processed are displayed on the EFT Events tab of the RETAIL Concord Host screen The first four characters of the record displayed contain the Record Type of the transaction Note 0800 Log on to EFT Manager and 0810 Confirm log on are other record types that w
53. 7 88 13 81 232 79 15 5 93 19 00 18 60 8725 82 43 11 105 85 1 00 233 1 11 32 27 1 3 44 22 00 110 00 110 00 50 00 4 220 00 3 00 3 00 2 97 49 75 3 5 97 10 00 20 00 89 90 81 81 7 109 90 v Sales data for products matching your selection will now be displayed in the bottom portion of the form Click Include Related Products field to include sales for any products having the same item code as products selected Click Sales Filter jal to refine the data you have selected The Sales filter allows you to apply specific criteria to the data displayed for example Quantity lt 10 Revenue gt 100 00 and allows you to sort the data in different ways Note RETAIL also displays total figures for the category you have selected The total figures are located to the right of the category selection for example Gross Profit Number of Customers and so on Enter Product Batches RETAIL gives you the capability to create product changes for an ad or to create a batch of product changes for multiple products or to review a previous ad batch Select the Product Batches Maintenance function under the PRODUCTS section of the Point of Sales menu RETAIL allows you to create three types of batches Normal Price Change Ad Batches or Pull Shelf Tags A Normal price change batch is used to make a permanent price change on a group of products An Ad batch is used to invoke special temporary changes to a group of p
54. 98 11 17 98 08 30 99 08 30 99 03 19 00 03 19 00 09 09 00 09 09 00 09 10 00 09 10 00 01 12 01 01 12 01 03 05 01 03 05 01 03 05 01 07 28 01 07 28 01 09 26 01 09 26 01 09 26 01 03 06 02 03 06 02 03 06 02 12 01 04 12 01 04 12 01 04 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 26 PM Page 1 Time Stamp 12 30 99 12 30 99 12 30 99 12 30 99 12 30 99 09 02 99 09 02 99 03 22 00 03 22 00 09 12 00 09 12 00 09 12 00 09 12 00 01 15 01 01 15 01 03 07 01 03 07 01 03 07 01 07 30 01 07 30 01 09 28 01 09 28 01 09 28 01 03 08 02 03 08 02 03 08 02 12 03 04 12 03 04 12 03 04 Tender Cash Check Food Stamps Cash Check Cash Check Cash Check Cash Check Cash Check Cash Check Cash Check Food Stamps Cash Check Cash Check Food Stamps Cash Check Food Stamps Cash Check Food Stamps Goodwin s Market Safe Audit Safe Audited Amount Amount 10 000 00 14 915 00 0 00 0 00 250 00 85 00 22 528 58 15 000 00 8 171 48 0 00 253 901 12 15 000 00 447 810 90 0 00 10 287 10 15 000 00 31 026 95 0 00 9 633 23 0 00 22 253 79 0 00 8 895 17 0 00 9 598 81 0 00 80 355 65 15 000 00 95 718 28 0 00 14 437 99 15 000 00 100 01 0 00 0 00 0 00 95 384 09 15 000 00 144 617 66 0 00 15 333 95 15 000 00 28 951 95 0 00 20 58 0 00 105 797 43 15 000 00 126 462 04 0 00 60 50 0 00 483 501 76 454 876 76 401 453 82
55. A n Points ot Accumulate Wicable Ad a Verity Age JT age nforce Oty uae Start Date Fale r Picture Print Label ous Misc ox Allow Lookup T PackiSize Memo Ej gt Discount Case Cost Modified Category Max Discount StorkonHana JO ModifiedBy CategoryB 7 Line tem I Scaled Tare Created Tax Plan Unit of Measure y Created By AP Bf cf DJ mMixMatchCode End Date a an x oa is ni xl Q Multiple rioril T Edit a Product 4 start Introduction2K3New Sf RETAIL for Microsoft A SCRL IN 9 54 PM 95 02 2004 CAPS NUN S vice GR RETAIL Log on as E Add a Coupon amp Edit a Product EO 9 54 PM User Activity Tracking Certain user activities are captured in a log to serve as an audit trail of critical functions performed in the system RETAIL uses the User Activity Log to track data which is removed from the system and to track other critical changes e g Mass Product Changes Anytime one of the following activities is User Activity 2 xi performed a form will display requesting the user to enter a reason for the action Delete a Customer Action Performed Delete Product Delete an Electronic Coupon Key Value 0000000000008 S eee ee Teom ERY NST Delete an Inventory Count Delete a Product a Delete a Vendor Numeric ID 2 e Complete a Mass Product Change Reason Give
56. A RP me Pan Profitability Shrink selected and the Calculate Inventory button tmc beca PT FR e is clicked the system will calculate and eel ap e po display the beginning and ending inventory for oe da I ow Ce ne the category and time frame Inventory shrink S eo ee can also be calculated via this form by clicking Calculate Shrink button refer to the Calculations topic in this section This function is only usable once an inventory count has been entered into the system refer to the Inventory Count section UPC Description Beginning Received Sold Adjustment Ending Cost Price 0000000000353 Ajax 11 0 0 0 11 36 63 55 00 0000000000354 Mr Muscle 12 12 39 96 79 92 0000000000355 Rice Milk 13 13 13 00 52 00 0000000000001 Cinnamon Raisin Swirl 20 27 00 88 00 0000000000002 Non fat Milk 15 00 40 00 00000 0 0 0 0 0000 0000 Note Refer to the Back End How To section for more information on the inventory process supported within RETAIL Table 14 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Analyze Inventory form INVENTORY ANALYSIS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Start Date End Date Category Clear Button UPC Department Section Vendor Other Quantity Initial Quantity Rec vd Quantity Sold Quantity Adjt Quantity Ending Profitability Price Profitability Cost Profitability Profit Profitability GM Shrink Price Shrin
57. Backend Click on the Search button on the Customer ID form or enter in CS from the Checkstand form command line to search for a customer Select search option Driver License Phone Number or Last Name and key in the search criteria Click on the Match Partial String field for Match Partial String example if search criteria are 123 then all items that contain 123 somewhere in the field will be Balance Ok Cancel displayed if desired Click on the Execute Search button ES to begin the search Note use the Tab Enter and Arrow keys to move between fields if a mouse is not available A list of customers matching the criteria will then Semiz be displayed on the Search Results form Tn Select the customer desired and click OK button uzee meanen lt ee to select a customer Click New Search button sas W42237 000 9515553333 123321 to return to the Customer Search form or click tense Cancel to exit the form without selecting a customer HAN E Note Click Balance button to display the customer s in store charge balance normal screen mode only Once a customer has been selected the customer name and any discount applied will be displayed on the Checkstand form If a customer uses the in store charge tender to pay for the order the customer s current account balance will print on the receipt These items can be configured to
58. Calculating Store Sales 1 Help befo re the first business da no data will be 11 3 2007 112372007 aon AM 1 aoe ae store Choss y for 11 03 2007 10 y ee MEET EN D i a A E checked out i processed but the processI ng date WI be 11 3 2007 112322007 9 02 24 AM 1 Store Close Calculating Store Sales 1 go ae 11 2 2007 1172 2007 8 57 55 AM 1 Store Close Store Close Finished Successfully for 11 02 2007 10 In itial ized properly 11 2 2007 11 2 2007 8 57 354M 1 Store Close All checkstands have been checked out 1 11 2 2007 112222007 8 57 35 AM 1 Store Close Calculating Store Sales 1 Srl alah Bio 11 2 2007 1 2 2007 855584 1 Ste Cese Cashe onchecktandQO0GTEST alsgnedan 1 to re ose S ou e execute al y n or er 11 2 2007 11 2 2007 ae 58 AM 1 Store Close Store Close cannot continue l 1 lo ensure the svstem nine efficient Certain Mo eaa a eee aS y u Ns e ICIen y e al n 1141 2007 1122 2007 8 50 07 4M 1 Store Close Recovery Calculating Store Sales 1 data files are cleaned out as part of a regular 117 2007 11 2007 24502 PM 0 StaeChse Comeingchecitands yA sto re close and not part of a sto re close g 11 405007 11 4 NNN 94 09 Dhd N Chara Plana Danna amimnnmmk th abeaal akadi ECI IC gt recovery i e store close run next day Finish You have now completed the initialization of RETAIL The system is now ready to begin processing customer transactions You ll want to test the system to ensure that it has been setup proper
59. Charge 222 20 5 16 2007 NotPaid 2 24 customer Is set up to have finance charges imposed AndersonAc 5 16 2007 Charge 99 00 5 16 2007 NotPaid 1 00 Harrison Haz 6 8 2007 Charge 36 00 6 8 2007 PartialPaid 0 09 through Customer In store Charge Attributes form where the terms can also be selected or new terms can be created RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 109 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Maintenance continued In store Charge Finance continued Table 2 12 contains a description of each field contained in the In store Charge Finance form Proc Date Defaults to current date but user can use any effective date for the finance charge calculation Percentage Defaults to previous used but user is allowed to enter any percentage so desired Grace Period Defaults to previous number of days but user is allowed to enter any number of days desired to be added on top of the invoices terms or due date after which finance charge is calculated Finance Charge Displays total of the currently calculated finance charge Memo Reason or special notation in the finance charge currently being calculated Last Finance Charge Proc Date Displays effective date of the last finance charge calculated Percentage Displays the percentage of the last effective finance charge calculated Grace Period Displays the number of days given as grace period on the last calculated finance charge Finance Charge Displays the total of the l
60. Check List Beginning Balance Ending Balance l Natwest Henry s Discount Food 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 5 249 55 317 22 20 99 0 00 208 00 5 249 55 317 22 20 99 0 00 208 00 5 795 76 0 00 5 795 76 233 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Make Review a Bank Deposit continued Under the Checks List tab a detailed list of the SETAS checks that make up the Check amount under elal alle m l the Deposit Totals tab is displayed When making a new deposit the system Process Date 10 30 2007 gt DepostNo lI pie sip C Print Checks automatically displays any checks that have ee been picked up from the checkstands and have Deposit Totals not been previously deposited By using the Pull Checks button in the toolbar ALL apes a checks for the day that have not been e E peseta deposited will be displayed De select a check 5110 Lesie Heny by clicking off the M in order to exclude a check B pi b from this deposit Use the Add Button to add a m 110 Lesie Heny Leslie Henry manual check to the deposit use the Edit SA Lesie Hery Button to edit an existing check and use the ak Delete Button to delete a check from the system Table 30 4 contains a description of each field contained in the Deposits form Process Date Displays the date for the deposit Deposit No Displays deposit No assigned by RETAIL to this deposit Time Stamp Displays the Date
61. Ck _b Start Date 8 8 2005 APPENDIX E Product Ad Batch Goodwin s Market Product Ad Batch Gavina Normal Special Normal Section Cost Cost Price 900 5 80 5 30 7 89 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 3 95 3 55 5 29 133 3 95 3 55 5 29 133 3 95 3 55 5 29 133 3 95 3 55 5 29 133 3 95 3 55 5 29 133 3 95 3 55 5 29 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 3 95 3 55 5 29 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 5 15 4 65 6 79 133 3 95 3 55 5 29 133 3 95 3 55 5 29 End Date 12 31 2005 Special Price 7 39 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 29 4 89 4 89 4 89 4 89 4 89 4 89 6 29 4 89 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 29 6 29 4 89 4 89 Price Diff 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 40 0 50 0 40 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 50 0 40 0 40 Normal Gross 26 49 24 15 24 15 24 15 24 15 24 15 24 15 24 15 24 15 24
62. Close Store Close Finished Successfully for 11 02 2007 10 not executed dai ly then the Sto re Close 11 2 2007 11 2 2007 8 57 35 4M 1 Store Close All checkstands have been checked out 1 R T b d Th 11 2 2007 1122 2007 8 57 35 AM 1 Store Close Calculating Store Sales 1 11 2 2007 11222007 8 57 35 AM 1 Store Close Connecting checkstands 1 ecovery Process WI e execute i e og 11 2 2007 1122 2007 8 56 58 AM 1 Store Close Cashier 1 on checkstand 2006TEST still signed on 1 1 11 2 2007 11222007 8 56 58 AM 1 Store Close Store Close cannot continue 1 d isplays the last step CO m pleted of the sto re 111 2007 11222007 8 50 28 AM 1 Store Close Recovery Store Close Recovery Finished Successfully for 114014 9 A 1 111 2007 112222007 8 50 07 AM 1 Store Close Recovery All checkstands have been checked out 1 close and a descriptio n of the process whether 11142007 1172 2007 8 50 07 AM 1 Store Close Recovery Calculating Store Sales 1 11 1 2007 11222007 8 50 07 AM 1 Store Close Recovery Connecting checkstands 1 the sto re close Was successtu or cou id not 117172007 11717 2007 2 45 02 PM 0 Store Close Connecting checkstands 1 11 1 NNN 41 4 NNN 94 079 Dhd N Charan Clann Pornstars alarde ron dl ECO 1 me connect to a checkstand lt gt The Store Close can be set up to run automatically at a specified time every day This is set up in System Information by pressing the Setup Store Close button in the toolbar See System Information in th
63. Customer Maintenance Bad Check Maintenance Employee Maintenance Department Maintenance Section Maintenance Tender Maintenance Vendor Maintenance Templates Maintenance Profile Maintenance Schedules Maintenance Print Customer Report Print Bad Checks Report Print Employee Report Synchronize Checkstands With Customers Synchronize Checkstands With Employees Synchronize Checkstands With All Tables Exit Current Window 315 PM 16172005 CAPs NUM SCRL INS start amp gt RETAIL Lo 5 RETAIL For gid Main Checks O CAIT Retail fl ITRetail_Use fl Picture in col Y untitled Paint E Ene 3 15PM Each functional area contains a menu of supported functions To access each of the menus click on the icons displayed along the left border A list of supported functions for the selected area will be displayed in the center portion of the screen Rest the cursor on each item to display a high level description of the tasks that can be completed for the selected area In order to access a given function click on the function s name RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 98 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACKEND FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW Back End Functional Overview Diagram Customers Customers Bad Checks Coupons Inventory Maintenance RETA L POs voices Analysis Administration System Administration System Setups Dept secttonsfendors RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL
64. Employee error Void 2 Employee error Void 13 Employee error Void 218 Employee error Void 223 Employee error Void 192 Employee error Void 192 Employee error Void 195 Credit Card Decline Cancel Transaction 11 No Divider between orders Void 12 Credit Card Decline Cancel Transaction 14 No Divider between orders Void 82 Employee error Void 31 Employee error Void 69 Credit Card Decline Cancel Transaction 50 Customer Return Explain Refund 84 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 34 PM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 UPC 0000000000803 0000000000064 0001200000013 0000000000055 0000000000062 0004138005900 0003800007648 0003800007648 00036000281 12 0005050000400 0000000000008 0004138033957 0004000015128 0004000015178 0007774520716 0000000001105 0000000000020 0060577623462 0008399371750 0004138085001 0000000000046 0007684040021 0007314001435 0028085600000 0001150900263 Amount Manager 0 89 0 0 24 0 2 39 0 0 89 0 0 04 0 178 2 07 0 2 59 178 4 99 178 4 99 178 1 99 0 1 79 0 99 0 1 59 9 95 178 4 99 128 3 29 128 3 19 178 3 19 178 60 98 128 0 48 1 79 0 1 79 3 79 128 21 78 128 2 59 128 190 0 79 0 128 3 79 128 1 99 0 6 01 128 178 8 29 128 Transactions by Reason RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Vendors Goodwin s Market Vendors Report Total Store ID Name Phone Address 1 Address 2 City S
65. End Functional Overview Introduction This section of the manual will describe the Front End module in detail As pictured in the Front End functional overview diagram the Front End module supports the following functions e Process Customer Transactions e Receive Tenders e Process Credit Debit Transactions e Support Supervisor Functions e Print Checkstand Reports e Print Checkstand Receipts Following the Front End functional overview diagram is a How To section which contains detailed instructions on how to perform certain functions using the Front End module This will provide the reader with a good understanding of how to perform certain critical functions within RETAIL RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 14 RETAIL 7 r Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW Functional Overview Diagram Process Support Customer Supervisor Transactions Functions RETAIL FRONT END Receive Tenders Print Register Reports Process Credit Debit Print Register Receipts Transactions RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 15 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Front End Functions How to Introduction This section of the manual is an overview of the Front End portion of the RETAIL system The areas covered in this section include e Signing On e Main Checkstand Screen Receipt e POS Configurati
66. Goods 11 Cheese 22 Chicken 43 Cigarettes 37 Crisps and Snacks NX OK Cancel Product Power Edit amp sia Select Products Column Operator Value A S eel SS Find 8 The list of the products is displayed in the grid on the bottom half of the form beginning with the UPC 9 All of the fields can now be edited After editing any field you must tab or click in another field with the cursor to save your changes The changes are applied immediately 10 You can print a report of the products you have edited Press Print or Print Preview in the toolbar RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 UPC 0000000000001 0000000000004 0000000000011 0000000000014 0000000000016 0000000000017 0000000000018 0000000000019 0000000000101 0000000000102 0000000000103 0000000000104 000000000011 Description Cinnamon Raisin Swirl Apricots Cheddar Cheese Pesto Sauce Flaming Doritos Cool Doritos Hot Doritos Red Beef Broth Cashews Nuts Gift Basket Strawberry Roll up Fruit Jelly Beans Fruit Gift Basket Disc DiscB TaxA TaxB Ti Y Y RETAIL 7 r Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Point of Sales Registers Safe Statistics and Balancing Make Review a Bank Deposit Safe Statistics Make Review Deposit Format Safe Safe Statisti Find T View Safe afe Statistics Deposit Select
67. Item Code Cost Price Normal Gross SpecialGross Ad spPrice product batch from this form Select the field you d like to update by moving the mouse pointer over the field name The mouse pointer will change into a hand indicating that this field is available for updating Select the field by clicking the field name and the field will change to allow entry of data If the POS Information tab is selected the top portion If the Attributes tab is selected the top portion of the of the form will change as follows form will change as follows Pricing a POS Information Attributes Percent Zero Pricing Pricing POS Information _Athibutes Percent Zero Pricing Property Scale Tare UPC Link Fdstmp P DSD To Plan M PlanB I On d P Active Target Margin Minkd atch Pane f PlanD E Print Label BCE Hea Sale Hours Dicom a g rl Sales Schedule Typed Type B If the Percent tab is selected the top portion of the If the Zero Pricing tab is selected the top portion of the form will change as depicted below form will change as depicted below ee Pricing POS Information Attributes all Percent Zero Pricing Pricing POS Information Attributes Percent Zero Pricing Normal Price Zero Pricing Details Zero Price Eligible E 7 SpecialPrice Start date End date Allow Only when Scann
68. M18900 9 7 2006 1 1 99 0 30 10 22 20 4 Francis Jones 1 1 M18900 9 7 2006 1 1 99 0 30 E 10 22 20 12 Sarah Lee 7 7 000000 978 2006 1 5 00 3 00 10 22 20 12 Sarah Lee 7 7 000000 9 8 2006 1 5 00 3 00 The coupon movement can be displayed in one cl 131 Sache z Tom sea 1 su go 10 22 20 12 Sarah Lee 7 7 000000 9 8 2006 1 5 00 3 00 of two form ats based on the Report Type 10 22 20 12 Sarah Lee 7 7 000000 9 8 2006 1 5 00 3 00 10 22 20 19 Sarah Lee 1 1 000000 9 12 2006 1 1 00 1 00 selected 10 22 20 21 Francis Jones 9 1 000000 9 12 2006 1 450 2 00 10 22 20 21 Henry James 9 1 000000 9 12 2006 1 4 50 2 00 10 22 20 21 Francis Jones 9 1 000000 9 12 2006 1 4 50 2 00 10 22 20 21 Henry James 9 1 000000 9 12 2006 1 4 50 2 00 4 10 22 20 22 Francis Jones 1 1 000000 9 12 2006 1 4 50 2 00 w Detail customer usage for each coupon j T Summary one line per coupon When the criteria have been entered click Movement The movement is displayed in the bottom portion of the form Table 5 1 contains a description of each field contained in Electronic Coupon Movement form ELECTRONIC COUPON MOVEMENT FIELD DESCRIPTIONS ELECTRONIC COUPON MOVEMENT FIELD DESCRIPTIONSS ________________ FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Coupon ld Description Department Start Date End Date Report Type Total Movement Total Retail Total Discount Coupon Movement List Detail Proc Date Coupon ID Customer Dept Link Trigger Start Date End
69. MANUAL RETAIL 7 Beginning 71 00 98 00 99 00 87 00 355 00 Received 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Sold 29 00 24 00 17 00 15 00 85 00 EndDate 11 28 2005 Adjt 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Ending 42 00 74 00 82 00 72 00 270 00 Shrink 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Cost 84 00 99 16 109 88 72 00 365 04 Price 147 00 173 16 191 88 216 00 728 04 Inventory Analysis by Crisps and Chips 347 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Inventory Count Goodwin s Market Inventory Count Inventory Count Id Soda Aisle Unit Total Unit Total Count Applied Applied UPC Description Qty Cost Cost Price Price Dept Section Vendor Pack Size Date On Qty 0000000000123 Cola 23 00 0 50 11 50 1 75 40 25 17 120 2 24 11 14 05 0000000000234 Lemon Lime 27 00 0 50 13 50 1 75 47 25 17 120 2 24 120Z 11 14 05 0000000000345 Orange Soda 45 00 0 50 22 50 1 75 78 75 17 120 2 24 11 14 05 Total 47 50 166 25 Monday November 14 2005 11 24 AM Page 1 Inventory Couni 348 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 RETAIL 7 User Manual Goodwin s Market 24089 Lake Gregory Drive TO BRITISH WHOLESALE IMPORTS INC 5711 CORSA AVENUE WESTLAKE VILLAGE CA 91362 Ship To APPENDIX E Invoice Goodwin s Market 24089 Lake Gregory Drive Purchase Order 8189916644 8189918829 P O Date P
70. None None Quantity Price Quantity Cost Table 26 2 Selection Criteria Records matching the selection time period Sort Criteria Department number Ascending RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 213 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Enter Prices for Ad Batch continued Apply Batch When the Apply button is selected from the Product Batches form the following updates will occur in the system e Create a batch for the ad batch if an entry does not already exist fields included batch start and end dates If the batch is a future batch start date gt today then a scheduled job will run to complete the remaining updates when the batch goes into effect Otherwise the following updates will occur Update each product in the product file with information from the ad batch e Create an entry into the Price Changes History file for each product in the ad batch Search Product Batch The Search Product Batch form lists all product batches Rina and is displayed when the button is clicked on the E iamtiam m a Product Batches form Select the batch from the list and p 322 saves o savanni click OK The data for the batch selected will then be displayed on the Product Batches form Ww CO Puna Sale ale st ay 1 Sale PB 5 1 2007 5 1 2017 May 1 Sale 05 01 2007 11 22 42 1 p PB 2 27 2007 4 14 2017 Soap 11 02 2007 08 26 02 1 PB 1 8 2007 2 28 2017 Cigarette Sale
71. O Invoice Date Invoice Requisitioner Ship Via Terms 11 28 2005 0000000028 UPC Item C Qty Unit Description G P G M Price Cost Ext Retail Total 0123321123321 50 00 pieces After Eight Dinner Mints 69 53 53 68 2 59 1 20 129 53 60 00 1234432234432 45 00 pieces McVities Digestives 45 46 78 30 1 29 0 28 58 06 12 60 95 00 114 99 61 30 3 88 1 48 187 59 72 60 1 Please send two copies of your invoice Adjustments 0 000 2 Enter this order in accordance with the prices terms delivery method and specifications listed above Total 72 600 3 Please notify us immediately if you are unable to ship as specified Vendor Total 11 28 2005 2 35 36PM Page 1 Authorized by Date RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 349 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Invoice Report Goodwin s Market Invoice Total Report DSD and Non DSD Department All Departments Start 11 27 2005 Invoice Date Invoice Number Non DSD Vendors GROCERY BRITISH WHOLESALE IMPORTS INC 11 29 2005 1128 Vendor Total Department Total Sub Total Grand Total Tuesday November 29 2005 10 01 AM RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Total Cost 72 60 72 60 72 60 72 60 72 60 Vendor All Vendors End 11 29 2005 Total Price 187 59 187 59 187 59 187 59 187 59 Gross Margin 61 30 61 30 61 30 61 30 61 30 Gross Profit 114 99 114 99 114 99 114 99 114 99 Inv
72. Price when the customer buys the qualifying quantity of items Qty then the qualifying item s price is adjusted to reflect the Group Price Example Mormal Pricina Meihod Groun Threshold E Welcome to Total Foods ae Your Total Grocery Solution Unit Price Cost 30 460 Price 0 89 ES Group Deal Price Crusty Wheat Rolls 0 89 F aty J Crusty Wheat Rolls 0 89 F Target Margin 0 00 Group Discount Included Gross Margin 738 Crusty Wheat Rolls 0 00 E 50 00 Disc Product Group RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 187 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCT Product Maintenance continued Product Pricing Methods continued 4 Group Adjusted The unit price is paid until the specified quantity is reached then the group deal price is applied to all previous and subsequent items entered For example Normal Price 25 Group Adjusted 5 for 1 00 The item will scan at the regular price until the 5th item is scanned with the adjustment made on the final item The customer will continue to get the deal after the 5th item in this example 20 each For this example enter as follows In the Unit Price fields enter the normal cost and unit price 0 25 In the Group Deal Price fields enter 5 in the Qty and 20 in the price field a Unit Price price the first or more items scans at b Qty qualifying quantity of items for the special group price c Group Deal Price when purchases
73. RETAIL Wireless module Table 16 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Allowances tab UPC Product UPC Product Group Allows user to set up allowance for every product in the product group selected Description Product description Item Code Item Code of product Pack Size Pack units in a case and size of the individual product Vendor name Vendor name for the allowance In add mode a list of vendors to select from will be displayed if the product has multiple vendors Enter description of the allowance This will appear on the PO or invoice when the allowance is applied Start date of the allowance Suggested price of the product while the allowance is in effect does not effect pricing of product at the checkstand End date of the allowance Case cost for the product Enter in the amount per case Net case cost for the product Case Cost Allowance This is the cost that will be used to compute total cost on PO or invoice Displays a list of current allowances in the system Sort this grid by any of the columns listed by clicking the column heading Allowance Desc Start Date Sugg Price End Date Case Cost Allowance Net Cost Product Grid Table 16 1 You can use the Bill Backs tab of the itu Allowances Bill Backs form to support the entry and maintenance of bill backs for a vendor and product In add mode enter the UPC of the product for which the bill back applies A list of vendors if multiple vendors
74. RETAIL 7 225 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Till Statistics and Balancing continued Table 29 1 Contains a description of each field contained in the Till Statistics and Balancing form TILL STATISTICS AND BALANCING FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Start Date Displays start date for balancing period End Date Displays end date for balancing period Cashier Displays the name of the cashier Use scroll buttons to scroll through different cashiers TILL BALANCING Tender Displays all the active tenders Cash Check etc Actual These fields are used to enter the actual countdown amounts for each tender System Displays the amount calculated for each tender by the system O S The over or short amounts the difference between the Actual amount and the System generated amount Totals Displays the total amount of each column TILL STATISTICS Gross Sales Total amount in sales made by current cashier Ave Order Average order size in dollar amounts Customers Number of customers attended by cashier Items Number of items sold by cashier Items Scanned Numbers of items sold that were scanned Note the definition of an item scanned is user configurable via the POS Information function Scanned Percentage of items scanned to total items Rings Min Average Number of items rang up per minute Refunds Amount of total refunds made by cashier Voids Amount in voids made by cashier Paid Ins Amount received by cashier that are
75. RETAIL 79 r Manual Step 1 Setup System Setup Information continued Setup Savings Messages The Savings Messages section is used to setup messages that will print on the checkstand receipt and screen for certain checkstand functions Select the message you wish to modify by clicking on the particular line The system will allow you to modify the content of the message as well as the font size bold property and print alignment for each message Setup Totals The Totals section is used to modify messages that will print on the checkstand receipt and screen for certain checkstand functions Select the message you wish to modify by clicking on the particular line The system will allow you to modify the content of the message as well as the font size bold property and print alignment for each message Setup Taxes The Tax tab is where the tax information is setup RETAIL allows up to 4 taxes on any product or department Taxes can be setup as a percentage rate or as a tax table Click on the Using Tax Rate button and enter the percentage into the Tax Rate field or click on the Using Tax Table button to setup a tax table RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Savings Msq Totals Customer Discount Msg Customer ID Customer Surcharge Msg Frequent Shopper Msg ltem Discount Msg Nextuse Coupon Desc 1 Nextuse Coupon Desc 2 Nextuse Coupon Desc 3 Nextuse Coupon Desc 4 PriceS avings4 bbr Pricing Level Saving Msg
76. Raisin Swirl Non fat Milk Chicken Eggs Apricots Crusty Wheat Rolls Alpo Puppy Food Science Diet Senior Dog Mini Apple Pie Fruit Gift Basket Frozen Pizza Horseradish Crunchy Taco Shells Soft Taco Shells Crunchy Taco Shells Crunchy Taco Shells Sprite Root Beer 4 40 2 00 6 00 10 00 3 00 3 00 2 25 0 59 50 00 5 24 2 00 1 99 2 00 1 99 1 99 2 00 2 00 Current Total 100 45 CheckStands m Misc Cash 55 32 Checks 0 00 FoodStamps 0 00 Credit Cards 0 00 ATM Cards 0 00 Till Status H Amt Refunds jo 0 00 Void ii fo 0 00 Pickups jo 0 00 89 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Bookkeeping amp Accounting RETAIL gives you the capability to perform daily bookkeeping functions within the system All of these functions should be performed on a daily basis This can be done at any time regardless if the store close has completed RETAIL will allow you to balance your tills balance your safe balance your cash on hand and make bank deposits The Bookkeeping tasks should be performed in the following sequence 1 Balance all of the tills for the day using the Till Statistics and Balancing function this can be done any time after the cashier has completed his her shift 2 Enter all the bank deposits for the day using the Make a Deposit function this can be done anytime throughout the day 3 Balance the safe and store using the Safe
77. Re t FR in m Refer to the Print an In store Charge Aging Report section Es Generates In Store Charge Statements Refer to the Print an In Store Charge Statement section Generates Customer In store Charge Activity Report s Refer to the Print Customer In store Charge Activity Report section Generates Customer In store Charge Balance Detail Report s Refer to the Print Customer In store Charge Balance Detail Report section Ele ES JE Generates Customer In store Charge Balance Summary Report Refer to the Print Customer In store Charge Balance Summary Report section k Activates the context sensitive help New Edit In store Charges The New In store Charges form is used to add EME charges not taken up at the Front End This form is aae i H vo p 2d displayed if you click Charges on the In store Charge r Name Barahlee ProcDate DueDate form The Edit In store Charges form displays when Eeen P p i Balance z Tye Memo Close a charge row is double clicked in any column from AS on MINS Proc Date to Trans No column of the In store Charge form The upper part of the screen displays the charge Ta a aa E E clicked The grid displays data of the same transaction and payment s applied to the charge if any From this form a Back End charge can either be modified or deleted Note Front End charges are viewable on this form but cannot be modified nor deleted Finance charges
78. Sales Statistics Sales 1 264 02 Amt Trip 9 60 0 00 Profit Trip 3 59 Open Dept cas 543 02 Shopped For Profit S GM 57 03 Name Luke Henry Total Sales 806 60 Trans Time GROCERY Phone 1 Dept Prft Time Shop Fav Products 1 Dept Sales GROCERY giil gt Fay Cashiers Dep Distibution fF Profit Cont 543 CardNo Customer Rank PostalCode Phone Cost Sales Open Dept items GrossProft GM A 1 Henry Luke 1 543 024 1 264 02 0 00 35254 721 00 57 03 DO Chen Rebecca 2 325 020 714 10 0 00 74 00 389 08 54 48 01 Lee Sarah 3 294 220 554 40 0 00 86 0 260 18 46 93 01 Jones Francis 4 63 500 131 59 0 00 74 0 68 09 51 74 Fletcher Jessica 5 20 900 125 00 0 00 15 0 6 7 8 Times Prd NN i a 104 10 83 28 Mm 0 0 0 34 Harrison Janice 58 840 109 0 0 00 45 00 50 20 46 03 00 Smith Janice 54 000 107 0 0 00 36 00 53 00 49 53 0 0 0 0 M 4 0 11 Harrison Hortense 60 010 105 60 0 00 19 0 45 59 43 17 001 Bronte Charlotte 9 23 000 92 75 69 75 75 20 04 Peck Gregory 10 35 000 89 70 0 00 38 0 54 70 60 98 Henry Emily 11 14 720 88 49 0 00 28 0 Paral lane 19 40017 en an SADA en con 0 00 15 0 73 77 83 36 v ECER C419 gt a5 Sis 2 2 The customer focus data consists of weekly monthly and yearly data Data is updated daily by system tasks that are executed automatically Click a specific ti
79. Statistics and Balancing function 4 Review and compare the store sales with the tenders and verify the deposits made by using the Balancing Overview function Make Deposits RETAIL provides you the capability of ERAS entering bank deposits made during different amp lR FE times of the day The system will allow you to track deposits by deposit number Each new ta EA Pit Sip Pint Checks deposit is assigned a consecutive number for the current day Select the Make a Bank Deposit Totals Check List Deposit function form from within the Safe L ee ee Statistics and Balancing task Feil sith rapes site WIC 0 00 0 00 0 00 Electronic Gift 0 00 0 00 0 00 The form opens to the Deposit Totals tab for the same date as selected in the Safe Statistics dialogue Any previously created deposits for the selected day will display in the beginning balance column Enter a Deposit amount for Totals any of the depositable Tenders Depositable field in Tender Maintenance or the deposit with the exception of checks including WIC Tender Type CK in Tender Maintenance function The system will automatically load the checks that have been picked up and can be deposited To view or edit check information click the Check List tab This tab allows you to view a list of checks for the current deposit and make any corrections to the current list of checks by using the Add Edit or Delete functions You may also select checks to be
80. System Generated Deposit Safe Contents Total Sales Over Shorts Paid Ins Paid Outs Received On Acct 6 737 36 0 00 519 02 214 06 20 00 0 00 44 40 1 219 66 0 00 5 798 26 5 795 76 2 50 Description 1 A Description 2 Description 3 Description 4 Electronic Tenders Description 5 Mfr Coupons Description 6 NonDepositables Description 7 f just t ii Safe Adjustments Description 8 System Deposit Description 9 S el el el el ell ell es sS ol ol Sf ell el S e ol all all ail S si Si si si 5 Actual Deposit Total Safe Variance Note The Total Sales amount displayed on this form is calculated using the same calculation as Till Statistics amp Balancing Total Sales including taxes amp excluding coupons Coupon Multiples e g double coupon amounts Discounts customer line item amp order level Electronic Coupons Table 30 1 Contains a description of each field contained in the Safe Statistics and Balancing form SAFE STATISTICS AND BALANCING FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Balancing Date CURRENT SAFE TAB Opening Adjustments Pickups Loans Reconcile RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 The date of the balancing transaction Opening safe balance based on previous day s ending balance Adjustments entered for the tender for the day Refer to the Safe Adjustments topic later in this section Displays the a
81. THE SYSTEM 5 Access the Employee Maintenance function under the MAINTENANCE section of the Administration menu and complete the following task Employees need to be setup in order to gain normal eka access to the system When RETAIL is installed a default employee exists that allows you to gain access one Employee Name to the system password 19 Now you need to setup your employees that need to use the RETAIL Back End and Front End Click on the Add button e EA and enter the appropriate information for each employee Set the security level of the employee based on the security levels you established earlier in the Security Administration function click on the 3 Job Title 981 99 81 Back End Profile Manager Active 12 31 1970 v buttons next to the Security fields to view the security sie Frontend ee levels Enter the employee s Cashier Password A e password for the front end module and Back End SS Pa SS word teate 1 1 1993 10 00 00 AM Modified 10 24 2007 8 42 00AM Modified by Press the Save button in the toolbar to save your changes Click on the Edit button in the toolbar to edit an employee you have entered Step 3 Setup Products Information You will find the task related to step 3 under the Point of Sales menu You must enter all Products into the main product file 1 Access the Product Maintenance function under the PRODUCTS section of th
82. Table 44 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Employee report Reportfield Description_______b k Format Calculation Employee Employee number Number Cashier Password Cashier password Number Checkstand Security Checkstand security level Number Admin Password Administrator Back End password Number Admin Security Administrator Back End security level Number First Name Employee name Text Last Name Employee name Text DL Employee D L number Text Job Title Employee job title Text Active Indicator if employee is active True False Purchases Amount of purchases made by the employee Currency not used Table 44 1 Selection Criteria Select all records contained in the Employees table where the deleted field is set to No Sort Criteria None synchronize Checkstands with Customers Employees The Synchronize Checkstands form is used to update the EXA checkstand databases with the latest customer and employee orio r Pomo information After adding editing or deleting customers and Close employees the checkstand computers must be updated so they serio have the latest information When editing or adding a new econo daa 00000000 00000000000 0000010000000 0000000001 employee the system will open this form automatically When mmen CheckStand 2006TEST OK deleting customers or employees this function will physically Vo e LESIE e delete or flag in the information from the Back End employee and
83. The Delete Inactive Coupons form is used to delete inactive coupons by virtue of dates being expired The date entered is the latest date for which coupons can be deleted If OK is clicked all expired coupons with dates on or before the entered date are deleted This form is displayed when the Delete Inactive Coupons on the Electronic Coupons form is clicked Enter expiration date for coupon deletion Cancel 1 042442007 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 123 RETAIL 79 r Man CUSTOMERS Electronic Coupon Movement The Electronic Coupon Movement form is used to view coupon movement for a desired v sl 22 time period This form can be accessed from F PATA CouponlD ee tart Date v the Electronic Coupon form by clicking o aa Coupon Movement A from the toolbar or Dapatment z Repot Type Da K from the main Customer menu Movement can Total Movement 33166 5299999 Total Retail 354049 Total Discount 1037 83 be displayed for a specific coupon an entire ProcDate CouponlD Customer Dept Dept Link Trigger EffectiveDate ExpirationDate RetailQuantity RetailPrice RetailDiscount 4 I ifi 2 Sarah Lee 12 12 00000000C 971 2006 1 1 00 0 50 department and or coupons meeting a specific A a 21 12 N o 10 22 20 4 Francis Jones 1 1 M18900 9 7 2006 1 1 99 0 30 date range 10 22 20 4 Francis Jones 1 1 M18900 9 7 2006 1 1 99 0 30 10 22 20 4 Francis Jones 1 1
84. The system will then display the converted amount in the Foreign Amount field To convert a foreign currency amount into the local currency click on the Foreign button The form will now change into Local mode Enter in the amount to be converted into the Foreign Amount field Select the Currency desired from the list displayed The system will then display the converted amount in the Local Amount field RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Currency Conversion Jo Foreign Currency Information Local Currency Dollars Local Amount PO Currency desired a Foreign Amount E Currency Value it Currency Conversion To Local FI lt Local Close Help Currency Information Local Currency Dollars Local Amount A Currency desired A Foreign Amount PO Currency Value OO 312 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX D EFT PROCESSIN Appendix D EF T Processing RETAIL supports interfaces to several EFT Electronic Fund Transfer processors Concord Web Concord Ingenico MPS and Microtrax Contact your reseller for an updated list The types of transactions supported for each processor is as follows Concord Credit Card Debit Card Electronic Food Stamps and Electronic Cash Concord Web Credit Card Debit Card Electronic Food Stamps Gift Cards and Electronic Cash Ingenico Credit Card Debit Card Electronic Food Stamps and Electronic Cash MPS Mercury Payment Systems Credit Card Deb
85. Word If a customer with bad checks is linked to another customer the Links button can be clicked to view information about the linked customer lf the user un flags the write checks field a message will be displayed asking if the check writing privileges should be removed from the linked customer Edit a Bad Check t SiR al 44 5 32 i Customer Info Search by Card No 1 see Name Henry Luke DILE 111111111 Check Details Check 123 Fee 30 00 Total 64 44 Memo Date 1 1 2007 v Paid Balance 0 00 Amount 34 44 Paid Date 9 5 2007 v Status 7 Iv Write Letter 2 Checks iv Letter 1 Iv Letter 3 E Store Date Check Amount Fee Total Paid Paid Date Balance 1 1 2007 123 34 44 30 00 64 44 64 44 9 5 2007 0 00 1 9 2007 11 49 if 5 3 2007 1223 122 11 20 00 142 11 142 11 9 5 2007 0 00 BackEnd P Would you like to remove the write checks capabilities for the linked customer Yes Flo Table 3 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Bad Check form BAD CHECK FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Search by Card No Name D L Check Paid Date Paid Date Amount Total Fee Balance Memo Called Letter 1 Letter 2 Letter 3 Write Checks Links Button BAD CHECK LIST Date Check Amount Fee Table 3 1 Search field to find a Customer by card number Displays customer s last and first name Customer s driver license number Bad check number Amount the cust
86. a il Balancing il Statistics for the day you wish to balance Having these ca ener Nome E Gs be ns countdowns you ll now be ready to balance Ta Customers at a a a redit Lar 0 00 soo i 0 00 l ems o Select the Till Statistics and Balancing Debit Card petro Fees Food Stamps 0 00 0 00 0 00 O 7 27 function under the REGISTERS section of the S ina pa Point of Sales menu InStore Charges Padne 5000 wc Paid Qui 0 00 Store Coupons Recvd On Acct 0 00 i Eea Foia i i i Over Shorts 158 55 The system will automatically bring up the sees Loe Parosa oe information for the first cashier You will be able i le eE a anadian ol soo sl oupons h to scroll through the different cashiers and view Z Dbi Coupon Coun 0 Totals 0 00 158 55 158 55 their information by clicking the right and left scroll arrows located next to the Cashier field Till Balancing and Till Statistics information will be displayed on the form The Till Statistics portion of the form will display various statistics for the checker for the time period specified The Till Balancing portion of the form will allow you to balance the till for a specific day The system calculated totals for the till would be displayed in the gray column labeled System of the Till Balancing portion of the form see the form above Enter the countdown information for the cashier in the white column labeled Actual As you enter the information RETAIL will calcula
87. a displayed depends on the menu selection y Urdste checkstands LEN ET En Dd Update Checkstand Log PosHist Backup 3 6 8 59 03 4M Update PLevels 2006TEST Updates 414 Add New 0 Deleted chosen from the Log drop down menu on this 0akabase Eror 6 8 59 03 AM Update PLevels LEMON 5Updates 414 Add New 0 Deleted form The menu selections include Store User Activity 6 8 59 03 AM Update PLevels 2006TEST 420Updates 0 Add New O Deleted A 6 8 59 03 4M Update PLevels LEMON Updates 415 Add New O Deleted Close Update Checkstands History 6 8 59 03 AM Update PLevels 2006TEST 5Updates 439 Add New 0 Deleted Backup Database Error and User Activity Close 6 8 59 034M Update PLevels 2006TEST 462Updates 1 Add New 0 Deleted mmm 3 59 03 4M Update PLevels 2006TEST 464Updates 0 Add New O Deleted Jane Smith 12 6 2006 8 59 03 AM Update PLevels LESLIE OUpdates 13 Add New 0 Deleted Jane Smith 12 6 2006 8 59 03 AM Update PLevels 2006TEST 536Updates 3 Add New O Deleted Jane Smith 12 6 2006 8 59 03 AM Update PLevels 1SUPPORT OUpdates 20 Add New 0 Deleted Jane Smith 12 6 2006 8 59 03 AM Update PLevels SUPPORT 24Updates 39 Add New 0 Deleted Jane Smith 12 6 2006 8 59 03 AM Update PLevels Z006TEST 516Updates 3 Add New 0 Deleted Jane Smith 12 6 2006 8 59 03 AM Update PLevels 1SUPPORT 516Updates 3 Add New 0 Deleted Jane Smith 12 6 2006 8 59 03 AM Update PLevels LESLIE 16Updates 503 Add New 0 Deleted Jane Smith 12 6 2006 8 59 03 AM Update PLevels 2006TEST 44 Updates
88. a coupon group Description and press Save Select the products you want in the group by entering the UPC code items code manufacturer code or selecting the product group Or you can use the Retail Power Search part of the form to look for products by description department or price for example Press the arrow buttons to send the Products you want to the Product Group side You can flag one or more of the products in the group to be Required by pressing the Show Required Product button This will enforce that the customer buys the item flagged Required RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 CUSTOMERS Gene type Lauper Gene Gene ii Saia Procite OO Le e OOo Opre Oten Lega th Cech es Mode 118 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Electronic Coupons continued Table 4 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Electronic Coupons form ELECTRONIC COUPONS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Coupon ID Trigger UPC Mix match Dept Section Vendor Product Group Description 1 Effective Date End Date Multiple Use check box Order Limit Min Order Priority Coupon Status Coupon Type Combo Box Card Number s Coupon Method combo Box Trigger Qty Amt Coupon Amount Coupon Link UPC Link Next Use Purchase Required Description 2 3 4 Modified By Modified Coupon List Box Table 4 1 Coupon Number automatically gene
89. added into RETAIL providing the ability to establish an unlimited number of product categories Attributes entered for the department will only effect transactions that are rung up to the department from the checkstands The Attributes tab allows maintenance of various attributes related to the department The Attributes tab will allow entry of data entry limits lalo and halo and UPC links for coupon and discount amounts Edit Department S R ul gt l 12 DeptNo SubNo DeptName Attributes Miscellaneous Attributes mn E E TAX 4 Food Stamp Unit of Measure v 2 0 PHOTO Hash Dept Points 3 0 BAKERY 4 0 PRODUCE Require Auth Scale 5 0 MEAT z 6 0 WINE LIQUOR Negative Dept Gift Card Dept a 7 D GENERAL MERCHANDISE 3 8 0 DELI Not Accumulate Cash Card Dept E 9 0 NON FOOD E 10 0 CANDY Verify Agel 11 0 DAIRY Valid Age 12 0 BEVERAGES 13 0 SWEETS miseri 14 0 POSTAGE STAMPS Disc A 15 0 DELIVERY SERVICE ee zf 16 D PET SUPPLIES Disc B 16 1 DOGS 16 2 CATS Line Item Discount T 16 3 MICE 17 0 TOYS 18 0 SANDWICHES Tax Plan 19 D FISH Tax A TaxB E 20 0 NEWSPAPER DELIVERY 21 CRY y Tax C TaxD a Modified Modified By Note When products are added and assigned to a department the attributes for the department will automatically be applied to the product These attributes can be edited for the product in Product Maintenance if required Table 36 1 contai
90. amount with food stamps Tax amounts collected however will always be accurate Table 19 4 contains a description of each field contained in the Store Sales Taxes form Tax Plan Names of Tax Plans Taxable Sales Department sales where sales taxes were collected Tax Amount Total sales taxes collected from taxable sales Tax Exempt Tax amount exempted from sales FS Tax Exempt Food Stamp amount exempted from sales Discount Discounts including electronic coupons store coupons order discounts and coupon multiple amounts Coupon Amount Manufacturer coupon amounts Table 19 4 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL7 8 RETAIL 7 r Manual POINT OF SALES STORE SALE Show Store Sales continued Store Sales Taxes Detail The Store Sales Taxes Detail form further breaks RURTES down the department taxable sales amp the sales taxes Tax Plan Taxable Sales Tax Amount TaxExempt FS Exempt Di by Tax Plans This form is displayed when the Detail SD ae 3 button Hi is clicked from the Store Sales Taxes 2 au i wp onge ns e form The Store Sales Taxes Summary form can be Pint Repot viewed again by clicking the Summary Simay button te in the same form Table 19 5 contains a description of each field contained in the Store Sales Taxes Detail form Departments Department names Tax Plans Tax Plans applicable to each department Taxable Sales Department sales where sales taxes were collected Tax Amount Tota
91. and Time when the deposit was saved Print Slip Flag to view or print detail of deposits by tender type totals Print Checks Flag to view or print detail of all checks deposited Bank Information Section Displays bank information as entered in the Receipt Banners section of POS Information function Deposit Totals TAB Tenders Displays the name of all depositable tenders Beginning Balance Displays amount deposited for the tender in previous deposits for the day Deposit Displays the deposited amount for each tender on this deposit Ending Balance Displays the sum of the Beginning Balance plus Deposit amount Check List TAB Customer No Displays the Customer Card Number corresponding to the check if entered at the Front end Date Displays the date when this check was written received Amount Displays the amount of the check Employee Displays the name of the employee who accepted the check Tenders Displays the tender type received Ref Info Displays any reference information entered at the Front end if the user was prompted Table 30 4 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 234 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Make Review a Bank Deposit continued Toolbar The following describes the tool bar displayed on the Deposits form Button Description Exit the current window Print a Deposit Report Refer to the Deposit Report topic in this section Display the Deposit Report on the screen Refer to the Deposit Repo
92. at the Checkstand Table 34 5 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 269 RETAIL 7 r Manual ADMINISTRATION SETUP synchronize Checkstands with Setup The Synchronize Checkstands process is used to update the EXA checkstands with all the latest System Information whenever mA you are adding or editing the following p a POS Information Sections Tenders Departments Work Stations Tax Table Currencies Reason Codes Transactions Keys Dimensions User Menus Status Executing Synchonization Procedures for Dimensions Verifying state for LESLIE CheckStand LESLIE OK Synchronizing Setup Synchronizing 2006TES7 Synchronizing LESLIE TenderDenom data has been synchronized successfully Synchronizing 2006TES7 Synchronizing LESLIE ReasonCodes data has been synchronized successfully Synchronizing 2006TES7 Synchronizing LESLIE TransKeys data has been synchronized successfully Synchronizing 2006TES7 Synchronizing LESLIE Sections data has been synchronized successfully Synchronizing 2006TEST Synchronizing LESLIE TaxT able data has been synchronized successfully Synchronizing 2006TES7 Synchronizing LESLIE Tenders data has been synchronized successfully Synchronizing 2006TES7 Synchronizing LESLIE Dimensions data has been synchronized successfully Click on Synchronize Checkstands with Setup from the Administration menu under the Maintenance sub menu to update your checkstand
93. being edited Automatically update all product with the Flag to allow user to specify if they want products of the same item code to be automatically same ltem Code updated when a product with a matching item code is changed Table 23 11 Note Refer to the Product Grouping Updates topic covered earlier in this section for more information on updating products with the same item code RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 197 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Maintenance continued RETAIL Y Search The RETAIL Search form is used to search for a Maa product by Description UPC Item Code Cost Normal Price Special Cost Special Price Department Section Column Operator Value Vendor Pack Size DSD Modified Date or Current ii Batch No This form is displayed when the Find UPC NA Se i Normal Price button next to the UPC field is clicked Select search oars criteria from the Column field Select the Operator such ee SESS Se j j i Apple Ambrosia 0000000000029 0 RISING SUN FAR as Like or Equal then type in the Value field a a Ee character or sequence of characters to search for Click Apie Bret oonnn00000962 RISING SUN FAR the Find button and all the products matching the Dried Pineapple 0000789789789 CERTIFIED criteria will be displayed on the form WFAPPLESCE NAT UNSWIND 0001540001209 CERTIFIED iti E BEST APPLE SNACK BARS 0002392320190 CERTIFIED The re
94. calculation used in the Show Product Sales function Note Movement for weighted items is tracked either by total weight sold or by number sold based on the setting Track Weighted Items Count in the System Information function Refer to the System Information section for more information Table 21 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Show Product Movement form Show Product Movement FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Start Date End Date UPC Description Pack Size Qty Customers Total Cost Total Revenue Margin Gross Profit Include all products with same item code Movement during Previous 13 Weeks Movement during Previous 12 Months Movement during Previous 10 Years Total Buttons Total Fields Table 21 1 Displays the start date for the query Displays the end date for the query Displays the UPC or PLU of the product to be queried Displays the description of the product being queried Displays the pack and the size of the product being queried Displays the number of items sold for the product for the time period specified Displays the number of customers who bought the product for the time period specified Displays the total cost of the product being queried for the selected time period Displays the gross sales of the product being queried for the selected time period Displays the gross margin revenue cost of the product for the selected period Displays the gross profit of the product
95. cashier begins a new transaction after the store close process has 11 8 2007 before proceeding begun While the store close is running the LL checkstand will be put into Store Close mode with current order and this will be reflected in the title bar in the i left hand corner of the screen Please ask manager to print a At this point the cashier needs to insert a new Till Status Report for the day drawer prior to processing the next transaction Press Enter for YES Press Clear for NO When the user responds to this message the following will occur 1 Atill status for the current processing date will print a manager password will be required 2 The checkstand will be loaned in for the new processing date and a till status will be printed for the new processing date 3 The processing date on the checkstand screen will be changed to reflect the new processing date The cashier can continue to ring up transactions while in Store Close mode The transactions will now be posted under the new processing date When the Store Close has finished the Store Close message will be removed from the checkstands title bar RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 306 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX B RUNNING A 24 HOUR STORE Checkstand Operation Stand Alone If for some reason the checkstand is operating Eme in stand alone e g server or network is down there may be a need to manually change the processing dates on t
96. credit charges Payment Unapplied payments and payments applied partially to a charge Currency Total of Unapplied payment is aged by the payment date whereas payment partially applied to a charge takes the age of the charge it is applied to Balance Outstanding customers balances belonging to each age group Currency Amount less Payment Rows Includes all charge transactions falling within the outstanding Text Currency None Current invoices due dates Age Groups Includes transactions falling within the given age group after the Text Currency None invoices due dates Customers Lists customer card numbers and names by account age group Text None Sub Totals Total Sub totals by account age group grand total of all age group Currency Add amounts by columns Instore Charge Report Aging Table 9 1 Reportfield _Description___________ Format _ Calculation Columns Proc Date Effective dates of every outstanding charge transactions Text None Type Charge Misc Charge Finance Charge or Payment Text None Re No Receipt number invoice number check number and so on Text None Due Date Due dates of every charge item Date None Amount Original amounts of the charge transactions Currency None Balance Unpaid charges and unapplied credits and payments Currency Amount less Partial Payments Rows Age Groups Main data groupings Text None Customers Data groups under age groups Text None Charges Itemized charge transactions Sub Total
97. customer A list of bad checks is displayed at the bottom of the form Click the button to return to normal edit mode Created 8 2 2007 11 36 59 AM Modified 10 23 2007 1 40 19 PM Modified By Jane Smith Refer to the Manage Customers topic in the Back End How To section for more information on managing your customers with RETAIL Note The Checkstands should be updated with the customer information when you have finished your updates by using the Synchronize Checkstands with Customers function covered later in this section This ensures that the checkstand database contains the most current customer data in the event the Front End system needs to operate in stand alone mode Note If you want to scan customer card numbers at the checkstand the customer card numbers must be preceded by 004 and must be a total of 13 digits number for example 0040001234567 Table 2 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer form CUSTOMER FORM FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Search by Card No Used to enter customer s card number in add mode Used to find a customer by card number in edit mode First Name Customer s first name MI Customer s middle initial Last Name Customer s last name Birth Date Date of customer s birth can use the calendar drop down menu Sex Customer s gender can use the selection drop down menu Marital Status Customer s marital status can use the selection drop down menu Type
98. customer for the time period Cost of Goods Sold for the customer for the time period Total profit for the time period sales minus cost Price minus Cost divided by Price Total sales for the customer for all instances of the time criteria selected that is if criteria is week total is for all weeks Department where customer purchases had highest profit Department where customer purchased most The percentage of profits contributed by highest ranking department Total amount purchased per trip Amount of profit per shopping trip for the customer The number of people customer shops for from Customer Maintenance screen Number of times shopped during the time period selected Average time to complete a transaction for the customer Times that is clock time when customer shops Top 20 products this customer purchases the most Top 20 cashiers this customer uses Top 20 departments this customer purchases from Customer s card number assigned through the Customer Maintenance form Customer s name assigned through the Customer Maintenance form RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 134 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Focus continued CUSTOMER FOCUS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Rank Customer rank based on sales for the time period Zip Customer s zip assigned through the Customer Maintenance form Cost Total Cost of goods sold purchased for the current period Sales Total Sales for the current per
99. deposited in the next deposit by removing the check mark on one or more of the checks When you are satisfied with the data you ve entered click the Save in the toolbar to save the information Use the Review a Bank Deposit function to view a previously created deposit select the Review a Bank Deposit function under the REGISTERS section of Point of Sales menu You can search for a deposit by clicking the Find a Deposit da in the toolbar You can scroll through each deposit for the selected day by clicking the scroll arrows next to the Deposit No field Click the Print Preview a or the Print amp in the toolbar to view print a bank deposit slip Note No changes can be made from within the Review a Deposit task All changes must be made by creating a negative or positive deposit to offset the error through the Make a Deposit function Note Only deposits created with your own password are displayed through the Find a Deposit function unless your manager s security is above security level 10 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 90 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Bookkeeping amp Accounting continued Balance Tills RETAIL provides you the capability to WMA balance your tills for every checker Prior to Re El EE using this function you ll need to have the Stat Date 10 23 2007 v EndDate fioa7am7 y lt gt entire checkers countdown their tills manually a ala Y lt gt e
100. excluding taxes amp coupons Coupon Multiples e g double coupon amounts Discounts customer line item amp order level Electronic Coupons The Store Sales data can also be displayed by sections Simply click on the Display Sections 2 button tro and data will be displayed for each Stat Date 10 1 2007 v EndDate 10 26 2007 w V Include Hash Department M Include Non Movers section matching the criteria you selected The Sales lems AwgPice AwgUde Customes a 4 035 12 18 74 1 191 00 3 39 8 85 456 criteria you entered can be changed at any time Ser e O A R z and the data will be re displayed To toggle NN E267 s back to the department sales simply click on ae al i it rE E p 2i meee E the Display Departments button al on the Enel Selection ev us 50 E 62 Legos 30 00 0 14 10 00 3 00 15 00 2 too bar Patted Plants 462 79 215 49 00 9 44 51 42 3 Bread 1 931 34 8 97 463 00 4 12 5 85 330 Bee NT s20 S72 2 Note The Section Sales form uses the same MT sal ca E si E E calculation as the department sales However se A e a E any sales made directly to the department i e Ft Snacks SaD 1484 ET E open department sales will be excluded from EEE e 303 20 the section sales Total Sales 21 535 70 100 4689 37 4 59 13 57 1 587 st RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 164 RETAIL 7 r Manual POINT OF SALES STORE SALE Note Customers in the total
101. exist for the product we ale alla BEN Allowances Bill Backs UPC 0000000002233 Product Group Y Rebate Id 123 Rebate Amount 1 23 Bil Back Desc y will be displayed in the Vendor Name field for Description o EI selection To edit a bill back enter the UPC and Ce i o z the first bill back will be displayed Sort the list o Ea e 373 Staus MEN Quantity San Amount Due Sa below by UPC or any other field by clicking the appropriate column heading RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Vendor Name CERTIFIED Rebate ID Description Item UPC 122 Rebate Vendor Name 2334 0000000000234 ADELINA S PRODUCT S INC 10 27 2007 11 3 2007 1 00 Start Date EndDate Amount St gt RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Allowance Bill Backs continued Use the calculate button n to calculate the quantity sold and amount due for the bill back based on the latest product movement figures available Table 16 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Bill Backs tab BILLBACKS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION UPC Product UPC Product Group Allows user to set up bill backs for every product in the product group selected Description Product description Item Code Item Code of product Pack Size Pack units in a case and size of the individual product Vendor name Vendor name for the allowance In add mode a list of vendors to select from will be displayed if the product has mult
102. in a Price Department Example from the keyboard MC500DP10 ENTER 5 00 coupon for department 1 Entering a Paid Out that is miscellaneous payment from the till for example lottery winnings a Key inthe amount of the Paid Out b Press the Paid Out key PO through the keyboard ENTER Example from the keyboard 500PO ENTER 5 00 Paid out Note RETAIL supports five Paid In keys that are configurable via the Security Administration screen The Keystrokes are 11 12 13 14 and 15 Entering a Paid in that is Non Product Sale for example Postage Stamps a Key inthe amount of the Paid In b Press the Paid in key PI through the keyboard ENTER Example from the keyboard 500PI ENTER 5 00 Paid in Note RETAIL supports 5 Paid Out keys that are configurable via the Security Administration screen The Keystrokes are O1 O2 O3 04 and O5 Entering a Received on Account that is Payment on Customer Charge a Key inthe amount being received b Press the Account Received key RA through the keyboard c Enter the Customer ID in the Customer entry dialog Example from the keyboard 500RA ENTER 5 00 Received on Account for a charge customer Note RA transactions cannot be completed with other transactions on an order This must be the only transaction for the order A valid customer ID with charge account privileges must be entered Note Customer balances can b
103. in the report Balance Date Balance date Date Time N A Departments Department name Text None Discount Discount amount for each department Currency None Coupons Coupon amount for each department Currency N A Totals Discounts Total discounts Currency Sum of all discounts Total Coupons Total coupons Currency Sum of coupons Table 30 11 Cashier Analysis The Cashier Analysis form consists of 3 tabs which give a detailed analysis of all your cashiers transactions and are useful for tracking cashier performance The Cashier Performance Evaluation tab produces a report that summarizes all the transaction statistics and rates your cashiers performance on a scale of 1 5 including the over shorts errors and corrections and achievements and profits This report can be used as an incentive to reward your cashiers performance or improvement a a The Cashier Analysis form displays the ARI details of each cashiers transactions E E 2 a a a Start Date 12 13 2006 y End Date 12 13 2006 y including over shorts voids etc a Following is a list of each field and the PEM TIE RE f Cancel 7 NE Sale n es ie ee oe al Le AE le s ancels N s A t t Agatha Christie 1 0 97 0 02 475 59 14 66 1 00 003 19 20 0 59 3 031 D 000 308 50 951 28267 871 242 1340 3 Jane Austen 2 0 00 0 00 55 00 7 4 Charlotte Bronte 7 0 00 0 00 6000 76 49 0 00 0 00 0 0 00 D 000 000 0 00 000 0 00 4
104. inventory for the category selected for the date specified Calculates the shrink for example theft spoilage breakage for the category selected for the date specified k Activates the context sensitive help Clear Clears the screen to allow the selection of different criteria for example UPCs to Total Store Inventory Analysis Report The Inventory Analysis function will produce an Inventory Analysis report based on the data displayed on the form This function is executed when or is selected from the Inventory Analysis form Table 14 2 contains a description of each field contained in the report Reportfield Description Format __ Calculation Start Date Start date of user query Date Time None End Date End date of user query Date Time None UPC UPC Text None Description Product description Text None Qty Beginning Beginning inventory Number None Qty Received Quantity received Number None Qty Sold Quantity sold Number None Qty Ending Ending inventory Number None Shrink Inventory shrink Number Beginning Received Sold Ending Inventory Ending Cost Cost of product based on ending inventory Currency Qty Ending Cost Ending Price Value of product based on ending inventory Currency Qty Ending Price Table 14 2 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 153 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY DSD Discrepancies You can use the DSD Discrepancies form to ZZZS display discrepancies created when a DSD invoice is received
105. is used as a method of ranking each cashier using the means as the yardstick measurement A positive amount is above average and negative is below average The following fields are displayed 1 Employee The name and employee number of each cashier that was signed on during the period selected Over or Short The dollar amount over or short per day the employee s percentage as explained above and the points awarded Errors and Corrections Details of all voids number of voids total dollar amount of voids and total dollar amount of voids into open departments The Sub Total column shows the total amount of points for the Errors and Corrections section The percentage shows the ranking of the cashier s sales The average number of points for this section is shown in the last column of the section Achievements and Profits This section displays the average dollar amount per hour the average number of items per hour and the average item price per hour Again the employee s percentage Is used to rank the employees according to the average Grand Total The total number of points from each section the sales person s average and the average number of points This data is used to sort the cashier s performance according to the number of points These points can be used for rewards and incentives RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 242 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Cashier Perfor
106. line reoresents the total number of customers that shopped in the store for the criteria selected Customers in the detail lines represent the number of customers that purchased items from the department or section The same customer could be represented multiple times in the detail since the same customer can purchase items from multiple departments or sections in the same order Note Number of items may differ between department sales and section sales if UPC links are being used to track electronic coupons For the same the number of items includes the number of electronic coupons used 24 HOUR STORE Remember current date is the current processing date which may not necessarily be the current date Table 19 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Stores Sales form Stores Sales FIELD DESCRIPTIONS Start Date Displays the start date for the report period End Date Displays the end date for the report period Include Hash Department If checked the Store Sales will include all sales for the department flagged as Hash Include Non Movers If checked non movers departments or sections with zero sales will be displayed Departments Sections Displays the Department or Section name for which the sales apply Sales Displays the total sales for the respective department section Displays the total percent for the respective department section Items Displays the number of items sold for the respective department section
107. name card number drivers license etc Operator Select the Operator for the search function such as Equal To Like gt Greater Than Value Enter the Value such as the name For partial search criteria use the Like operator Find Button Used to initiate the search request Customer Name List of customer names matching the search criteria Card Number List of the card number for each customer Driver s License List of customer driver s licenses Table 2 6 Redeem Customer s Frequent Shopper Points The Redeem Customer s Frequent Shopper Points ZEJM form is used to redeem points for the current customer Frequent Shopper Points selected This form is accessed when the Redeem EsmedPoirts hao Co fr Shopper Points a is clicked from the toolbar on a the Customer form The displayed form shows the pp current earned points and the card number of the customer Type the number of points to redeem in the Points Redeemed Date Comments Redeem Points field select a date and type a reason di for the redemption in the Comments field When the redeem points date and comments are typed click Apply to apply the changes When Apply is clicked a RETAIL dialogue box appears prompting whether or not a redemption slip should be printed The Earned Points is reduced by the number redeemed and an entry is created at the bottom of the list BackEnd Print Frequent shopper redemption slip Yes Po RETAIL USER RE
108. name Text None add1 Customer address Text None add2 Customer address Text None add3 Customer address Text None phone Customer phone Text None PO Date Purchase Order Date Date Time None P O Purchase Order Text None Invoice Invoice Number None Receiver Receiver name Text None Ship Via Ship via Text None Terms Terms Text None UPC Product UPC Text None Item C Item code of product Text None Qty Quantity purchased Number None Unit Unit description Text Description Product description Text None Gross Profit Number Price Cost Gross Margin Number Price Cost Price Product price Currency None Cost of product Number None Ext Retail Extended Retail price Number Price Units Purchased Total Total billed Currency None Adjustment Adjustment amount Currency Total of all Adjustment amounts Total Net total Currency Sum of total adjustment Vendor Total Vendor total on vendor s invoice Currency None Table 13 3 Selection Criteria All products for the selected invoice Sort Criteria None RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 151 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Inventory Analysis You can use the Inventory Analysis form to MA perform an Inventory Analysis for a specific RE IE Ete category including Department Section ons Categoy Total Store StertDate 10 11 2007 v EndDate 10 11 2007 y Vendor Total Store or for a specific UPC m pa i Quantity Code Once a category and date range is upc ma
109. name the system uses for the form Control Type Not available for modification Font button Used to change the font on the Front End Name Displays the name of the font Size Displays the size of the font Bold A flag indicates that the font is bold selected by pressing the Font button Underline A flag indicates that the font is underlined selected by pressing the Font button Italic A flag indicates that the font is italicized selected by pressing the Font button Font Color Select the font color by pressing the ellipsis button Back Color Select the back color by pressing the ellipsis button Alignment Select the alignment from the drop down list Multimedia Type Select the multimedia type displayed either none video or image Background Type Select the background type from the drop down list Control Style Not available for modification Attributes Not available for modification Text Displays the message displayed File Name Displays the file name the system uses for the various parts of the screen Left Not available for modification Top Not available for modification Height Displays the height of the field being modified Width Displays the width of the field being modified Sample Template Displays the position of the selected part of the form being modified Table 31 2 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 260 RETAIL 7 r Manual ADMINISTRATION SETUP System Information The System Information form is us
110. ne p s Synchronizing 2006TEST cu sto m er d atabases a E n pd co successful Processing Restrictions There is no restriction It can be run any time RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 292 RETAIL 7 User Manual ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Synchronize Checkstands with Employees continued Processing Specifications 1 Select the Checkstands to be updated usually all under the Checkstands tab Click OK to start the process 2 The system connects to all Check Stands selected If an error occurs the system will prompt you with a message Cannot connect to some of the Checkstands Do you still want to continue 3 If you select NO the system will abort this function If you select YES then the system will continue this function However the checkstands which caused the error will not be updated with the employee information In either case the system is having problem connecting to the checkstands and corrective action should be taken synchronize Checkstands with All Tables The Synchronize Checkstands with All Tables form is used to update the checkstand databases with the latest information All of the tables in RETAIL are updated by this function Information includes POS Information and Receipt Banners Sections Tenders Departments Work Stations Tax Table Currencies Reason Codes Transaction Keys Security data Customers Products and Employees After making any cha
111. ok Sales form z Memo Cancel Created 3 29 2007 11 43 Modified 3 29 2007 11 43 By Greta Garbo Table 19 3 contains a description of each field contained in the Store Sales Memo form STORE SALES MEMO FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION ProcDate Start date of the sales information time period on the Stores Sales form Created Date the memo was created Memo Memo data for this entry Modified Date of last modification By Person who last modified the information Table 19 3 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 167 RETAIL 7 r Manual POINT OF SALES STORE SALE Show Store Sales continued Store Sales Taxes The Store Sales Taxes form is used to display taxable BESES sales by department and the corresponding sales ee a ax Flan axable ales ax Amour ax Exemp emp Iscoun taxes collected from those sales This form is E IE E 67 22 306 42 poi 2 PIDO 42 DAY 1 073 87 41 28 13 70 0 06 150 51 343 14 2 24 5 70 0 00 46 38 displayed when the View Taxes button is clicked 325 71 8881 1950 15265 1340 from the Store Sales form Click on the Detail button to view detail totals by tax plan Tax exempt amounts are also calculated and displayed in aggregate on the Store Sales Tax Detail report Note if food stamps are used in the store taxable sales may be understated in a situation where food stamp sales are tax exempt and a customer does not pay the entire food stamp eligible
112. privileges in our store until this matter is resolved In addition we may take one of the following actions if we do not hear from you immediately 1 Proceed in the manner prescribed by state law which entitles us to collect THREE 8 TIMES the amount of the returned check 2 File your check with the local police department or Labor Board for such action as they deem appropriate 3 Refer your check to our collection agency which will be authorized to take legal action against you Please contact me personally at the phone number above if you have any questions or concerns regarding this matter Respectfully yours Amount Due 155 00 Please make your check payable to Goodwin s Market RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 326 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Bad Checks Letter 3 Goodwin s Market 24089 Lake Gregory Drive PO Box 3269 Crestline CA Third Written notification of Returned Check s 11 6 05 Jones Tina A88888888 Our records indicate that a check endorsed by you or your company has been returned by your bank unpaid after 2 deposit attempts Check number 1009 in the amount of 125 00 was accepted in our store A service charge of 30 00 for each returned check is applied Please pay the balance due of 155 00 immediately We must receive your check by Monday November 21 2005 Because this is our third notification your company and or personal checks have been entered into our computer and you are pr
113. right This will allow for the selection of a coupon to be assigned to the selected category of customers This is very useful to apply a Target Coupon to your top customers Customer Focus Report Customer Group Select Type Preferred Customer v Select a Coupon CUSTOMERS Description PS Goldfish Crackers Target C EC Multiple 2 MixMatch partt CouponlD Type Target Custumer 35 Target Custumer 42 Preferred Customer CardNo Customer Bench Johnny Jones Francis Bronte Charlotte Henry Luke Lee Sarah Chen Rebecca Cool Jane Cool Joe Rank PostalCode A MAA Customer Group Select Type Prefered Customer Select a Coupon CouponlD Type Target Custumer 126 Preferred Customer 138 Preferred Customer Description PS SANDWICHES EC Mismatch 2 PS Crisps and Snacks Customer Armstrong Donna Bench Johnny Bonaparte Napoleon Bronte Anne Bronte Charlotte Bronte Emily Chen Rebecca Cool Fred Cool Jane Attach Close 3 Help The Customer Focus Report function produces a Customer Focus report listing all selected criteria currently listed on the Customer Focus form The layout of this report is contained in Appendix E This function is executed when or is clicked from the Customer Focus form Table 10 8 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer Focus report Reportfield Description Format Calculation CardNo Customer s card number assigned through
114. selected EndDate 11 6 2007 vr from the Point of Sales menu This form will accept entry Help of a start and end date for selection on the report and is Sort By sorted either by Cashier Name or by Front End de Transaction Key e g RF refund f Transaction Kep RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 250 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Print Transactions by Reason Report continued Table 30 15 contains a description of each field contained in the Transactions by Reason Report REPORT FIELD DESCRIPTION FORMAT Start Date Start date of selected period Date Time End Date End date of selected period Date Time Sorted by Select from Cashier Name or Transaction Key Text Cashier Number Employee No of the active cashiers Number Cashier Name Employee Name Text Reason Reason selected for the transaction Text Transaction Key Transaction key description Text Transaction Numbers No of transactions with the same reason codes Number UPC UPC No on the transaction Number Amount Total Amount of the transaction Currency Manager Manager No of person who completed a mgr override function if applicable Number Table 30 15 Selection Criteria Based on selected dates entered on form Sort Criteria Cashier Name Transaction Key Print Sales Person Productivity Report The function will produce a Sales Person Productivity AAA report listing the transaction totals by salesperson Only those transactions
115. selected from the Monitor Tills form This Cash TEER form will display the current till amount till the E a ih ee time this form is accessed Click Pickup or PEN m am Loan in and enter the amount of the pickup TE oi P aoo or loan in for the tenders Checks Tenders as ena ate peers with Tender Type CK can only be picked can ma up in their entirety whereas partial pickups can be completed for the other tenders Click Save amp Print to print a pickup slip or a loan in slip once the data is entered on this form Total Table 31 5 contains a description of each field contained in the Pickups amp Loan Ins form PICKUPS 8 LOAN INS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS Cashier Displays the name of the selected employee Till Displays the Till number for the selected employee Tenders Displays the tenders allowed to be picked up as flagged in Tender Maintenance Till Amount Displays the current Till Amount for the various tenders for the selected employee Pickup Loan In Used to type the amount of the pickup or loan in Balance Displays the balance for the tenders displayed after the pickup or loan in Total Displays the total amount of the pickup or loan in Table 31 5 Pickup Slip or Loan In Slip Reports The Pickup Slip or Loan In Slip Reports function will produce a Pickup Slip or Loan In report The layout of this report is contained in Appendix F This function is executed when you click Save amp Print from the Pickup a C
116. system is having difficulty printing The system will check the status of ES ando Scent f ease Yerty printer status the printer at the beginning of each transaction and when printing a till status or checklist R e lt may become necessary to reset the printer a by turning it off and then on The system will UL Turn pour printer off and on then press the enter key to continue display an error message if this is needed Checkstand Receipt The Checkstand receipt takes on the same characteristics as the Checkstand form Items and messages printed on the receipt can be configured using the POS Information function Refer to the POS Configuration topic in this section In addition to the information displayed on the Checkstand form the receipt contains the following information e Checkstand number Employee number Till number and Transaction number These fields are displayed on the date time line of the Checkstand receipt e Cashier Name Note Transaction numbers are reset on a daily basis If there is a need to have transaction numbers be continuous over a period of days this can be configured through the Continuous Transaction option in the POS Information function refer to the POS Configuration topic in this section The transaction numbers will be continuous from one day to the next until a specific maximum Is reached whereby the transaction numbers will then reset to 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAI
117. that P PET are displayed in the Monitor Tills form as configured by the user This form is displayed when the Select a Tender to Monitor button is clicked from the Pepostabie A toolbar from the Monitor Tills form FF Check True E M Credit Card False Note The system will check that the user s security M Debit Card False Help level allows access to the Tender Maintenance ood Stamps False function before giving access to this form Coupons False M InStore Charges False I WIC True M Store Coupons False lt Table 31 4 contains a description of each field contained in the Select a Tender form SELECT A TENDER FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Tender Names Lists all the tenders stored in the system Depositable List whether a tender is depositable or not as maintained in the Tender Maintenance function E Shows that the selected tender is to be monitored in the Monitor Tills form Ea le Field Flagged to de select a tender to show in the Monitor Tills form Table 31 4 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 245 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Monitor Tills continued Pickups amp Loan Ins The Pickup Loan Ins form is used to make EETA TITE tender pickups or additional loan ins for a particular cashier This form is displayed Cashier Jane Smith Lane 1 TH 1 gaveti Pint IS when the Pickups Loan Ins des button a Tender Till Amount Pickup Balance Cancel
118. the Customer Number None Maintenance form Customer s card number assigned through the Customer Text Maintenance form Rank Customer rank based on sales for the time period Cost Total Cost of goods sold purchased for the current period Sales Total Sales for the current period Items Total ltems purchased for the current period Gross Profit Sales minus Cost GM The Gross Margin Table 10 8 Customer None Calculation Calculation Calculation Calculation Sales Cost Price Cost Price Number Currency Currency Number Currency Currency RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 139 RETAIL 79 r Manual Inventory Inventory Count l Inventory Count l l View Inventory Inventory Count Report Count Report Inventory Analysis Inventory Analysis y Inventory Analysis View Inventory Analysis Report RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 INVENTORY Open a New Review a Purchase Order Receive an Invoice Purchase l Order Receive an Invoice P O View a Product oe Select P O View Adjustment Adjustments sae sae Memo Costs Invoice Adjustment Adjustments y y y Select Cost P rchase Ord r Cost Invoice er Invoice Calculator Calculator DSD Discrepancies Allowances Billbacks Reason Codes Reports oe N Stock on Hand
119. the RETAIL Back End module The RETAIL splash screen will open up and the Password form will be displayed Type your password and click OK If the password you type is not a valid password the Invalid User for Front or Back End error message is displayed Click OK and then try again If you type a valid password the RETAIL Back End menu form appears Click the appropriate icon to select the menu you want to use The menu choices will change depending on the icon selected Select a function by clicking the name RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 PROFESSIONAL RETAIL Log on as LH Main Menu E 181 xi Fie Windows Help EP E O Administration OPERATIONS SETUP Close Store View System Log Files Notify Checkstands with Server Information Clear Checker Login Entries Reset Product Movement Get Unloaded Transactions System Information POS Information POS Partitioned Display Dimensions Security Administration Synchronize Checkstands With Setup MAINTENANCE Customer Maintenance Bad Check Maintenance Employee Maintenance Department Maintenance Section Maintenance Tender Maintenance Vendor Maintenance Templates Maintenance Profile Maintenance Schedules Maintenance Print Customer Report Print Bad Checks Report Print Employee Report Synchronize Checkstands With Customers Synchr
120. the changes that can then be applied later using the Enter Prices for Ad Batch function The Display field is only accessible for those templates where date will be modified That is Shelf Audit Quick Add and Quick Edit This field will indicate to the system which fields should be available for modification and which fields will be display only no modification on the template By default all fields are editable on a template To set the Display field click on the field in the Current box and set the Display field to M Table 40 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Template Maintenance form TEMPLATE MAINTENANCE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS Template Type Select a template type desired from the drop down menu Name Name of the template which will be displayed in the selection list Description Optional description of the template being defined Product Fields List of items that can be selected for the template Display Only Identify whether the selected product is modifiable or not First Name Last Name List of available users that can be assigned the template Display Only field Indicates if the item selected from the Product field will be display only cannot be modified or will be available for modification Template Grid List of current set up and defined templates Table 40 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 287 RETAIL 7 User Manual ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Profile Maintenance Note The setup of
121. the field descriptions contained in the Product Changes form in the Product Maintenance section for the following TABS Pricing POS Information and Attributes Percent TAB Normal Price Button to indicate if change is to be made to the normal price of the products Special Price Button to indicate if change is to be made to the special price of the products Discount Unit Price Button to indicate that the unit price should be discounted by the percentage in the by field Increase Unit Price Button to indicate that the unit price should be increased by the percentage in the by field Discount Cost Button to indicate that the cost should be discounted by the percentage in the by field Increase Cost Button to indicate that the cost should be increased by the percentage in the by field By Percentage to use in updating the price or cost Table 25 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 206 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Mass Product Changes continued Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on the Mass Product Changes form Button Description Exit the current window Print a Product Mass Changes report Refer to the Print Mass Product Changes topic in this section Displays the Product Mass Changes report on the screen Refer to the Print Mass Product Changes topic in this section Apply the changes you have entered This will immediately update
122. the form is on edit mode click this button to change to New Charge form for new charge transaction entry Save Saves entries made for the new charge transaction When clicked upper form s field is blanked and data saved directly goes to In store Charge AR Maintenance form grid not to New _ Dete Charge form s grid Delete Deletes charge entries Deletion is only allowed on Back End originated charges and on charges not paid or partially paid Cancel Disregards entries made for new charge RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 106 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Maintenance continued New Edit Payments The New Payments form is used to record payments received at the Back End This form is displayed if you click Payment field from the toolbar The Edit Payments form displays when a payment row is clicked twice in any column from Proc Date to Trans No column of the In store Charge form The upper part of the screen displays the payment clicked The grid displays the charges where payment is applied and all unpaid and partially paid invoices Use this form to apply Front End payments New Payments Instore Charge V CardNo 111 aa TranslD Ref No a Save Name Hortense Harison ProcDate 10 24 2007 y Memo Delete Balance Amou P Close Apply Available ProcDate Type Amount Balance Paying Amount RefNo TransNo 8 28 2007 Charge 5 00 5 00 1 1 264 245 8 28 2007 Charge
123. the main form Other data for the product can be entered through different options accessible by clicking on the toolbar These options include e Assigning a product to product groups This option allows you to assign a product to a pricing product group and or one or more reporting product groups Pricing product groups streamlines the maintenance of products by allowing you to group like products together that share the same pricing information for example various flavors of Jell O When a pricing change is made to one product in the pricing group the system prompts you to update all products in the pricing product group with the change The use of pricing product groups simplifies the Price Management functions in RETAIL Refer to the Product Grouping Updates discussion in the Product Maintenance topic in the Back End Detail Documentation section e Entering pricing levels for a product Enter different pricing levels up to 10 for the product using the Pricing Levels tab refer to the Pricing Levels topic in the Customer Rewards section above e Assigning additional vendors to a product This option allows you to assign secondary vendors to a product and cost related information for the vendor s e Update inventory level stock on hand Enter inventory related data for the product including the initial quantity on hand this is your initial beginning inventory for the product In edit mode you can enter inventory adjustments dep
124. the products file to reflect the changes Create a batch to apply special pricing changes later This button will become available when special pricing changes are entered Refer to the Create New Batch and the Product Batches topics contained in the Enter Prices for Ad Batch section P lo i 2 k Activates the context sensitive help Print Mass Product Changes The Print Mass Product Changes function will produce a Mass Product Changes report listing all products selected for the mass change This function is executed when or is selected from the Mass Product Changes form Table 25 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Mass Product Changes report as well as the database fields used by the report Report field Description Format Calculation UPC UPC Text Description Product Description Text Normal Cost Product Cost Currency Normal Price Product Price Currency RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 207 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Print Product Mass Changes continued Reportfield_ Description Format Calculation Normal Gross Gross margin for the product Percent Price Cost Price Special Cost Special cost for the product Currency Special Price Special price for the product Currency Special Gross Special gross margin for the Percent Special price Special Cost product Special Price FS Foodstamp flag Yes No Scaleable Scale flag Yes No DSD DSD flag Yes No
125. the selected term enjoyed by the current customer Credit Limit Displays the allowed credit limit given to customer Credit limit defaults to the amount entered on the System information form in the Administration menu Finance Charge Check off Box Flagged to allow calculation of finance charge on overdue invoices of current customer Grid columns Card No Lists the card numbers of all customers properly set up to enjoy charge privileges Name Lists the names of al customers properly set up to enjoy charge privileges Terms Lists the Terms ID No selected for the charge customers Credit Limit Lists the credit limits granted to charge customers Balance Lists the current outstanding unpaid balances of the charge customers Finance Charge Identifies wnen customers are imposed finance charges Yes means Finance Charge box is checked off for the customer Table 2 13 nas CCC CCC T RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Maintenance continued In store Charge Terms The In store Charge Terms form is used to setup METAS various credit terms extended to a customer This form is displayed when the Terms field SS IS Verret Bole Description Add clicked from the Customers In store Charge a Save Attributes form Click Add to add new categories ee to the list To modify a term retrieve the data by clicking any column of a desired term Table 2 14 contains a description of each field contained in the In store Charge Terms fo
126. the system refer to Set TenderCode EA ai E Defaults topic below Only certain attributes teense m een o will be available for edit in regards to these eer el lll geass E ll tenders However for all other tenders added to Sere I y Accenterchange Open Drawer v the system all attributes are available for Sve Use MSR Gace D modification Tenders can be assigned to Pint Tender Count I AlowMedaSwaps F currencies entered in the system in order to Tn at a facilitate currency conversion at the Checkstand Refer to the Foreign Currencies topic in the Appendices The tender form is a powerful tool that allows the user to configure and limit the way tenders are used in the Checkstand system The General tab is used to maintain general attributes and amounts for the tender Min 0 00 Overall Max 1 000 00 Negative Amount Required M Modified 10 30 2007 11 52 00 AM Modified By Jane Smith The Limits tab is used to enter The Miscellaneous tab is used to The Electronic Service tab is used various limits for functions related to setup prompts on the Front End for to enter data related to electronic the tender such as refunds and the tender For example to collect transactions Credit Debit EBT pickup amounts additional customer information Cards General Limits Miscellaneous Electronic Service General Limits Miscellaneous Electronic Service General Limits Miscellaneous Electronic Service Refun
127. the tender is given Max Displays the highest amount of change usually cash back that can be given out for this tender This maximum can be overridden by amount of change allowed to a customer in the Customer Maintenance function This can be a flat dollar amount or a percentage percentage of sale Flag to indicate that the Max field is in percentage Otherwise Max field is in dollar amount MISC TAB Prompt for Information Flag to indicate if the user will be prompted to enter data for the tender For example serial number Data entered will be tracked on the transaction and can be reported on using the Electronic Journal function Message Message that should be displayed when prompting for data ELEC SRVC TAB Require Ext Auth Flag to indicate if external approval is required for the tender Time Allowed Displays the maximum acceptable delay allowed to wait for an external payment authorization Balance Inquiry Flag to indicate if balance inquiry is allowed for Electronic Tenders ET Partial Amount Flag to indicate if the Electronic Tender can pay a portion of an order Manual Authorization Flag to indicate if manual authorization is allowed for the Electronic Tender Require Gen Flag to indicate if gen number is required for electronic benefits Require Pin Flag to indicate if a pin number must be entered for the Electronic Tender Require Expiration Flag to indicate if an expiration date is required for the Electronic Tender
128. this section Display the Select Tenders to Monitor Refer to the Select a Tender topic in this section lo 2 O lo Display the Currency Conversion form to convert amounts between different currencies Refer to the Foreign Currencies topic in the Appendices Set up the number of minutes that qualify a cashier as inactive A form will be displayed accepting entry of the period of time in minutes Make a pickup or a loan in for a cashier Refer to Pickups and Loan Ins topic in this section k Activates the context sensitive help Print Monitor Tills Report The Print Monitor Tills Report function will produce a Monitor Tills report This function is executed when you select the from the Monitor Tills form Table 31 3 contains a description of each field contained in the Monitor Tills report Reportfield Type Format Calculation Table Name Field Name Till Database Field Number None Monitor Tills Report Cashier Name Database Field Text None Monitor Tills Report Tender Name Database Field Text None Monitor Tills Report Tendered Amount Database Field Currency Sum of Monitor Tills Report Amounts Total Formula Field Currency Sum of N A Amounts Table 31 3 Selection Criteria All tills currently displayed RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 244 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Monitor Tills continued Select a Tender The Select a Tender form is used to select tenders
129. to activate the supervisor window will prompt for a supervisor password rf 500MM28 ENTER Manual Measure entered for a product that is sold in units of measure The unit of MM measure is identified for the product in the product maintenance function In the Tender Amount MI ENTER 500MI ENTER In Store charges tender used to pay for the order NS example 5 lbs of product 28 were sold NS ENTER NS ENTER No sale key used to open the cash drawer with no active transaction will prompt for cashier supervisor password Amount OD ENTER OD ENTER Open department key brings up a list of departments to choose from to ring up a transaction directly to a department similar to the DP key Amount OS ENTER OS ENTER Open section key brings up a list of sections to choose from to ring up a transaction directly to a section similar to the SE key F Amount PI ENTER 500PI ENTER Paid In key used for non product items for example postage stamps Five additional Paid In functions can be configured via the Security Administration screen The additional Front end keystrokes are 11 12 13 14 and 15 PK Price PK UPC ENTER 500PK28 ENTER Price key used to assign a price to a product No decimal in amount In the example 5 00 is being entered as the price for product 28 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 24 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Keyboard Use with Regula
130. to be given Example The change tender is designated as Pesos so the system will display the change as P 400 00 and also as 50 00 US Dollars Now let s say that the change is to be given back in the local currency in this case US Dollars The Pesos tender would be setup to give change back in cash Tender CA Setup Peso Tender give change back in US Dollars Tender ID Tender Code Tender Type Change Tender The steps as outlined above are the same except for step 3 but the change will be given in US Dollars 3 The system will compute the amount of change to be given Example The change tender is designated as US Dollars so the system converts the amount of change in this case P 400 00 Pesos and display the change as 50 00 US Dollars RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 31 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX C FOREIGN CURRENCIE Checkstand Operation continued Example 2 Now let s take a different example where the local currency is Pesos and US Dollars is setup as a currency Note The Windows Regional Settings would be changed in this case to reflect the local currency as Pesos Setup two currencies Local Currency Pesos Currency 2 US Dollars The value of the US Dollars is 8 Pesos e g 125 Dollars 1 Peso Currency ID Amount Description _ Symbol a GS P po 2 80 US Dollars O 1 Setup US Dollars Tender give change back in US Dollars Tender ID Tender Code Tender Type Change Ten
131. to the Discount and Coupon Summary topic in this section Display the Currency Conversion form to convert amounts between different currencies Refer to the Foreign Currencies topic in the Appendices Maintain notes for the specified date Refer to the Bookkeeping Memo topic in this section Gk E Ba E Activate the context sensitive help in this dialogue 9 Balancing Overview Report This function will produce a Balancing Overview Report for the specified date on the Balancing Overview form This function is executed when or is selected from the Balancing Overview form Table 30 9 contains a description of each field contained in the report Balance Date Balance date Date Time N A Total Taxes Total of tax amounts Currency TaxA TaxB TaxC TaxD Tax A Total amount under Tax schedule A Currency Sum of TaxA Tax B Total amount under Tax schedule B Currency Sum of TaxB Tax C Total amount under Tax schedule C Currency Sum of TaxC Tax D Total amount under Tax schedule D Currency Sum of TaxD This Deposit Deposit amount for the day Currency N A Variance Variance amount Currency To be deposited Actual deposit Over Shorts Tills Over Shorts for the day Currency N A Totals Totals for the day Currency Total of Tills detail Sales Name Department name Text None Sales Amounts Department sales for the day Currency None Safe Description Safe label description Text None Safe Amounts Amount for the safe Currency None Tills De
132. toolbar of Customer Maintenance produces a Customers report listing all customers that currently exist in the system The layout of this report is contained in Appendix F This function is executed when or is clicked from the Customer form or from the Print Customer Report function in the Customers menu Table 8 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer report Reportfield Description Format Calculation __ Table 8 1 Selection Criteria Select all records contained in the Customer Status table Sort Criteria Dependent on user selection Print Customer Bad Checks Report The Print Customer Bad Checks Report function produces a Bad Checks report listing all bad checks that are currently outstanding in the system The report is sorted in customer name sequence The layout of this report is contained in Appendix F This function is executed when or is clicked from the Bad Check form or from the Print Bad Checks Report function in the Administration menu Table 8 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Bad Checks report Reportfield___ ____ Description____b Format Calculation Names Customer name Text None Card Number Card ID Number Number None Date Check date Date Time None Check Check Number Text None Amount Amount of the check Currency None Fee Fee applied for the bad check Currency None Total Total owed by the customer for the bad check Currency Check Amount Check Fee
133. type the Category that you wish to assign to the count this can be the date of the inventory count if you wish and press ENTER Enter the UPC code of a product you have counted and press ENTER Enter the quantity for the product in the Quantity field and press ENTER The product is displayed in the bottom portion of the form Continue this process until you have entered your counts Note When you exit the form the system will update the quantity on hand for each product based on the counts entered to that point Once you are completely done entering your inventory count this could have spanned several days you would want to mark the ending inventory to establish a baseline to be used when analyzing inventory Click Mark Ending Inventory to complete this process The system confirms your request and asks you to enter an ending inventory date this should be the ending date of the count RETAIL recalculates the quantity for each product in the count taking into account all receipts and sales through the close of business on the ending date you entered Note RETAIL requires that the ending date you enter be the same date as a successful store close If this is not the case an error message appears RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 81 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manage Inventory continued Enter Inventory Count continued The inventory count and ending date you enter is the basis for calcu
134. within the Customer form is clicked Click Add to add new categories to the list Select a code in the list and click OK Category Maintenance F E Definition IL Category Description Modified Modified By Teacher 10 24 2007 1 Comcel Pre School 10 24 2007 1 Add 104242007 Cancel Delete Help Table 2 5 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer Category Maintenance form Definition Number sequentially assigned by the system starting from number 1 Category Description Description Modified Date and time stamped by the system Modified By Number of the employee who made the last modification Table 2 5 Customer Link Retail The Customer Link feature is used to link two customers together This feature is useful in synchronizing data between two customers Either type the Card Number of the customer to link to or 2 Update this customer with data From customer 2 click Link Search al to access the RETAIL Search form to search for a customer When you MHo have entered the customer a link customer message box is displayed Click Yes to update the current customer with the following data from the linked customer customer address marital status area category discount pricing level purchases shops for credit limit terms writing check privilege cash back checks written frequent shoppers points earned store coupons and print invoice When modify
135. 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 362 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Products by Department UPC 0000000005727 0000000005728 0000000005729 0000000005730 0000000005731 0000000007681 0000000007691 000000000771 1 0000000007721 0001575900432 0002097233109 0002252304012 0002252304013 0002252304015 0002252304310 0002252304578 000225233461 1 0002252334615 0002252334618 0002252334624 0002351378202 0002737104015 0002743400618 0003600001915 0003899333882 0003980004012 0003993800616 0004130510102 0004160412141 0004160412418 Products by Department GENERAL MERCHANDISE Description CREST TOOTHPASTE NYQUIL DAYQUIL HRBL ESSENCE SHMP CON KOTEX SCOPE MOUTHWASH 0 0 0 0 CITRONELLA TORCH 10 LIGHT SET WINE BAG WINE BAG WINE BAG WINE BAG WINE BAG WINE BAG WINE BAG WINE BAG WINE BAG PROGSTRN CREME STERNO LIQUID FUEL TWNLB CHOLINE CAP KTX MAXI PAD 27CT CALICO 2PK LIGHTERS 4 HRNG AID BATT PLSTC TABLE COVER NO BUGS SM INSULATED MUG LG INSULATED MUG Tuesday November 01 2005 05 39 PM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Normal Cost 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 99 0 99 0 99 0 99 0 99 0 99 0 99 0 99 0 99 0 00 3 14 0 00 2 61 0 61 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Goodwin s Market Normal Pric
136. 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0041000000549 10 31 05 Charge 7 7 137 10 30 05 Charge 6 6 156 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0041000000550 10 30 05 Charge 4 4 191 250 00 CRESTINE CARD 0046990000045 10 28 05 Charge 6 6 23 250 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0042500000018 10 20 05 Charge 3 3 206 250 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0046990000044 10 19 05 Charge 5 5 61 50 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0040500000124 10 23 05 Charge 6 6 57 10 21 05 Charge 4 4 55 250 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0046990000050 10 25 05 Charge 2 2 7 10 25 05 Charge 2 2 8 10 19 05 Charge 1 1 61 10 18 05 Charge 3 3 103 End Date 11 1 2005 Reference No Memo Current Balance 0 08 Current Balance 0 00 Current Balance 20 75 Current Balance 0 00 Current Balance 88 71 Current Balance 39 86 Current Balance 64 23 Current Balance 0 00 Current Balance 0 00 Current Balance 0 00 Current Balance 33 06 Current Balance 0 00 BOOSTERS RIM BAND 0041000000170 Current Balance 0 00 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 46 PM RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Amount 20 00 8 22 24 15 8 21 71 04 1 00 99 00 11 29 14 36 45 78 35 77 83 72 2 36 43 03 11 58 5 36 3 99 0 10 9 58 29 14 Customer Instore Charge Activity 335 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E In Store Charge Balance Detail Goodwin s Market Customer In store Charge Balance Detail Start Date 10 15 2005 Date Activi
137. 00 00 100 00 20 75 88 71 39 86 64 23 2 36 20 00 20 00 12 79 20 00 20 00 20 00 0 95 20 00 16 95 2 60 20 00 20 00 20 00 Customer Instore Charae Balance Summarv 337 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Customer Letters Tuesday December 06 2005 Goodwin s Market 24089 Lake Gregory Drive PO Box 3269 Crestline CA Doe Jane 0049887891122 7 Sandford Drive Crestline CA 97887 We here at Goodwin s Market want to express our sincere thanks for your faithful support of our store Our success depends greatly upon your continued patronage In the future we intend not only to recognize those of you who support our store but to reward you as well Gift certificates personalized coupons and daily discounted items are just some of the things we will be doing to say Thank You P S Once again the Goodwin s Market staff and thank you for your loyal support and therefore our jobs sincerely Your Name Your Title RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 338 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Customer Ranking Report CardNo 31 6887 3364759 0677014 0621996 1929428 0921607 9310564 0040003949864 3169779 0153125 0116275 0430738 0576903 0067073 0162685 0806734 0005084 0040003948188 8813708 0205984 0506188 0012505 0910863 Week of October 30 2005 to November 5 2
138. 000034343 0000000000876 0000000000321 Health and Beauty 0000000012343 SALAD Snacks 0000678678678 SERVICE BAKERY SERVICE 0000000001000 SERVICE 0000000098765 STATIONARY Paper 0000000123401 WINE WINE 0000000087601 Goodwin s Market Stock On Hand Stock On Hand Threshold 20 Description Cherry Cola Canned Beans Rice Cakes Brown Rice Frankfurters Tuna Helper Hot Dog Relish Strawberry Jam Grape Jelly Small Noodles Medium Noodles Salt amp Vinegar Chips Tale of Two Cities Bodv Wash Peanuts Potato Bread 12 Pack Cupcakes Pen Set California Red Wine RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 10 29 2010 Stock On Hand 18 00 9 00 7 00 8 00 7 00 4 00 12 00 4 00 10 00 14 00 12 00 6 00 7 00 6 00 13 00 9 00 18 00 17 00 20 00 Cost 0 50 1 00 1 00 1 59 0 89 2 00 1 50 1 00 5 00 1 00 1 00 1 00 2 53 2 00 0 00 1 00 1 00 5 00 2 40 Total Extended Cost 9 00 5 00 7 00 12 72 6 23 8 00 18 00 4 00 50 00 14 00 12 00 6 00 17 71 12 00 0 00 5 00 18 00 85 00 48 00 337 66 3 1 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Store Sales by Department Departments GROCERY PHOTO BAKERY PRODUCE MEAT WINE LIQUOR GENERAL MERCHANDISE DELI GIFTS Total Sales Tax A Tax B Tax C Tax D Total Tax Total LesdayNVovemper04 lt 00504 s RETAIL USER REFERENCE MAN Goodwin s Market
139. 0002820000178 0002820000179 0002820000270 0002820000271 0002820000274 0002820000275 0002820000276 0002820000302 0002820000304 0002820000305 0002820000306 0002820000316 0002820000327 0002820000338 0002820000341 0002820000342 0002820000343 0002820000410 0002820000620 0002820000621 0002820000622 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Start Date 7 12 2005 Description Vendor Dept MARLBORO SP MARLBORO MENTH SP MARLBORO SP VIRG SLIMS SP VIRG SLIMS SP VIRG SLIMS SP VIRG SLIMS SP MARLBORO SP MARLBORO SP MARLBORO SP MARLBORO SP MARLBORO SP MARLBORO SP MARLBORO SP MARLBORO BLEND N27 MARLBORO BLND 27 MARLBORO MENT 72 BLUE MARLBORO MENT 72 GRN PARLIAMENT MENT VIRGINIA SLIMS REG SP PARLIAMENT MEN SP MARLBORO SP MARLBORO SP MARLBORO SP MARLBORO SP BASIC SP BASIC SP BASIC SP hb ee ee ee a oe ee ee oe a ee ee a a ce a a a a o ee ee ee ee ee ee oe ee a a a ee ee ce a ce a a a ao Goodwin s Market Product Ad Batch kcpc2 Section 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 141 Normal Cost 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 67 3 38 3 38 3 38 End Date 7 12 2005 Special Cost 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2
140. 005 Customer NORTON KAREN WAGONNER SUZANNE JOHNSON BARBARA FREDERICK JOANNA SMITH CYNTHIA ROLLANDS BETTY STEPHENS SHERYL THOMAS TREVOR MORRIS MIKE MOORE RAYMOND RAYMOND LINDA LEE SARAH SANDERSON ELIZABETH BROWN LORIE GILES LINDA SHARKS LISA BANKS GERALD BURTON KATE DENNIS JAMES WALKER LLOYD WILLIAMS FRANCIS BRANDON AARRON ROBERTS KATHY RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Goodwin s Market Rank CON OOF O DN pa E US US NN oao RoN o O 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 Cost 0 00 98 33 67 50 69 51 60 76 63 23 58 32 48 20 47 10 53 14 42 20 49 08 48 68 56 47 58 78 119 23 52 20 30 18 32 24 42 13 44 85 56 81 41 19 Sales 200 63 165 35 145 31 121 70 104 07 101 53 97 77 97 73 97 16 96 23 94 92 90 66 88 72 85 67 84 46 84 02 83 30 82 46 79 65 79 27 78 79 78 57 71 93 Items 16 065 00 80 66 53 22 40 05 42 49 37 44 48 00 26 00 18 32 39 94 51 70 252 13 37 30 22 68 17 00 59 76 43 09 27 94 186 13 837 66 36 94 30 83 32 00 Gross Profit 200 63 62 53 77 81 48 90 38 33 38 30 39 45 46 24 42 07 38 78 32 89 41 59 32 47 28 21 25 68 35 21 31 10 50 30 36 33 33 95 32 95 21 76 28 25 GM 100 00 38 87 93 09 41 29 38 68 37 72 40 39 48 96 47 18 42 19 43 80 45 86 40 00 33 31 30 40 41 90 37 33 62 49 92 98 44 62 42 39 21 68 40
141. 02 27 2007 13 17 43 1 p2 PB 11 2 2007 12 31 2007 Soap 2 11 03 2007 09 13 08 1 p1 PB 11 3 2007 12 31 2007 Soap 1 11 03 2007 08 58 28 1 tial PB 7 25 2007 11 30 2007 Trial 11 02 2007 08 42 28 1 ook Sale PB 10 29 2007 10 30 2007 Book Sale 10 29 2007 08 56 10 1 Cancel OK oal g o o El El ii DADO Table 26 3 contains a description of each field contained in the Display Batch Numbers form DISPLAY BATCH NUMBERS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS PRODUCT INFORMATION Batch No Displays the batch number it can be alpha numeric Start date Displays the date when the current batch starts End date Displays the date when the current batch ends Description Displays the description of the batch may be Alpha numeric Table 26 3 Create New Batch The Create New Batch form is used to create a new batch META or to change the date and time for an existing batch This E form is displayed when the Add New Batch button IS A D gt Ok clicked on the Product Batches form or when the Create a eho Cancel Batch button 6 is clicked from different forms within lt T RETAIL Select the Batch Type from the drop down AD O E TA for temporary price changes Normal Price Change for permanent price changes or Pull Shelf Tags to print price o WELL E tags when the ad has expired aet aE sl Type the Batch ID and the Start and End Dates and Times An expired ad batch can be re activated and modified through this form by entering an ex
142. 04240040463 0007480040306 Description SPARKLETTS WTR 24 PACK GC EGGS 20 CT TOOTIE FRUITIES MOM GOLDEN PUFFS OHSE BACON 12 OZ Total Tuesday November 01 2005 05 39 PM RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Normal Cost 2 75 1 37 2 66 2 56 1 47 10 80 BatchNo BIG3d Normal Price 4 99 2 99 3 19 3 29 2 99 17 45 Normal Gross 44 89 54 18 16 61 22 30 50 90 Goodwin s Market Mass Product Changes Special Cost 3 05 1 01 1 76 1 76 1 46 9 04 Special Price 2 99 1 49 1 79 1 79 0 99 9 05 Special Gross 2 14 32 21 1 96 1 79 47 78 FS Scale DSD Vendor Section 1 140 1 157 1 125 1 125 1 526 Mass Product Changes 353 Dept RETAIL 7 User Manual Lane Till Cashier Name 4 4 Linda H 5 5 Sarah M Tuesday November 29 2005 11 04 AM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 APPENDIX E Monitor Tills Goodwin s Market Monitor Tills Tender Name Cash Credit Card Check Coupons Debit Card Elec Foodstamps Food Stamps InStore Charges Store Coupons Total Cash Credit Card Check Coupons Debit Card Elec Foodstamps Food Stamps InStore Charges Store Coupons Total Tendered Amount 587 58 146 18 146 69 16 99 106 76 46 71 191 28 208 06
143. 07 10 15 29 AM i have been established check the Frequent ae an STS one ETE A Shopper field in the Customer Maintenance form to 60 01 70 00 70 10 22 2007 10 15 45 AM 1 i 70 01 80 00 80 10 22 2007 10 15 50 4M 1 allow a customer to begin accumulating points When CT GST RST the customer s Card Number is scanned or entered 90 01 100 00 100 10 22 2007 10 16 01 AM 1 at the checkstand points are awarded to the SOON 1200 120 10 22 2007 101627AM 1 customer automatically The number of points 120 01 130 00 130 10 22 2007 10 16 36 AM gt anmi 140 mn 14n 1022222007 10 17 45 AM lt ill awarded is printed on the receipt preceded by a message that can be configured through the Pricing Levels Message field in POS Information function The Redeem Customer s Frequent Shopper Redeem Luke Henry s Frequent Shopper Points Points form is used to redeem points for customers Frequent Shopper Points jir This form is accessed when the Redeem Shopper EsmedPoirts F Cao a i Points A is clicked on the toolbar from the e E Customer Maintenance form Type the number of ee E _ E lt A points to redeem in the Redeem Points field select a Date and enter a reason for the redemption in the Points Redeemed Date Comments p 700 10 22 2007 Gift Certificate mailed out Comments field Click on the Apply button to apply the changes and the customer s points will be adjusted based on the points redeemed
144. 07232300361 D F DECAF CINN HAZEL 6 79 6 29 4 65 8 00 52 32 39 20 13 12 2 00 321 133 0007232300362 D F DECAF FR CARM WHL 6 79 6 29 4 65 12 00 78 98 59 30 19 68 2 50 321 133 0007232300363 D F DECAF HAWAII HAZ 6 79 6 29 4 65 10 00 63 90 47 50 16 40 4 00 321 133 0007232300364 D F CAFE CINN HZL WHL 6 79 6 29 4 65 15 00 98 35 73 75 24 60 3 50 321 133 0007232300376 D F ESPRESSO 5 29 4 89 3 55 27 00 138 03 101 85 36 18 4 80 321 133 0007232300467 D F BUTTERSCOTCH 5 29 4 89 3 55 51 00 255 79 187 45 68 34 14 00 321 133 0007232300524 DF NW DARK ROAST 5 29 4 89 3 55 14 00 70 86 52 10 18 76 3 20 321 133 0007232301118 DF DECAF COLOMBIAN 5 29 4 89 3 55 28 00 142 92 105 40 87 52 5 20 215 46 199 56 146 65 1 084 52 6 726 4 4 950 6 1 775 81 269 44 Total 215 46 199 56 146 65 1 084 52 6 726 4 4 950 6 1 775 81 269 44 11 1 2005 5 36 43PM Paae 2 of 2 Product Ad Loss By Batch RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 360 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Product Mix Match Report Mixmatch Code GROCERY 1 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 1218 UPC 0001200000016 0001200000169 0001200000190 0001200000225 0001200000491 0001200000495 0001200000856 0001200001003 0001200001283 0001200001343 0001200001344 0001200001359 0001200001360 0001200001368 000120000
145. 1 0 00 Note click the Help button then Adjustments Pickups Loans Deposits headings to view details related to these items RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 91 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Safe Statistics continued The second tab Balance Information displays System Generated Deposit totals This includes total sales and cashier reconciliation information based on the till statistics information entered into the system refer to the Balance Tills section for more information lt also contains the actual deposit information based on deposits made using the Make a Bank Deposit function The system takes into account any fluctuation in the safe in the Safe Variance field The system will compare the amounts entered to the system generated deposit information and actual deposit information and display any variance in the Variance field When you are satisfied with the data you ve entered click Save in the toolbar Safe Statistics and Balancing Current Safe System Generated Deposit Total Sales Over Shorts Paid Ins Paid Outs Received On Acct Electronic Tenders Mfr Coupons NonDepositables Safe Adjustments System Deposit Actual Deposit Deposit Variance 8 684 21 0 00 519 02 214 06 20 00 0 00 44 40 1 319 96 0 00 7 644 81 7 457 81 187 00 Safe Contents Description 1 Description 2 Description 3 Description 4 Description
146. 11 47 42 AM Employee No THANK YOU FOR Employee No 1 THANK YOU FOR I Ng SHOPPING WITH US iiz A HOPEING WITH Lisl Register No Register No 12 Transaction No Transaction No 4 Tender Type Tender Type cc Tender Amount 8 88 Tender Amount 7 89 Account No ADOSARARAAAA 1114 Account Mo 5233x0016 Authorization No 4412345678 Authorization No 4412345678 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 203 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Electronic Journal continued Table 30 17 contains a description of each field contained in the Electronic Journal form ELECTRONIC JOURNAL FORM FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD Start Date End Date DESCRIPTION Start date of the date range in U S format MM DD YY End date of the date range in U S format MM DD YY Cashier Tender Type CardNo Time Amount Trans No Select a cashier via the drop down menu Select a tender via the drop down menu Select a transaction type via the drop down menu Enter a card number or use the ellipse button to search for a customer Enter the start time and the end time of the range Enter the minimum and maximum amount of the range Enter the beginning transaction No and the ending transaction No of the range Start UPC End UPC Lane No Tax Status Trans Level Disc Type Grid Table 30 17 Enter the beginning UPC No and the ending UPC No Enter a specific checkstand Select Tax Exempt of Food Stamp Exempt f
147. 1369 0001200001458 0001200001465 0001200001474 0001200001481 0001200001506 0001200001507 0001200001519 0001200001520 0001200001661 0001200010015 0001200010046 0001200010129 0001200010176 0001200010631 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 39 PM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Goodwin s Market Product Mix Match Report Description PEPSI SODA 12 PACK DIET MTN DEW 12 PACK DIET PEPSI 12 PACK MTN DEW 12 PACK CAF FREE PEPSI 12 PAK CAF FREE DIET PEPSI 12 PAK ORANGE SLICE 12 PACK MTN DEW PTCH BLK 12 PK PEPSI HOLIDAY SPICE TROP ORANGEADE TROP ORNGEADE 12 PAK TROP ORNGEADE 12PAK TROP S F ORANGEADE TROP FRUIT PUNCH 12 PAK TROP S F FRT PUNCH TROP DT ORNG TWST 12 PAK TROP TWST GRAPE 12 PK TROP TWST ORNG 12 PAK TROPICANA STRAWBRY PEPSI LIME PEPSI W LIME 12 PACK DIET PEPSI W LME 12 PAK DIET PEPSI W LME 12 PAK MTN DW PTCH BLK II 12 PK MUG ROOT BEER 12 PAK MTN DEW CODE RD 12 PAK SIERRA MIST 12 PACK DIET MTN DEW CDE RD PEPSI TWIST 12 PACK Section 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 139 900 139 139 139 900 900 900 900 139 139 139 139 139 139 Normal Cost 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 2 90 Normal Price 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99 3 99
148. 144 Fe POPS TICS ed A A dd ene ATA RA A E 145 PURCHASES Order DOCUMEN arenie dados 146 MUS Vendor COS ist E T A A ad 147 O A eee Lee Oe AOR Te a Tae ae MOTT a eee eee ee me eee ETP 147 COSFCACUA Oti le ta deca ae re dia ket et een 148 PREG EI VE AD IN E e e do da 148 o AA A A A see a 150 SE o e A O A O eee en oe 151 INVOICS BEE 8141218 EAN EE adi 151 ASS a A 152 E A A A A A 153 VO OID AAA A es A T EPEE TNE Panel siti on etdite ube Mencken at AE EIES TANE E haa ete 153 Inventory ARAN SIS REPON aia ii A tot anieitaaiiat 153 BS ODIS CRE RANG eS must calibra a a aur baicdsbi asec 154 ALLOWANCE BIE BA GK Se canina ta idad 155 TOODA ea a a a a a a abe Sen nape ieee atedandead a a N 156 AllOWANGCE Bill Back Repons serrin a AA A e raae 157 PRINT OTOGK ON FAND REPOR Tissot ea e aa 158 SETUP REASON GODE Ssns a e er a o er aa 159 PRINT TOTAL INVOICES BY DEPARTMENT dla 159 PRINT ALLOWANCES BY VENDOR aid 160 PRINT POS BY VENDORS camarada dada 161 PAID UNPAID INVOICES BY VENDORS cocinera 162 SHOVES TOPE Se ce seat a Ne ste he e eh ne ON eG RE ido 164 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 6 RETAIL 7 r Manual TABLE OF CONTENT A A II A 165 A EAA A EASE Pen Ae RES mn Ue E EAE a ee ee a EA eee ERE 166 SAA ES NEO oe Ee ROC CE REE E SVS RS en SEMEN eee eee eRe 167 OS A O TR 167 DOME SACS led TOPICO nn A RE EE E TE A 168 lore Sales Taxes DO sort tenso O a eO 169 olore Sales Tax DE alNRODOM escrita o eO TA OE 169 Aggregate Store Sale
149. 16 ROMERO S BURRITO 1 25 1 69 26 04 3 00 5 07 3 75 1 32 0002400001481 DEL MONTE SPINACH 1 06 1 49 29 09 2 00 2 98 2 11 0 87 0002680000445 A B WIDE NOODLES 0 93 1 69 44 87 3 00 5 07 2 80 2 27 0002840000818 F L TOST MILD SALSA 2 04 2 99 31 78 2 00 5 98 4 08 1 90 0003120035027 O S LGHT CRNBRYRASP JCE 2 68 2 99 31 11 2 00 7 78 5 36 2 42 0003500039161 SUAVITEL SOFT FLOWER 3 05 3 69 100 00 1 00 3 19 0 00 3 19 00037000801 72 DWNY SNGL MTN SPG 3 71 4 99 25 70 1 00 4 99 3 71 1 28 0004100000332 LIPTON CH NOODLE 1 01 1 69 40 41 1 00 1 69 1 01 0 68 0004138001502 SF Y C SLCD PCHES H S 1 06 1 69 37 48 2 00 3 38 2 11 1 27 0004138018700 SF LRGE ELBOW MAC 0 69 1 19 42 23 1 00 1 19 0 69 0 50 0004138049304 S F DRY RST SNFLWR 1 09 1 69 35 66 4 00 6 76 4 35 2 41 0004138080625 346 CH STONE GR WHEAT 1 32 1 99 33 67 4 00 7 96 5 28 2 68 0004156500008 PACE PCIANTE SCE MED 0 97 1 49 34 90 1 00 1 49 0 97 0 52 0004300021704 JELLO FRT CHRY CHZ CK 2 54 3 59 29 20 1 00 3 59 2 54 1 05 0004440015650 GOR CRNCH FSHSTK 3 11 4 99 37 76 1 00 4 99 3 11 1 88 0004740013070 SERIES GEL S SKN 2 06 2 99 31 11 1 00 2 99 2 06 0 93 0004960000034 ANTHONYS MANICOTTI 1 09 1 59 31 45 1 00 1 59 1 09 0 50 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 01 PM Page 1 Product Sales RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 366 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Safe Audit Report Date 10 22 96 10 22 96 10 22 96 11 17
150. 2 00 AM Section Bread y Gross Margin 22 50 end 11 59PM Vendor BETTYS BAKED GOODS Euren Product Group Batch Others y E Related Products UPC Description Item Code PGCode PGT ype Cost Price Ad a 0000000000001 Cinnamon Raisin Swirl 1 350 4 40 0000000000002 Non fat Milk 2222 0 750 2 00 v 0000000000003 Chicken Eggs 222 2 130 6 00 a oo00000000004 Apricots 93 000 10 00 0000000000005 Crusty Wheat Rolls 1 550 3 00 O D000000000006 Lined Paper All 1 870 2 99 O oooo000000007 Coca Cola 2 000 2 00 v D000000000008 Sprite 2 000 2 00 v 0000000000009 Root Beer 2 000 2 00 M 0000000000010 Pizza Slice 0 980 1 10 E 0000000000011 Cheddar Cheese 1 220 4 00 Y v Modified 8 29 2007 12 15 13 PM Modified By Jane Smith Created 12 30 2005 10 24 11 4M Created By Jane Smith Note With Pricing Product groups and Item Codes data for a group of products can be automatically updated Refer to the Product Grouping Updates topic in this section Note The Checkstands should be updated with the product information once you have finished your updates by using the Synchronize Checkstands with Products function this function is covered later in this section This will ensure that the checkstand database contains the most current product data in the event the checkstand system needs to operate in stand alone mode Note When deleting a product an entry will be created in the user activity log in order to provide an audit trail of
151. 3 685 33 3 355 72 1 958 77 1 599 68 1 076 24 472 53 43 01 Items Sold 577 892 890 720 1 617 1 449 2 982 2 683 5 198 2 672 2 995 2 388 2 183 468 201 End Date 10 31 2005 No of Customers 63 68 80 74 112 142 111 126 193 188 173 113 75 62 Avg Order Size 10 46 18 18 18 40 16 08 17 25 20 51 27 51 20 50 23 19 19 60 19 40 17 33 21 33 17 36 18 90 Avg Item Price 1 14 1 39 1 65 1 65 1 20 2 01 1 02 0 96 0 86 1 38 1 12 0 82 0 73 2 30 2 35 31 706 31 Checkstand Productivity Report 330 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Checkstand Service Report Goodwin s Market Checkstand Service Report Start Date 10 31 2005 End Date 10 31 2005 Average Ring Total Coupons Void Refunds Gross Over Short Order Scan Time Hours H Total Sale Total Sale Sales Ashley Franks 220 0 01 20 92 95 93 27 34 0 00 11 79 4 78 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 900 41 Bakery Dept 43 4 99 3 89 83 78 35 36 0 00 0 79 0 00 0 00 95 31 Brent Parker 216 0 05 21 76 94 39 36 06 8 89 16 34 4 66 0 08 5 947 11 Catherine Jones 109 0 00 16 64 95 08 24 87 1 00 22 47 0 40 1 620 31 Cindy Williams 178 0 31 21 22 94 43 31 63 4 00 32 87 65 00 4 002 69 Deli 42 0 10 5 67 92 86 27 76 0 00 4 45 0 00 444 76 Kim Nolan 128 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Laura Hallma
152. 3 98 43 58 68 12 2 Smith Janice 54 00 18 00 45 00 83 34 200 Cool Fred 9 99 1 00 6 99 69 97 2000 Note The calculation used for the Sales is the same calculation used in the Show Store Sales Department function Total Sales excluding taxes amp coupons Coupon Multiples e g double coupon amounts Discounts customer line item amp order level Electronic Coupons Table 22 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer Sales form CUSTOMER SALES FIELD DESCRIPTIONS CUSTOMER SALES FIELD DESCRIPTIONS gt gt gt FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Start Date End Date UPC field 1 UPC field 2 UPC button Dept field Dept button Section field Section button Vendor field Vendor button Other field Other button Total Cost Quantity Customers Profit Margin Include Related Products CUSTOMER LIST BOX Multiple occurrences of the following Customer Zip Home Phone Total Cost Quantity Profit Margin Table 22 1 Displays the start date for the selected time period Displays the end date for the selected time period Displays the start UPC or PLU number for the product range Displays the end UPC or PLU number for the product range Used to run the query for the UPCs entered Displays the department name Used to run the query for the selected department category Displays the section name Used to run the query for the selected section category Displ
153. 321 133 0007232300078 D F CAFE FR VAN WHL 6 79 6 29 4 65 12 00 78 48 58 80 19 68 3 00 321 133 0007232300080 D F CAFE AU CHOC 6 79 6 29 4 65 3 00 19 87 14 95 4 92 0 50 321 133 0007232300088 DF HAWAII HZLNUT WHL 6 79 6 29 4 65 12 00 78 48 58 80 19 68 3 00 321 133 0007232300333 DF COLOMBIA SUPREME 5 29 4 89 3 55 47 00 239 83 176 85 62 98 8 80 321 133 0007232300334 D F VANILLA NUT 5 29 4 89 3 55 84 00 430 36 317 80 112 56 13 60 321 133 0007232300335 D F CINN HAZELNUT 5 29 4 89 3 55 52 00 265 08 195 40 69 68 10 00 321 133 0007232300336 D F FRENCH ROAST 5 29 4 89 3 55 20 00 100 20 73 40 26 80 5 60 321 133 0007232300338 D F HAWAIIAN BLEND 5 29 4 89 3 55 27 00 135 63 99 45 36 18 7 20 321 133 0007232300340 D F HAWAIIAN HAZEL 5 29 4 89 3 55 63 00 318 47 234 05 84 42 14 40 321 133 0007232300357 D F CAFE VAN NUT WHL 6 79 6 29 4 65 21 00 136 59 102 15 34 44 6 00 321 133 0007232300358 DF CARAMEL CREME 5 29 4 89 3 55 55 00 278 55 204 85 73 70 12 40 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 359 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Product Ad Loss by Batch Batch Coffee 8 8 2005 12 31 2005 Normal Special Special Vendor Section UPC Description Price Price Cost Qty Sales Cost Profit Mark Down 321 133 0007232300359 D F CAFE FR CARAMEL 6 79 6 29 4 65 8 00 51 82 38 70 13 12 2 50 321 133 0007232300360 DF DECAF VANILLA NUT 6 79 6 29 4 65 9 00 59 11 44 35 14 76 2 00 321 133 00
154. 4 17 0 00 Deposit Variance 187 00 To preview or print a report of the information on the form click the Print Preview E or the Print amp in the toolbar A report of the financial data will be available for you to review or print You may also view or print a summary of the discounts and coupons for the time period selected Press to view the report RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 92 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO System Administration H e The store close process is one of the most EM critical processes in RETAIL This process ee E a i i ProcDate Timestamp Emp Activity Description a A Run Now 10 23 2007 2 15 03 PM 1 10 WI Il transfer all of the checkstand transactio n 10 23 2007 10 23 2007 2 14 39 PM 1 Store Close Connecting checkstands 1 Refresh 10 23 2007 10 23 2007 2 14 39 PM 1 Store Close All checkstands have been checked out 1a data fro m the Fro nt E nd m od u le to the SQ L 10 23 2007 10 23 2007 2 14 39 PM 1 Store Close Calculating Store Sales 1 Close H 10 22 2007 10 22 2007 2 57 28 PM 1 Store Close Store Close Finished Successfully for 10 22 2007 10 Databases and Back E nd m od u le It WI also 10 22 2007 10 22 2007 2 56 49 PM 1 Store Close All checkstands have been checked out 1 Help 10 22 2007 10 22 2007 2 56 49 PM 1 Store Close Calculating Store Sales 1 aggreg ate data that su ppo rts the various Back 10 22 2007 10 22 2007 2 56 49 PM 1 Store Close Connectin
155. 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 2 46 Normal Price 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 69 4 29 4 29 4 29 Special Price 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 34 3 34 3 34 3 34 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 34 3 19 3 34 3 19 3 19 3 19 3 19 2 99 2 99 2 99 Price Diff 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 35 1 35 1 35 1 35 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 35 1 50 1 35 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 50 1 30 1 30 1 30 Normal Gross 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 73 21 21 21 21 21 21 Special Gross Ad Loss 22 88 22 88 22 88 26 39 26 39 26 39 26 39 22 88 22 88 22 88 22 88 22 88 22 88 22 88 22 88 22 88 22 88 22 88 26 39 22 88 26 39 22 88 22 88 22 88 22 88 17 73 17 73 17 73 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Sold 0
156. 5 Description 6 Description 7 Description 8 Description 9 Total bad ell ell el e P oj Sj Sj Sj Sj Sj Dl S O oj cj SH So elel So ele SI Sj Sjaj LE mjw la to save the information Another portion of the Balance Information is the Safe Contents section This allows you to enter the actual countdown of your safe This amount can then be compared to the system generated Ending Safe amount The labels displayed on the form can be changed to meet the needs of the user based on the currency labels can be entered to meet your needs Note Adjustments can be made to the safe to change balances on specific tenders This function would be used when moneys need to be added or removed from the safe Click the Safe Adjustments to access this feature Note The system uses the previous day s ending safe amount as the starting point for the current day in order to calculate the safe variance Balancing Overview Select the Balancing Overview function under the REGISTERS section of the Point of Sales menu This form will give you a complete financial picture at a glance This form Balancing Overview y S ee m l s Start Date 10 22 2007 End Date 0 22 2007 v Sales Department Tills Sales 4 831 87 A Tender Name Cash Actual System 6 924 85 6 924 85 0 5 a 0 00 Deposit Total Sales Over Shorts 8 684 21 0 00 combines data from three differe
157. 5 00 5 00 1 1 264 246 9 21 2007 Charge 5 00 5 00 1 1 332 321 9 21 2007 Charge 5 00 5 00 1 1 332 322 Due Date Status No 9 12 2007 NotPaid No 9 12 2007 NotPaid No 10 6 2007 NotPaid No 10 6 2007 NotPaid No 10 6 2007 NotPaid 10 6 2007 NotPaid 9 21 2007 Charge 5 00 5 00 1 1 356 328 9 21 2007 Charge 5 00 5 00 1 1 356 329 Table 2 10 contains a description of each field contained in the New Edit Payments form NEW EDIT PAYMENTS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION In store Charge box Card No Name Balance Trans ID Proc Date Amount Ref No Available Memo Grid columns Applied Due Date Status Proc Date Type Amount Balance Paying Amount Ref No Trans No Table 2 10 Displays whether a customer in the Customer Attributes form is set up as charge customer or not Charge activities can still be processed but a reminder This is not a charge customer is always encountered until a customer is set up Displays the card number of the current customer Displays the name of the current customer Displays the current outstanding balance of the current customer Displays either New Trans when on add mode of the system assigned sequential number of the retrieved payment transaction Displays the effective date of the payment In New Payments form the field defaults to current date but then allows user to enter other dates back date or future date Displays payment amoun
158. 53 10 88 4 66 5 09 44 41 38 37 4 72 13 17 5 88 3 49 53 65 33 51 36 46 44 78 12 67 48 07 6 78 Profit 15 33 12 26 1 89 3 84 2 03 5 79 3 46 6 18 3 96 2 84 20 96 16 97 2 81 7 65 4 74 3 49 21 07 17 71 15 69 20 00 4 97 28 11 2 67 GM 67 50 88 14 17 11 19 57 100 00 21 64 30 04 96 84 89 07 99 83 47 20 44 23 99 04 98 05 80 64 100 00 39 28 92 86 43 04 44 68 39 24 58 49 39 39 Customer Sales 340 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Customers Report Customer Name ALLEN ART ANDERSON MARVIN BAINS JANE DAVIS ROBIN E EDWARDS THOMAS EDWINS JANNICE Goodwin s Market Customers Sorted by Last Name Address Card Number Link 2 12 Little Bear Dr 0730241 131 Rim Forest Ca 92378 2234 Davis Ct 3647156 1546 Crestline Ca 92325 PO BOX 225 4709938 23133 BALSAM LN CRESTLINE CA 92325 133 Bernard 0845527 Crestline Ca 92325 PO BOX 2177 9657543 4678 DARFO DR CRESTLINE CA 92325 PO BOX 3998 3400018 29872 LINX CRESTLINE CA 92325 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 40 PM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Home Phone 919 555 9955 919 555 6426 919 555 5025 919 555 0493 919 555 7535 919 555 0393 Purchases 1980 33 345 50 210 98 318 48 2988 54 10 964 09 Shopped 2 Customers 341 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Departme
159. 55 990 867 5373 5512 9108 2489 329 705 81706 9025 4740 384 179 565 5977 0 0 Chkstnd Security 20 10 6 20 4 20 20 8 10 10 20 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 50 PM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Admin Password 19 80 94 867 77 180 60 36 39 41 178 49 Goodwin s Market Admin Security 20 10 6 20 10 20 10 20 10 10 20 Employees First Name Last Name DL Employee Generic Cindy Martins Janet Windsor Larry Masterson David Goodyear Bridgette Jones John Ralph Supervisor Supervisor Supervisor2 Supervisor2 Deli Bakery Dept Supervisor 3 Supervisor 3 Larry Johnson Mark Eagles Donna Anderson Kim Newell Melinda Martinez Jim Barrister Store Close Job Title Checker Gen Mer Bookkeeper Grocery President Payroll Grocery Front end Front end Deli Dept Bakery Checker Manager CASHIER Cashier Acctng Store c Active Purchases Employees 346 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Inventory Analysis UPC 0000000000022 0000000008888 0000000009999 0000000456701 Goodwin s Market Inventory Analysis by Crisps and Chips StartDate 9 11 2005 Description Rice Cakes Pretzels Onion Pretzels BBQ Potato Chips Total Monday November 28 2005 01 58 PM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE
160. 6 69 30 898 66 0 31 0 31 A DN1_ Dag over per 0094 28 29e AIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Tenders Report Goodwin s Market Tenders Tender Tender Tender Tender Require Currency Currency Refund Require Code Name Type Depositable ID Active ID Description OK MGR Override 1 CA Cash CA 1 Dollars 2 CK Check CK 1 Dollars 3 CC Credit Card CA 1 Dollars 4 DC Debit Card CA 1 Dollars 5 FS Food Stamps CA 1 Dollars 6 CP Coupons CA 1 Dollars 7 MI In Store Charges CH 1 Dollars 8 SN Store Coupons CA C 7 C 1 Dollars C 7 9 EF Elec Foodstamps CA 1 Dollars 10 EC Elec Cash CA 1 Dollars 11 GC Gift Certificates CA 1 Dollars Tuesday November 01 2005 05 51 PM Page 1 Tenders RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 3 5 RETAIL 7 User Manual Name Generic Employee Martin Cindy Supervisor Dept Deli Dept Bakery Johnson Catherine Norton Kim Hall Laura Roberts Marianne Aguila Lupe Frances Ashley A J ombe O 005 0500 PM P Sales 0 22 443 08 5 786 25 315 77 42 20 1 496 43 3 357 87 990 27 2 414 44 1 868 40
161. 6 B SLOAT AVE PACIFIC GROVE CA 93950 0 00 6128TOO GOOD GOURMET 510 985 0400 3862 PIEDMONT AVE OAKLAND CA 94611 0 00 6129 MARICH 800 624 7055 PO BOX 1477 HOLLISTER CA 95024 1477 0 00 6130 GRACE GOURMET INC 415 642 7008 715 CESAR CHAVEZ ST SAN FRANCISCO CA 94124 0 00 6139JILLSON amp ROBERTS 800 233 0070 3300 WEST CASTOR ST SANTA ANA CA 92704 3908 0 00 6140 RECYCLED PAPER 800 777 9494 PO BOX 95337 CHICAGO IL 60694 5337 0 00 6141 IVETA GOURMET 831 423 5149 PO BOX 376 SANTA CRUZ CA 95061 0 00 6142LIZARD LIPS 310 305 4047 4712 ADMIRALITY WAY 113 MARINA DEL REY CA 90292 0 00 6143 PASTA PARTNERS 801 977 9077 P O BOX 271097 SALT LAKE CITY UT 84127 0 00 6145 TURTLE ISLAND INC 815 759 9000 1910 BAY ROAD MC HENRY IL 60050 0 00 6146KYSELA IMPORTS INC 805 278 9332 701 DEL NORTE BLVD OXNARD CA 93030 0 00 6150SIMPLY SCRUMPTIOUS 714 505 3955 PO BOX 50141 IRVINE CA 92619 0 00 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 ES 3 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Reports lt This Page Intentionally Left Blank gt RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 380
162. 68 339 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Customer Sales Report Customer BARBARA WATERS Janet Winston Brad Harolds Catherine Jones Miles Lansden Laura Hallmark Kate Burton HEATHER FINCH Brent Parker LORI ANDERSON GEORGE THOMAS Tom Barns Vera Nelson Sally Crafton Carol Williams Mark Eagles Linda Lewis Elizabeth Krumstead Andrew Martins MARY SILVERS Sara Wallace Lynn Graham Betty Morris Card 0029521 0040000404434 0040001571170 0040001642207 0040002252523 0040002965247 0040003948188 0040004160584 0040004260310 0040004592619 0040004799520 0040005077173 0040005430622 0040005579368 0040006804864 0040007269789 0043262 0043842 0065580 0168212 0178863 0204661 0306728 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 06 PM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Goodwin s Market Customer Sales Total Store Start Date 10 24 2005 Home Phone Zip Code 9195553262 92325 9195550433 92325 9195557286 92325 9195554766 92325 9195554514 92325 9195552419 92325 9195553789 92325 9195554775 92322 End Date 10 24 2005 Qty 9 25 7 90 4 00 7 00 2 00 7 00 9 00 6 00 9 00 6 00 26 00 29 00 4 00 7 00 2 00 2 00 16 00 11 54 19 73 12 51 8 00 23 47 2 00 Cost 7 39 1 65 9 16 0 99 0 00 15 15 8 07 4 70 0 70 2 25 23 45 21 40 1 91 5 53 1 14 0 00 32 58 15 80 20 77 24 78 7 70 19 96 4 11 Total 22 72 13 91 11 05 4 83 2 03 20 93 11
163. 70 9 17 10 14 15 1 9 63 144 50 Store Manager 3 64 97 30 30 34 67 4 12 3 53 12 1 5 41 64 97 Total 1 576 64 593 32 983 32 Tuesday November 29 2005 02 48 PM Page 1 Sales Person RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 369 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Sections Report Section 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 121 122 123 124 125 126 Name Club Packs Dietetic Foods Canned Fruits Fruit Juices Canned Vegetables Condiments Spaghetti Sauce Pickles Mayo mustard Salad Dressings Cooking Oils Canned Fish Canned Meats Mexican Specialties Oriental Noodles Disposable Diapers Baby Food amp Formula Soups Canned amp Powdered Milk Pet Food Packaged Beans amp Rice Popcorn Packaged Dinners Dried Pasta Cereal Snack Bars amp Fruit Rolls Dept Tuesday November 01 2005 05 51 PM Page 1 Goodwin s Market Sections Modified Modified Food Discount Unit of Effective Tax Date By Stamps A B Measure Schedule A B C D 10 16 00 1 0 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00 10 16 00
164. AA A pete 2 42 1 Repeat Range same range being repeated 2 29 13 Based on the tax table above the following entries would be made into the Tax form in RETAIL Tax Form Entries 1 Repeat Range Sales value of end of repeat range 1 09 minus Sales value of record before 1 entry in repeat range 09 1 00 2 Repeat Tax of entries in repeat range In this case 14 through 1 09 7 So enter in 0 07 3 Tax Table Enter in all entries ending values through end of 1 repeat range Including entries which precede the repeat range in this case only 1 entry 01 09 st RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 297 RETAIL 79 r Manual APPENDIX A INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM Step 1 Setup System Setup Information continued Setup Discounts The Discounts is used to enter maintain discount arrangements These discounts are assigned to customers in the Customer Maintenance function To create a new discount press the Add button To edit an existing discount scroll using the right or left arrows Check Product Category A or Product Category B or both Select the days of the week for the discount to apply and fill in a discount percentage The discount will only work with product departments or sections flagged with either Product Category A B or both The Discount Threshold is the dollar amount the customer has to purchase in order to be eligible to receive the discount Setup POS Infomation
165. AEE E A EEE AEE NE panne EEE E ins ceoet ooo octal cocoa 81 ENTER INVENTOR COUNT E aiii 81 ORDER GOOD esse predestination ainia 83 RECEVE GOOD Se ssist ten e iaa 84 ANALYZE INVENTOR Va ad A A 85 ALLOWANCES BIE BACKS A ao 86 MANAGE ENPLOYEES cunda dada dada aaa aa 87 ENTEREMPLOYEED TA dee 87 FICVIOW GHECKEl Sia USOS ai ti a ts tado iaa 88 MONTO TUS dada diaos 88 MONTO CHCCKS IANS at ads bd ti data detal a 89 BOOKKEEPING amp ACCOUNTING ooccccccccccccnononcnnnanananononononononononon nana nana r ren nn nn nn cnn nro nn n anna narrar enana nac cnnns 90 Make DEDOS td tico 90 Balance MS o e als hg E A EE E E E EE R o e OA P 91 SA EE E P TEE PIE E E PES ee E T O EEEE P AEE E PE E E a EE E 91 Paa e OVCIWICW id dida 92 SY OEM ADMINIS TRATION cornada A a a A E aa AA E ea AAAA 93 GEOSE THE STORE curia t 93 VIEW System LOG FICS a ic 94 BACKEND DETAIL DOCUMENTATION siciusi sti iach ete Ratna ds 95 PURPOSE nuria ir ean va ante ued hua tin rat naaa al 95 CUSTOMER MAINTENANCE cccccccccceccccceccecceceeccccececececececccecececececeeeeeeececececeeceeeaceceeececaceceeeeeseseseceeseeeeeeeeess 97 TOODA IPPO ee eee ee ee AS ee ee ee ee a ee ee 99 CUSTOMER 5 ee ee data 99 CSIC IEP AO CICS Susa o naa nc a ae cee ca ean ate sda 100 COTE A O Melee Re RC ECT eC ROR Ree ee RCT mn Pe Seem RERer Ree ree Rec in Pee oe nee REN ty Pe ee tere amt eee E ten Renee Meer eee es 100 CUSTOMER A COD sr ata eae ee 101 CROT Er Ie tl ai teen rd 101 RETALES CA ieai
166. AIL All reports were developed using Crystal Reports for Microsoft Visual Basic The reports contained in this appendix include Report Title Aggregate Store Sales Allowances Allowance Report Bad Checks Bad Checks Letter 1 Bad Checks Letter 2 Bad Checks Letter 3 Balancing Overview Bill Backs Checkstand Productivit Checkstand Service Coupon Movement Detail Coupon Movement Summar Customer Gift Certificates Allwnc rpt ALLbyVend rpt CustBcs rpt BadChk1 dot BadChk2 dot BadChk3 dot RegBook rpt Bllbcks rpt RegPraty rpt RegSevc rpt CpnLossD rpt CpnLossS rpt CusGrpG doc InStrAct rpt InStrBal rpt InstrSum rpt CusGrpL doc Customer Rankino Customer Sales Customers Departments Discount amp Coupon Summary Electronic Coupons Electronic Journal Employees Inventory Analysis Inventory Count Invoice Invoice Total In Store Charge Statement Loan In Slip Pickup Slip Mass Product Changes Monitor Tills CustF rpt SalesCus rpt CustPus rpt Departmt rpt Regbcd rpt CustCpns rpt RegEJ rpt Employee rpt InvAnaly rpt InvCount rpt InvR rpt InvDept rpt In storeC rpt Pickups rpt ProdMC rpt MTills rpt Outstanding Purchase Orders PobyVend rpt Price Changes History Prodcpch rpt Product Ad Batch Product Ad Markdown Product Mix Match Product Normal Batch Products by Department RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 ProdBadv rpt ProdBMrk rpt MixMatch rpt Prodbnml rpt RptByDep rpt 318 R
167. AIL 7 2 2 RETAIL 7 User Manual ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Employee Maintenance continued Clicking on the buttons next to the security BALA level fields to display forms listing security AS levels for the Checkstand and Back End Ma Functor To MEE NES functions These security levels are established lt using the Security Administration function E Level BT CN DA DB DG DN DR DS A For the Checkstand security levels for both the cco 60 00 0 15 0 15 10 00 13 00 80 00 0 20 0 20 20 00 50 00 1 00 1 00 100 00 100 00 manager functions and Checkstand functions are displayed Each manager function is displayed with the assigned security level For the Checkstand functions each amount established for each security level is displayed for each transaction key Reset Password Force Reset Password will require the employee to change his or her Pe Pad password When these fields are flagged from the Employees form the password is reset The next time this employee logs on to either the Front End E checkstand or Back End the prompt will appear to key in a new password Back_End Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on the Employees form Button Description Exit the current window Print an employee report Refer to the Print Employee Report topic in this section Display the employee report on the screen Refer to the Print Employee Report topic in
168. B 1 Ring up the item either a product department or section transaction 2 Key in the percentage discount for example 5 25 5 25 Discounts must be keyed in with decimal points 3 Press the DB Discount key DB ENTER through the keyboard Example from the keyboard 5 25DB 5 25 discount off of the entire order for all Products Departments or Sections with Category B selected RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 29 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Entering a Surcharge for entire order for products categorized as A 1 Ring up the item either a product department or section transaction 2 Key in surcharge percentage for example 5 25 5 25 Surcharge must be keyed in with decimal points 3 Press the SA Surcharge key SA ENTER through the keyboard Example from the keyboard 5 25SA 5 25 surcharge applied to the entire order for all Products Departments or Sections with Category A selected Entering a Surcharge for entire order for products categorized as B 1 Ring up the item either a product department or section transaction 2 Key in surcharge percentage for example 5 25 5 25 Surcharge must be keyed in with decimal points 3 Press the SB Surcharge key SB ENTER through the keyboard Example from the keyboard 5 25SB 5 25 surcharge applied to the entire order for all Products Departments or Sections with Categor
169. Balance Outstanding balance owed by the customer for Currency Total Amount Payments Made the bad check by customers Table 8 2 Selection Criteria Select all bad check records Sort Criteria Purchases Descending RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 129 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS In Store Charge Report Aging The In Store Charge Report Aging function produces a Customer Charge Aging report listing all outstanding charges by customers This report is generated from the Charge Maintenance toolbar The here Ree report s process date is always the current date The aging report can be generated either by Summary Type E Summary Report Close Report or by Detail Report The Age Group number of days displayed on the report is by default Age Group Help The layouts of these reports are found in Appendix F Tables 9 1 and 9 2 contain description of each field contained in the In Store Charge Aging Report Summary and In Store Charge Aging Report Detail Report field A ee Calculation Columns Card numbers of customers with outstanding balances Card None Card No number displays separately for each age group Name Names of customers with outstanding balances listed separately Text None for each age group Amount Outstanding charges credit memos Front end returns and Front Currency Total have unpaid and end pay outs if MI tender is used falling into each age group partially paid charges less
170. Checkstands POS Displays the name of the selected Checkstand Activity Field multiple occurrences Displays the description of the current transactions being processed by the Checkstand Employee Name Displays the name of the employee working on the selected Checkstand Current Total Displays the current total for the order being processed TILLSTATUS Cash Displays the current total amount of cash for the Checkstand being monitored Checks Displays the current total amount of checks for the Checkstand being monitored Food Stamps Displays the current total amount of food stamps for the Checkstand being monitored Credit Cards Displays the current total credit card amount for the Checkstand being monitored ATM Cards Displays the current total ATM amount for the Checkstand being monitored MISC Amt Refunds Displays the current amount of refunds for the Checkstand being monitored Amt Voids Displays the current amount of voids for the Checkstand being monitored Amt Pickups Displays the current amount of manager pickups for the Checkstand being monitored Table 31 7 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 247 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Print EFT Charges Report This function will produce an EFT electronic fund transfer iisasubeictesse os Charges report listing all checkstand EFT charges transactions Ea for the selected time period The layout of this report is Stat Date 11 5 2007
171. Currency Special Cost Special price Price Special Price Table 2 8 4 Selection Criteria All products assigned a mix match code Sort Criteria Department Mix Match UPC Print Product Price Changes The Print Product Price Changes function will produce HA a Price Changes History report of all product price changes for a selected date range A range of UPCs can also be selected by entering a starting and ending UPC Stat Date 11 5 2007 y OK This function is executed when the Print Product Price EndDate 11 5 2007 ha Changes report option is selected from the main menu Se o T Help End UPC Reportfield Description Format UPC Product UPC Text Description Product Description Text Cost Normal cost entered for the product Currency Price Normal price entered for the product Currency Method Pricing Method entered for the product Text Deal Price Deal price depends on pricing method Currency Deal Quantity Deal Quantity depends on pricing method Number Special Indicates if price change was a special price Checkbox change Date Modified Date price change was made Date Who Modified Employee and name of person who made Text the price change Table 2 8 5 Selection Criteria Selection criteria signify all products having a price change matching the criteria specified Sort Criteria UPC Date Modified in descending order RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 220 RETAIL 7 U
172. DFUNCTONALOVERVIE Nui 58 INTRODUCTION ane trees oes id o de E e de Cie ee o O tae o 58 BACK END FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW DIAGRAM aecaieaii an ee achadvavh ve ssatun E E EER kone caonmdete 59 GENERAL TO PICS load 60 METIDO WNGOWS ari A aaa 60 USE ACIVIIV TACKINO cicero eas octane acca se acios eaeoi eae eas a auese causes sae seadiseiese ie aaueae dace aeeawauso easeeceadanceee 60 BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO cccccccccccsssssseeeeeeeeesssseneeeeeeecsssseneeeeeeecesseeaeeeeseeecsseeeaseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeeesssseeees 61 NIRODUCTION ito oeannetennaassdenncai ates saeaceseaneeeee 61 SIGNING ON sodio ote nsio iii 62 MANAGE CUSTOMERS cundo ponia pica 63 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 4 RETAIL 7 r Manual TABLE OF CONTENT Maman GUSTONIOL 1 AI cise wishes aes nc io ici 63 CUSTIOMEr FCW AICS italia 64 o A a a E E E 65 ELECTRONIC COUPON Sii ica 66 BACK DADES es 71 TRACK CUSTOMER SALES bd 72 MANAGE IN STORE CHARGES 0oocccccccccnccncncnnnononnnanncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nana nn nr rr rr nn rn nr rr cnn rar rara rara 73 MANAGE PRODUCE Sada iaa 74 MANTAN PRODU O A DA TA 74 MASSIPRODUC FORA Etica tacto cio a TY TRACK PRODUCT MOVEMENT sarria ei 78 ANALYZE PRODUCT CATEGORIE S rea 78 TRACK PRODUCT OALE ooo ras cece sence incre asees cuca saamnieeeeccicoaseeaascaasus caus manatanecaeacasnaaaieseaea cisunaaaitaseeessanmeemieaet 79 el AB et REPRODUCE BAIC HE Pen ee eee Se ee ee ee ee ee eee eee eee ee eee eee eee eee ee 79 PUAN GE INVENTOR Y E EEE
173. DSD Allowances Setup Reason A O DER Discrepancies Billbacks Codes Allowances by Vendor POs by Vendor Paid Unpaid Invoices by Vendor a P Allowances amp Billbacks Reports Allowances amp Billbacks 140 RETAIL 7 Inventory Count You can use the Inventory Count form to enter and review physical inventory count for a product or set of products You can also use it r Manual INVENTORY Inventory Count E x al 8 Mark Ending Inventory Category Pop z Description e ela Pack Size to display or print an inventory report Only one we C e pe a ooo inventory count can exist per day This function ae mea e e a aa should be performed when a store first opens to i o aw ve e establish the beginning inventory count for products and periodically when physical inventory counts are performed Inventory Click the appropriate column heading to sort in an ascending or descending order The quantity on hand of the product is updated when the Mark ending Inventory has been processed UPC Description 0000000000007 Coca Cola 0000000000008 Sprite 0000000000009 Root Beer 0000000005353 Coke 0000053535353 Cherry Coke Price Pack Size 1 000 4 00 6 12 1 000 4 00 24 1202 Qty CountDate Dept Section Vendor DSD 123 10 26 2007 1 120 73 M 22 10 26 2007 1 120 73 34 10 26 2007 1 120 73 28 10 26 2007 12 102 14 76 10 26 2007 1 000 4 00 24 1202 0 500 1 00 1 00
174. Date Qty Retail Price Discount Coupon Movement List Summary Coupon ID Description Dept Trigger Start Date End Date Qty Retail Price Discount Table 5 1 Coupon Id assigned in the Electronic Coupon form Coupon Description in the Electronic Coupon form Department assigned to the trigger in the Electronic Coupon form Start Date of Coupon End Date of coupon Report Type Detail customer usage for each coupon or Summary one line per coupon Total quantity of items sold Total Retail Price of the trigger at the time of the sale Total actual coupon discount coupon amount at the time of the sale Date coupon was used Coupon ID assigned in the Electronic Coupon form Customer assigned to coupon at the time of the sale Department assigned to the trigger in the Electronic Coupon form Department assigned to the coupon link Trigger either UPC code or Group Code Start Date of Coupon End Date of Coupon Quantity of coupon purchased per sales transaction Retail price of the trigger at the time of the sale Actual coupon discount coupon amount at the time of the sale Coupon ID assigned in the Electronic Coupon form Descriptions as assigned in the Electronic Coupon form Department assigned to the trigger in the Electronic Coupon form Trigger either UPC code or Group Code Start Date of Coupon End Date of Coupon Quantity of coupon purchased per sales transaction Retail price of the trigger at the time of the sal
175. Discoun t Threshold Discoun ts Discount Category Number ua 0 00 gt ada Details Product Category 4 Vv Product Category B 3 Access the Security Administration function under the SETUP section of the Administration menu and complete the following tasks The setup of this data is critical to the security of the entire system Establish security levels limits and reason codes for the checkstand and back end functions For each Checkstand Function designate an overall minimum and maximum amount that can be completed at the front end as well as a limit for each security level Indicate if reasons are required when using the function and enter the reason codes for the function by clicking on the Reason Code button el For each checkstand Manager Function designate the security level required to complete the function and indicate if reasons are required when using the function Enter reason codes by clicking on the Reason Code button el Note The highest security level an employee can be assigned is level 20 If you assign security level 20 to a transaction key for example Paid In the transaction cannot be overridden by a manager RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Security Administration Transaction Key Blind Tills General Description Blind Tills Cancel Transaction Discount Category 4 Discount Category B Security Level Require Mar Vv L Override Department G
176. Displays the Product s UPC or PLU Description Displays the Product s Description Item Code Displays the Item Code used by the Wholesaler to identify the product Cost Displays the ad cost for the product Ad Price Displays the ad price for the product Margin Displays the gross margin based on the normal price and normal cost Sp Margin Displays the gross margin based on the special price and special cost Qty Displays the quantity of items sold during the time period of the batch Ad Loss Displays the add loss amount for this product PRODUCT LIST Multiple occurrences of the following for a NORMAL BATCH Normal Cost Displays the normal cost of the product Normal Price Displays the normal price of the product Table 26 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 211 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Enter Prices for Ad Batch continued Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on the Product Batches form Button See Meee os das q z le Description Exit the current window Print a product batches report Refer to the Print Product Batches Report topic in this section Display a product batches report on the screen Refer to the Print Product Batches Report topic in this section Save your entries or changes for the current record Delete the selected product in the product batch list Delete the currently displayed batch Add a new Batch o
177. EFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 79 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Maintain Products Data continued If you like to print shelf labels for the products click Labels Ej on the toolbar This prints labels for all products that have a check mark in the Label field If you prefer to export the product data to import into a separate label for the products selected This file can then be imported into any label making program that supports importing of files Note Product labels do not include a barcode If you would like to print labels with barcodes check to see if your printer supports downloading of fonts Refer to your Printer User Manual about the fonts supported Important Whenever you add or update product information make sure you update the information to the checkstands using the Synchronize Checkstands with Products function The checkstand data is used when checkstands are operating in stand alone mode To delete a product click Delete Xp on the toolbar RETAIL allows you to delete a product if the product has not been sold or ordered If sales exist for the item then the product can be flagged Inactive instead of Deleted A product is not removed from the system until the Synchronize Checkstands with Products function has been executed RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 76 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Maintain Products Data continued Mass Product Changes
178. ENGIES id 309 A RAN 309 2110 oE T EE o EE A ie re ee ee eee eee Cee eer 309 CUE C Y ManenaN E asco a a ac ss i Sis SAN I ec teh G 309 A 309 ONPE ANO ODIO ii Stossel tata de A di A aia 310 O Ta a O RA 310 A ie 311 BACK ENO ODE Oi AA A sd Ii E 311 CUNENCY CONVE MN ies 312 APPENDIX EFF FROCESSING ia A A A 313 CONCORD INTRODUCTION Sis a 314 Concord TIANSACHOIN FOW ios adhe ds 314 Concord RE FAI EOS EROS ies dd 315 Concord RESPONSE MAD ios add dde dd 315 CONCORD WEB INTRODUCTION sacado aa 316 INGENICO INTRODUCTION e 317 APPENDOSE REPORT SAMPLES ai id 318 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 10 RETAIL 7 r Manual INTRODUCTION Introduction The introduction of the technical document follows Intended Audience This document is intended to provide the reader with a technical overview of the RETAIL system developed by IT RETAIL INC This document is geared towards information technology professionals who wish to gain an in depth understanding of the technical foundation supporting the RETAIL system Purpose of Document The purpose of this document is to help the reader gain a technical perspective of RETAIL IT RETAIL INC has endeavored to provide a document that allows the reader to gain an insight into then RETAIL system This document contains the following Functional Overview Diagrams Technical Overview Diagrams Data Flow Diagrams for key system processes Entity Relationship Diagram Dat
179. ERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Rounding Last Digit of Price 8 v Rounding Criteria ees y Save 9 1 Delete 199 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Maintenance continued Table 23 13 contains a description of each field contained in the Cost Calculator form Description Displays the description of the current product Vendor Displays the primary vendor of the product Unit Cost Displays the unit cost of the product from or to the Product Maintenance form Case Cost Displays the calculated or entered cost on packaged product Pack Displays the quantity per pack Pricing Method Pricing method of product Unit Price Cost Unit cost Unit Price Price Unit price Group Deal Price Qty Group deal quantity if applicable Group Deal Price Price Group deal price if applicable Gross Margin Displays the calculated gross margin a to cost of the product Target Margin Displays the desired margin of the product entered in the product form Rounding Table Last Digit Price Last digit price ends in which will be rounded based on the rounding criteria Rounding Criteria Rounding criteria to be applied to price Table 23 13 Product Memo The Product Memo form is used to maintain Mas miscellaneous notes and information about a product This form is displayed when the memo button me 0000000000234 Ok located next to the Memo field of the Product Description Science Diet Senior Dog Maintenance form is clicked
180. ERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 80 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manage Inventory Entering inventory counts ordering goods receiving goods and analyzing your inventory are all important functions of managing your inventory RETAIL provides you with the ability to perform all these functions in an automated fashion Enter Inventory Count To be able to analyze your inventory the first step required is to establish the beginning S Bolk S M inventory physical inventory for the products S lt lt lt 4 A This function should be performed when a store a EE Cost first opens to establish the beginning inventory anoss poar E O i l count for the products as well as periodically a Po es i when physical inventory counts are performed Select the Inventory Count function of the Inventory menu The Inventory Count form is now displayed Dept Section Vendor DSD One advantage of RETAIL s Inventory Count application is that it allows you to take a physical count of your store s inventory over a period of several days This is useful if the count needs to span several days Note You should enter the product counts into the system the same day the count for the product is taken The system stamps the date and time entered on the product count and uses this date to recalculate the net quantity on hand when you mark the ending inventory To begin entering an inventory count
181. ES 2 Por Scanner Pse Magellan Scanner Scale y OK Printer Epson OPOS y a EA Cash Drawer Comm Info Checkstands Save Epsnoros SPL Cashier Display None 5 a 77 Customer Display None v 2 7 MICR Epson OPOS y a 7 Coin Dispenser None 2 7 The Comm Info tab is used to configure devices used by the Front End including the pin pad scanner scale printer cash drawer and MICR reader Press the test button to verify the communication between the front end and the device If the front end cannot communicate the status will be Fail If testing a printer or MICR reader a test receipt will be printed and you will be prompted to put a check through the MICR RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 The Database tab is used to configure the databases and their locations for use by the Front End Only very experienced users should alter information on this tab Checksiands r Local Databases Server Name LESLIEH Retal eeeeeccccse Test Connection User Name Password r Server Databases LESLIEH RETAIL Ss hei eeecccccces Test Connection Server Name User Name Password General Database Checkstands Tit ff dat ff Primary Monitor Mode Touch Screen y Secondary Monitor Mode Normal Screer y On Monitor m Receipt Print Type Receipt Only y Line Feed 2 invokes WITROOSVADel MFP 112 Copies fi inte
182. ETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX E REPORT SAMPLE Appendix E Report Samples continued Report Title Product Group Product Movement Product Sales Safe Audit Safe Statistics Sales Person Productivit Stock On Hand Store Sales Department or Section Store Sales Tax Detail Tenders Till Statistics Till Status Transactions by Reason Vendors RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 319 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Aggregate Store Sales Goodwin s Market Aggregate Store Sales Start Date 10 31 2005 End Date 10 31 2005 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Departments Sales Open Dept Cost of Gross ltems Avg Price Avg Order Customers Sales Sales Margin 0 00 Non Hash Aggregate Departments BAKERY 3 BAKERY 643 20 208 48 11 57 92 84 193 00 3 33 1 25 154 SubTotal 643 20 48 11 57 92 193 00 DELI 8 DELI 1 352 15 438 14 43 0 00 99 354 94 3 81 1 70 209 SubTotal 1 352 15 14 43 0 00 354 94 GENERAL MERCHANDISE 7 GENERAL 1 979 80 641 117 04 1 147 49 36 584 00 3 39 1 80 325 SubTotal 1 979 80 117 04 1 147 49 584 00 GIFTS 10 GIFTS 801 24 259 792 33 0 00 1 380 00 2 11 2 41 158 SubTotal 801 24 792 33 0 00 380 00 GROCERY 1 GROCERY 19 766 94 63 97 273 32 12 850 96 34 9 293 92 2 13 6 72 1 383 SubTotal 19 766 94 273 32 12 850 96 9 293 92 MEAT 5 MEAT 2 968 73 961 179 55 1 527 59 42 13 673 29 0 22 39 52 346 SubTotal 2 968 73 179 55 1 527 59 13 673 29 Tuesday Novem
183. FERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 102 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Maintenance continued Redeem Customer s Frequent Shopper Points continued Table 2 7 contains a description of each field in the Redeem Customer s Frequent Shopper Points form Earned Points To date balance of points earned stored in the system Card No Current customer s card number Redeem Points Number of points to be redeemed Date Date of points redemption may use the calendar drop down menu Comments Notes as to the nature of points redeemed Redemption List Points Redeemed List of points redeemed Date List of dates of each point redemption Comments List of comments related to each point redemption Table 2 7 In store Charge Maintenance The In store Charge Maintenance form is Instore Charge AR Maintenance i ean a Ws elelee S Bat used to view and maintain in store charge activities of customers This form is accessed ua Mnou im mmea ten fra re fom Z when the In store Charge Maintenance cs pt Partial Applied iv eer V Partial Applied lv oe v Partial Paid Y Misc Charges Iv g Unapplied Iv Unapplied Iv UnPaid IV Instore Charges V Financial Charges Y is clicked from the toolbar of the Customer Maintenance form This form can also be 7 Se gz EY Gee accessed from the Customer menu This form SD Ono O O ak a 9 21 2007 Charge 5 00 15 10 6 2007 NotPaid 1 1 356 328
184. For example NS SO the system will only allow entry of a security level required to perform the function The Security Levels tab will not be accessible for these transaction keys RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 267 RETAIL 7 r Manual Checkstand Functions continued ADMINISTRATION SETUP Table 34 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Checkstand Functions tab Displays the description of a selected transaction key function Key List Iltemizes the checkstand keys and descriptions being administered in this form GENERAL TAB Minimum Minimum amount allowed for a selected transaction key Maximum Maximum amount allowed for a selected transaction key Allow Reason Code Flag designating if reason codes are allowed for this transaction key Require Manager Override Flag if manager override is required on the minimum amount Update GL Not applicable to this version Reasons Required Flag designating if a reason code is required when the transaction key is used SECURITY LEVELS TAB Level Security level that entry applies to Amount Maximum amount allowed for the transaction key for the security level Override Flag if a manager override is allowed for a particular level of security Table 34 1 Manager Functions The Manager Functions tab allows entry of a ESJU security level and whether or not to prompt for reason codes for checkstand manager functions The manager functions are displayed on the checkst
185. GEIP Tarrasa ia 18 MEN GAECKSIANO FONT arcada iii A AA A A A A A A di 18 SANGANE MOOS soa it ti ici 19 Cas Drawer nner ENO S enisi AA tose A AAA A A AAA 20 GHECKSIQNO HOC A A wie idee cl ee 20 POS CONFIGURATION oracion a ai cdo sacada 22 SEC URI FEATURE S oia aaa airis 22 KEYBOARD A A hans poceus Gaaanka A 22 KEYBOARD USE WITH REGULAR KEYBOARD ccccccccccceecceceeeeeeeeeeseeeececeeeeeeeeeeeeuaueeueueseeeeeeueeseeeeueuaauaeuaeeedeeeeeneeeeaeenaaas 23 TRANSACTION DISCOUNTS AND SURCHARGES 0cccccccecceceeeceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeceeceeeeeueeeeeeeeuaaueuseuceeeeeeeeueeeeeeeeuuaaeaausedeeeeeenenss 2 ENEE DISCON Std oleate idan Nannon gets ote edad 28 Entenng a7 DISCOULALTO an eMe eo e dl 28 Entering a Dollar Amount Discount for an llelM ooconooccccnoccconocccnnooonononononononnnnononnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnr nn nnnn nro ran nn rra rrnnnnnnnnnnnnss 28 CUSTOMER Specie DISCOS ii 29 Removing Discount for entire order for a Customer GISCOUN ccccsccessceessseessseeesseeeesseeesseeessseeseseeessaeessaeesssneessaees 29 Order Level Discounts and SUCNALQCS sssscccessscsessscsessscssssecsessessessessasesessseseasseseassesesaseseausesesuseseassssnsssesnasenss 29 Entering a Discount for entire order for products categorized as A coococonococonaccconnoonnnnnonnnnnnonnncnnnnnnnnannnnnnnrnnnnannnnnnns 29 Entering a Discount for entire order for products categorized as Boooocococodiconoccconooonnnononnnnononnnonannnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnannnnnnns
186. IES DELI NON FOOD CANDY DAIRY SWEETS TOYS GROCERY FLORAL WINE LIQUOR BAKERY BAKERY AAAMEAT SASMEAT AAAMEAT PRODUCE Attributes Attributes Schedule X Unit of Measure X Food Stamp D Verity Age I Valid Age Discount Plan Discount T Discount B D Tax Plan Tard Tax B Tax C 106 Fruit PRODUCE 107 Dried Nuts GROCERY TD 108 Fruit Snacks GROCERY v Modified Modified By 4 Access the Vendor Maintenance function under the MAINTENANCE section of the Administration menu and complete the following task Edit a Vendor Vendors are important to setup for many of the same reasons as sections This is important to setup before E sn Bahs Mi you begin adding products so they are correctly l assigned a vendor as you add them Click on the Add rd y button Eg in the toolbar to add a vendor Enter the ER m mon Name appropriate data for the vendor Press the Save button in the toolbar to save your data Click on the Edit button on the toolbar to edit a vendor you have entered Address 1 Contact Address 2 City State zp Phone ff o M If you have set Require Vendor in System a E bso r Maintenance vendors must be setup or you will not ie d re be able to add items in Product Maintenance Created Modified Modifiedby PESA RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 300 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX A INITIALIZING
187. Identify the Customer as a Regular REG or Preferred PC customer Driver License Customer s driver s license number Expiration Date Date driver s license expires can use the calendar drop down menu Customer Link Card Number of another customer linked to the current Customer refer to the Customer Link topic in this section RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 97 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Maintenance continued CUSTOMER FORM FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Area Button Customer Photo Customer Address Customer e mail Category Button Customer Secondary IDs Active Customer Frequent Shopper Store Coupons Print invoice Pricing Level Finance Charge Tax Exempt Points Earned Discount Purchases Shops for Charge Account Credit Limit Terms Current Balance Write Checks Cash Back Checks Written Created Modified Modified By BAD CHECK LIST Date Check Amount Fee Total Paid Paid Date Balance Called Letter1 Letter2 Letter3 Memo Table 2 1 Click to access the area selection box covered later in this section Click to browse and attach a photo to selected customer used in Customer Focus function Click to access customer address detail covered later in this section Click to access your email browser email address is entered through the Customer Address button Click to access the set up category selection box covered later in this section Cl
188. K END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Electronic Coupons continued Example of a Generated Coupon you want to have customer who purchases cola have a free coupon for chips if they purchase chips 1 First setup the Linked coupon for Free chips Free Chips 2 Next setup the Generating coupon for Cola Coupon ID of Free Chips Coupon E Coupon will be given on next visit if customer buys chips Blank Coupon will be give in current order if customer buys chips Description s Enter one or more descriptions that should be printed at the bottom of the receipt The descriptions are printed if the coupon has been flagged for Next Use When the customer purchases Cola a Free Chips coupon is generated Depending on the Next Use flag when the customer purchases chips the Free Chips coupon is awarded to the customer either on the current order or on a future order Note If a coupon is not flagged for Next Use the linked coupon for example Free Chips is only available for use during the customer s current visit If the customer does not buy the chips the coupon is no longer available for use Restrictions Certain restrictions can be entered regarding the coupon Restrictions include Start and End dates Limits when the coupon can be used Multiple Indicates if coupon can be used more than once can only be changed for Target Customer coupons Order Limit Limits the number of times a coup
189. L RETAIL 7 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Discount amp Coupon Summary Department GROCERY PHOTO MEAT WINE LIQUOR BAD CHECK PAYMENT BAKERY PRODUCE GIFTS GENERAL MERCHANDISE DELI Tuesday November 01 2005 05 27 PM Page 1 Total Goodwin s Market Discount amp Coupon Summary Balance as of 10 19 2005 Discounts 1 78 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 26 0 00 0 00 0 00 3 10 5 14 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Coupons 356 70 0 00 4 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 10 0 00 84 32 0 00 446 12 Discount amp Coupon Summary 343 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Electronic Coupons Coupon Upc ID Description 4th of July Celebration PS KRFT DLX MC amp CZ PS NEAR EAST ORIG RICE PILAF Type PC PC PC Tuesday November 01 2005 05 48 PM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Amount 0 01 0 25 0 10 Coupon Link Goodwin s Market Electronic Coupons Trigger 0000000001101 0002100065886 0007225100105 Trigger Amt Qty 1 00 1 00 1 00 Min Purchase 50 00 0 01 0 01 No Limit NextUse Purchase 999 999 999 Effect 06 28 00 01 15 01 06 22 01 Expir 07 05 00 11 17 01 Multi Priority Use UpcLink 1 DEPTELECPNOO1 1 DEPTELECPNOO1 1 DEPTELECPNOO1 Electronic Coupons 344 RETAIL 7 Use
190. L 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Batches Maintenance The Product Batches form is used to batch MMS pricing changes together for selected products This function is used to support a temporary price e reduction an advertisement special or a wholesalers pricing change Three categories of batches are supported Normal permanent price changes Ad temporary price changes and Pull Shelf Tags print price tags for products Depts Section Wendor when the sale is over The pricing fields updated aiem ej ae ml xala mel Grape Sale Grape Sale Starts 6 13 2007 End 6 13 2017 0000000000142 Pricing POS Information Attributes Sales ines SSCS Special Normal Method Eis site les Method Unit Price Unit Price Cost 0 990 Price 1 89 900 Cost Price GROCERY Group Deal Price Case Cost so 000 Grocery Oty Price Group Deal Price Oty Price J Print Shelf Label Status Applied ltem Code Cost Price Margin SpMargin Quantity Ad Loss Normal Cost Normal Price Modified Fields From Corporate normal or special depend on the category pe EE arez 320 sae 81 00 I ae 00000000001 44 Red 6 gt a i D ate ER FT 5 is 5 a ed Grapes 00 62 se ected n O rm al O r ad res pective ly P ress Ad d 0000000000145 Green Grapes 0 99 1 89 50 00 47 62 28 0 3 08 1 00 2 00 New Batch then select from the Batch Type drop down If the POS information tab
191. L 7 20 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Checkstand Receipt continued Receipt banners trailers saving messages and tenders printed on the receipt can be changed through the POS Information function in the Back End As well as content certain properties for example position left centered right Bold Italic and font size can be set for each receipt banner trailer and other messages for example You Saved message printed on the receipt A logo can be printed on the top of the receipt by completing the following e Set the Print Receipt Logo option to Yes through the POS Information function e Save the image of the company logo in the logo bmp file in the C Program Files RETAIL POS directory on each checkstand Note Microsoft Paint can be used to edit the contents of this file As transactions are processed they are saved to the database The Electronic Journal function in the Back End can then be used to re print Checkstand transactions matching certain criteria This is useful for analysis and audit trail purposes Signatures that have been captured when using credit cards by signing the pin pad are also available for viewing and reprinting in Electronic Journal Customer receipts for electronic transactions are also available for viewing if signature capture is being used RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 21 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO POS Configuration Ce
192. L 7 358 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Product Ad Loss by Batch Goodwin s Market Product Ad Loss By Batch Batch Coffee 8 8 2005 12 31 2005 Normal Special Special Vendor Section UPC Description Price Price Cost Qty Sales Cost Profit Mark Down GROCERY 1 321 900 0000000000222 D F BULK COFFEE 7 89 7 39 5 30 305 52 2 325 5 1 686 9 638 65 83 74 321 133 0007232300060 D F COLOMBIA COFFEE 6 79 6 29 4 65 28 00 182 62 136 70 45 92 7 50 321 133 0007232300061 D F DECAF FRENCH 6 79 6 29 4 65 4 00 25 66 19 10 6 56 1 50 321 133 0007232300062 D F DECAF REGULAR 6 79 6 29 4 65 4 00 26 16 19 60 6 56 1 00 321 133 0007232300063 D F ESPRESSO ROAST 6 79 6 29 4 65 11 00 70 69 52 65 18 04 4 00 321 133 0007232300064 D F FRENCH ROAST 6 79 6 29 4 65 31 00 199 99 149 15 50 84 10 50 321 133 0007232300065 DF GUATE ANTIGUA WHL 6 79 6 29 4 65 15 00 97 85 73 25 24 60 4 00 321 133 0007232300066 D F KONA BLEND WHL BN 6 79 6 29 4 65 51 00 330 79 247 15 83 64 15 50 321 133 0007232300067 D F MOKA JAVA 6 79 6 29 4 65 31 00 204 49 153 65 50 84 6 00 321 133 0007232300068 D F OWN FAMILY BLND 6 79 6 29 4 65 8 00 50 82 37 70 13 12 3 50 321 133 0007232300070 D F VIENNA ROAST 6 79 6 29 4 65 6 00 39 24 29 40 9 84 1 50 321 133 0007232300073 DF DCAF FRN VAN WHL 6 79 6 29 4 65 6 00 39 74 29 90 9 84 1 00 321 133 0007232300074 D F DECAF AU CHOC 6 79 6 29 4 65 6 00 39 24 29 40 9 84 1 50
193. L USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 119 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Electronic Coupons continued RETAIL Search To edit or view a particular coupon use the lt Retail Search search function The RETAIL Search form is Column Operator Value accessible through the Ellipse button next El zl to the Coupon ID field Select the criteria from ER E z the Column drop down You can select i l mE Description Coupon ID Department or AA Modified Date Select the Operator such as MS Equals or Like Enter the Value or select from E t n the ellipsis button Press the Find button to PET 149 o 5 sw populate the grid PS Jey gt 0 PS Toad Stoo 72 o i w Highlight the coupon that you would like to view FScstwsmatmues so 0 0 pw g ixMatch parti 42 0 3 0 00 or edit and press the OK button tehama i o Ok Cancel Table 4 2 contains a description of each field contained in the RETAIL Search form Column Select the first criteria from the drop down such as Description Coupon ID Department or Modified Date Operator Select the Operator from the drop down For partial search criteria choose Like Value Enter the value which will be dependent on the column and operator that were chosen Description The description of the coupon that is shown on the Front End and receipt Coupon ID Coupon ID of coupon being added edited Trigger Group Used when a group such as Department or Sectio
194. L USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 95 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END DOCUMENTATION Customers Customer Maintenance Bad Check Maintenance Electronic Coupons Electronic Customer Bad Checks Coupons Status J 4 4 Retail c Redeem Retail View Bad Bad Checks Coupon View Search ustomer Shopper Search Checks Find Coupon mos Coupons Customer memo Points Customer Report 9 Report Report Vv y Vv In Store View Customer Coupon Coupons Charge Customer Report Movement Report Maintenance Report Electronic Coupon Update Checkstands with neset Frequent Electronic Coupon Update Checkstands with Frequent Reset Frequent CusibmerEcc s Movement Customer Changes Shopper Ranges Shopper Points Coupon Update IE QUen Customer h Reset Points Movement Checkstands pei Focus y y In Store Charge Reports y y opan Customer Movement Ranking Report Report IRER i a a Ranking Report Activity Balance Detail Balance Summary Statements View Coupon Movement Report O A J BL ESC Checkstand 1 Checkstand 2 Checkstand n RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 96 RETAIL 7 User Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Maintenance To add a customer click Add from the cr Ero Sa AICA ih
195. LD DESCRIPTIONS Vendor Displays the Vendor s name Unit Cost Displays the unit cost of the current product if any Case Cost Displays the case cost of the current product if any Table 12 4 Find P O You can use the Find P O form to display all the POs EEE currently in the system This form is displayed when Find a P O button is clicked when Reviewing a Purchase Order Select a PO from the list and click OK THE GENERAL STORE 0000000008 10 26 200 15 Cancel Table 12 5 contains a description of each field contained in the Find P O form FIND P O FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Vendor Displays the Vendor s name PO Number Displays the purchase order number corresponding to the Vendor PO Date Displays the purchase order date for the corresponding PO Number Table 12 5 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 147 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Open a New Review a Purchase Order continued Cost Calculator You can use the Cost Calculator form to change the unit ZSSS PK cost case cost unit price or margin for a product Description Vendor f ADELI Apply Changes made on this form when applied will not only gt Pricing E Unit Cost affect the change on the current purchase order but will So E Pricing metroa Unt Piara Funding Tatie also apply the changes to the product itself Pak hz unt Price 6700 Gross Margin 82437 ep Group Deal Price Qty Price Target M
196. LE This function will produce a Store Sales report by department or section for the time period selected on the Stores Sales form The layout of this report is contained in Appendix F This function is executed when or is selected from the Stores Sales form The following describes each field contained in the report Reportfield___ ____kbDescription______ Format Calculation Departments Sections Department or Section name Sales Total sales for the department or section Percentage of the total sales Open Dept Sales Total sales to open departments or sections Cost of Sales Total cost of sales excluding sales to open dept section Gross Margin Percentage profit on sales excluding sales to open department section Items Total items purchased Avg Price Average price Avg Order Average Order size Customers Total number of customers SUMMARY TAXES Tax A Tax B Total of tax amount using tax schedule A Total of tax amount using tax schedule B Tax C Total of tax amount using tax schedule C Tax D Total of tax amount using tax schedule D Total Total taxes Table 19 2 Selection Criteria Data selected on the Stores Sales form Sort Criteria Department Number Ascending RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Text Currency Number Currency Currency Percent Number Currency Number Number Currency Currency Currency Currency Currency Dept Sales 100 Total Sales Sales Cost of Sales Sales 100
197. Label Row4 Quarters button f is clicked on the toolbar on the Safe ae Half Dollars Statistics and Balancing form Row 6 Ones Row Fives Row 8 Tens Row 4 Twenties Row 10 Fifties Row 11 Checkf 0 Row12 Description 120 Row13 Description 13 Row 14 Description 14 Row 15 Description 15 Table 30 2 Contains a description of each field contained in the Format Safe Statistics Label form FORMAT SAFE STATISTICS LABEL FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Row 1 trough Row 15 Label description to be displayed on the Safe Statistics and Balancing form Table 30 2 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 231 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTER Safe Statistics and Balancing continued Find Records This form allows the user to select a desired date to Find Date retrieve records for the Safe Statistics and Balancing data This form is displayed when the find Records button is clicked on the toolbar on the Safe Statistics and 11 5 2007 Balancing form Select the date desired and click on the 11 4 2007 OK button The safe statistics information for the date be a a a selected will then be displayed 2 ME 117172007 107 3172007 1073072007 1072972007 1072672007 1072572007 10 24 2007 104232007 Help x Safe Audit Report This function will produce a Safe Audit Report listing all safe audits that have been completed This function is executed when the Show Safe Audit Report but
198. M 4 40 changes made to the product selected The data is STC ISSAPM S20 HOO sorted so that the most recent price change appears 5 first A price history entry is made each time a price change is made to a product Table 23 9 contains a description of each field contained in the Price History form PRICE HISTORY FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Modified On Displays the modified date and time Cost Displays cost of the product for that modified date and time Unit Price Displays price of the product for that modified date and time Deal Qty Displays the quantity available at the price Deal Price Displays the group price for that product P Method Displays the pricing method Special Flag to indicate if the price is a special price Yes or a normal price No Who Modified Displays the number corresponding to the employee that modified this product Table 23 9 Coupons Triggered Select Coupons button from the toolbar to Fm a access the Coupons Triggered form This form Couponld Description Coupon Lin Start End Priority Pricing Amount Type displays a list of electronic coupons that the product is 235 PS Broccoli 10 3072 1 O 050 PC assigned to The coupons listed all contain the UPC as the trigger criteria for the coupon Table 23 10 contains a description of each field contained in the Product Coupons form Coupon ID Coupon ID of the electro
199. Medical Dental or Vision Category B Line Item Max Discount TAX PLAN Tax A Flag to indicate if the product is taxable with the tax plan A Tax B Flag to indicate if the product is taxable with the tax plan B Tax C Flag to indicate if the product is taxable with the tax plan C Tax D Flag to indicate if the product is taxable with the tax plan D Points Used to enter the amount of extra points the customer may accumulate when purchasing this item Not Accumulate Flag to prevent the item from accumulating any frequent shopper points on the Front End RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 183 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Maintenance continued PRODUCT MAINTENANCE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Picture Memo Button Misc Button RESTRICTIONS Sale Hours Schedule Verify Age Age MISCELLANEOUS UPC Link Str Coupon Pack Size Case Cost Stock On Hand Scaled Tare Weight Unit Of Measure Mix Match Code Modified box Modified B PRODUCT LIST GRID UPC Description Item Code Product Group PG type Type the picture name corresponding to this item including its extension tomato bmp and so on or click on the button to the right and search for the correct bmp Click to access Product Memo form discussed later in this section Click to access Product Miscellaneous form discussed later in this section Select the schedule number to apply to this item See Sched
200. OMERS Electronic Coupons continued Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on the Electronic Coupons form Button Description Exits the current window Prints an Electronic Coupons report Refer to the Print Coupons Report topic in this section Displays the Electronic Coupons report on the screen Refer to the Print Coupons Report topic in this section Shows Hides Coupon List Deletes the current coupon record Coupons are not deleted until the Synchronize Checkstands with Electronic Coupons function is executed Saves your entries or changes for the current record Jumps to the Edit a Coupon function Jumps to the Add a Coupon function Creates a new coupon by cloning the current coupon displayed Deletes inactive and expired coupons Refer to the Delete Inactive Coupons topic in this section Jumps to the Electronic Coupon Movement function Refer to the Electronic Coupon Movement section Enters specific settings related to the coupons displayed in the coupon list and to set the default prefix used in for the coupon descriptions Refer to the Coupon Settings topic in this section NN H MA Activates the context sensitive help Ed RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 121 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Electronic Coupons continued Coupon Settings The Coupon Settings form is used to set fields EJES to be used as a search engine to find electro
201. Only flag this field Press Save in the toolbar when you have entered all of the parameters This will enable the Task Trigger fields Task Triggers At 8 00 AM every day starting 4 24 2009 Schedule Task Weekly 06 00 Am Add Trigger Schedule Task Weekly Ever 1 week s on Mon Iv Tue lv Wed Iv Thu Iv Fi M Sat Iv Sun M Remove Trigger To remove a trigger highlight the trigger in the list box and press the Remove Trigger button 290 RETAIL 7 User Manual ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Table 43 1contains a description of each field contained in the Reporting Services form NOTE Some of the fields listed will not be displayed unless the corresponding option is chosen REPORTING SERVICES FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Task Name Enabled Report E mail To Subject Report Parameters Schedule Report Days Weeks Start Date End Date UPC Include Hash Department Department Section Vendor Other Task Trigger Schedule Task Time of Day Schedule Task Weekly Schedule Task Monthly Add Trigger Enter the name of the Task you are creating Task is enabled Clear the check box to disable the task so that it will not run Select the name of the Report that you want generated Enter the email address that the report will be sent to Separate multiple emails with semi colons Type in a description that will appear in the subject line of the email Drop down to select the dat
202. PTION Photo Displays customer s photo Browse Browse allows for selection of a photo from another location Table 2 2 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 99 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Maintenance continued Customer Address The Customer Address form is used to maintain the customer s current address bill to information phone E PEP numbers and e mail address This form is displayed Street r Sendon M aaa x when the Customer Address is clicked Click OK and a a the address information are saved as Freak p gt Note Click Customer E mail on the Customer CC EMM Maintenance form to open your e mail service to A ee send e mail directly to your customer provided your Home Phone 951 5551234 f computer supports e mail Business Phone 1 4 Show this again when address is incomplete or unclear Table 2 3 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer Address form CUSTOMER ADDRESS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Street Customer s street number and P O Box number if available City Customer s city State Province Customer s state or province as applicable Zip Postal Code Customer s zip code Home Phone Number Customers home phone number Business Phone Number Customers business phone number Bill to Address Customer s bill to address City State Province and zip code address to mail charge statements if different than customer s address Bill to Name Name of cu
203. Press the Filter button after entering your criteria 100 If using Signature Capture the signature may be l l l viewed after highlighting and double clicking on a Desired number of rows in the display grid can be set specific transaction then pressing the View Signature Using the above RETAIL form when the Setting button The customer copy of the receipt will also be button E in the tool bar form is clicked shown in the View Signature form Once the criteria are entered and the Analyze Transactions button in the toolbar is clicked the data will be displayed in Display grid and more queries can be performed Use the Analyze Order button to analyze the selected data further To view details of one selected transaction double click on an item in the display grid If checkstand transaction history has been archived for ERT a portion of the time period entered a message will be a err ee f ransactions have been archived as o displayed The date of the last archival will be displayed LD Retrieving archived data may be very slow depending an the data volume and a request will be made to retrieve the archived data SOR ete if available on the system Clicking the OK button will begin the process of retrieving the archive data for NES no reporting The amount of time needed to accomplish this task depends on the amount of data being retrieved Clicking cancel cancels the entire request and allows to user to specify a differe
204. REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 315 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX D EFT PROCESSIN Concord Web Introduction This section only applies to installations using Concord Web as their EFT processor This documentation should be used in conjunction with documentation supplied by Concord EFT Processing Concord EFT Processing requires the following configuration Direct connection to the Web web address supplied by Concord Store Id and Store Key supplied by Concord Concord WEB does not require any software installation on the store side Each register needs access to the Internet The following entries must be added to the Ros ini file on each Front End machine Section of Ros ini AllowEBT yo Indicates that EBT Electronic Benefits Transactions will be supported CdHostType CONCORD Indicates that Concord WEB is being used for EFT processing StorelD ____ ___________ Indicated store id assigned by concord Concord StoreKey Indicated store key assigned by concord Concord Note Consideration should be made in the event the store loses connection to the web This can be accomplished with either a standalone unit purchased from Concord or a router can be purchased with a automatic backup dial system Note Some type of Web security such as a file wall should be setup prior to processing transactions RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 316 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX D EFT PROCESSIN Ingenico Introd
205. RETAIL also gives you the ability to make mass changes to entire categories of products Access this function by selecting the Mass eS E A ee Product Changes function under the Products Normal eae Sp section on the Point of Sales menu p ee E ni e Cost Price Select a category of products for example department section vendor other by clicking the down arrow next to one of the selection fields to select from a list of items When you have selected the appropriate category the products are displayed in the bottom portion of the form To enter data into a field move the mouse pointer over the field name If the cursor changes from a pointer to a hand then the field accepts entry of data Click the field name and the field changes to allow input Click the Pricing tab to make changes to the normal or special pricing for the products Click the POS Information tab to make changes to the product for example to assign a mix match code change the unit of measure Click the Attributes tab to change attributes for the products selected for example change or set up a discount or change the tax plan and the Percent tab to increase or decrease the cost or unit price of the selected group Changes with the exception of special pricing changes are applied to the products file immediately Click Apply on the toolbar to apply your changes The program requires that you apply the changes for each tab separately If you are
206. RETAIL 7 BACK END Point of Sales vales Analysis Products Bookkeeping 99 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW General Topics Multiple Windows RETAIL Log on as Employee Generic Main Menu l x RETAIL will support having multiple windows 6 open at the same time This feature will save the user time in not having to return to the menu every time they would like to go to a particular form From the menu selections on the left the user is able to switch between forms In this example the user can switch between the Electronic Coupons form and the Product Maintenance form without having to close one of the forms Point of Sale Customers Show Store Sales Product Maintenance Show Product Spa o ZET SET Lal P 3 ay gt o Administration Tl aR w 55 6 B E de Fa E Normal Special Pricing Method y Pricing Method y nit Price Unit Price Pric Unit Pri ice ItemCode Cost Price x cost e G ri D roup Deal Price Group Deal Price an Qty Price Qty Price Target Margin go 7 Mixmatch F Start y Vendor Gross Margin Allow Disc JT ena 12 31 2099 y Others ES Product Group STORE SALES PRODUCTS Coupon Method Trigger Qty 4mt Coupon Amount Coupon Link For Next Use Upc Link Property Restrict rictions UPC Link Sw O i Sale Hours Schedule y BEA
207. RETAIL 7 36 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Line Item Functions continued Entering Multiple Quantities for Scanned Items a Type the quantity being purchased of the product b Followed by an Press the key c Scan the product code Manually Entering Unit of Measure for a Product Some products are sold in units of measure for example pounds inches The unit of measure is entered for the product in the Product Maintenance form a Type the amount being purchased based on unit of measure for example 500 5 inches or 5 pounds b Press the Manual Measure key MM through the keyboard c Scan or Key in the product code ENTER Example from the keyboard 500MM028 5 units of measure for product 28 Manually Entering a Weighted Item Department or Section a Place product on scale b Press the Scale key SC through the keyboard ENTER c Key ina price per unit of weight for example price per pound and department or section ENTER Example from the keyboard SC ENTER 100DP10 ENTER Dept Sale or 100SE100 ENTER Section Sale The price entered will be multiplied by the weight on the scale to calculate the transaction amount Entering a Weighted Product UPC a Place product on scale b Key inthe product code ENTER Note The product must be setup as scaled in the product file Deducting Tare Weight from a Weighted Product The tare weight for
208. Receipt Recept Consolidate Receipt Sort By Alphabet Rearend Cost Qe lOr e Ma Indicates if the employee name should be printed on the checkstand receipt Setup POS Infomation The Tax tab is used to enter maintain tax tables and ter rates Up to 4 different tax arrangements can be tato fa AA Lon entered into RETAIL Entry of a tax table is also o n lara Tas uw supported refer to the Tax Table Setup topic ak iain Repeat Range contained in Appendix A Repeat Tax Note Refer to the Initializing the System section in the Appendices for more information on the use of these functions Table 33 1 contains a description of each field contained in the POS Information form POS INFORMATION TAB AGE RESTRICTIONS Configurable to allow employees to sell age restricted products Age 21 Enter the age allowable by law for cashiers to sell products marked as 21 for buying Age 18 Enter the age allowable by law for cashiers to sell products marked as 18 for buying BIOMETRIC DATA Server information for systems running BioCert fingerprints used to access front and back ends Server IP Enter the IP address of the server running the BioCert software Server Port Enter the port number for bio cert CHECK TENDER Applies to the MICR reader which enables reading o f the check number by the receipt printer Read Check Select Yes or No to enable the receipt printer to read the check number Account No is Check No Select Yes to s
209. Retail Custom Label Printing Manual for help with this option You must have a license to use Print Custom Labels The following reports are used to support this function Selection Report File Name 1 Regular Labels ProdClrg rpt Regular product label s 2 DSD Labels ProdCldr rpt DSD product label s 3 Discontinued Items ProdClds rpt Discontinued product label s 4 AD Labels ProdClds rpt Advertised product Label s Table 2 8 3 Print Mix Match Report The Print Mix Match Report function will produce a report listing all products that have been assigned a mix match code The layout of these reports is contained in Appendix F This function is executed when the Print Mix Match Report function is selected from the main menu Reportfield_ Description Format Mix Match Code Mix match code assigned to product Text UPC Product UPC Text Description Product Description Text Section Section assigned to product Text Normal Cost Normal cost entered for the product Currency RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 219 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Print Mix Match Report continued Reportfield Description Format Calculation Special Cost Special cost entered for the product Currency None Special Price Special Price entered for the product Currency None Normal Margin Gross margin of normal cost and Currency Cost Price Price price Special Margin Gross margin of special cost and
210. Retail 5055550 SRetall 0 Information in this document is subject to change without notice Companies names and data used in examples herein are fictitious or used by permission No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of IT Retail Inc 1993 2010 ITRETAIL Inc All rights reserved Printed in the United States of America RETAIL is a registered trademark of ITRETAIL Inc Microsoft Access Visual Basic MS SQL Server Windows and Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation Crystal Reports for Visual Basic is a registered trademark of Crystal Computer Services Inc RETAIL 7 r Manual TABLE OF CONTENT INTRODUC HON aac tetas a eStats dint A A a 11 INTENDED AUDIENCE susana aa 11 PURPOSE Or DOCUMENT a A ao O 11 GUIDELINES FOR USE usada al li 11 OVERALL FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW sucinta satan dla 12 mito E rest 12 HIGH LEVEL FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW DIAGRAM cc ccccccccsssssseeeeeeeessseeeeeeeeeeesseseaeeeesecesssesneeeeeeeeesseeeeees 13 FRONT END FUNC TIONAL OVERVIEW minen n lane id 14 INTRODUCTION a oa 14 FUNG TIONAL OVERVIEW DIAM ed es eto 15 FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOWITTO occcccncnnccccnnnonoccccnnncnnccccnnonononcnnnonnnnonnnnnonnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 16 INTRODUCTION naar Ea 16 SIGNING ON e E 17 MAIN GHECKSTAND FORME
211. SD Print Label 0000000004001 Apple PRODUCE v FRUITS amp VEGETABLES EARTH amp VINE PROVISION y Active WIC CWW Ad Enforce Gty Allow Lookup Discounts CategoryA CategoryB Line tem FSA FSA Eligible Max Discount 0 00 g POINT OF SALES PRODUCT Unit Pricing v Unit Price Cost 1 230 Price 2 33 ja Group Deal Price Oty a Price A 2 Target Margin Gross Margin Product Group Restrictions Sale Hours Schedule Verify Age Age Tax Plan Bl EE co mg ip Misc Points O T NotAccumulate Picture E Memo ies Misc Eas 88 8 12 H Ya Special Pricing Method y Unit Price Cost Price E Group Deal Price Qty Price Start 12 00 AM End 11 59 PM Current el Batch E E UPC Link Store Coupon Case Cost re Stock On Hand 0 Scaled Tare V 0 Unit of Measure ib MixMatchCode Pack Size Modified 11 17 2009 10 31 25 AM Modified By MSS GLOBAL Created 11 17 2009 10 31 25 4M Created By MSS GLOBAL Edit a Product B ie Sol in Be x Bl 8 ar Hl mw a se Ba ak ike UPC 0000000000055 aoe p Normal Special Pricing Method Unit Pricing y PricingMethod vw Description Whole Wheat Bread Unit Price Unit Price Cost 1 550 Price A cost Price ltemCode Group Deal Price Group Deal Price Depts BREAD Qty Price Gty Price Target Margin 0 00 Start 1
212. SER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 262 RETAIL 7 r Manual ADMINISTRATION SETUP POS Information The POS Information form is used to setup various parameter data that will be used to support various functions within RETAIL This includes 1 Checkstand Point of Sale data 2 Discount arrangements and 3 Tax tables The POS Information tab is used to enter limits The Discounts tab is used to enter maintain discount defaults and configurable attributes used by the Front arrangements The discounts are assigned to customers n End checkstands inthe Customer Maintenance function Setup POS Infomation PR Setup POS Infomation PR POS Information Discounts Tax Plane POS Information Discourks Tax Plans Aga Fisemetions S 2 Dos Discourt Threshold 0 00 Save S P 127001 Discourks E ES Serve Port 10001 pe Category Number I gt Add Read Check No j J Check Tender Account Number is Card Number No _ Ho Show Check Memo No Details Print Employee Name es Print Front of Check No Product Category A Y Print Receipt Logo Print Authoezation Code Yes Product Category 8 Spit Tax Total Yes Point al Sale Pint Zero Tax No n 5 M T w af iE S Dicot Dys WM MM iv iv Print UPC No Print Customer DOS Y Print Discourt Category Suppress Customer Balances l Til information Header l l Discourt Percent 100 Checkstand Receipt Print Non T exable Amount Suppress Receipt Parting Item Sequence tem Description Buttered
213. SLIE CheckStand LESLIE OK Synchronizing S Up Notifying 2006TEST of server availability done labil Notifying LESLIE of server availability done Processing Restrictions This requires no restrictions and can be run whenever needed Processing Specifications 1 Select the checkstands to be notified usually all by clicking in the M beside the checkstand name Press OK to start the process 2 The system connects to all Checkstands selected If an error occurs the system will prompt you with a message Cannot connect to some of the checkstands Do you still want to continue If you select NO the system will abort this function If you select YES then the system will continue this function However the checkstands which caused the error will not be notified that the server is available Clear Checker Login Entries The Clear Checker login Entries form lists those checkstands that were not properly signed off which caused the store closing process to stop This form allows the user to clear the unnecessary entries which hinder the store close process Checker Login Checkstand Til No 2006TEST 1 Employee No Employee Name 1 Jane Smith ProcDate i 11 6 2007 Refresh Help Entries displayed are only for checkstands that were not able to sign off properly In order for an entry to be cleared the checkstand must be signed off to the desktop Note Signing on to the checkstand using the same empl
214. Sales Items ltems Customers Amount of tax applied using Tax Table A Amount of tax applied using Tax Table B Amount of tax applied using Tax Table C Amount of tax applied using Tax Table D Total of tax amounts 166 RETAIL 7 r Manual POINT OF SALES STORE SALE Show Store Sales continued Store Sales Graph This form is used to display store sales in graph form There are 3 selections available via the SS fu 5 8 iy drop down list on the graph for the amount of sales data displayed 14 000 00 Previous 12 days Daily Sales Previous 12 weeks Weekly Sales Previous 12 months Monthly Sales 10 000 00 8 000 00 12 000 00 To change the style of graph displayed click on the drop down boxes displayed at the bottom of SL the form A list of options for you to choose 4 000 00 from will be displayed 2 000 00 00 121612171218 12 19 12 20 12 21 12 22 12 23 12 24 12 25 12 26 12 27 This form is displayed when the Show Store Sales Graph button is clicked from the Stores Sales form To retu rn to the Store l Sales Type Presentation type Data point fil effect Light scheme Mouse mode Sales form click on the Show Store Sales Pess llteee zifsion Nore xl recor y Graph m button again Store Sales Memo The Store Sales Memo form is used to maintain memo Ef information related to sales data This form is displayed when the memo button is clicked from the Store Proc Date 3729 2007
215. Save customers Pricing levels provide flexibility in assigning wer Te A er aa various levels of unit pricing arrangements to a E Se ETT product Up to 10 different pricing levels can be entered for a product A pricing level is then assigned PRA Da o s to a customer and when the customer ID is entered at ein eee the check stand the pricing level will be applied to the order A start and end date must be entered for the pricing level The pricing will only be applied if it is currently in effect Table 23 3 contains a description of each field contained in the Pricing Levels form Current item s UPC Pricing level number Select from 1 to 10 by clicking on the drop down menu button Unit price for this pricing level Start date for this pricing level End date for this pricing level Table 23 3 Product Additional Vendors Click Additional Vendors button 2l on the toolbar to PZZREURERSISITEIEAS PK access Product Additional Vendors form This form displays the current product s primary vendor unit cost UPC poooz unt cost s070 Save and case cost coming from the Product Maintenance a E cee e a Delete i iti Close form This form is also used to assign additional a so coe vendors to the product Separate item code and cost information can be entered for each additional vendor When a secondary vendor is selected the form displays the Cost Calculator button next to the unit cost fie
216. Schedules be used to limit the days and times in which a product A AA can be sold The schedule number is assigned to a ee i Heb product in the Product Maintenance function MA ee AAA Click in the boxes in the Grid to select or deselect times tot A 449332 that the product may be sold Red signifies that the D E product cannot be purchased at that time whereas Blue stay See signifies a time that the product may be sold Table 42 1contains a description of each field contained in the Schedule Maintenance form SCHEDULE MAINTENANCE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Product Schedule Number Displays the number of the schedule used in assigning schedules to products via Product Maintenance Add New button Press to create a new Schedule Allow All Press to clear the fields in the Detail section to allow the product to be sold at all times Select All Press to select all of the fields in the Detail section to prohibit the product from being sold at all times Table 42 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 288 RETAIL 7 User Manual Reporting Services Reporting Services is used to generate various sales till statistics and cashier reports in Retail and create schedules to e mail those reports automatically to one or more recipients The reports can be scheduled to be sent daily weekly monthly or once and at the time of day you specify They can be generated for the current day previous day week mo
217. Select Criteria Dates a7 a7 View View Salesperson Electronic Report Journal Electronic Journal Salesperson Report 224 RETAIL 7 r Manual Till Statistics and Balancing The Till Statistics and Balancing form displays a cashier s till counts and overall till statistics for a given time period or day This form is used to reconcile totals between each cashier s till count and the computer totals for the specified date Till balancing can be done during the day if needed before a store close is completed see Note on Get button below or the following day after a store close has been completed The till totals are updated periodically default is every 10 minutes for the current day Each cashier s till statistics is accessible by scrolling through the list of cashier names Enter the cashier s actual countdown amount into the Actual column for the tender Any over shorts will be displayed in the Balance column The right hand side of the form contains various statistics for the particular till displayed Use the scroll bar on the right to scroll through the various statistics Statistics displayed include gross sales refund and void amounts number of customer and items sold Paid in and Paid Out totals Received on Account amount and coupon totals including a count Double coupon totals are displayed only if the Track Double Coupons option has been selected on the Default ta
218. Store Sales Start Date 10 31 2005 End Date 10 31 2005 HA PKA B UAL RETAIL 7 10 29 2010 Sales Open Dept Cost of Gross Sales Sales Margin 19 766 94 63 97 273 32 12 850 96 34 25 65 0 08 25 65 0 00 643 20 2 08 48 11 57 92 90 2 009 67 6 50 144 49 812 93 56 2 968 73 9 61 179 55 1 527 59 45 1 351 28 4 37 10 00 926 04 31 1 979 80 6 41 117 04 1 147 49 38 1 352 15 4 38 14 43 0 00 100 801 24 2 59 792 33 0 00 100 30 898 66 100 00 1 604 92 17 322 93 807 65 0 00 0 00 0 00 807 65 31 706 31 Items 9 293 92 3 00 193 00 3 288 62 13 673 29 163 00 584 00 354 94 380 00 27 933 77 Avg Price Avg Order 2 13 8 55 3 33 0 61 0 22 8 29 3 39 3 81 2 11 an 6 72 3 00 1 25 6 95 39 52 1 30 1 80 1 70 2 41 17 39 Customers 1 383 154 473 346 125 325 209 158 1 606 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Store Sales by Section Sections Club Packs Dietetic Foods Canned Fruits Fruit Juices Canned Vegetables Condiments Spaghetti Sauce Pickles Mayo mustard Salad Dressings Cooking Oils Canned Fish Canned Meats Mexican Specialties Oriental Noodles Disposable Diapers Tuesday November 01 2005 04 57 PM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Start Date 10 31 2005 Sales 118 80 26 12 75 82 350 45 186 65 240 65 64 00 15 43 56 44 77 77 68 49 80 93 115 92 207
219. TAIL 7 Description Print a Tenders report Refer to the Tenders Report topic in this section Display the Sections report on the screen Refer to the Tenders Report topic in this section Save your entries or changes for the current record Press to Add or Edit a Currency Refer to the Currency Maintenance topic in this section Display the Currency Conversion form to convert amounts between different currencies Refer to the Foreign Currencies topic in the Appendices 2 Tender DC will now be set to its original Retail settings Is this what you want Bo 281 RETAIL 7 User Manual ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Tender Maintenance continued Select a Tender Form The Select a Tender form lists all tenders that have been UMTS set up in the system This form is displayed when the Cash button next to the Tender Code field on the Tender T Maintenance form is clicked Double click on the Tender PT Code to retrieve the tender for a detailed viewing and Fe Food Gift Card m od ifyi ng i Food Stamps InStore Charges Peso Pound Pick2 Pickup Pick3 Table 38 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Select a Tender form SELECT A TENDER FORM FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Code Lists all the tender codes in the system Name Displays the description of all the tenders Table 38 2 Currency Maintenance Form The Currency Maintenance form is used to add GESI and o
220. TENANCE The Tenders Report function will produce a Tenders report listing all tenders currently in the system This function is executed when or is selected from the Tender Maintenance form Table 38 4 contains a description of each field contained in the Tenders report Report field Description Tender Unique identifier number for the tender Format Calculation Tender Code Tender Name Tender Type Depositable Require ID Checkstand code used by user Description of the tender General classification for the tender CA used for cash credit debit EBT and gift CK used for checks and WIC CH used for in store charge MI Indicates if tender can be deposited Indicates if an ID is required for the tender Active Currency ID Indicates if tender is currently active Currency ID associated to the tender and in which it is valued Currency name associated to the tender Indicates if tender can be used given out for refund Indicates tender transaction requires a manager override to be completed if Require MGR Override is equal to Yes The tender transaction is allowed to be completed when the value is No Currency Description Refund OK Require MGR Override Table 38 4 Selection Criteria Selection criteria consist of all tenders that currently exist in the system Sort Criteria Tender Ascending Vendor Maintenance The Vendor Maintenance form is used to add edit and delete vendor in
221. TER through the keyboard 3 Ring up the item either a product department or section transaction ENTER Example from the keyboard 500DN28 5 00 discount off product 28 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 28 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Customer Specific Discounts Customer discounts are automatically applied when a Customer ID is entered on a transaction Customers are assigned a discount schedule through the Customer Maintenance function in the Back End The discount schedules reflect a discount to be given based on product category A B or both Discount schedules are entered through the POS Information function in the Back End Product categories are assigned to products through the Product Maintenance function Refer to the Order Level Discounts topic below for more information on product categories Customer discounts are reflected after the final sub total on the Checkstand receipt The message that prints on the receipt can be configured through the POS Information function in the Backend Note refer to the Customer Rewards topic in the Back End How To section of this manual for more information on rewarding your customers with other types of incentives for example electronic coupons Removing Discount for entire order for a Customer discount 1 Ring up the item a product department or section transaction 2 Key inthe Customer number Note Customers must be set up to receive disc
222. TESTS ODO ii id ia aa aa 228 SAFE STATISTICS ANDO BAN e ee e 229 AA E O tee dees 230 SAE Slas Ie A A een Te ee Oe Ie 231 Format Safe Statistics Labalan ool a a e A a bated 231 Pra COOS ae a a a ee cat a te eae te te a A 232 Sa AUT RODO eae Ne eRe era See eRe DE A O 232 Sale AUS IMSS At See ee ern 233 MAKE PREVIEW ABANK DEPOSIT ce o E asad ae 233 ONDA sae ct alc eae hea o sl 235 DEDOS MODO airada dd al a 235 A A E O 236 Depos MEO lb td id taba 236 BALANCING OVERVIEW cita dde 237 E A O AS 238 Balancing Overview Repor tdi dd ida brida io dat 238 PIOOKI CODING MOMO add did ideal its 239 DISCOUNT g COUDOM SUNNY ed 240 CAS IER ANAS S A A tadas 240 ey TE ede ERE 2117 21 E nen eee ete eo ne a O ee 241 CASHIER PERFORMANCE EVALUA TION cdo e a e e 242 CASHIER PERFORMANCE EVALUATION SET POINT VALUES cccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeceeeseaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeananaaeeesess 243 MONITOR MES det nT UR SoD e Pee e e e Oe eae Te 243 KOODAA AA NA 244 PANCIMONITOF TIS REDON usted roa ira E Da ATA oer till db EA AE AS AA AA 244 Selera Eo AAA A O Te mney N ES 245 PICKUDS SECAR ui e did tdi 246 RICKUD SID OF LOAN IA SID REDONS 2d ds ii a 246 MONITOR CHECKS TANDS cit tii aia ida betis 247 PRINTER I CHARGES REPORT ia Panta iia adiae 248 PRINT FRONT END SERVICE REPO eau 248 PRINT FRONT END SERVICE REPORT CONTINUED sacarina dina 249 PRINT REGISTER PRODUCTIVITY REPORT enisi llas 250 PRINT TRANSACTIONS BY REASON REPORT 250 PRINT SALES PERSON PRODUCTI
223. TL ENTER FNTL Will display the running total of the food stamp eligible amount for the order VD TL ENTER Will void the entire order entered to that point Enter OCA 0 00 cash to clear the transaction once the void total is complete WN TL ENTER WNTL Will display the Wic CVV eligible amount The customer can use another tender after Wic CVV Table 2 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 26 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Transaction Discounts and Surcharges Discounts for a transaction can be done at the following levels e Line ltem e Customer Specific e Order Level Surcharges for a transaction can be done only at the Order Level The system applies only one discount to a given transaction line by default However through an attribute setting on the Back End the system can be configured to allow multiple discounts When applying a discount the system uses a predefined pecking order when applying the discounts This order is defined as follows Order Level Discounts Customer Specific Discounts gt Line Item Discounts The order level discounts take precedence over customer specific discounts which in turn take precedence over line item discounts RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 2 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Transaction Discounts and Surcharges continued When multiple discounts are allowed the discounts are calculated on the net amou
224. The total dollar amount of sales for the time period RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 240 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Cashier Performance The Cashier Performance task lists the following 1 Employee The names and eee employee numbers of the Employees who performed transactions during the time period selected Start Date 12 13 2006 w End Date 12 13 2006 y Cashier Analysis Employee Total Sales Total Avg Sales Total Scanned Avgltems Aing Rings Ava Second Idle Hours Per Hour tems Items PerHour Min Tender Time Hours Agatha Christie 1 3 242 81 0 98 3 308 99 958 918 95 82 978 322 45 82 481 1 0 02 2 Total Sales Total sales for each ChaloteBrove 7 2170 002 sios 6 610000 30026886 4B 31 am 1 George Eliot 8 0 00 0 00 0 0 182 56 0 1 0 0 00 employee during the period Janelle Morgan 9 818 10 0 02 40 905 00 1 1 100 00 50 169 04 42 63 0 02 Beatrix Potter 14 2 556 95 0 27 9 470 19 788 761 96 57 2919 327 21 85 al 0 21 3 Total Hours Total hours the employee was signed on 4 Average Sales Per Hour Total Sales divided by Total Hours signed on 5 Total Items Total number of items sold including sales keyed into open departments 6 Scanned Items Total number of items scanned 7 Percentage of Items scanned Items Scanned Total Items 100 8 Average Items Per Hour The average number of items sold per hour 9 Ring Percentage The s
225. This function is executed when or is selected from the Product Batches form Table 26 2 contains a description of each field __Reportfield Description Format Calculation Ad Batch Start Date End Date Date Time None Date Time None Batch start date Batch end date Vendor Section Dept UPC Description Normal Cost Special Cost Normal Price Special Price Price Diff Normal Gross Special Gross Ad Loss Sold Normal Batch Vendor Section Department UPC Description Cost Price Normal Gross Qty Sold Profit Product vendor Product section Product department UPC Product description Product cost Product special cost Product price Product special price Difference between normal and special price Gross margin Special gross margin Amount lost due to product being on ad Number sold during ad period Product vendor Product section Product department UPC Product description Product cost Product price Normal gross margin Number sold Profit Number Number Number Number Text Currency Currency Currency Currency Currency Percent Percent Currency Number Number Number Number Text Text Currency Currency Currency Number Currency None None None None None None None None None Normal price special price Price cost price Special price Special cost Special price Normal price Special Price Quantity None None None None None None None None
226. UPC code or Group Code Start Date of Coupon End Date of Coupon Date coupon was processed on the Checkstand Customer number assigned to the sale Quantity of items sold Retail price of the trigger Price of trigger less the coupon amount Coupon Amount discount amount Total coupon amount Coupon Id assigned in the Electronic Coupon form Coupon Description in the Electronic Coupon form Trigger either UPC code or Group Code Start Date of Coupon End Date of Coupon Quantity of items sold Retail price of the trigger Price of trigger less the coupon amount Coupon Amount discount amount Total coupon amount RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Text Date Date Date Text Number Currency Currency Currency Currency Number Text Text Date Date Number Currency Currency Currency Currency 125 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Frequent Shopper Ranges The Frequent Shopper Ranges form is used to set RATOS up shopper point ranges being earned by customers The ranges are automatically established based on nc SE C C Delete l omnts the entries entered The amount represents the high Sae end of the range that is purchase up to the amount Modified 10 25 2007 8 52 22 A Bi cose entered receives the points assigned to the range From mount Amount Points Modified ModifiedBy A Help New entries are automatically inserted into the list as 0 00 10 00 10 11 2007 11 42 37 AM
227. USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 116 RETAIL 7 r Manual Electronic Coupons The Electronic Coupons form is used to create and edit coupons Coupons can be targeted for use by all preferred customers Customer Type PC or for use by a specific customer Target The coupon can be for a price reduction amount a specific price or a percentage discount Specific criteria can be assigned to the coupon to limit the use for a specific product or mix match code department section vendor or product group The coupon can also be restricted for use during a certain time period or to restrict use based on a minimum quantity or amount purchased The coupon is automatically applied to the purchase at the checkstand when the customer ID is entered To edit a coupon select it from the list or enter a Coupon ID in the Coupon ID field Coupon Type includes 6 different types of coupons e Preferred coupon is applied to preferred customers Type PC in Customer Maintenance This is for basic cents off or specified price coupons for UPCs departments sections vendors and product groups e Target coupon is applied to one or more specific customers A customer card number is required e Linked Generates a coupon that the customer can use on the next shopping trip e BOGO Buy One Get One applies to all customers not just PC e Pick Quantity Pick a specified quantity and receive all for a reduced price This typ
228. USION 0 64 0 99 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 30 Larry Johnson 0001254867153 TRID WINTERGREEN FUSION 0 64 0 99 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 30 Larry Johnson 0001380004546 ST HSD GRILL LME CHKN 2 33 3 59 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 160 Leslie Morris 0001480064600 HAWAIIAN PUNCH RED 1 39 1 99 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 30 Larry Johnson 0001480064601 HAWAIIAN PNCH ORNGE 1 39 1 99 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 30 Larry Johnson 0001480064602 HAW PUNCH STRW SRF 1 39 1 99 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 30 Larry Johnson 0001480064603 HAWAIIAN PNCH GRAPE 1 39 1 99 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 30 Larry Johnson 0001600026081 BC C M FETT ALFREDO 3 83 4 59 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 30 Larry Johnson 0001600026083 BC CM CH BUTTERMILK BIS 3 83 4 59 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 30 Larry Johnson 0002200000775 JUICY FRUIT TROP KIWI 0 64 0 99 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 30 Larry Johnson 0002870000300 TREE TOP APPLE CIDER 3 87 4 99 Unit Pricing 11 01 05 30 Larry Johnson 0003000005040 AJ PANCAKE MIX 0 00 0 99 Unit Pricing 0 00 0 00 11 01 05 JobPendingCPC7805 0003000005070 A J COMP PNCKE MIX 0 00 0 99 Unit Pricing 0 00 0 00 11 01 05 JobPendingCPC7805 0003000005240 A J BCKWHEAT PNCKES 0 00 0 99 Unit Pricing 0 00 0 00 11 01 05 JobPendingCPC7805 0003000005300 A J COMP BTRMLK PNCKE 0 00 0 99 Unit Pricing 0 00 0 00 11 01 05 JobPendingCPC7805 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 40 PM Page 1 Price Changes History RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL
229. VITY REPORT ts 251 scl yl 21 eed 217 Batre meen ne aceso rc ete tard e e ee oO 252 EICCHONIGUOUINIGLFACDON AAA A ncanitaanevelee ee 254 CLOSE STO 2 ewe me tanda Re ew OR ee PT eR a a eRe 256 MEW SYSTEMLOG FLE Smurna ches nd ct Ge detec ata didas 257 NOTIFY CHECKSTANDS WITH SERVER INFORMATION c ceeeeeeccceeeececcceeeececcaeeceeecccaeeeeeeceaaeeeeesaaeeeeeesaueeeeesaaeneeeeess 258 CLEAR CHECKER LOGIN ENTRIES unto cici n 258 RESET RO DUC TIVO Ve MENE eto eaa 258 POS PARTITIONED DISPLAY DIMENSIONS cad io 259 SYSTEM INFORMATION scott tado 261 POS INFORMATION 005 Cura aL ota da e a a o ee tt ee Oh Ae ce tte de as ee 263 SECURITY ADMINISTRATION orde cani riada idas rca 267 CICCKSTANG FUNCION ut e e leal cite dol coll ceda 267 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 8 RETAIL 7 r Manual TABLE OF CONTENT Manager UNC HONS A A a 268 A A A IN 269 EA ME Ao RENE N AE A TTT AR MEET NE oe SRN arn AR EME SNR OED Ee mee CR RE 269 SYNCHRONIZE SHECKSTANDS WITH SE TUP suavidad 270 WIRELESS SETUNO aig E a ore ere 270 EMPLOYEE MAINTENANCE soraseceyi na e a AE a a a tensions 272 Ressel FASS WONG oreuon E AO AA AE A 273 TOODA ideene e E E O EE 273 SECURITY ADMINISTRATION este edie Ses n E a 274 Assigning security to Front End Transaction K YS cccccssccccsssssccsesseesessseesseesessesessesensesesscansessesessesessssenens 274 Assigning security to Front End Manager fun Ctionss ccccccscccccssscscsssssesssseseesesssscsscsnsesseusee
230. View Bank Records l ea l on m E 3 Report PDA Pepe Memo Employee Deposit abe y v Saf T ale View Safe Audit Bank Deposit Currenc List Checks oP Adjustments Report E E TA Slip Till Statistics and Balancing Review and Update G L Till Statisti Review and REA Update G L Es ett A Select an View Till Till Statistics Currency Buke Create Statistics Journal Employee Conversion Memo Report Entries Report RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Safe Audit Report l View G L G L Report Report l Store Discounts amp Caiinane 223 RETAIL 7 User Manual Point of Sales Registers Print Frontend Service Report l Select Report Dates View Front End Service Report Print Transactions By Reason Report Select Report Dates View Transactions Report RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Front End Service wy Transactions Report POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Print Register Productivity Report a Select Report Dates a View Register Productivity Report Register Productivity Print Salesperson Productivity Report Electronic Journal l l Select Report TA b
231. Weeks s Month s or Year s then the field to the right will be available for editing Select the number of days weeks months or years by using the arrows to the right of the field Create Task Triggers select the Schedule Task criteria from the drop down You can select Daily Weekly Monthly or Once Enter the Time of day in the time field Press the Add Trigger button The trigger for the job will be displayed in the box to the left To create another trigger repeat by making another selection from the drop down Depending on your selection in the Schedule Task drop down other fields may become available For example if you select Weekly then fields will be displayed for you to select the days of the week to E mail the report RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Report Parameters Schedule Report Custom y Start Date 4 27 2009 v EndDate 4 27 2009 v UPC Include products with same item codes Zero movers only D Department GROCERY Vendor 7 Section Others If you selected Custom enter the Start and End dates in the date fields To generate a Product Sales report make selections in the fields below You can enter a range of UPC s or select a Department Section Vendor or Product Group To view movement for products with the same item code select Include products with same items codes To generate a report with Zero Movers
232. a for the category selected on the Customer Sales form Weekly Balance Summary The Weekly Balance Summary form gives the user a summary of all sales for the week selected The purpose is to give the user a feel a VTE TN aT AS for the week s business from a cash flow i he i ee no ot am amo nu um i GENERAL MERCHAN 000 000 000 000 100 000 400 1818 2400 14 66 000 0 00 000 0 00 2800 15 26 GRO ICERY 000 000 000 000 000 000 00 000 110 068 000 0 00 000 0 00 110 05 perspective The form begins with Sales and SSmus beam emm he mel emi me Pl mo no da Sam a PRO JCE 000 000 000 000 000 000 1000 4545 5000 30 96 000 000 000 000 6000 3270 th e n arrives at th e De OS it WIN F LIQUOR 000 000 000 000 900 000 00 000 2598 16 64 000 0 00 000 0 00 26 99 14 65 p TAX 0 00 0 00 0 00 40 35 54 0 00 0 00 604 Begin by selecting the Start Date The End Date will automatically default to one week Total Sales 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 000 000 22 40 11 62 167 12 66 18 000 0 00 0 00 0 00 169 52 Monday Wednesday Thursday l Foday Saturday T Sunday Tas a The days of the week are displayed across the Orea T saoo ET T 10 68852 Recewed On Acct 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 000 000 000 000 top of the columns The days are dependent ran 000 000 2000 2000 2000 sno saoo T Pad Out 0 00 0 00 0 00 000 000 0 00 0 00 0 00 upon the date that the user select
233. a product will automatically be deducted from the weight entered on the Checkstand form a The tare weight for a product is entered in the Product Maintenance form b Enter in the tare weight you want deducted in the Tare Weight field c The tare weight will automatically be deducted from the weight entered on the checkstand transaction RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 3 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Line Item Functions continued Manually Deducting Tare Weight from a Product Normally the tare weight for a product will automatically be deducted from the weight entered on the Checkstand form but if the product is not set up for tare weight in the products file use one of the following a Place empty container on scale b Key in TW ENTER OR a Key in lt Weight gt TW ENTER Example 20TW 20 of a pound Once the Tare Weight either has been entered by of the two above methods Key in or Scan the product code The tare weight will be deducted from the total weight of the scanned item Note The product must be setup as scaled in the product file The tare weight for the empty container will be deducted from the overall weight of the product Overriding a Price on a Weighted Product a Place product on scale b Key in price c Press the Price key PK through the keyboard d Followed by the product code ENTER Note The product must be setup as scaled in the product file Exampl
234. abase Schemas Object Definitions Classes Used by RETAIL Programming Standards Guidelines for Use In order to help you locate information quickly this document is organized in the following sections e Overall Functional Overview provides a functional and technical overview of the system e Database Overview provides entity relationships data model definition of stored procedures and schema of database in RETAIL e System Flows provides data flows of key processes contained in the system e Programming Reference provides programming standards and DLL documentation This document should be used in conjunction with other documentation available for RETAIL which includes User Reference Manuals and Installation Manuals RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 11 RETAIL 7 r Manual VERALL FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW Overall Functional Overview Introduction RETAIL consists of three main modules Front End Back End and Wireless The Functional Overview diagrams contained in the following pages provides an overview of the functions supported by RETAIL The functions supported by the Front End Back End and Wireless modules are as follows Front End e Customer Purchases Captures the register transactions for customer orders e Register Management Complete management functions at the register including cash loan ins cash pick up running register reports for example till status list of checks overridin
235. additional ID when a tender is used The user can tailor the message that displays as part of the prompt through the Tender Maintenance function The data entered is free format and is printed on the electronic journal Electronic Journal function i Enter Zip Code gogg ENTER CLEAR BACK Boog 4 ep EN EJ EJ ey cy ea The steps below are an outline of how to use the pre configured system tenders The steps followed for other tenders would generally follow the same pattern but are dependent on the attributes entered for the tenders Cash Tendering a Enter items and total order b Enter amount of cash and press the Cash tendering key CA ENTER through the keyboard Note Balance due to customer will be highlighted at the end of the order Example from the keyboard 500CA ENTER 5 00 cash tender RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 41 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Line Item Functions continued Check Tendering applies to any tender that has a CK tender type a Enter items and total order b Scan or Type in the customer s card number followed by the ID key ID ENTER through the keyboard or Press the ID key ID ENTER through the keyboard and type the customer card number when prompted c Type the amount of the check and press the Check Tender key CK ENTER through the keyboard d Ifthe MICR reader is
236. ag to indicate if amount must be entered to use the tender If not flagged then the tender can be entered without an amount and the order will be tendered for sale Min Displays the lowest value of tender that can be accepted Max Displays the highest value of tender that can be accepted without an approval An mgr override will be required if this max is exceeded Negative Amount Required Flag to indicate if an amount needs to be entered when the tender is in a negative state Example when sale is a refund only Overall Max Displays the absolute highest value of tender that can be accepted An mgr override will not be allowed for this maximum LIMITS TAB Refund OK Flag to indicate if the tender can be given out as refund Require Mgr Auth Flag to indicate if manager authorization is required to give the tender as refund Max Displays the highest refund that can be given out without an approval Overall Max Displays the absolute highest value of tender that can be given out as refund Pickups Allow Pickups amp Loans Flag to indicate if pickups or loans can be made to the till for the tender Till Limit Displays the till pickup limit for tender where a soft warning is issued Mandatory Limit Displays the till pickup limit for tender where a mandatory warning is issued and tender pickup must be done Change Change Tender Displays the type of tender that can be given out as change to this tender Message Displays the message when change for
237. alance Info tab Refer to Format Safe Statistics Label topic in this section Perform a safe audit This will allow entry of opening balance totals to reset the balances Display the Safe Audit Report Refer to Safe Audit Report topic in this section Make safe adjustments Refer to Safe Adjustments topic in this section Activate the context sensitive help in this dialogue RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 230 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Safe Statistics and Balancing continued Safe Statistics Report This function will produce a Safe Statistics Report listing the safe statistics data for the specified period This report lists the data in the same format as displayed on the Safe Statistics and Balancing form The layout of this report is contained in Appendix F This function is executed when El or is selected from the Safe Statistics and Balancing torm Format Safe Statistics Label The Format Safe Statistics Label form gives the user the ability to change the field labels contained on the Safe Statistics and Balancing form This provides Safe Statistics Format flexibility in assigning currency types contained in the Row 1 Pennies DK safe and to establish target levels for each currency Bow Nickels This information is ened on the Safe aati See on eee Cancel portion of the form under the Balance Info tab This form is displayed when the Format Safe Statistics
238. and manager form Function when a MG command is used Select a add Customer all Description Checkstand Functions Manager Functions function select the security level for the TT function and indicate if reasons are required for the function The security level will then Add Product Check Override Check List Loan In Account Limit Override Security Level restrict access to the function based on the an edia Swap employee s assigned security level Pickup Resume Transaction Screen Lock Override Sign off Override Suspend Transaction Training Mode Till Status Table 34 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Manager Functions tab of the Security Administration form Function Displays the description of a selected manager function Function Column Heading ltemizes the 9 manager functions being administered in this form Displays the descriptions of the 9 itemized manager functions Description Column General Tab Security Level Allow Reason Code Reasons Required Table 34 2 Displays the selected security level from the drop down menu that can execute the function Flag designating if reason codes are allowed for this transaction key Flag designating if a reason code is required when the transaction key is used RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 268 RETAIL 7 r Manual ADMINISTRATION SETUP security Administration continued Toolbar The following describ
239. ansaction to be recorded This field accepts positive or negative amount Displays the entered reference number for Backend originated charges and a system assigned number for Front end originated charges Displays the due date of the new or retrieved charge Defaults to a date calculated from current date the number of days of the customer s credit terms Accepts other entered due date Note Default date does not automatically change when a different date other than current is entered in the Proc Date field Memo Displays the entered reason of the recorded transaction Grid Columns Proc Date Lists the effective date s of the charge transactions Type Lists the types Charge for Front end charges Misc Charge for Backend entries and Payment for Amount Lists the amount s of the charge transactions Terms Lists the terms of the charge transactions Due Date Lists the due date of the charge transactions Status Lists the status of the charge activity whether Paid Unpaid Partial Ref No Lists the reference number of the charge transactions Memo Lists the reason related to charge transactions Trans No Lists the sequentially assigned trans id of the charge transactions Table 2 9 Processing buttons The following describes special notations on the buttons used to process charge transactions on the New Edit In store Charges form Description Button Add When grayed out the New Charges form accepts entries for a new charge When
240. argin 0 00 This form is displayed when the RETAIL Calculator button E is clicked when preparing or reviewing a Purchase Order Note Description of every field of this form is detailed in the same topic found in the Product Maintenance form Receive an Invoice You can use the Receive an Invoice form to Metas receive merchandise ordered via a PO When 222 ainisle ae products are received the inventory iS DIA be Peper Co x P O No Jooooooooos v Address 5663 Redondo Beach Bd SS automatically updated Select a vendor from the 4 gt ay ee a e far list and a list of P O s not received will be uc Pakse pi i available for selection in the P O No field If mm 1 2 ut Vo receiving goods without a PO simply input the a en e eric first UPC in the UPC field and the system will PER Led Paper an 44 88 ERA ost utes A Pecoved r Ts prompt if anew PO should be created RETAIL supports receiving the entire PO as ordered by clicking the Receive as Ordered button or inputting individual received quantities for each line item Invoice Gross Total 179 52 Adjustment 0 20 Total 179 32 Vendor Total 179 32 Date 471272007 v Number 1221 Shipped By J D Received By Greta Garbo Paid Date 4 12 2007 Note Click UPC to toggle to Item Code Note Cost and pricing data can be updated from this form by using the Cost Calculator function Refer to the
241. artments That is non sale departments will be available for selection or included in the selection BEVERAGES Include Hash Departments Listed below is a description of the reports generated for each selection Selection ReportFileName Description All active products within a selected Product Group or all the existing RptbyOT rpt products in the Products table Total Store Table 2 8 1 Table 28 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Product reports as well as the database fields used by the reports The preceding a field is the report number on which the field appears Report field Description Format Calculation Product Group Product Group Text None The fields below will be included on all reports UPC UPC Text None Description Product description Text None Normal Cost Product cost Currency None Normal Price Product price Currency None Special Cost Special cost for the product Currency None Special Price Special price for the product Currency None Gross Profit Profit for the product Percentage Price cost Price Disc Discount category for the Number 1 A 2 B product Effective Schedule Product schedule assigned to Number None the product Mix Match Code Product mix match code Text None Dept Department for the product Number None Section Section for the product Number None Taxable flag Number None Scale flag Yes No None Foodstamp flag Yes No None
242. arts Display the date and time when the current batch ends Display the UPC or PLU of the product being added to the batch Displays the description of the product being added to the batch Display the wholesaler code of the product being added to the batch Displays the product s department Displays the product s section Displays the product s vendor Only applies to an ad batch Select from four pricing methods 0 Unit Pricing 1 Split Package Pricing 2 Group Threshold 3 Group Adjusted 4 Limited Pricing Special Cost for the product Special Price for the product Quantity for this product to be priced under special group pricing Special group pricing applied to this product Flag to indicate if a label needs to be printed for this product Only applies to a Normal Batch Select from four pricing methods 0 Unit Pricing 1 Split Package Pricing 2 Group Threshold 3 Group Adjusted 4 Limited Pricing Cost for the product Price for the product Quantity for this product to be priced under group pricing Group pricing applied to this product Flag to print a label for the product Target gross margin percentage for a product Packaging breakdown if product is packaged with one or more units and the size of the units UPC code of a product linked to the product being entered Provides ability to link two products together for the purposes of pricing Use this field to group multiple like products tog
243. ashier form Table 31 6 contains a description of each field contained in the Pickup Slip or Loan In Slip Report jj Reportfield Type Format Calculation Cashier Formula Field Text None Manager Formula Field Text None Till No Formula Field Number None Tender Name Database Field Text None Amount Database Field Currency None Customer No Database Field Text None Sub Total Formula Field Currency Subtotal of the tender Total Pickup Formula Field Currency Total of all the tenders Table 31 6 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 246 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Monitor Checkstands The Monitor Checkstands form is used to MOSSE monitor the activity and the till statistics of the checkstands When a checkstand is selected the name of the employee signed on to the ae a a checkstand current till status and other ERO Caron Ran Sot 24 4 es e miscellaneous totals will be displayed If a 0000000000003 Chicken Eggs 6 00 i 000 transaction is being completed on the QO00000000005 Crusty Wheat ols 200 checkstand the activity will be displayed on the poo Lines Pape 28 oo ES form as it is occurring CreditCards Jggo0 ATM Cards 000 Till Status Amt Refunds fo 0 00 Voids lo 0 00 Pickups fo 0 00 Current Total 28 39 Table 31 7 contains a description of each field contained in the Monitor Checkstands form Checkstands Displays all the available
244. ast finance charge calculated Grid Columns Card No Lists card numbers of customers whose finance charges were will be computed Name Proc Date pe Amount Due Date Lists the due dates of the charge transactions finance charges were will be computed Status Lists the status of the charge transactions finance charges were will be computed Balance Lists the balance of partially paid charges finance charges were will be computed Finance Charge Lists the individual computed finance charges Trans No Lists the trans id number of the charge transactions finance charges were will be computed Table 2 12 Processing buttons The following describes the buttons used to process finance charge calculations on the In store Charge Finance form Button Description _ Calle Calculates finance charges Reset Resets to original defaults and grid to display the old data when not satisfied with the calculated finance charges but before saving Save Saves calculated finance charges Finance charges are totaled by customer and are added to customers accounts Delete Deletes the latest calculated finance charges More than one set of calculated finance charges can be deleted starting from the latest set Deletion does not skip dates and is allowed only when no payments or finance charge on top of the finance charges have been made _ Comcel Ignores the new calculated finance charges Use this button to exit the for
245. ata IS sorted In alphabetical 6 Armstrong Donna 10 9 2007 1455 124 55 30 00 j j 5 Armstrong Gilbert 2 1 2007 456 123 55 30 00 or der by customer last name This for ls 2 Hen Emily 10 3 2007 221 137 65 30 00 displayed when the Display Customers Bad 2 Henry Emily 10 10 2007 235 233 78 30 00 car 2 Henry Emily 10 12 2007 245 3256 30 00 Checks is clicked from the toolbar from 3 Henry Kristin 5 13 2007 123 34 55 30 00 1 Henry Luke 10 23 2007 1254 134 99 30 00 the Bad Check form 0621308837 Palmer Amold 8 20 2007 122 123 33 30 00 Table 3 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer Bad Checks form FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Card No Display the customer s card number Name Display the customer s Last Name and First Name Check Date Display the bad check date Check No Display the bad check number Check Amt Display the bad check amount Check Fee Display the fee amount on the bad check Home Phone Display the Customer s phone number Due Display the amount due on the bad check Table 3 2 Set Check Return Fee The Set Check Return Fee form is displayed when the Set Check Return Fee 32 is clicked from the toolbar on the Bad e rien ae ae Check form The form is used to set or change the required check return fee on Cancel customers returned checks When the fee is changed the new fee applies only to future returned check entries for all 30 00 customers BackEnd RETAIL
246. ata can be displayed in Summary totals by coupon or Detail display totals by customer for each coupon format by selecting a Report Type RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 70 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Track Bad Checks Bad checks can be a problem for retailers BES RETAIL gives you the ability to track Y amp B customer bad checks and automatically oe produce bad check notification letters The Name Kent Clark DAR honom system can also warn the checkstands of any Check Details customer trying to write checks that have had Check 122 Fee 30 00 Total 53 33 Memo their check writing privileges removed Select EA 100 a eee the Bad Check Maintenance function on the ee A Customers menu Status V 27107 Letter 2 a lt lt lt pelea Vv To add a bad check click Add EA from the wer AT tetes FP toolbar The first thing to do is select the customer who wrote the bad check You can search for customers by Customer Card number Driver s License or by Last Name Date Check Amount Fee Total Paid Paid Date Balance 12 5 2006 122 23 33 30 00 53 33 0 00 53 33 2 10 2006 12 15 Type the customer s card number in the Search by Card No field To search by name or driver s license Birth Date City or many other options click Search th from the toolbar Select a customer by clicking the correct name and clicking OK When you have selected the customer a list of
247. ate Time None Name Employee name Text None Sales Total sales Currency None Average Order Average order size Currency None Customers No of customers Number None Items No of items sold Number None Scanned Percentage of items scanned to total Number None items Rings Minute Average rings per minute Number None Refunds Amount of refunds Currency None Coupons Amount of coupons Currency None Coupon Count No of coupons Number None Voids Amount of voids Currency None Over Shorts Amount of over shorts Currency None Total Sales Totals Currency Sum of detail Total Average Order Totals Number Simple Average of detail Total Customers Totals Number Sum of detail Total Items Totals Number Sum of detail Total Rings Min Totals Number Simple Average of detail Total Refunds Totals Currency Sum of detail Total Coupons Totals Currency Sum of detail Total Coupon Count Totals Number Sum of detail Total Voids Totals Currency Sum of detail Total Over Shorts Totals Currency Sum of detail Table 29 2 Selection Criteria Select the data for the selected time period on the form Sort Criteria None Till Status Report This function will produce a Till Status Report listing all tender amounts system and countdown for each da cashier for the selected time period This function is executed when the Till Status Report button is selected from the Till Statistics and Balancing form Table 29 3 contains a description of each field co
248. ated as Pesos cash so the system will convert the amount of change in this case 25 00 US Dollars and display the change as P 200 00 Pesos Note When a foreign currency is used at the checkstand the Till Status report will print the amount in both the local currency and in the currency tendered Back End Operation The Back End functions operate the same however remember that all foreign currency amounts tenders where the currency is not the local currency are displayed in the local currency This affects all screens where dollar amounts are displayed for the tender e g Till Statistics Safe Statistics and Balancing Balancing Overview Monitor Tills Tender Maintenance RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 311 RETAIL 7 r Manual Back End Operation continued Currency Conversion APPENDIX FOREIGN CURRENCIE A Currency Conversion function has been added to each of these forms to allow conversion of amounts to different currencies Click on the Currency Conversion button A contained on the toolbar of each of these forms This form supports the conversion of amounts from the local currency to a foreign currency Foreign mode and from a foreign currency to the local currency Local mode The form displays in the Foreign mode when first selected Enter in the amount to be converted in the Local Amount field in this example the amount would be in US Dollars Select the Currency desired from the list displayed
249. ategory ca when editing a product in the Product Maintenance function or by selecting the Analyze Product Categories function under the PRODUCTS section of the Point of Sales menu From this form you can analyze a particular product or category of products To analyze a particular product enter the UPC code of the product in the UPC field and press ENTER If you would like to select a category of products for example department section vendor click the down arrow next to one of the selections Dept Section Vendor to select from a list of items When you have made your APP selection press the Execute Query button Product Category Department GROCERY elle al sel als lee Special Pricing Method UPC 00000000001 me Normal Pricing Method Unit Pricing Unit Price Cost 1 350 Price see Unit Price Cost A Price i a ee Group Deal Price Group Deal Price Qty Price Qty Price Start 12 00 4M 69 32 End 11 59 PM Current Batch DSD only E g Description Cinnamon Raisin Swirl ltemCode GROCERY Depts Target Margin 0 00 Bread y Gross Margin CERTIFIED y Product Group Section Wendor Others Total Items Margin SP Margin Ad 69 31 0 00 O 50 00 50 00 M 50 00 50 00 M 50 00 50 00 69 50 0 00 0 150 9 00 98 33 0 00 1 330 3 00 55 66 0 00 2 000 4 00 50 00 0 00 2 000 4 00 50 00 0 00 2 000 4
250. available for use and each product will need to be confirmed individually so that the vendor can be added at this time v Product by Groups PE UPC Description Non fat Milk Joined Groups Cia AMAS Group ID op Tape e Add Group Save Description Click Add Group button and the form expands allowing user to add a new group to the system 191 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Groups continued Note A product can belong to one pricing product group and many reporting product groups Refer to the Product Grouping Updates topic earlier in this section for more information on the use of pricing product groups Table 23 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Products by Group form UPC Current item s UPC Description Current item s description Pricing Groups Lists all available pricing groups Reporting Group Lists all available reporting groups Joined Group List of pricing group and reporting groups the current product is joined to Add Group Group ID Group ID for the product group Description Enter the group description it may be the same as the Group ID Group Type Select the type Reporting or Price Group from the drop down menu Table 23 2 Product Pricing Levels Click Pricing Levels button ca from the toolbar to Maa access the Product Pricing Levels form This form is used to set up different pricing levels available to woo ROOM ke sio
251. ayed and or an error code will be displayed Note if the transaction has been denied for insufficient funds current account balances will be printed on the receipt for verification The transaction can then be tendered for up to the balance remaining for the account k The customer copy of the receipt will print out I The merchant copy will print out unless the system is set to SkipPrintMerchant 1 in the ros ini m The customer will keep the first one and the checker will save the second receipt for balancing at the end of the shift Note If the transaction was denied once the transaction is tendered or voided a receipt will be printed specifying the denial reason and other electronic benefits information Gift Card Activation Reload Balance Inquiry Deactivation and Tendering a To activate a gift card enter the amount and press the Gift Card button DG ENTER through the keyboard b Amessage box will appear prompting customer to slide card through the pin pad c Ifthe card is activated successfully the amount will be displayed on the Front End The customer will pay using a different tender l d To reload a gift card press the gift card nv a button DG ENTER A form will open up E showing several options Card Reload Card 1 Card Reload 2 Card Deactivate Deactivate Balance Inquiry and Manual Balance Inquiry e Select Reload Enter the amount that the customer wants added to the gift card
252. ays product movement for a specific product Access this function either by clicking Product Movement da on the toolbar while editing a product or by selecting the Show Product Movement function under the STORE SALES section of the Point of Sales menu Product movement can be shown for any time period you wish Simply enter the start and end dates for the time period desired and press Enter The product movement for the time period you entered is displayed in the upper portion of the form You can also display e sl sl E Start Date 110142007 M End Date 1072172007 x UPC Description Pack Size Oty Customers 0000000000001 CINNAMON RAISIN SWIRL 0 0 00 0 Total Cost Total Revenue Margin Gross Profit Ad Loss 0 000 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Include all products with the same ltemCode Movement during Previous 13 Weeks mer ema emo en sa MEE MMM is foe oe Po fo Ja 3 fu pe a 2001 2002 2003 El a E A al Ea O A A A ES product movement for the past 13 weeks or the past 12 months or even the past 10 years Simply click Total to the right of the time frame you wish and the product movement is displayed To include totals for products having the same item code as the product selected click Include all products with the same item code field Analyze Product Categories RETAIL also gives you the ability to analyze categories of products Access this function either by clicking Analyze Product C
253. ays the vendor name Used to run the query for the selected vendor category Displays the DSD Only Total Store or Product Group selections to be queried Used to run the DSD Only Total Store or Product Group category Displays the total sales for the reporting period for the selected category Displays the total cost of the purchases for the reporting period for the selected category Displays the number of items for the reporting period for the selected category Displays the number of customers who purchased products Displays the gross profit purchases cost for the reporting period for the selected category Displays the gross profit gross profit cost for the reporting period for the selected category When flagged depending on the category selected includes those items with the same item code On Total Store category sales to open departments are included Lists the customers who matched the category selected Displays the customer s name Displays the customer s zip code Displays the customer s phone number Displays the total amount purchased by the customer Displays the cost of goods sold for the purchases by the customer Displays the number of items purchased by the customer Displays the profit amount for that customer Displays the gross profit for that customer RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 176 RETAIL 7 r Manual POINT OF SALES STORE SALE Show Customer Sales continued Toolbar The following
254. b of the System Information form Till Statistics and Balancing POINT OF SALES REGISTER sa as wala Start Date Till Balancing Tender Name Cash Check Credit Card Debit Card Food Stamps Coupons InStore Charges WIC Store Coupons Elec Foodstamps Elec Cash Peso Canadian Totals Till Statistics and Balancing BiB ala 11 5 2007 w Cashier Jane Smith Start Date Till Balancing Tender Name Cash Check Credit Card Debit Card Food Stamps Coupons InStore Charges WIC Store Coupons Elec Foodstamps Elec Cash Peso Canadian Totals 10 30 2007 w Cashier Leslie Henry End Date Actual System 4 593 6 317 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 f wo aj a 1 227 6 44 4 18 9 0 0 ele e ele So eS ollo ollo E 1 E O E SS ea ps co o WELLE ELE e a TA ES Sl s o gt 6 191 42 0 00 T End Date Actual System 0 5 0 00 45 2 45 22 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 01 0 0 Alesis sp Sl 8l S S 2l 81 Ss Ss ss Oj oj ojl OF OF OY OF oO Gy ojo Oo ol OF CO CO OG Oi Ol GO Gi Goi a aad xd 5 S o N Oo Oo CO Oi CGH Gi Gi Gi Gi Gi C Gi fh 0 00 45 22 10 30 2007 w lt i zi 11 5 2007 wl lt ws iG i zi Till S
255. bad checks is displayed in the bottom portion of the form You can now enter the remainder of the information for the bad check Click Save from the toolbar to save the information To edit a bad check click Edit from the toolbar Select the customer To edit a check double click a check listed on the bottom portion of the form To generate notification letters to the customer select which letter you want to send by clicking the box to the right of one of the letter selections for example Letter 1 2 3 This allows you to view and or print the letter The system also captures the date and time the letter was sent NOTE Microsoft Word must be installed in order to print the letters Note To disable check writing privileges for a customer make sure the Write Checks field is not selected both on this form and on the Customer Maintenance form The program also allows you to update any customer that is linked to the customer being modified RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 71 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manage Customers continued Track Customer Sales How about Customer sales Who are your PEE best customers The answers are at your fingertips RETAIL tracks sales by E customer automatically To view customer sales select the Show Customer Sales function of the Store Sales section on the Point of Sales menu The Show Customer Total Cost Quantity Sales form is
256. be displayed informing the user that the function is not available 30 X 0 01Ibs savings Torat 0 00 lbs MM 0 00 PM 4 40 l StandAlone Greta G 10 22 2007 item Count 1 10 22 2007 10 01 AM The system notifies the checkstands that the server is up when the Notify Checkstands with Server Information function is used on the Back End The checkstands will then automatically come out of stand alone mode and all of the transactions will be transferred to the server RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 19 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Cash Drawer Printer Errors Depending on your installation if OPOS compliant refer to the RETAIL Installation Guide various messages may be displayed on the main Checkstand form related to the cash drawer and printer These include e Cash Drawer Open a message displays MIA whenever the cash drawer is open e Cash Drawer Time Limit Exceeded a message will display and an alarm will sound if Drawer Open Time Exceeded the cash drawer has been open longer than Close Drawer the time allowed through the POS Information function e Force Cash Drawer Closed a message will display and an alarm will sound if the cash drawer must be closed prior to beginning a xX Coce A raet BeTa proceeding new order One can configure and check this option through POS Information function e Printer Error a printer error message will be displayed if the
257. being used the cashier will be prompted to insert the check into the printer The Read Check options must be selected in POS Information and the MICR must be set up in OPOS The check information will be captured in addition to the customer ID e The front of the check can be printed by Print Front check i E selecting the Print Front of Check option in the POS Information function your printer Do you want to print the frontofthe check must support this option e Select 1 to print the front of a short check OR e Select 2 to print the front of a long check _ 7 E OR e Select 3 to frank the check only OR e Select 4 to cancel the franking NOTE This only cancels the franking not the check tender f If you choose to print the check e Place the check face up along the right side of the printer the light should be flashing on the printer e The front of the check will now print g The back of the check can be franked by coco oS l ae selecting the Require Franking option for the Document Franking E tender ohn area cert a meric Please insert the check then press Ok e Back of the check will now print e The system will not continue to process E until the back of the check is printed You can cancel the printing by clicking Cancel button Note Any balance due to the customer will be highlighted at the bottom of the order Print Check Single Pass Reta
258. ber 01 2005 04 55 PM Page 1 Aggregate Store Sales 320 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Aggregate Store Sales Departments PHOTO 2 PHOTO SubTotal PRODUCE 4 PRODUCE SubTotal WINE LIQUOR 6 WINE LIQUOR SubTotal Non Hash SubTotal Total Sales Tax A Tax B Tax C Tax D Total Tax Total Tuesday November 01 2005 04 55 PM Page 2 Start Date 10 31 2005 Sales 25 65 25 65 2 009 67 2 009 67 1 351 28 1 351 28 30 898 66 30 898 66 807 65 0 00 0 00 0 00 807 65 31 706 31 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 0 08 25 65 6 50 144 49 4 37 Open Dept Sales 25 65 144 49 10 00 10 00 1 604 92 100 00 1 604 92 End Date 10 31 2005 Cost of Sales 0 00 0 00 812 93 812 93 926 04 926 04 17 322 93 17 322 93 Gross Margin 0 92 31 ltems 3 00 3 00 3 288 62 3 288 62 163 00 163 00 27 933 77 27 933 77 Avg Price Avg Order 8 55 0 61 8 29 AT 3 00 6 95 1 30 17 39 Customers 473 125 1 606 Aggregate Store Sales 321 RETAIL 7 User Manual UPC 0000000001007 0000000001008 0000000012301 0000001234501 Item Code 234 123 Product Description Canned Dog Food Dry Dog Food Arrowhead Water Aqua Lite Monday November 14 2005 03 01 PM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 APPENDIX E Allowances
259. bilities in displaying pictures and running videos from the Front End system Pictures or videos depending on your selection during the installation setup process will be displayed when the screen lock feature goes into effect on the Front End checkstands The pictures or videos will be shown sequentially as they exist in the system directory that contains the picture video files RETAIL supports the display of jog and bmp files pictures and avi files videos In order for RETAIL to access picture video files the files must exist in the following directories on your system File Type___ FrontEnd Back End Picture Files Program Files RETAIL POS BmpProducts Video Files Program Files RETAIL POS Videos sss Picture Files Program Files e Files C EFO LOGS Lookuplmages for Lookup RetaiNPOS Lookuplmages RetaiNPOS Items Lookuplmages Load your jpg or omp files into the Picture Files directory and load your avi files into the Video Files directory listed above Pictures of products will also be available for use with the Price Verify function If a product has been associated to a picture file on the Back End load the picture file s to the Checkstand as well and the picture of the product will display when price verification is performed on the product Note Ifyou are going to attach pictures to the product files for lookup on the Front End create a folder in the POSServer folder so that you can browse
260. can be viewed on this form only when a related transaction is being viewed RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 105 RETAIL 7 r Manual Customer Maintenance continued In store Charge AR Maintenance continued CUSTOMERS Table 2 9 contains a description of each field contained in the New Edit In store Charges form NEW EDIT IN STORE CHARGES FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION In store Charge box Displays whether a customer in the Customer Attributes form is set up as charge customer or not Charge Card No Name Balance Terms Trans ID Proc Date Type Amount Ref No Due Date activities can still be processed but a reminder This is not a charge customer is encountered until customer is set up Displays the card number of the current customer When displayed only the current customer s activities display on the grid Displays the name of the current customer Displays the current outstanding balance of the current customer Displays the current setup terms of the current customer Displays either New Trans when on add mode of the system assigned sequential number of the retrieved charged transaction Displays the effective date of the transaction In new charge form the field defaults to current date but allows user to enter other dates back date or future date Defaults to Misc Charge Displays the amount of the charge transaction When on add mode enter the amount of the tr
261. card number Default is 004 Random Weight Prefix Prefix used to identify scanned random weight items Default is 002 Manufacturer Coupon Prefix Prefix used to identify scanned manufacturer coupons Default is 005 Ask for Password on Sign Flag to force the cashier to enter a password on sign off Off Product Point Value Amount to use as a ratio when calculating points at the checkstand Till Audit Flag to indicate if till audit data will be captured for all transactions Force Drawer Close Flag to indicate if the system should force the cashier to close the cash drawer before proceeding to a new order RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 264 RETAIL 7 r Manual ADMINISTRATION SETUP POS Information continued COUPONS DISCOUNTS Configurable attributes and limits for coupons and discounts Days Flag days to apply coupon multiple Multiple Limit Displays the limit of coupon multiple amount when applying coupon multiple Example if coupon multiple limit 1 00 coupons up to 1 00 will have the multiple applied If this limit is used Maximum Limit will be set to zero Multiple Displays the amount of coupon multiple to be applied on coupon days Maximum Displays the limit of overall coupon amounts when applying coupon multiple Example If Coupon Maximum 1 00 and a coupon is 75 the coupon will be multiplied up to 1 00 If this limit is used than Multiple Limit will be set to zero Tax Exempt Flag to indicate if t
262. ce is paid Table 18 5 Selection Criteria Criteria specified by user Sort Criteria Vendor Name and Date descending order RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 162 RETAIL 7 r Manual Point of Sales Store Sales Show Store Sales y Store Sales Department or Section 4 IO IO Store Sales Report View Store Sales Report Store Sales Memo Store Sales Taxes Aggregate Store Sales Report Store Sales Graph Show Product Movement g POINT OF SALES STORE SALES Show Product Sales v Product Sales l ee ae Sales Filter Piao Product Product Sales Memo Report see Form Flow Salas View Product Sales Report Show Customer Sales y 8 S Product Customer Movement Sales a E i Product i Braet View Product K Customer Sales by View Customer Niero Movement ovemen Sales Filter G D eni Customer Sales Report Repon Banna roupings epartmen Sales Report RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 163 RETAIL 7 r Manual POINT OF SALES STORE SALE Show Store Sales The Store Sales form is used to display sales MZ ZDIIZLE data by departments or by sections for a desired time period Enter in or select the start and end dates for the time period to view Sta
263. cess of the deposit Deposit ID Displays the current deposit number Created Date and time when the memo entry was created Memo Memo information entered Modified Displays date and time of last modifications By Displays the Employee name that made the last modification Table 30 7 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 236 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Balancing Overview The Balancing Overview form is used to E Sila o taR review and compare Department Sales Safe e sa d ey Ch 1 ifi 0 31 2007 11 4 2007 Statistics and Till amounts for a specified date eater Sie E i Sales Tills Deposit This form gives the user an overview of the Department Sales Tender Name Actual System 0 5 A Mi 2 793 72 GROCERY 1 154 92 0 00 2 773 22 2 773 22 Over Shorts 0 00 tenders sales and deposits Enter or select a BAKERY 1500 3000 000 4000 de PRODUCE 90 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 __Paidins 0 00 Balance Date and the data for the date selected WINE LIQUOR 208 29 000 000 000 Paid ut sao f GENERAL MERCHANDISE 817 12 0 00 20 50 20 50 ee oF DAIRY 456 20 0 00 0 00 0 00 eceive will be displayed PET SUPPLIES 5 25 0 00 0 00 0 00 A a ii BOTTLE RETURNS 2 00 Elec Foodstamps 0 00 0 00 0 00 Electronic Tenders 0 Gift Card 0 00 0 00 0 00 Mfr Coupons 0 00 Food Stamps 0 00 0 00 0 00 InStore Charges 0 00 0 00 0 00 NonDepositables 0 00 Peso 0 00 0 00 0 00 Pound
264. changed whenever the Store Close process is completed In other words if the Store Close process is run at 10 00pm on 12 10 08 the processing date will now become 12 11 08 even though the calendar date is still 12 10 08 Setup Setup of a 24 Hour store is very easy Using the System tooo Information function under the Administration menu click on ak al e the Default tab Click on M the 24 Hour Store field Make sure eee ee eer a ransaction history 94 day s our Store v Close to update all of the checkstands once you have completed this Sytomioghitay E ae selection Transactions Default Credit Limit for Customer Clear Suspended Transactions Note This should be done prior to the first business day of Track Weighted Items Coun operating as a 24 Hour store and after a store close if the store Products Allow Alpha Updates Item Codes V Allow Discount While on Sale v has been operational for any period of time Allow Zero Prices Iv Apply Best Allowance Only Iv Require Vendor Track Double Coupons m Auto Store Close Setup Store Close Last Store Close 11 4 2007 ela Data File C POSServer Archive Cost Changes File Passwords Cashier Expire Days Admin Expire Days Minimum Length 0 0 0 Data Synchronization Quantity Halo Setup Synchonization Jobs Halo 200 Special Considerations Special Pricing Running a 24 Hour store does not affect the way that special pricing is treated in the system Special pricin
265. ck Save Ej from the toolbar to save the information Edit Delete Coupons To edit a coupon click Edit from the toolbar Type in a specific Coupon ID or search for a coupon by clicking ellipse button located next to the Coupon ID field A list of coupons matching certain criteria can be displayed at the bottom of the form Click Coupon Settings E from the toolbar to enter in the criteria Display Filter section that would affect the list of coupons displayed When the criterion has been set display a list of coupons by clicking Show Hide Coupon List E from the toolbar A list of coupons is displayed in the bottom portion of the form You can scroll through the coupons by using the scroll arrows located to the right of the list Select a coupon to edit from the list by double clicking the coupon To delete a coupon click Delete 52 from the toolbar RETAIL will allow you to delete a coupon if the coupon is not attached to another coupon Coupon Movement Coupon Movement usage can be viewed for a specific coupon or group of coupons Coupon Movement for a specific coupon can be viewed by clicking Coupon Movement i from the toolbar This displays the coupon movement for the specific coupon that is edited You can also display coupon movement for a group of coupons by accessing the Electronic Coupon Movement function from the main menu Enter in the criteria desired specific coupon department date range and click Movement The d
266. clicked the system will update the data in the product file Only users with security access to the Product Maintenance function will have access to this function Click Save in the toolbar to save the information Click Print Preview a to preview a printout of the P O or click Print amp to print the P O To edit a purchase order use the Review a Purchase Order function of the Inventory menu Select the vendor that is on the P O you wish to modify Once you have selected the vendor you will be able to select the P O you wish to modify by clicking the down arrow next to the P O No field This will bring up a drop down list of the purchase orders for the vendor that you can select Once you ve selected a P O the information related to the P O will be displayed To edit a product listed type the UPC number of the product into the UPC field and you will be able to modify the data for that product To add a new product to the P O simply enter the UPC of the new product in the UPC field and the system will allow you to add the product To enter adjustments to the P O click Adjustment E in the toolbar RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 83 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manage Inventory continued Receive Goods When goods are on order at some point they will need to be received You can receive goods ordered by using the Receive an Invoice function of the Inventory menu First select the vendor tha
267. cornnonnnconnnnonnconnnnonnnononconnnonnn corn nnnnn ron nnnnnrannnnnnnannos 47 voiding a Welghica Products ot e e A S 47 VOIGING a Produc IO a SIN a 47 VOICI se ENIE SC cect cccre a sie Sau ccet a a stele tcat eedncotdcuieel someday 47 Refunding a Product to a DepartMe nt ccccsccecssssecssseeecssseeecsseeecssneecsseeenssneessseneessseeeessneecseeeeessseeeseseneeessaeeesssneetesees 47 Reunido a PFOGUICE OUI S Ene siii lo toco 48 Refunding a Product through Scanned ENNY ii E ES ie 48 Refunding Multiple Quantities Of a Product rsss airan EER aR a 48 Refunding a Product to a S CtION cccccccsccesseesseesseeesseesseecseeecseecseecessecseeceseecaeecseecaeesseecsaeesseeceaeesueesseecsaeeseessaeeeseeeegs 48 MANAGER UNC TION Se a 49 Bieli aN E 49 Option FICK anaana r e ae 50 6 70 gers s Check ener eg ter aa 51 A a BY ne eC ne meee nee rene en ee 51 Option ss Check Ove nie untada ds 51 TONY ENA OV OIC tia 52 Option 7 RESUME OF Suspende A tt ce E tht eres eats ce iat 53 Option S Medid SWAD a aa 54 Option 9 Maintain Data Add CUStOMES cccccecccesecessecsseeesseeeseecseecessecseeeesseceeeeseecaeeesseceseessueceseecueeessecsaeesseeeeaeessesy 55 Option 9 Maintain Data Add Product c ccccccesecssscsssecsseecseecsseeeeeceseecseeeeseecsaeeeseeesaeeeseeceaesssuecessecueseseecseeseseeseaeeesesy 55 Hanna Mode sas cs o e a ae 56 LOADING PICTURES AND VIDEOS usina 56 RETAIL SYS TEM MANAGER esposas 57 BACKEN
268. cost of the product Displays the current price normal or special of the product Flag indicating if product is currently on ad Table 23 1 Note Picture Files must exist in a specific directory on the server to be accessed from this screen The files must exist in a directory named BMPFILES within the same directory where the Back End databases exist Toolbar The following describes the toolbar displayed on the Product Maintenance form Button Description Press to exit the current window Hides or shows the bottom grid which displays a list of products as selected in Settings Press to Jump to the Edit mode from Add mode Press to Jump to the Add mode from Edit mode a 16 el me a Clones the current product information to a new product All data will be cloned except for UPC code description and certified number Helps to view pending products added from the Front End checkstands Click to return to normal mode Refer to the Pending Products topic in this section Deletes the product The product will be flagged deleted and will be removed by the system when the Synchronize Checkstands with Products function is executed Gl Y e RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 184 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Maintenance continued 2 ja amp amp E E ee a re m Ha a le E Ed Saves your entries or changes for the current record Press to a
269. ct UPC e Purchase of a product that belongs to a specific mix match group Mix Match e Purchase of a product that belongs to a specific Department Section or Vendor e Purchase of a product that belongs to a specific Product Group A separate coupon is created for each UPC in the product group e Purchase of a specified quantity of items in a Coupon Group The group is created when Pick Quantity is chosen as the coupon type When a trigger is entered the Description field is automatically set You can override the description by typing in a new value in the field The description is printed on the receipt when the coupon is triggered on the checkstand RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 66 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Coupon Type Six Coupon types are supported If Pick Quantity is chosen as the Coupon Type the form will change to display the Trigger Price From Preferred Customer coupon is applied to all preferred customers Type PC in Customer Maintenance function Target Customer coupon is applied to a specific customer or customers Card number of each customer is required When selected a form is displayed allowing selection entry of one or more customers to which the coupon is assigned In edit mode an Ellipse is displayed which allows viewing of the customers selected Linked Coupon coupon is allowed to link another coupon This type of coupon would be genera
270. d For each pricing level simply determine which products should be affected and what the pricing should be Then enter the pricing level for each product through the Pricing Levels button in the toolbar of the Product Maintenance function Next assign the pricing level to the customer s through the Pricing Level field on the Customer Maintenance form When the customer Card Number is entered or scanned at the checkstand the pricing for the pricing level assigned is applied to the customer s order The customer s savings amount is printed separately on the receipt preceded by a message that is user configurable through the Pricing Levels Message field in the POS Information function RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 64 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manage Customers continued Frequent Shopper Points A reward system based on points earned is RATOS supported with RETAIL Establish ranges based on purchase amount for the points to be awarded using de diia Delete the Frequent Shopper Ranges function Through o u EZ E this form you can input different ranges of points to Modified By o be awarded for purchases up to a certain level For Cose example to reward a customer who purchased 100 FromAmownt Amour Posl heel Modesa Hep of goods with 50 points type 100 in the Amount am 20 00 20 870 2007 S08 AB AN 2 field and 50 into the Points field When the ranges 30 01 4000 40 10 22 20
271. d fields are displayed from the Product Maintenance form The only fields that can be changed from this form are the Stock min Stock Max and Re Order Point Click A usinest to process the adjustments for stocks on hand at which time the lower portion of the form appears Quantiy EffeciveDate 1175 2007 The fields on this form are defined as follows Quantity Reason SS entered can be positive increases the stock on hand and negative decreases the stock on hand Effective date defaults to today s date This date is used by the inventory analysis function Reason allows for a selection of a reason for adjustments Click Apply to save the adjustment data entered Note Once an adjustment is applied it cannot be modified An offsetting entry can be made to affect the stock on hand Reason codes for adjustments can be added or edited by ESTE ai clicking the ellipse button next to the reason field saans ra Click Add to add a new reason code The reason code Gein fivaiopRiiinene will automatically be assigned er EN VERDI A SS Do Stock on Hand 2 New Shipment RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Lists all the set up supplier of the current items listing attributes for each different vendors in the columns Inventory Inventory UPC 0000000001 122 81 00 Save Close Adjustment Help Stock Min 0 00 ltem Code Stock Max 0 00 Stock On Hand ReOrder Point 0 00 Adju
272. d if an item code is assigned to the product The following fields will be updated for all products having the same item code e Static Data Dept Section Primary Vendor e Pricing Data Normal Pricing Method Unit Cost Unit Price Normal Group Deal Qty and Price Target Margin Case Cost Special Pricing Method Special Unit Cost Special Unit Price Special Group Deal Qty and Price Note unit cost and case cost will only be updated for the Primary Vendor e Misc Pack Unit of Measure Scaled UPC Link and Mix Match e Attributes Foodstamp DSD Wicable Ad Enforce Qty Effective Schedule Tax Plan A thru D Discount Category A and B Line Item Discount Max Discount e Pricing Levels Pricing Level Price Start End RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 190 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Maintenance continued Pending Products Products added through the Checkstand are assigned a pending status These products can be sold through the checkstand but contain only minimal information To view all pending products click Get button A list of pending products will be displayed at the bottom of the Product Maintenance form Click the Get button again to restore the list back to normal To update pending products complete one of the following a Select each pending product from the list and update save the product information b Click the Confirm All button located at the bottom o
273. d Stamps Discount A Discount B Unit of Measure Effective Schedule TaxA Tax B Tax C Tax D Table 37 2 Selection Criteria Section number Section name Department section assigned to Last time section was modified Employee number who last modified the section Indicates if food stamp items can be rung to the section Indicates if discount A applies to this section Indicates if discount B applies to this section Unit of measure to be used on manual weight items rung into the section Product schedule assigned to the section Indicates if Tax schedule A applies to items rung to this section Indicates if Tax schedule B applies to items rung to this section Indicates if Tax schedule C applies to items rung to this section Indicates if Tax schedule D applies to items rung to this section selection criteria consist of all sections that currently exist in the system Sort Criteria Section Ascending RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Number Text Number Date Time Number N A N A N A Text Number N A N A N A N A RETAIL 7 User Manual ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Tender Maintenance The Tender Maintenance form is used to add KESS and edit tender information An unlimited amp w a x number of tenders can be supported by i RETAIL A pre configured set of tenders is Tenderio fi General Limits Miscellaneous Electronic Service distributed with
274. d department to be the aggregate of a selected department RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 275 RETAIL 7 User Manual Department Maintenance continued Toolbar ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on the Department Maintenance form Button Description Exit the current window Print a Department report Refer to the Department Report topic in this section Display the Department report on the screen Refer to the Department Report topic in this section Save your entries or changes for the current record Add a New Department function Edit a Department function Activates the context sensitive help ZARA ol ul Es Department Report The Department Report function will produce a Department report listing departments and sub departments currently in the system This function is executed when or is selected Table 36 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Department report Report field Description Format Calculation Number Dept No Sub No Name Date Modified Modified By Food Stamps Hash Discount A Discount B Unit of Measure Coupon Link Discount Link Halo Limit Lalo Limit Tax A Tax B Tax C Tax D Table 36 2 Department number Sub department number Department name Last time department was modified Employee number who last modified the department Indicates if food stamp items can be rung
275. d for a product Press the Save button to save the product information Click on the Edit button in the toolbar to edit a product you have entered To delete a product click on the Delete button in the toolbar RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 301 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX A INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM Step 3 Setup Products Information continued Note Scan the product UPC codes to ensure they are entered correctly While in the Add mode and with the cursor in the UPC field scan the product and the UPC code should appear in the field If you manually key in the UPC codes then follow the examples below UPC Code Type UPC Code Type E EANTS Code EAN Code mM 1 ll 39012 Enter in ff product code i in this leading digi as the first Enter in this leading digit as the fist Enter m the product only hor this bppe of UPE character of the UPE followed by the character of the code followed by hr se For thig lim this care 5678901 product code in this case 0123456 the product code in this case n thit care 123456789012 23456 If you d like to print shelf labels for the saan click on the Labels button in the toolbar This will EN export the product data to a text file ProductLabels txt for use in importing into a label making program RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 302 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX A INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM Step 4 Setup Safe Balance You need to establish a starting balance for y
276. d only to Back End originated entries and as long as it is not yet applied to charges Cancel Disregards new credit entry Click this button to exit form Apply Applies credit automatically to open charges from earliest to latest Available field displays zero when credit is applied This button changes to Reset after it is clicked Peset Changes application of credit Available field goes back to original amount equal to credit amount Note After the credit application is saved the Reset button does not work User needs to manually click Yes fields corresponding to invoices where credit need not apply This button changes to No after it is clicked In store Charge Finance The In store Charge Finance form is used to calculate WSdirain and record finance charges imposed on overdue posos URE are Pa accounts This form is displayed when Finance Charge is clicked from the toolbar Finance charge calculated is Percentage Percentage Grace Period Grace Period Delete the product of unpaid charges balance of a partially a inance Charge inance Charge Close paid charges unpaid finance charges unapplied Meca Memo pf payments and unapplied credit memos times the Percentage entered Finance charges are calculated fodasonAc 5 8 2007 Chage S1000 5 15207 NaPad SS SOLS according to terms 15 days 30 days etc Each andeonAe 5 16 2007 Chage 120 20 5 16 2007 Nota 5020 i k i AndersonAc 5 16 2007
277. d short amount Currency None Average Order Size Average order size Currency None Scanned Percentage of items scanned Percent Percentage of scanned vs total Ring Time Time spent ringing items Number None Coupon No of coupons accepted Number None Coupon Coupon amount Currency None Coupon Percentage of report total Percent Void No of voids performed Number None Void Void amount Currency None Void Percentage of report total Percent Refunds No of refunds completed Number None Refunds Refund amount Currency None Refunds Percentage of report total Percent Gross Sales Gross sales for the employee Currency None Total fields Total of details Text Sum of detail fields Table 30 13 Selection Criteria Data for the selected time period on the form Sort Criteria Hour Ascending RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 249 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Print Register Productivity Report The function will produce a Register Productivity report M E Productivity Report listing productivity totals for the selected time period The layout of this report is contained in Appendix F The Register Productivity Report form is displayed when the Select Dates For the Report Print Register Productivity Report function is selected Start Date _ from the Point of Sales menu This form will accept ee Can TE Cancel i entry of a start and end date for selection on the report You may also select the tim
278. date when this product was count Displays the department number of the product Displays the section name of the product Displays the vendor number of the product Displays a 1 if this product has direct service delivery Displays the cost of the product Displays the price of the product Displays the pack number of the product Displays the size of the product RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 141 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Inventory Count continued Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on the Inventory Count form Button Description Exits the current window Prints an Inventory Count report Refer to the Inventory Count Report topic in this section Displays the Inventory Count report on the screen Refer to the Inventory Count Report topic in this section Saves item count or a changed count of an item Deletes the current category with all its records Deletes the whole inventory count category y E la E a El Marks the ending of the current inventory count An end date is requested and is stored as the ending inventory date This date can then be used in the Inventory Analysis function aj Creates a job to mark the ending inventory count Activates the context sensitive help E Inventory Count Report This function will produce an Inventory Count Report for the selected count date This function is executed when or is selected on
279. de to total the order The checker should now be able to accept the check as the tender for the order RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 52 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manager Functions continued Option 7 Resume or Suspend Function Resumes a suspended order or Suspends a current order Menu option will toggle In between orders the Resume option will be available in the middle of an order the Suspend option will be available Note The transaction can be resumed by scanning the bar code that was printed when the transaction was suspended The security to suspend or resume will still be enforced with this method Please type in the Transaction ID a Choose 7 from the Supervisor Menu b If suspending an order the order will be suspended and a Transaction ID displayed and printed on the receipt a barcode may also print if the printer supports printing of barcodes The transaction ID will Search be required to resume the order c If resuming an order the system will prompt for a Erie Transaction ID Either scan in the transaction ID if a barcode was printed or key in the transaction ID and Retai hit ENTER A search option is also available if the Transaction ID is Jee stale UA Vete not known Click Search button and a list of suspended 00504423308 a SU transactions will be displayed Select the item desired and click OK button Cancel Once a transaction is selected the order w
280. der vto CST USDdas CA 2 US The process for tendering is exactly the same as the other example 1 Convert the order total to the foreign currency using the Currency Conversion command CU The currency command is used as follows lt Currency ID gt CU Example The order total is currently P 1800 00 and the order is going to be tendered in US Dollars Enter in 2CU and the system will convert the P 1800 00 into US Dollars 225 00 2 Now that the value of the order in US Dollars is known tender the order in US Dollars Example Tender the order with 250 00 by entering in 25000US The system will display the value of the tender in the local currency as well in this case P 2000 00 Pesos 3 The system will compute the amount of change to be given Example The change tender is designated as US Dollars so the system will display the change as 25 00 and also as P 200 00 Pesos Again let s change the example to give change back in the local currency in this case Pesos The US Dollars tender would be setup to give change back in cash Tender CA The cash tender represents cash in Pesos since the local currency is Pesos Setup US Dollars Tender give change back in Pesos Tender ID Tender Code Tender Type Change Tender US Dollars CA 2 CA The steps as outlined above are the same except for step 3 3 The system will compute the amount of change to be given but now in Pesos Example The change tender is design
281. describes the functions supported by the tool bar located on the Customer Sales form Button Description Use to exit the current window Use this button to print an Customer Sales report Refer to the Customer Sales Report topic in this section Use this button to display the Customer Sales report on the screen Refer to the Customer Sales Report topic in this section Use to show the total sales by department A form will be displayed showing a breakdown of sales by department ES lol A E Use this button to refine the selection of data displayed Refer to the Sales Filter topic in this section Ay Access the Customer Group form where thank you letters gift certificates or coupons can be printed for a customer Refer to Customer Group topic in this section Use this button to select find a specific customer The customer selected will be highlighted E Ed k Use this button to activate the context sensitive help in this dialogue Sales Filter The Sales Filter form is used to refine the Pm SIA selection criteria for the customer sales data and to specify a sort option for the customer list portion of the Customer Sales form This form ls F is displayed when the Sales Filter button 3 is are RR El _ selected from the Customer Sales form A Criteria a Profit ji y Help Select the field to be used as a filter from the list Gross EE displayed under the Filter heading Once you
282. description for the product Up to 120 characters Short Description Secondary description for the product Up to 40 characters Zero Price Eligible Flag to make this product eligible for zero pricing Negative Price Eligible Flag to make this item negative price eligible for example pay outs Allow only when scanned Flag to allow zero or negative price only when the product is scanned Prompt for price Flag to prompt for price at the Front End for example deli sandwiches Table 23 15 Picture Browser The Picture Browser can be accessed with the help of the Minas Find Pictu re button located next to the Pictu re field of Working directory C Program FilestRetailipos Lookuplmages Set Folder the Product Maintenance form Browse select and acon squeshipg A alfalfa sprouts pg associate a picture to the product The picture will also be Anescan el available for viewing on the Checkstand when a Price Verify oe artichokes ipg function is performed To set a folder for the pictures on the Asian peat pg Asparagus ipg Back End press the Set Folder button barana aaah The pictures must also exist on each Front End so that the Seca cashier can view it in Product Lookup bel perper pa s RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 201 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Quick Add Quick Edit The Product Quick Add and Quick Edit are accessed from the Point of Sale menu under the Product category When
283. display or not display through the POS Information function in the Back End RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 31 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Adding Customers Customer data can be added from the Checkstand RtTIS Access the manager menu MG command and select Add Customer Enter the data for the customer 0 C DES e A and click on the OK button Pay special attention to lr o a a and select the appropriate attributes for the customer a zz Write Checks Charge Account Print Invoice not arte N used at this time and Frequent Shopper ox conca Note use the Tab Enter and Arrow keys to move Note Adding customers is not available in stand between fields if a mouse is not available alone mode Checkstand Functions The functions described below are subject to the security levels limits and attributes established by the user Refer to the Security Features topic above for more information In addition to the security features that can be associated with various Checkstand functions reason codes can also be assigned Reason codes are assigned to Checkstand functions as well as Checkstand manager functions through the Security Administration function When a reason code is required for a particular function the system will prompt for the selection of a reason code from a list Selection of a reason code is mandatory when the function is flagged to require
284. displayed ees Include all products with the same item code Enter the Start and end dates for the time i ip HomePhone Total Cost Qty Profit Ei CardNo period you want to view for example oe Hb 1223944455 85150 210 1800 2740 Masee1 1632 952 500 680 41 67 10 06 1 2010 to 12 31 2010 Now click the fi ai 28 86 15 06 8 00 13 80 47 82 101 28 86 15 06 800 13 80 47 82 102 down arrow next to Other select Total n Ra 98899 9518777777 12 21 698 4 00 5 23 42 84 103 ith Mr 322 188 1 00 1 34 41 62 11 Store from the list and then click Execute pestei com ars sisas sae 1300 sanar wean 2 Query in the toolbar RETAIL gets your customers and sums their purchases for the time period The sales information is listed in the bottom portion of the screen Click Include Related Products to include items related by item code or pricing product group Click Sales Filter to refine the data you have selected The Sales filter allows you to apply specific criteria to the data displayed for example Profit gt 10 Total Sales lt 100 00 and allows you to sort the data in different ways You can also narrow down your search to a particular category for example specific products department section and vendor Click the down arrow next to one of the selections for example Dept Section and Vendor to select from a list of items or select a specific product or range of products by typing the UPC code s in the fiel
285. dor section or department click the down arrow next to one of the selection boxes for example Department Section Vendor Other to select from a drop down list To calculate the inventory for the category you selected click the Calculate Inventory button 3 in the toolbar The system will now list all of the products matching the category you selected in the bottom portion of the screen In the middle of the screen you will see three columns of information displayed by the system Quantity Profitability and Shrink Under the Quantity column you ll be able to see your initial inventory based on the inventory count entered matching the start date you specified the number of items received the number of items sold the inventory adjustments edit column and your ending inventory Under Profitability you ll see your price your cost your profit and gross margin of your ending inventory RETAIL calculates your ending inventory by taking the beginning inventory count plus the received invoices minus the sold products To calculate any inventory shrink click the Calculate Shrink in the toolbar The system will then search for an inventory count for the ending date you specified on this form The inventory count will be displayed in the Ending inventory column on the form This ending inventory count will be used to calculate the shrink Under Shrink you ll see your price your cost any loss of product and the actual margin of your
286. ds Iv Prompt for Information f Require External Authorization Y Max 100 00 Message Time Allowed 80 Overall Max 1 000 00 Require Mar Auth a Balance Inquiry E Require Pin Iv Allow Pickups amp Loans V Till Limit 1 000 00 Partial Amount Vv Require Expiration Mandatory Limit 1 000 00 Manual Authorization E Stand In Approval y Require Gen E Require Luhn Check p Change Change Tender CA Msg Change Max 100 00 T Table 38 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Tender Maintenance form Tender ID Displays the unique identifier number assigned by the system for the tender Tender Code Displays the Checkstand code used for the tender Tender Name Displays the tender description Tender Type Displays the general classification for the tender CA used for Credit Debit EBT and Gift CK used for checks and WIC CH used for in store charge MI Currency Displays the name of the currency in which the tender is valued Modified Displays the date and time when the tender was last modified Modified By Displays the name of the employee who last modified the currently viewed tender GENERAL TAB Active Flag to activate tender for Checkstand tendering If this flag is not set then the tender will not be accepted for transactions at the Checkstand Require Mgr Auth Flag to indicate if manager authorization is required for the tender Depositable Flag to indicate if the tender can be deposited Monitor Flag to i
287. ds to the left of the UPC When you have selected the category you require click the appropriate selection next to your selection The customer sales data matching your selection is displayed Click Group Customers from the toolbar on the Customer Sales form to group the customers in order to reward your best customers By grouping selected customers you can attach a Gift Certificate Thank you letter or Electronic Coupons to each customer in the group This provides you the ability to target your best customers and reward them for their business Note RETAIL also displays total figures for the category you have selected The total figures are located to the right of the category selection for example Customers ltems Purchases and so on RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 12 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manage Customers continued Manage In Store Charges In Store charges for a customer can be managed P i Se IO using the In store Charge Maintenance form accessible from the Customers Menu or through Proc Date Due Date MinBal 001 MaxBal From 8 1 2007 wl Tol de From v To Credt Memos Charges J Patial Applied J Appted F Patial Appbed v Pad Y Pata Paid W Misc Charges v Y Unappled Y UrPad 4 Instore Charges Y Financial Chaiges Y tro on the toolbar of the Customer Maintenance form Name Balance ProcDale Type Amourt Tems Due Date Status Rel No Memo TiansNo A 119 2007 Paym
288. duct Group 7 UP 6 PACK 12 OZ 364 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Product Movement Report Goodwin s Market Product Movement Start Date 10 24 2005 End Date 10 31 2005 Pack Size Quantity Customers UPC Description 17 15 0007114200001 ARROWHEAD SP WTR 1 LTR Total Cost Total Revenue Margin Ad Loss 9 061 13 43 32 53 0 00 Movement during Previous Weeks 8 27 9 03 9 10 9 17 9 24 10 01 Week Total 3 22 41 24 38 28 399 Movement during Previous Months 5 05 Month Total 11 04 12 04 1 05 2 05 3 05 4 05 1 059 52 29 58 39 43 74 19 Movement during Previous Years 2001 Year Total 1998 1999 2000 20 33 2008 3174 4862 3423 136 91 18 36 35 34 Product Movement Tuesday November 01 2005 05 06 PM 365 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Product Sales Report Goodwin s Market Product Sales Total Store Start Date 10 24 2005 End Date 10 24 2005 Gross Margin 43 29 Upc Description Cost Price GM Qty Revenue Total Cost Profit 0000000000368 ENDIVE 0 50 1 09 94 13 1 00 1 09 0 50 0 59 0001070070202 WHOPPERS BAG 0 76 1 09 30 28 1 00 1 09 0 76 0 33 0001300000105 HEINZ KETCHUP 1 32 1 99 33 8 1 00 1 99 1 32 0 67 0001510000039 CREMETTA MOSTACOLI 0 79 1 29 100 00 2 00 2 38 0 00 2 38 0001600042040 BISQUICK 40 OZ 2 29 3 79 39 64 2 00 7 58 4 58 3 00 0001850005106 PADRINOS R F ORIG 1 84 2 69 31 60 1 00 2 69 1 84 0 85 00021108202
289. duct Maintenance of the Point of Sales A a menu The Edit a Product form will be displayed e A OEO mo To add a product click Add on the toolbar Bla a You can now enter the information related to the oe Tamen ODE St fizonan product you want to add Make sure to assign the ve ERR ad E a product to the appropriate department section e and vendor When a department is selected the Reston attributes for the department are loaded to the 2 7 o ap a eae product The pricing information for example type e peuse 7 of pricing that applies price amount for the mowiwwr ETT n product is also critical Enter the pricing data for ca fee oe the normal pricing of the product and if necessary a ee Petes O any special pricing that is in effect for the product Se E NoMetchCode type start and end dates for the special pricing Modified 1 20 2010 1 19 56PM Modified By MSS GLOBAL Crested 1 20 2010 1 00 39 PM Created By MSS GLOBAL For each type of pricing you can click the down arrow next to the Pricing Method field and a list of pricing methods is displayed that you can choose Click Ellipse next to either of the price fields to pop up the Cost Calculator form The Cost Calculator allows you to perform what if scenarios related to pricing cost and margins and applies the pricing information to the product Enter all other applicable POS related and attribute related data for the product on
290. e Special Cost Special Price Gross Margin 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 37 74 37 74 37 74 37 74 37 74 37 74 37 74 37 74 37 74 100 00 47 58 100 00 29 21 44 04 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 100 00 Disc gt b dd L dd Ad C A l sd ss dh se ss dd d dd dh d d dd se ss ss ss h Average Gross Profit 37 43 Mix Match Code Vendor Tax Scale FS DSD Products by Department GENERAL MERCHANDISE 363 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Product Group Report Upc 0007800000038 0007800000079 0007800000256 0007800000187 0007800000240 0007800000244 0007800000280 0007800000274 0007800000264 0007800000196
291. e Actual coupon discount coupon amount at the time of the sale RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 124 RETAIL 7 r Manual Electronic Coupon Movement continued Toolbar CUSTOMERS The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on the Electronic Coupon Movement form U c O Description Exits the current window Prints an Electronic Coupon Movement report Refer to the Electronic Coupon Movement Report topic in this section Displays the electronic coupon report on the screen Refer to the Electronic Coupon Movement Report topic in this section Activates the context sensitive help Z lol e Fe Electronic Coupon Movement Report The Electronic Coupon Movement Report function produces a Coupon Movement Summary Detail report listing all movement currently listed on the Electronic Coupon Movement form The report is sorted in Department name sequence The layout of these reports is contained in Appendix F This function is executed when or is clicked from the Electronic Coupon Movement form Table 5 2 contains a description of each field contained in the report Report field _____ Description S Format Movement by Detail Trigger Start Date End Date Proc Date Customer Movement Price Coupon Price Loss Total Loss Movement by Summary Coupon id Description Trigger Start Date End Date Movement Price Coupon Price Loss Total Loss Table 5 2 Trigger either
292. e Administration Menu for more information Note This process must be run after the store has closed for the day exception 24 hour stores see below Ringing up transactions for the current day after the store close has run will result in the loss of those transactions Note If suspended transactions exist for the closing day the following may occur depending on the Clear Suspended Transactions setting in the System Information function Clear Suspended Transactions Action performed by Store Close Setting Clears all suspended transactions without prompting the user the store close which will clear the transactions before the store close can proceed 24 Hour Store For 24 hour stores the Store Close process can be run at any time of the day even while transactions are being processed at the checkstand The Store Close process will update the processing date stamped on each transaction to the next consecutive day lf the store close cannot be run because of a system or other problem use the change date feature to force the update of the processing date to the next day For more information on running a 24 hour store refer to the Running a 24 Hour Store topic in the Appendices RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 296 RETAIL 7 r Manual ADMINISTRATION SETUP View System Log Files The View System Log Files form is used to view information stored in the various system paa k logs maintained by RETAIL The form as
293. e Number Number Number Date Time Date Time Number Currency Currency Currency Currency Currency Text Text Text Text Number Text Text Text Text These next fields are only visible if a Customer Debit Credit card number is selected Card Type Cardno Expired Authno RefNo Table 30 18 Selection Criteria Criteria selected on the Sort Criteria Card type Debit or Credit Card No Expiration date Authorization No received Reference No Electronic Journal form Employee no amp transaction no amp line no in ascending order RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Number Number Number Number Text 204 ADMINISTRATION RETAIL 7 r Manual l i Reset Product Close Store View System Log Files System qee POS Information ovement Clear Checker Login View S System POS Reset Product Clear Checker Store Close AR ee Information Information Movement Login Log Files Monitor Tills security Administration Modem for o Communication Monitor Tills Security Modem for Administration Communication y y y y y ana a View Securit R y A A Notify Checkstands with Update Checkstands with Serial Tracking Wireless Server Information Monitor Checkstands Setup Information Settings Settings Serial Notify Monitor Update tracking Wireless Checkstands Checkstands Checkstands Settings Settings
294. e c Press the Section key SE through the keyboard d Following by a Section number ENTER Note If this is the only transaction press the Total key TL through the keyboard key in 0 and press the Cash key CA through the keyboard to refund the amount in cash If the refund will be applied to an electronic tender enter TL then ET ENTER The customer will be prompted to slide the card through the MSR and follow the prompts on the pin pad Example from the keyboard RF500SE100 ENTER Refund 5 00 for a product from section 100 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 48 RETAIL 7 r Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOWTO Manager Functions This section will describe the functions that can be WZA performed by someone who has manager security level privileges In order to access the manager functions type in the manager transaction code MG ENTER or press the manager transaction key on the keyboard When a selection is made the system will prompt for a manager s password When using Normal Screen Mode Option 9 Maintain Data is selected Option 8 and Option 9 will change to Add a Customer and Add a Product allowing access to these functions Note A manager s number can be set up as a bar code that will scan when the manager function is selected Simply create a barcode containing the manager password for example 19 Listed below are instructions on how to complete each of the op
295. e normal cost and price for the product Displays the name of the Pricing Product Group the item belongs to added via Product Group Maintenance Unit Price Cost Unit Price Price Group Deal Price Qty Group Deal Price Price Target Margin Gross Margin Product Group SPECIAL PRICING Pricing Method Select from four pricing methods Unit Pricing Split Package Pricing Group Threshold Group Adjusted Limited Pricing Special Cost for the product Special Price for the product Quantity for this product to be priced under special group pricing Special group pricing applied to this product The date the special pricing begins The time of day the special pricing begins The date the special pricing ends The time of day the special pricing ends Indicates if mix match code is assigned to product for special pricing only When the pricing expires the mix match code will be removed Indicates if discounts will be allowed while the special pricing is in effect Unit Price Cost Unit Price Price Group Deal Price Qty Group Deal Price Price Start Time End Time Mix match Allow Disc PROPERTY Fdstamp Active Wicable Wic CVV Ad DSD Enforce Qty Print Label Allow Lookup Flag to enable or disable purchase of the product with food stamps Flag to indicate that the item is currently carried in inventory or is backordered Flag to indicate if the product can be purchased with a WIC
296. e of pricing is commonly used for random weight meat items buy 5 packages of meat for 20 00 Or a free item may be rewarded after the quantity has been purchased e Total Order A dollar amount off the order after the Minimum Order is reached Or award an item free after the minimum order is reached CUSTOMERS Edit a Coupon yal S Coupon ID H Price Reduction ie Coupon Type Preferred Customer y a Generate Coupon C Buy This A UPC rer Trigger Oty Amt Mismatch ae Coupon Amount Department y Coupon Link Section y a A Vendo y Upe Link ma Prod Group y Description Start Date 12 15 2006 Y Description2 End Date _y Description 3 Multiple M Order Limit Descri ption 4 Restrictions include Trigger Quantity or Amount Start and End dates if the coupon can be used on multiple orders Multiple Use limit the number of times a coupon can be used in an order Limit per Order and the minimum purchase amount before the coupon is awarded Min Purchase If you do not want the price of the trigger item included in the minimum purchase amount set Exclude Trigger Items to Yes in POS Information The Coupon Method options depend on the type of trigger selected For UPC and Mix Match triggers a Price Reduction or a Specified Price can be applied For most others a Price Reduction or Reduction can be applied Generate Coupon
297. e the purchase order number You can now enter sx 7 A pe the products you are ordering by entering in the A F e Cert_Code Unit Cost Price Case Cost Qty Qty Case Type 10 24 UPC of the product into the UPC field You can som mannan Swi s135 MA 400 also enter in products using their item code by clicking the UPC and toggling to item code Once youve entered a product specific product information will be loaded to the form To view the more detailed information click on the sma Buyer paan eee ta FAm Product Detail field You are now ready to enter a purchase amount for the product Three purchase types are supported in RETAIL Received which is the normal type Free indicates goods are being received for free no charge Returned indicates goods are being returned to the vendor which will result in a negative entry on the P O Enter in the quantity that applies to the product Allowances for a product s will automatically be applied as products are entered To view the allowances click the Allowances next to the Allowance total field As you enter the products they will be listed on the bottom portion of the form Click Cost Calculator 3 to adjust a products cost price and margin data The calculator can be used to perform what if scenarios in adjusting the cost and pricing data Cost and pricing data can also be updated and applied to the product file from this function When the Apply is
298. e 10 3 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 136 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Focus continued Show Customer s Favorite Products The Favorite Products for a Customer form KMS displays the top products the customer purchased Department tems Sales i 1 GROCERY 381 00 1 143 00 from the first time to current date This form is 0000000000001 Cinnamon Raisin Swit GROCERY 306 00 1 299 32 displayed when the Show Customer s Favorite eS E Bae en AE Product is clicked An item displavs mor me eee jaan inn oaucts S CIICKe te splays ore i 0000000556677 Bottle Retums BOTTLE RETURNS 130 00 6 40 than once if the same UPC number IS transferred 0000000885522 Clotted Cream DAIRY 122 00 582 72 0000000000005 Crusty wheat Rolls BAKERY 115 00 345 00 to another department 0000000007001 Chocolate Covered Raisins SWEETS2 110 00 440 00 0000000007002 Chocolate Covered Peanuts SWEETS2 109 00 218 00 0000000000025 Strawberry Jelly GROCERY 100 00 250 00 0000788788788 Dog GENERAL MERCHANDISE 87 00 522 00 0000000000012 Alberto 05 Conditioner GENERAL MERCHANDISE 81 00 567 00 0000000774411 Devon Clotted Cream DAIRY 75 00 375 00 0029876500000 Lobster T ail FISH 54 55 98 44 y Table 10 4 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer s Favorite Products form CUSTOMER FAVORITE PRODUCTS COLUMN DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION UPC Displays he UPCs of the customer s favorite products Description Display
299. e Currency Statement beginning Balance balance plus minus transactions within the selected period Terms Displays the terms description extended to the customer Date None Columns Date Charge activity dates Date None Activity Transaction short description Text None Reference No Checkstand No Till No Transaction No for checkstand Text None transactions Entered reference number for Backend entries Amount Charge activity transaction amounts Currency None Statement Displays the beginning balance of the period selected Currency Current balance plus minus Beginning Balance transactions from the current date to beginning date Table 9 6 Selection Criteria Based on input form customers with outstanding balances Sort Criteria Transaction date RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 133 RETAIL 7 User Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Focus The Customer Focus function allows retailers to Customer Forus z erR ala oalele El El focus on their customers and improve their customer loyalty This function allows retailers to e Rank their top customers for specific weeks months and years e View customer buying patterns for example which departments they are shopping in which products they are purchasing e View discounts consumed by the customer for example electronic coupons manufacturer coupons e View preferred times they shop e View the customer s favorite cashier s Date 10 26 2007 w e Week C Month C Year
300. e Point of Sales menu and complete the following task Products are the heart and soul of RETAIL Up EAE to this point we have just been preparing the EWB srianta sass system for the creation of the product file To add 1 E e a product click on the Add button Sel When you o cost STS pee e a e enter products make sure they are classified with a E sl S eS the proper department section and vendor Enter Seran 00 set frewaw the normal pricing for the product and any special a cross arg ama et AA pricing that may be in effect See the note below 4 z inii Batch E on entering product codes Enter the appropriate properties discount arrangements tax plans and Oa on e ee other information related to the product Enter in a a e ES Store Coupon T Stock on Hand in order to establish your n R ea beginning inventory for the product Other data for the product e g pricing levels secondary ma F ie EI o NIE vendors product groups can be entered by Ltn a ne e unt of Mesos a clicking on the various toolbar buttons Make sure ruta you refer to th e Man a ge Pro du cts topi C of th e Modified 11 1 2007 9 31 354M Modified By Jane Smith Created 5 23 2006 1 39 56 PM Created By Jane Smith Back End How To section and the Product Maintenance topic in the Back End Detail Documentation section for more information on all of the data that can be entere
301. e Vendor Name Vendor Created Allowance Desc Pp End Date Start Date Mi x Sugg Price Case Cost Poo Allowance Net Cost Modified by 86 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manage Employees Employee data is necessary within RETAIL to grant users access to the system and to track employee performance statistics This section will step the reader through the basic functionality within RETAIL that supports the setup of employee data Enter Employee Data In order to maintain employee data using EEEL RETAIL select the Employee Maintenance E LN UETH YM function under the MAINTENANCE section of Employee Number EE gt Employee Name the Administration menu nae To add an employee click the Add EA in the O MUI FirstName Lede AdminSecurity 0 Y toolbar You can now enter the employee NOOD g g g Back End Profile Manager v pal information The employee is automatically Y me assigned by the system This number is used in sino ETRE E the system to track statistics on the employee 7 and it appears on various reports and screens a _ Ef pe within the system Make sure to set the security A etl oS se y level of the employee based on the security DAA i levels established in the Security Administration Created 8 31 2006 9 04 00 AM Modified 10 3 2007 1 40 00PM Modified by 1 function To view the Security Administration data c
302. e configured to print or not print on the receipt through the POS Information function in the Back End RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 39 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Line Item Functions continued Verifying the Price of a Product UPC 1 Press the Price Verify key PV through the LL A keyboard Whole Grain Bread 2 Scan the product or key in the product code ENTER 2 35 3 The product description and price will be displayed Note A message of Product not Found will be displayed if BAKERY the product is not in the product file Press enter to sell item Verifying the Price of a Product Description Retail v 2010 1001 0 288 ROSF v 2010 1001 0 286 1 Press the Price Verify key PV through the keyboard Acorn squash ORURO a 7 7 Apple Ambrosia 00000000000294 2 Enter in a description partial or full or leave blank Sa for all products decada aan 00000000000313 Blueberries 0000000004343k Broccoli 0000000001212E Chayote 0000022334455 Cinnamon Raisin Swirl 0000000000001 Endive Belgian 0000000000028 3 A list of products will be displayed 4 A picture of the product will display if the product has a picture associated with it Noma pice 0 55 Special pice 0 00 5 If using Touch Screen press Price Inquiry 6 All of the products with Allow Lookup will be shown B pple rosia reen Onion Chayote oma
303. e cost price and margin data for a product The form allows the user to perform what if scenarios by changing data and having the system re calculate the cost and pricing data Click Cancel to ignore the calculated figures or Apply to accept the figures Click the RETAIL Calculator button located next to one of the Unit Price fields to access this form Cost Calculator Description Bioccolh Wendor Apply Pricing Cancel Unit Cost E Case Cost 0 00 o ido E Rounding Table Pack Unit Price 1 33 Gross Margin 124 81 Help Group Deal Price Qty Price Target Margin The cost calculator function is also accessible from other functions in the system including the Enter Review a Purchase Order Receive an Invoice and Enter Prices for Ad Batch Users must have security access to the Product Maintenance function to access the Cost Calculator function from other parts of the system When the Rounding Table button is clicked the Cost Calculator expands displaying fields to allow entry of a rounding table The user selects the last digit of the price drop down list 0 9 and enters the rounding criteria drop down list 9 to 9 For example If the user wants all prices which end in 4 to be rounded up to 9 then 5 would be selected as the rounding criteria To round down to 9 enter 5 as the criteria Once entered the rounding criteria are applied to all prices entered in the Product Maintenance form RETAIL USER REF
304. e criteria for creating reports for example Daily or Weekly This field is dependent on what was selected in the Schedule Report field For example if you choose Previous Days you can select the number of Days to generate the report for This field will be enabled if Custom was selected in the Schedule Report field This field will be enabled if Custom was selected in the Schedule Report field A UPC or range of UPCs can be entered for Product Reports Hash Departments are non sales departments and do not usually appear in Store Sales For example Bottle Returns Flag this field to include Hash Departments in the report The Department for Product Sales Report optional The Section for Product Sales Report optional The Vendor for Product Sales Report optional The Product Group for Product Sales Report optional Select the criteria for emailing the report such as Daily Weekly Monthly or Once Enter the time of day that the report will be e mailed Use the arrows to select the number of weeks between e mailing of reports For example select 1 to e mail the report every week or 2 to e mail the report every other week Put a checkmark next to the day or days of the week you would like to report sent Use the arrows to select the number of months between e mailing of reports For example select 1 to e mail the report every month or 2 to e mail the report every other month Put a checkmar
305. e customer sign the second Save the second receipt for balancing at the end of the shift Log h N Note Refer to Appendix E EFT processing for more information on credit debit EBT processing RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 46 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Voiding and Refunding This section will describe some of the various functions that can be used when completing void and refund transactions through the Front end module of RETAIL Please note that these functions are subject to requiring a manager s override depending on the security levels that have been set within RETAIL Voiding the Previous item a To void the previous item for example product tender press the Void key VD ENTER through the keyboard Voiding an Earlier Product a To void a product for example product other than the previous product press the Void key VD through the keyboard then re enter the product using the same key sequence used to ring it up Example from the keyboard VD28 ENTER _ Void product 28 Voiding an Earlier Product by Scrolling a To void a product by scrolling press the void key and scroll to the item with the up or down arrow key to select the item and press enter Example from the keyboard VD Scroll to Item ENTER Void product highlighted Voiding a Weighted Product a To void a weighted product place the product back on the scale then the press the
306. e for a pee doce C Upe particular line item on the P O select UPC Type a Upe Description Type Details Amount ltem Origination description for the adjustment the amount and select OOOOOO0gg0w34 Alemance Alowance Adust Ey Upc BUI 0000000000012 Shipping Shipping Adjust By Purchase Order 2 00 an adjustment type Adjustments listed as Reductions are treated as negative adjustments i e reducing the amount of the PO or invoice Adjustments listed as Added Charges are treated as positive adjustments i e adding to the amount of the PO or invoice 1 0000000000034 Shipping Shipping Adjust By Purchase Order 0 77 1 0000000000234 Shipping Shipping Adjust By Purchase Order 4 20 1 0000000002003 Shipping Shipping Adjust By Purchase Order 2 88 1 0000000005895 Shipping Shipping Adjust By Purchase Order 432 1 0000000098765 Shipping Shipping Adjust By Purchase Order 0 39 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Total 14 100 Table 12 2 contains a description of each field contained in the P O Adjustments form P O ADJUSTMENTS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION PO Number Displays the purchase order number for which adjustments are entered Proc Date Displays the date defaults to current date for which the adjustment is processed Amount The dollar amount of the adjustment entered Description Additional detail of the adjustment entered Reductions Select from Allowance Credit Damaged Rebate Spoil and Misc Reducti
307. e form by clicking the select a tender amp button Note User must have security rights to access the Tender Maintenance function This form will also distinguish between active and inactive cashiers Click the Time button to change the criteria used to determine an active versus inactive cashier e 0 el 0 e m Lane Till EmpNo Cashier Active Recone C Check Credit Card Debit Card Food Stamps Coupons InStore Charges WIC 1 1JaneS No No f 22 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 1 2 Leslie H No No 80 i 0 00 1 7 EvanN No No 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 0 00 0 00 0 00 24 16 0 00 190 06 0 00 0 00 0 00 24 16 0 00 Table 31 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Monitor Tills form MONITOR TILLS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Lane Displays the checkstand number Cashier Displays the employee name assigned to the checkstand Tenders Displays the current amount for the tender 5 tenders can be displayed at a time Totals Displays the total amount of the tenders currently displayed Table 31 2 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 243 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Monitor Tills continued Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on the Monitor Tills form Button Description Exit the current window Display the Monitor Tills report on the screen Refer to the Print Monitor Tills Report topic in
308. e from the keyboard 500PK028 5 00 per pound for product 28 Splitting up Multi Pack Products a Type the total number of items in the multi pack i e 6 for 6 pack b Followed by a Press the key c Followed by the quantity the customer is buying d Followed by the Press the key e Followed by the product code for the multi pack either scan or key the code ENTER Example from the keyboard 6 3 028 ENTER 3 products out of a 6 pack for product 28 Toggle a Product s Tax Status a Key in the Tax Table number set up in the Tax tab in the POS Information task b Followed by the tax toggle key and ENTER TN ENTER through the keyboard c Ring up the item either a product department or section transaction Example from the keyboard 1TN ENTER 28 ENTER Product 28 will now include tax from tax plan one Scanning a Coupon with a Barcode a Scan the coupon s barcode with the scanner Note Coupon will be deducted only if a product s manufacturer s number matches the coupon If you are unable to scan the coupon key in the coupon as a department coupon see next section RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 38 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Line Item Functions continued Keying in a Department Coupon a Press the Coupon key MC through the keyboard b Followed by coupon amount c Followed by a Department Key refer to Keying
309. e interval of hourly or every Help Time Interval 15 minutes The data can be further refined to display a T by total store departments or by a single department A By 15 Minute Show Report le By Store C Ep Department C Single Department Table 30 14 contains a description of each field contained in the Register Productivity report Start Date Start date of selected period Date Time N A End Date End date of selected period Date Time N A Hour Time span Number None No of Checkers No of checkers logged in Number None Sign on Hours Amount of sign on hours Number None Sales Amount Total sales Currency None Items Sold Items sold Number None No of Customers No of customer serviced Number None Avg Order Size Average order size Currency Sales Customers Avg Item Price Average item price Currency Sales ltems Total Fields Total of details Text Sum of detail Fields Table 30 14 Selection Criteria Based on dates time period and department selection entered on form Sort Criteria Listed in order by the chronological hour Print Transactions by Reason Report The function will produce a Transaction by Reason report MAA for the selected time listing checkstand transactions where a reason code was entered The layout of this lar Aaah report is contained in Appendix F The Transactions by OK Reason Report form is displayed when the Print Start Date 11 6 2007 hi e Transactions by Reason Report function is
310. e pricing product group to the batch The use of pricing product groups simplifies the price management functions in RETAIL APPLY To apply the batch to the products file click Apply on the toolbar If the date of the batch is currently in effect then the batch is updated to the products file immediately If the date of the batch is a future date then the batch will be scheduled for update and the products file will be updated on the appropriate date as part of a SQL job To get information for a past batch click Find Batches hy and a list of batches are displayed Select one of the batches from the list and a list of products for the batch are displayed in the bottom portion of the form You can sort the list of products either by Movement Profit Gross or UPC by clicking Sort Products from the toolbar If you want to look at a specific product select it from the list by double clicking the product To analyze the product s activity click Sales tab and then click Quantity Sold eel The quantity sold for the past 13 weeks is displayed for your review Click Review Batches on the toolbar to view a list of all the batches that contain the product you are entering editing This allows you to identify any conflicts that might exist for the product Note Use the Batch Priority Management function under the PRODUCTS section of the Point of Sales menu to manage and prioritize batches that have been entered RETAIL USER REF
311. e recorded transaction RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 108 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS New Credit Memos continued Grid columns Applied Click Applied boxes to apply credit to specific charges Due Date Lists the due dates of charge transactions Status Lists the status of the charge transactions ProcDate Lists the effective dates of the charge transactions Type Lists the type of the charge activities Charge Finance Charge or Misc Charge Amount Lists the original amount of the charge transactions Balance Lists the current balances of the partially paid charge transactions Paying Amount Lists the amount paid or amount being applied to the credit memo Ref No Lists the reference numbers of the charge transactions TransNo Lists the sequentially assigned trans IDs of the charge transactions Table 2 11 Processing buttons The following describes special notations on the buttons used to process payments on the New Edit Credit Memos form Button Description Add When grayed out the form is on new add a credit memo mode From Edit Credit Memos form click this button to change to New Credit Memo form for new credit transaction entry Save Saves edited applied and new credit transactions Credit saved without applying to invoices needs to be retrieved from the In store Charge AR Maintenance form to apply to charges then click Save again Delete Deletes credit Credit deletion is allowe
312. eck Letter1 Date the first notification letter was sent Letter2 Date the second notification letter was sent Letter3 Date the third notification letter was sent Memo Displays any notes on the bad check Table 3 1 Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on the Bad Check form Button Description Exits the current window Prints a bad check report Refer to the Print Customer Bad Checks Report section Displays the bad check report on the screen Refer to the Print Customer Bad Checks Report section Saves your entries or changes for the current record Jumps to the Add a Bad Check Function Jumps to the Edit a Bad Check Function Finds a customer by name Refer to the RETAIL Search topic in the Customer Maintenance section El E 80 1 oF o Gives a quick view of all the bad checks in the system Refer to the Customer Bad Checks topic in this section Helps to access the form used to change the check return fee Refer to the Set Check Return Fee topic in this section Activates the context sensitive help gt E RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 115 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Bad Check Maintenance continued Customer Bad Checks The Customer Bad Checks form is used to KASARNE perform a quick view of all the bad checks in Check Date Check No Check Amt Check Fee Home Phone Du i 10 10 2007 1667 21989 30 00 1233344231 89 the system The d
313. eckstand n 181 RETAIL 7 r Manual Product Maintenance The Product Maintenance form is used to add maintain and delete product information The Product file is the heart and soul of RETAIL This file is used at the core of the critical system operations The integrity of this file dictates the integrity of the entire system From this form the product pricing arrangements and attributes can be maintained The Front End and Back End modules will make use of the product information which will be added directly into the system Product data can be retrieved by UPC Item Code or Description by clicking Joutton located to the right of the UPC field Use the clone function in edit add mode to add a new product that is similar to an existing product Make a product inactive Active field unchecked to not allow it to be sold at the checkstand Click Hide Show Product List button B to display related products either by a consecutive selected number of items after the current item Item Group Number or by Product Groups in which the current item is included Selections of items displaying in the grid is made through the Settings form discussed later in this section Many other options are available through the toolbar refer to the Toolbar section Edit a Product e eo S BL a 5 mw Normal Pricing Method UPC Description ltemCode Depts Section Vendor Others Property Fdstamp Wicable D
314. ecseeeeseasessaeeceuseseaeecsensessaseseaeeessneeseeeessneeseneas 36 Overriding a Price oma Scanned Pro UC Ascesa e e a tds 36 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 3 RETAIL 7 r Manual TABLE OF CONTENT Entering Multiple Quantities for Keyed temMS ooooccocococococonconcnoonnnonnnnonnnonnnnonnnonnnnonnnononnonn nono ncnn non nn nono nnnnnrarnnnnnnanennnss 36 Entering Multiple Quantities for Scanned Items ooococcccccnccacoccnooonconnnnonononcnnonnconnnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nono nnnnnrannnnnnnanencnss 37 Manually Entering Unit of Measure for a Product c ccccsscecessseeessseeeessneeessseeessseeeeeseneeessneeseseeesssaeeessseeeeesneeeesseeeens 37 Manually Entering a Weighted Item Department or Secti0N ooconococcoccnnoccncnonnncononononnononnnnanoncnnnnnannnrnnnnnnannnrarnnnnnnnos 37 Entering a Weighted Produet UPC cs 37 Deducting Tare Weight from a Weighted Product cccccccssessseessseceseecssseesseeessseesssueeseaeessseeeecaeesseeeesseeeesaeesssneeesnees 37 Manually Deducting Tare Weight from a ProducCt ccococcnccccoocccnoconononnnnononcanonononnnnononcnn nono nnn canon non non n coran nnnrnnrarnnrannnos 38 Overriding a Price on a Weighted Product ccccccccssccssecsssesssecseeeseesessecseesessecsaeseseecsaeesseecseeseseeceseecaeeeseessseeeeeesaeeesess 38 Splitting up Multi Pack Products cccccscccssecessecsseeessecsseecseeeessecseeeeseecsaeessseceaeesseeceaeacsaeee
315. ed Aggregate Store Sales Report This function will produce an Aggregate Store Sales Report showing departments under Non Hash or Hash department and then aggregated to department s as set up in the Department Maintenance form This function is executed when the Aggregate Sales Report button is selected from the Stores Sales form Table 19 7 contains a description of each field contained in the Aggregate Store Sales report Reportfield_ Description Format Calculation Departments Department name listed in order of Text aggregate departments Sales Total Sales for the department Currency Percentage of total sales Percent Dept Sales 100 Total Sales Open Dept Sales Total sales to open departments Currency Cost of Sales Total Cost of sales excluding sales to open Currency department Gross Margin Percentage profit on sales excluding sales Percent Sales Cost of Sales Sales 100 to open department Items Total number of items sold Number Avg Price Average price of items sold Currency Sales Items Avg Order Average Order size Number Items Customers Customer Total number of customers Number SUMMARY TAXES Tax A Total of tax amount using tax schedule A Currency Amount of tax applied using Tax A Tax B Total of tax amount using tax schedule B Currency Amount of tax applied using Tax B Tax C Total of tax amount using tax schedule C Currency Amount of tax applied using Tax C Tax D Total of tax amount using tax sched
316. ed 7 Prompt for Price Fr Type Negative Price Eligible Ej f Discount Unit Price Increase Unit Price By ooo O Discount Cost Increase Cost Note When completing mass product changes an entry will be created in the user activity log in order to provide an audit trail of data modified using this function Refer to the User Activity Tracking topic in the General Topics section Note Pricing changes will only update the unit price normal or special of a product If a product is using a pricing method other than the unit price the group price will not be affected Prices for products using split price as the pricing method will NOT be updated since a unit price does not exist for these products RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 205 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Mass Product Changes continued Table 25 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Mass Product Changes form Section Displays a list of sections for selected products Vendor Displays a list of vendors for selected of products Others Displays a list of product groups for selected products FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Ad Batches Displays a list of ad batches for selection of products On Ad check box Displays an X if the products are updated as an ON AD product This flag will trigger the Front End system to display a savings line of information You Saved when the product is rung up Refer to
317. ed so the e a a aj an aa e e a M s user may begin from any day of the week a a eT a Elec Foodstamps 0 00 0 00 0 00 9 00 9 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Store Sales are displayed by Department som 22 1 s E Under the department the Tax summary for ar fe m as Misc 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 12 40 0 00 0 00 1240 v each day is shown This is tax collected and is included in the sum calculation below The total sales are shown under the department information This sum is all the monies that were collected for the day RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 179 RETAIL 7 r Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Point of Sales Products Product Maintenance Analyze Product Categories Product Analyze Changes Products r y Item Search Product ade cast ltem Search Product ai Select Label Product Groups O Calculator Maino ae Type Labels Sales y 3 Pricing Coupons Product Coupons Review l Levels l Triggered l Pres Vendors 3 i Triggered KSR ae Batches pees Sales x Review Allowances Batches Billbacks Quick Add Product Group Mass Product an m Quick Edit Maintenance Changes Product Kits Numbers Product Quick Add Quick Edit J Labels y v y y Product Product Create Product Mass Memo Group Repor
318. ed to research discrepancies The user can go into the database to search for the missing record As shown in the screen shot below a Gift Card was used to partially tender the order and then the order was suspended The Authorization number for the Gift Card is also shown by scrolling to the right Data in Table TTSArchive in PO5STrans on a ACNE 99990748503 99990748503 99990748503 99990748540 99990748540 TES 0000000000001 2 99 lt NULL gt 0000000000002 Bread 3 99 lt NULL gt 0000000000003 Whole Wheat Brea 3 99 lt NULL gt 0000000000004 white Bread 3 99 lt NULL gt 0000000000001 Milk lt NULL gt 0000000000002 Bread lt NULL gt 0000000000003 Whole Wheat Brea 3 99 lt NULL gt GIFT CARD 2 99 lt NULL gt 0000000000002 Bread 3 99 lt NULL gt 0000000000001 Milk 5 lt NULL gt lt NULL gt GROCERY 5 99990748540 99990748540 1 15 2010 99991555413 M 1 15 2010 99991555413 1 15 2010 99991555413 QQ MN BROWN WD a ae Be Be Be oe oe mnmnK Oc Oooo ooo m RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 53 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manager Functions continued Option 8 Media Swap Function Allows swapping of amounts from one tender to another Media swaps can be performed for any tender that has the Media Swap attribute checked M through the Tender Maintenance function Tenders and the current till amount will be listed on the Media Swap form Follo
319. ed to setup various system aula related information The types of system information setup oS ES EEE through tabs on this form include Backups Detauks 1 Defaults Parameters used by the Back End system e ea he These parameters are critical to system operations Transactions Transaction history backup archival and system log files ec a oe history time frames are entered as well as configurable Leases FT eee attributes used in the Back End system The Files section Product is used to inform RETAIL of the location of certain files eee eee used in various processes Bese Verki ES 2 Databases RETAIL database information is setup aoe ee with the help of this tab This informs the system of the HA location of the database aaa 3 License This is used to display the licensee name used Cost Changes Fl 22 by the system as well as the contents of the logo file The pen A logo is a bitmap file accessible by Microsoft Paint that i Data Synchronization Quantity Halo can be easily modified The logo file is used by the Back as End and Front End systems to print on reports and receipts respectively The logo file must exist in the C Retail logo bmp_ directory on the Back End computer s and in the C Program Files Retail POS directory on the Front End computers NOTE Changing the name of the licensee will invalidate the license 4 Checkstands Used to identify the network names of the Front End checkstands 5 Notification Used t
320. ed without applying to invoices needs to be retrieved from the In store Charge AR Maintenance form to apply to charges then click Save again Delete Deletes payment Payment deletion is allowed only to Back End originated entries and as long as it is not yet applied to charges Cancel Disregards new payment entry Click this button to exit form Apply Applies payment automatically to open charges from earliest to latest Available field displays zero when payment is applied This button changes to Reset after it is clicked Reset Changes application of payment Available field goes back to original amount equal to payment amount Note After the payment application is saved the Reset button does not work User needs to manually click Yes fields corresponding to invoices where payment need not apply This button changes to No after it is clicked New Credit Memos The New Credit Memos form is used to EAS record and issue credit memos entered on GO the Back End This form is displayed if you o Ial click Credit Memo from the toolbar The Name Fonema Han in 6 ae Ea Edit Credit Memos form displays when a Balance FE ee Delete credit row is clicked twice in any column Close from Proc Date to Trans No column of the 2 Avs In store Charge form The upper part of the Ne SA27 Napad BOI Charge MeO SO Te E screen displays the credit memo clicked e 72am napa vamo Guy ns na a The grid displays the charges where e eenas ao
321. ee ey Pee Ree ee 199 REO VEO teta td ace eat eaicaen aaa A naan epee dentate 200 POCTV CO NANCO Std MMR PRS fee A ee 201 PIU E BOWN asa ee ee oe Rr ee ctas 201 QUICK DDC ase asa ea ssc das eee cecal sac iia 202 PRODUCT GROUP MAINTE NANG E 00 tt dd aa e ic ii 203 TOOIDEF ANG FORO BUUONS ooreis a a iaa 204 FEOQUC GIOUD NEP Ni A iaa 204 MASS PRODUCE HANGES ut ie lic 205 o AAA A II A A A A A 207 FANEMEaSSRLOQUC CNAE Si AA A AA A da 207 ANALYZE PRODUCT CATEGORIES tc o ended 208 A O E ta tlc le Retief lee edipaternate noha bie nett diateelnidigba ce dsdligoele be 208 TOM A AN A AN ina 208 PRODUCT BATCHES MAINTENANCE Si Ae 209 TOODA Aitana 212 PIM PIOGUCT BANES REDON nesia mana a e 213 APOY BAC A e i e a at ea ated tes 214 Seca Fro uer ACH areia AA A tl a la 214 Greate NOW AICI cette e E A A E O eE 214 Review Related Buches aid ie lead 215 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 7 RETAIL 7 r Manual TABLE OF CONTENT PRINT AD BATCH MARKDOWN REPORT sasare h r a a S 216 BACH PRIORI NACEN e eh ate ee oe 217 REPORT A A O RP OE OE TT 218 A ee OO gE oo I eee EE Re ETN 219 PRINTEC O iii 219 PRINT PRODUCT PRCE CHANGES ia tidad 220 SYNCHRONIZE CHECKSTANDS WITH PRODUCTS ssssseeeeeeececececcccaaeesesseseeceeeeeeeeeceeeaaaaaauaesseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaeeesess 221 E 222 TILL STATISTICS AND BALANCING ida nenonnn 225 AAA TEE E ane SI E S O E 226 SOC ANETO CC resurser i a ai 226 TUESTQUSTES HONDO nicotina a iia A a A a a A E ii 228
322. eeeeennanenseseees 128 PRINTF GUSTOMER AER ORT Biosca arto 129 PRINT CUSTOMER BAD CHECKS REPORT iicc seninarsutsntccecaedeninsswiaventadeanintiedecasabstasavanencuanavbecd wadedeves aii aiani whcietediuatios 129 N STORE CHARGE REPORT a ACI ir sida 130 CHARGE ACTIVITY REPORT e e ates ato none ates 131 CHARGE BALANCE DETAISREROR Wiscecaciesedee conan ocentusedtcobed ots cedoecesrnt adana eie irada karaii dedeh a oetsseesua ok ndara tre nest aaees 132 CHARGE BALANCE SUMMARY REPOR T tn e ia i 132 IN STORE CHARGE 91 ATEMENT we ssctasssssndensoeanCoccwesavecteoeedattiegdenceeod aainbiededts eoel aa 133 GUSTOMERFOCU ir ice EAA 134 o AR CS A ee tate aaa a ac Pan a ee ei ae 135 show Times Customer Shops Me Slo A 136 Show Customer s Favorite Cashiers cccccscccccccccscccesccccccccnnsseseseecensnsnnsseeeeeensnanssesecersunaussesecensuannssessersnnanness 136 SHOW CUSIOMEr ST v rn Frodu S ii de o ie ne a able 137 SHOW CUSIOMICH S LIISCOUIIES o e o e e e dd ad 137 Show the Departments Shopped by the CUSLOMES u csccccescccesssceenssecesssecesssesesesesesssesesuseseseseseausesesesesssnessaas 138 Show Customer s 12 Week Department Distribution cccccscccceessccsesscsessnsssessesesecsenassesscassesseasessessssessnaaees 138 GUSTOIMEE FOCUS PEPON did os dla 139 INVENTOR Y COUNT sasoe aaa a tadas 141 AAA O II AR EEE 142 IPVO COUNT ebees tutes 142 OPEN A NEW REVIEW A PURCHASE ORDER cta cocks cies De a aa el ae 143 o A A NR RN edad esi a cet
323. either one is selected the Product Template Selection form displays The drop down menu lists the Default Template and all templates created from the Administration menu Templates Maintenance The Product Quick Add and Quick Edit are user customizable forms that support adding and editing of products The fields displayed on the form are defined using the Templates Maintenance function in the Administration menu If a template is not defined then default fields are displayed for both quick add and quick edit as depicted on the right Templates are user specific and the template selection is based on the user s password This functionality provides the ability to customize the product data maintenance function to be specific to a user or group of users The template name will be displayed at the top of the form The fields available for selection on the template are a subset of the fields on the Product Maintenance form RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Product Template Select 4 Template Y Cancel Product Quick Add Default Template UPC Save Description PO Close Department Pe Help Vendor e Normal Price PO Product Quick Edit Default Template UPC Save Description Help Department Vendor Normal Price 202 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Group Maintenance The Product Groups form is used to group BETA product
324. ending inventory including your shrink Remember You will not be able to use this function until an inventory count s is entered in the system The system will search for an inventory count matching the start date you entered and use the inventory count as the initial beginning inventory To calculate shrink the system will search for an inventory count matching the End Date you entered Refer to the Enter Inventory Count topic covered earlier in this section RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 85 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manage Inventory continued Allowances Bill Backs Enter in any vendor allowances and bill backs by using this form Allowances will automatically be applied to any P O or invoice entered via the Back End module or the RETAIL Wireless module The allowance amount will automatically reduce the PO or invoice amount when the product is entered Bill Backs and any amount due in the form of rebates from the vendor can be tracked The amount due from the bill back is calculated by clicking calculate in the toolbar The system will calculate the quantity sold of the product based on the most current product movement data available RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Edit an Allowance Allowances Bill Backs UPC Product Group zi Description ltem Code Pack Size Vendor Name z Description ltem StartDate EndDate Retail Price Allowanc
325. entering changes for more than one tab click Apply before clicking any other tab Special pricing changes must be applied through a batch To create a batch click Create Batch fa on the toolbar Enter in a batch ID in the Batch ID field press ENTER and type the start and ending dates When the batch is created it must be applied to the product file using the Product Batches Maintenance function Click Find a Batch from the toolbar to locate the batch When the batch is loaded to the screen click Apply on the toolbar Note Take care in using this task If you click on Apply the changes become permanent and cannot be reversed Note Pricing changes will only update the unit price normal or special for a product If a product using a pricing method other than unit price the group price is not affected Prices for products using split price as the pricing method is not updated since a unit price does not exist for these products Note An audit trail of changes performed by the Mass Product Changes function is kept in the User Activity Log Access this log by using the View System Log Files function under the Administration menu RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 11 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Maintain Products Data continued Track Product Movement Tracking product movement is critical for retailers to enable them to make important decisions related to the products they offer RETAIL displ
326. eport prints on the receipt printer Option 5 Check Override Function Overrides security to allow a check to be accepted for the current transaction A manager message as depicted on the right will appear if there is a problem with the customer s check writing privileges The message numbers will change depending on the type of problem encountered The No check writing error messages are configured via the POS Information Point of Sale tab privileges e 1 message Customer has no check writing privileges e 2 message Number of checks written by the customer has exceeded the number allowed per day set through the POS Information form e 3 message Number of checks written by the customer has exceeded the number allowed per week set through the POS Information form To override the system and allow the check to be tendered complete the following steps a The checker should now hit the Clear key or Type CL ENTER through the keyboard to clear the message b The manager can complete a check override to allow a check to be accepted for this transaction by following these steps Access the Supervisor menu and choose 5 2 Click OK or ENTER to the message All checks will now be allowed for the current transaction 3 Select 10 or enter 0 to exit 4 Press the Total key or Type TL ENTER as the transaction code to total the order The checker shou
327. er OF Operators Cost A 3 Frice Criteria as Cance Gross Oty a ic Help Revenue TotalCost e Select the field to be used as a filter from the list displayed under the Filter heading Once you ve selected the field select the filter criteria using a combination of the operators and criteria displayed Select the sort option desired from Sort By f Descending Description a Cost Ascending the list displayed and whether you want the sort Price i order in descending or ascending sequence Gross Click OK and the filter will be applied to the data Aero E displayed on the Product Sales form RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 173 RETAIL 7 r Manual POINT OF SALES STORE SALE Show Product Movement The Show Product Movement form is used to ZMT view movement sales for a product for a desired time period Movement is not only displayed for the time period selected but can ie rr i a URE Description Pack Size Oty Customers also be displayed for the following time frames 0000000000001 CINNAMON RAISIN SWIRL 0 168 00 108 Total Cost Total Revenue Margin Gross Profit Ad Loss P revi ous 1 3 W e eks 226 800 739 20 69 32 512 40 0 00 P revious 1 2 mo nths Include all products with the same ltemCode Previous 10 years The amount of movement available for display depends on the amount of history maintained in the system Note The calculation of Total Revenue is the same
328. er Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Maintenance continued Export Labels Click the Export Labels button from the toolbar to Emm access the Export Labels function Data can be exported for products in an entire department section or select by other For example product group By not selecting Department md OF any criteria all products with the Label field M will be Cancel Section selected Data for each product will be written to a text file ProductLabels txt Data in this file can then be imported into a label program that supports importing of data Note Default Selection is by Print Label flag Help Other Table 23 8 contains a description of each field contained in the Export Labels form EXPORT LABELS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Department List of departments for selection Section List of sections for selection Other List of other types of selection For example product groups Table 23 8 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 195 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Maintenance continued Price History Click the Price History button from the toolbar in Price history for UPC 0000000000001 Modified On Cost Unit Price DealQty DealPrice P Method Special Who Modified the Product Maintenance form to view the Price 5 30 2007 102047 A 0 Jane Smith History form This form will display a history of price 22007111644 3002 300 3 3 28 2007 8 44 54 A
329. er must have a user profile to access Product Maintenance to use this function Changes applied will update the product in the Product file Refer to Cost Calculator topic in the Open a New Review a Purchase Order section Activates the context sensitive help RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 150 RETAIL 7 r Manual Receive an Invoice continued Select an Invoice INVENTORY You can use the Select an Invoice form to show all HERA Invoices that currently exist in the system for the selected vendor The form will allow selection of an invoice to be displayed on the Receive an Invoice form This form is displayed when the find button is clicked on the Receive an Invoice form Invoice Number PO Number PO Date Vendor 0000000005 10 24 2007 0000000006 10 24 2007 17 Cancel Table 13 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Select an Invoice form Invoice Number Displays the Invoice Number PO Number Displays the Purchase Order number PO Date Displays the Purchase Order date Table 13 2 Invoice Document This function will produce a Receiving Invoice document for the selected invoice This function is executed when or is selected on the Invoice form Reportfield Description Format Calculation Comp name Company name Text None compadd1 Company address Text None compadd2 Company address Text None compadd3 Company address Text None compadd4 Company address Text None name Customer
330. ere the initial checkstand loan in Mba amounts configuration settings various tendering limits and coupon setup occurs This is needed so the front end system can operate efficiently and enforce certain store policies Scroll down the list and enter appropriate data in each of the fields The data is automatically saved as it is entered As you select the different fields a description of the field is displayed in the Description field at the bottom of the form Setup Receipt Banner The Receipt Banners section is used to Check Franking setup information that will print on the various receipts generated by RETAIL Multiple ae lines can be entered for each type of banner ie as well as the font size bold property and print alignment for each line Credit Card Header Header M W N W N N Trailer The banner types include Check Franking Prints on the back of the checks Credit Card Header Prints on the top of the credit card slips Check Deposit Prints on the back of the checks Receipt Header Prints at the top of the receipt and checkstand screens Receipt Trailer Prints at the bottom of the receipt and checkstand screens RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Deposit Information RETURNED CHECKS 20 00 SERVICE FEE Goodwin s Market 5041 La Mart Riverside C 92507 NatWest Henry s Discount Food 5 Pleasant Lane Thank You Goodwin s Market Thank You 295
331. erence No Till No Checkstand No Transaction No when Text None activity originated at the checkstand Backend entry reference is the text input by the user Memo Detailed description of activity Applies to the Text None Backend entry only Amount Charge activity amount Currency None Balance Displays the charge account s running balance Currency Current balance plus minus charge Activity is listed in descending chronological order activity for the next row balance Rows Names Names of customers Text None Card Numbers ID numbers of customers Text None Table 9 4 Selection Criteria Based on input form customer selected or all customers with activities during the selected period Sort Criteria By customer in alphabetical order Charge Balance Summary Report The Charge Balance Summary Report function Instore Charge Report Balance Summary EJES produces a Customer In store Charge Balance EER Summary report listing all customers with outstanding Preview Print balances as of the current End date The Start Date and Pizzen inie specific Customer Card number as selections are ignored Stat Date 8 20 2007 F in the generated report End Date MT gt me Cardo Help MO m RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 132 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Charge Balance Summary Report continued The layout of this report is found in Appendix F Table 9 5 contains a description of each field contained in the Cus
332. eria Criteria entered by user Sort Criteria Vendor Name RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 160 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Print POs by Vendors The Print POs by Vendors function will produce an Hama Outstanding Purchase Orders Report by vendors within a desired time frame pe ox Cancel Vendor Total Store Help Date Ranges From 1016 2007 To 10 26 2007 y Table 18 4 contains a description of each field contained in the Outstanding Purchase Orders report Report field Description Format Calculation PO Date Date PO was originally prepared Text None PO Number PO number assigned by the RETAIL system Text None Total Cost Total net of adjustment amount of the invoice Currency None Total Price Ext retail amount total reflected in the invoice Currency None Gross Margin Percentage of Gross Profit to Total Price Percent Gross Profit Total Price 100 Gross Profit Difference between Total Price less Total Cost Currency Total Price Total Cost Table 18 4 Selection Criteria Criteria entered by user Sort Criteria Vendor Name RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 161 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Paid Unpaid Invoices by Vendors The Paid Unpaid Invoices by Vendors function will LME produce a list of paid and or unpaid purchase invoices i Vendor ALL VENDORS X by vendors within a desired time frame Select the Paid Invoice cai Start Date v End Date v Y U
333. ers from to the customer list and customer group list boxes Use to attach the selected coupon to the selected customers displayed in the customer group list box A coupon entry will be created for each customer RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 178 RETAIL 7 r Manual POINT OF SALES STORE SALE Show Customer Sales continued Customer Sales Report The Customer Sales Report will report on the customer sales information for the selected category on the Customer Sales form The la al out of this report is contained in Appendix F Not available in electronic form This function is executed when E or Lal Lal is selected from the Customer Sales form Table 22 3 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer Sales report Report field Description Format _ Calculation Category Displays the category selected Text Selected Category Start Date Start date of selection Date Time Selected Time Period End Date End date of selection Date Time Selected Time Period Customer Customer name Text None Card Customer card Text None Home Phone Customer home phone Text None Zip Code Customer zip code Text None Qty Quantity purchased by customer Number None Cost Cost of products purchased Currency None Total Total purchase amount Currency None Profit Total profit Currency Total Cost Gross Gross margin Percent Total Cost Total Table 22 3 Selection Criteria Shows customer sales dat
334. ert 151 16 0 Applied Backend 9 13 2007 Finance Chargs 13 13 30 10 13 2007 Paid Finance 001 Finance Charge 42 nce Charge sn HW 10 10 2007 Pad Finance 0 0029 Finance 36 227 32 2 1 1 3 All in store charges or payments made through the Front End checkstands will be available for review through this form Any additional charges or payments or miscellaneous entries can be added through this form All entries pertaining to the customer are displayed in the bottom of the form Note Only the memo field can be modified for an entry Offsetting entries must be added to adjust amounts Click an entry in the list to make it available for edit To print a customer statement for a specific time period click on the Statement button in the toolbar This generates a Statement of Accounts that can be mailed to the selected customer for payment Additional reports listing in store charge activity and customer balances activity are also available RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 73 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manage Products Managing products is one of the most critical tasks within RETAIL Product information is the heart and soul of RETAIL This section explains the basic functionality within RETAIL supporting the management of products Maintain Products Data Edit aProduct BS Ap fad e 8 0 e Ola ele eel sa Maintaining products data is done through the Pro
335. es and amounts of Wic CVV vouchers Note this command must be entered at the beginning of the orden 2 Process the items and total the order If a product is not flagged as Wic CVV an error message will display If the amount of the order exceeds the amount of the Wic Voucher the cashier will be warned The customer can decide to proceed and pay with additional tenders 3 Tender the order with a Wic CVV tender WV tender entered through the Tender Maintenance function 4 The customer can use additional tenders but the Wic Vouchers MUST be used first 5 If using Food Stamps the foodstamp card MUST be used second The cashier will be warned 6 Additional tenders then may be used Accepting Canceling HALOS LALOS Limits 1 To Accept the transaction simply press ENTER 2 To Cancel the transaction press the Clear key CL ENTER through the keyboard Note Halos Lalos are set up for each department to avoid checker error The HALOS is the maximum amount used in checking for keyboard entry errors while LALOS is the minimum amount Re print Checkstand Receipt 1 To reprint a receipt press the Reprint receipt key RP ENTER through the keyboard RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 33 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Overall Order Functions continued Clear Message from Screen 1 Press the clear key CL ENTER through the keyboard Open Cash Drawer 1 Press
336. es the functions supported by the toolbar located on the Security Administration form Button Description Exits the current window Saves your entries or changes for the current record Helps to enter reason codes for a checkstand transaction or manager function Refer to the Reason Codes topic in this section Activates the context sensitive help a oA Reason Codes Click the Reason Codes button from the Pisssdldedsas Security Administration form to access the a gt Reason Codes form This form allows entry of besem lamps reason codes for checkstand transaction keys aad and manager functions When reason codes a ee Delete are entered and the Reasons Required field is SoH Close flagged the reason codes will be displayed on Help the Front End checkstand screen when the transaction key or manager function is used The cashier will then be required to select a reason code Transactions assigned a reason code can be reviewed by printing a report with the Print Transactions by Reason Report function Table 34 5 contains a description of each field contained in the Reason Codes form REASONS CODES FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Transactions Key Displays the transaction key code selected Description Displays the description of the selected transaction key Reason Code Displays the reason code id assigned by system Description Displays the reason code description that will display
337. etailed description of activity Applies to the Text Backend entry only Amount Charge activity amount Currency Rows Names Names of customers Text Card Numbers ID numbers of customers Text Current Balance Current account balance for the customer Currency Charge Activities Itemized charge transactions within the selected Currency period Table 9 3 Selection Criteria Based on input form only customers with activity during the time period Sort Criteria By customer in alphabetical order RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 131 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Charge Balance Detail Report The Print Charge Balance Detail Report function MPAA AT generates a report listing all activities and a running balance for the time period selected This report is Preview C Print generated from the In store Charge Maintenance Report Info toolbar This allows for a detailed review of account and 200 nd a a balances for a customer or all customers ae Select the start date and customer s desired The end TT al Customers Y Help date is automatically set to the current date and is used as the starting point to calculate customer balances a a Table 9 4 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer In store Charge Balance Detail report Reportfield Description_________ Format Calculation Columns Date Charge activity date Date Time None Activity Charge activity short description Text None Ref
338. ether for pricing purposes The Mix Match code assigned through the Ad Batch will be in effect during the Ad Batch only Once the batch expires the Mix Match code will be reset to spaces This only applies to Ad batches Indicates if the Mix Match code was set during for the Ad Batch This only applies to Ad batches Flag to enable or disable purchase of the product with food stamps Flag to indicate that the product requires a scale to determine price Flag to indicate if the product is delivered directly to the store Flag to indicate if the product is assigned to discount category A and or category B Flag to indicate if discounts should be applied to the product while the ad is in effect Only applies to Ad batch Flags to indicate tax table used with this product Displays the sales made during the batch s time period Displays the sales made during the time period covered by the amount of time of the batch prior to the start of the batch That is if the batch period is one week then previous week s sales are displayed If batch period is one month then previous month s sales are displayed Displays the loss amount for this batch during the ad period 13 Weeks of product movement displayed when the movement button is clicked Week Ending Date Quantity Sold during the week 210 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCT Enter Prices for Ad Batch continued Multiple occurrences of the following for an AD BATCH UPC
339. ew and print a Till Status report Refer to the Till Status Report topic in this section Activate the context sensitive help in this dialogue ala E E E Y a E Till Statistics and Balancing continued Select an Employee RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 226 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS The Select an Employee form is used to select an employee for which the till statistics are to be re calculated for the selected time period This function can be used to re calculate the tills for the current day prior to Select an Employee the store close or to re calculate the till statistics for a 2 Henry Leslie prior day This form is displayed when the Get button 2 Naught Evan Cancel J Morgan Janelle is selected Note Any existing data entered for the period will be deleted when this function is used RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 227 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Till Statistics and Balancing continued Till Statistics Report This function will produce a Till Statistics Report listing all till statistics that currently exist in the system for the selected time period This function is executed when 83 or is selected from the Till Statistics and Balancing form Table 29 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Till Statistics Report Start Date Start date for the data Date Time None End Date End date for the data D
340. f the form to accept all the pending products This will change the pending status of all products listed to active This is a quick way to update the pending products A confirmation message will be displayed Product Groups The Product Groups form is used to add the current product to an existing Pricing Group or to one or more existing Reporting Groups Available product groups are displayed on the left side of the form Product groups to which the product is already assigned are listed under the Joined Groups section In the Joined Groups section a P precedes the pricing product group Select a group and click the Arrow key gt to assign the product to the selected group Click on the gt gt to assign the product to all reporting groups To remove the product from a group click on the group in the Joined Groups list and click on the reverse arrow lt or click on the double reverse arrow to remove the product from all groups RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Related Products Special Gross Ad spPrice norPrice spl 0 00 O 12 99 BackEnd j Confirm all pending products using their department attributes Note Department attributes For example tax status are assigned to all pending products Click Yes to accept all pending products and change their status to active Note If the Required Vendor flag is set to True through the System Information function the Confirm All button will not be
341. f the product Item Item code of the product Description Product description C Cost Case cost of the product Received Quantity received C Total Extended total for the product Pack Pack units in a case Size Size of the individual product Table 15 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 154 RETAIL 7 r Manual Allowance Bill Backs You can use the Allowances tab of the Allowances Bill Backs form to support the entry and maintenance of allowances for a vendor and product In add mode enter the UPC INVENTORY Add an Allowance a ale ma 7 ta Se El Allowances Bill Backs UPC 0000000002233 of the product for which the allowance applies A Allowance Desc ere A list of vendors if multiple vendors exist for the Product Group E a OER e pre product will be displayed in the Vendor Name Descipion FF OOO l oP caseCet TT field for selection To edit an allowance enter the UPC and the first allowance will be displayed see Ci a 2470 NG Sort the list below by UPC or any other field by mm clicking the appropriate column heading blica UPC Description Item Code Start Date End Date Retail Price Allowance VendorName Vendor 0000000001122 Sale 10 27 2007 10 31 2007 1 99 0 20 CERTIFIED 14 Allowance 10 27 2007 11 3 2007 200 025 CERTIFIED 14 Note Allowances will automatically be applied to any PO or Invoice entered via the Back End module or via a hand held device using the
342. for the selected category on the Product Sales form This function is executed when or is selected from the Product Sales form Table 20 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Product Sales report jj Reportfield Description Format Calculation Start Date Start date of user query Date Time End Date End date of user query Date Time Gross Margin Total Gross margin Currency Total of Gross UPC UPC Text None Description Product description Text None Cost Cost of product Currency None Price Price of product Currency None Gross Gross margin of product Number Price Cost Price Qty Quantity sold Number None Revenue Revenue for product Currency None Total Cost Total Cost of the product Currency Cost Quantity Profit Profit for the product Currency Revenue Cost Grand Total Qty Total Number Sum of Qty Grand Total Revenue Total Currency Sum of Revenue Grand Total Total Cost Total Currency Sum of Total Cost Grand Total Profit Total Currency Sum of Profit Table 20 2 Selection Criteria Select products for the selected category on the Product Sales form Sort Criteria UPC Ascending Sales Filter The Sales Filter form is used to refine the selection criteria for the product sales data and to specify a sort option for the product list portion of the Product Sales form This form is displayed when the Sales Filter button is selected from the Product Sales form Sales Filter EJE Filt
343. for the selected period Indicates if movement for products having the same item code should be included in totals Displays the movement for the product for the past 13 weeks Displays the movement for the product for the past 12 months Displays the movement for the product for the past 10 years This button will execute the function to display the movement for the desired time period Displays the total items sold for the desired time period RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 174 RETAIL 7 r Manual POINT OF SALES STORE SALE Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the tool bar located on the Product Movement form Button Description Use to exit the current window Use this button to print a Product Movement report Refer to the Product Movement Report topic in this section Use this button to display the Product Movement report on the screen Refer to the Product Movement Report topic in this section Use this button to maintain memo information for the selected product Refer to the Product Memo topic contained in the Product Maintenance section Use this button to activate the context sensitive help in this dialogue Z E be Ea Product Movement Report The Product Movement report is a printed copy of Show Product Movement form The entire field on this report is a duplicate of the fields on the form The layout of this report is contained in Appendix F This function
344. formation Edit a Vendor ej SB mho eje Vendor ID zi Note When deleting a vendor an entry will ae be created in the user activity log in order to Vendor ID _ fone provide an audit trail of data removed from the Ven system Refer to the User Activity Tracking cl topic in the General Topics section Address 1 Address 2 City fo State f Phone 3 ama Modem DD rT Misc 1 E Created Modified Modified by RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 283 RETAIL 7 User Manual ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Vendor Maintenance continued Table 39 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Vendor Maintenance form VENDOR MAINTENANCE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Vendor ID Displays all of the vendor numbers that can be selected disabled in add mode Vendor ID Displays the vendor number assigned by RETAIL Discount Displays the discount given by the vendor Discount is reflected on purchase orders and Invoices Name Displays the name of the vendor Contact Displays the name of the person to contact Address 1 Displays line 1 of the vendor s address Address 2 Displays line 2 of the vendor s address City Displays the city of the vendor s address State Displays the state of the vendor s address Zip Displays the zip code of the vendor s address Phone Displays the vendor s phone number Fax Displays the vendor s fax number Modem D
345. g a check media swaps adding customers adding products and setting up the register in training mode e Interface to critical devices Support of the receipt printer cash drawer scanner scale and ATM Credit Card Pin Pad are some of the critical devices that are interfaced from RETAIL Back End e Store Management Manage customers employees and products complete product price changes import price changes from a wholesaler manage purchase orders and invoices monitor and manage tills complete safe balancing manage bank deposits e Store Trends Analyze store sales by department product group of products or customer for a given time period track product movement for a given time period filter data to analyze specific areas e Personnel Management Set up employee data monitor checkstands as orders are processed from the Back End system review till statistics and balancing review Front End service levels for each checker review register productivity for a given time period review transactions by salesperson e System Administration Set up tenders set up departments sections and vendors set up system security complete the store close process set up system limits set up store information for example company name receipt banners Wireless e Wireless Functions Shelf Audit Inventory Count DSD receiving and Ordering The Technical Overview diagram which follows the functional overview diagrams gives a high level o
346. g checkstands 1 a 10 21 2007 10 21 2007 7 00 03 PM D Store Close Store Close Finished Successfully for 10 21 2007 10 End processes Normally this process should 10 21 2007 10 21 2007 7 0002PM 0 Store Close Connecting checkstands 1 a 10 21 2007 10 21 2007 7 00 02 PM D Store Close All checkstands have been checked out 1 be fun on a d aily basis after the store closes or 10 21 2007 10 21 2007 7 00 02PM 0 Store Close Calculating Store Sales 1 h f 24 h g d i 10 20 2007 10 20 2007 7 00 03 PM O Store Close Store Close Finished Successfully for 10 20 2007 10 10 20 2007 10 20 2007 7 00 02 PM D Store Close Connecting checkstands 1 In t e case O a ou r sto re anyt m e u ri ng 10 20 2007 10 20 2007 7 00 02 PM 0 Store Close All checkstands have been checked out 1 1 1 10 20 2007 10 20 2007 7 00 02 PM 0 Store Close Calculating Store Sales 1 the day If for som e reaso n It IS not ru n O n a 10 19 2007 10 19 2007 7 00 03 PM O Store Close Store Close Finished Successfully for 10 19 2007 10 I 1 1 10 19 2007 10 19 2007 7 00 01 PM 0 Store Close Connecting checkstands 1 dal ly basis then the process WI Il al low yo u to 10 19 2007 10 19 2007 7 00 01 PM 0 Store Close All checkstands have been checked out 1 H 10 19 2007 10 19 2007 7 00 01 PM D Store Close Calculating Store Sales 1 catch up for the days missed To execute the 10 18 2007 10 18 2007 7 00 19PM 0 Store Close Store Close Finished Successfully for 10 18 2007 10 10210 NNN 102210 NNN F NAN ND Oba N Chara Clan
347. g still becomes effective based on the calendar date l a product has special pricing then at 12 00 AM of the start date the pricing will become effective regardless of the processing date RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 305 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX B RUNNING A 24 HOUR STORE Checkstand Operation Checkstand Screen The Checkstand operation is basically the Broto same for a 24 Hour store The most notable Set AO difference is in the display of the processing date on the checkstand The processing date is displayed In the bottom left hand corner of the checkstand screen The date in the bottom right portion of the form reflects the current system date In this case the current system date is 11 06 07 while the processing date is 11 07 07 In this scenario each transaction is posted with 11 07 07 as the processing date The functions for the checkstand will operate in the exact same manner regardless of whether or not the store is a 24 Hour store 30 x 0 01Ibs sanos Ibs 0 00 0 00 Jane S 11 7 2007 Item Count 0 111612007 12 51 PM Store Close When the store initiates a store close for the current processing date any checkstands that 24 hour store processing date are currently signed on will receive a message b e i n g ch an g e d that the store close is in process and they need to insert a new drawer This message will Please insert a new drawer for appear as soon as the
348. g the desired information click Save on the toolbar to save the information You can now enter another customer if required Note If you want to scan customer card numbers at the checkstand the customer card numbers must be preceded by 004 and must be a total of 13 digits for example 0040001234567 004 prefix is the default prefix this default can be changed through the POS Information function RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 63 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Maintain Customer Data continued To edit a customer click Edit on the toolbar You can search for customers by Customer Card Number Driver s License or by Name To search by Card Number enter the customer s card number into the Search by Card No field To search by name click Search on the toolbar A search form is displayed allowing you to search for customers by name driver s license or card number Partial search criteria can be entered for example entering Ja will display customers Jackson James etc Select a customer by clicking the appropriate customer and clicking OK When you have selected a customer you can edit the data related to that customer Click Show Bad Check History is on the toolbar to display a list of bad checks written by the customer To delete a customer click Delete on the toolbar A customer can only be deleted if the customer does not have any sales data associated with it or any bad chec
349. ge Table 6 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 126 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Reset Frequent Shopper Points The Reset Frequent Shopper Points form is used to Cr e reset the Points Earned value for all customers to a specified point value Type the value and click OK The system then prompts for confirmation of the Sesh Molin el update The system then updates the Points Earned value for all customers to the specified value Close Table 7 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Frequent Shopper Point Ranges form RESET FREQUENT SHOPPER POINTS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Reset Point Value A new across the board point set OK Button Click to confirm new set point Cancel Button Click to cancel ent Table 7 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 127 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS synchronize Checkstands with Customers Electronic Coupons The two forms Synchronize Checkstands with Customers and Synchronize Checkstands with Electronic Coupons are used to update the checkstand databases with the latest customer information frequent shopper ranges and coupon data After adding editing or deleting customers adding or editing bad checks editing frequent shopper point ranges and adding or editing coupons the checkstand computers should be updated so they have the latest information Confirm which checkstands to update and then click OK The data is then be upda
350. ge the Ros ini file to UseUserName 1 This setting requires a User Name along with a Password When signing off RETAIL can also prompt for a password optional The password entered must have a high enough security to sign off of the system The security level assigned to the sign off function MGSO is entered in the Security Administration function in the Back End If the password is not valid the system will display an error message Clear the error message by clicking on the OK button and try again RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Employee Maintenance function and are assigned a Cashier PROFESSIONAL PROFESSIONAL GIT E AL i r Ti MANE ZAG af2fafe so 78 9 o ojwje r r vf u o r x AjsjofjrjofjHis kfije 2 x C v BIN M sax PE NE ee EE RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Main Checkstand Form Receipt Main Checkstand Form Upon verification of your password the system will now display the Main Checkstand form Po The Front End module is now ready to accept Thank You Checkstand transactions As you enter transactions they will be displayed on the Checkstand form as depicted to the right The Mrs Smith Command Line of the Main Checkstand form is a fe pA An where RETAIL transaction codes can be Oe ae eto ee ae Typed through the keyboard to process a 1 2 00 si customer order refer to the Keyboard Use topic De Vanesa Shee 2 00
351. gular Pricing Always in effect unless Special Pricing is effect as defined by Special Pricing Effective and Expiration Dates b Special Pricing overrides Regular Price if current date is within the special pricing effective and expiration dates inclusive The Special Pricing is displayed when products are entered on Ads through Product Batches Maintenance Special Pricing may also be entered directly into the Product Maintenance form Within each category of Pricing Regular and Special IT Retail supports 5 different Price Types 1 Unit 2 Split 8 Group Threshold 4 Group Adjusted 5 Limited Pricing Methods 1 Unit Pricing This is the normal most usual pricing in the supermarket for example 1 99 In the Unit Price fields enter the cost in the Cost field and the unit price in the Price field Example H a ana fUnipieng E Welcome to Total Foods H l AI FTICIA ll 5 Your Total Grocery Solution Unit Price Cost 1 100 Price 1 99 aa Group Deal Price Strawberry Jam 1 99 E aty Price Strawberry Jam 1 99 E Target Margin 0 00 Strawberry Jam 1 99 F Gross Margin AZ Strawberry Jam 1 99 F l Strawberry Jam 1 99 F Product Group 0 TAX 0 00 TOTAL 9 95 2 Split Package Pricing Products are bundled together For example 3 for 1 00 34 34 32 If the customer buys more than the 3 for 1 00 the sequence will start over at 34 34 32 For this example enter as follows Enter the cost in
352. h Displays the cost of the product taken up at the batch period Displays the special price method used by the batch Displays the special price of the product as entered on the batch Displays the special group price of the product as entered on the batch Displays the group deal quantity of the product as entered on the batch RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 215 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Print Ad Batch Markdown Report The function will produce an Ad Batch markdown report for a specific batch Select from the Report By drop down Batches will show the ad loss within a specific batch If an item is in more than one batch the ad loss for that item may not show up in this report UPC will generate a report Report By BatchHo showing all UPCs with ad loss in a specific date range Total Ad Loss Within Batch will show the ad loss for each item within the batch even if the loss was in another batch having higher priority Product Markdown Report Batches Batches Total Ad Loss Within Batch Table 26 5 contains a description of each field contained in the Ad Batch markdown report Report field Vendor Section UPC Description Normal Price Special Price Special Cost Qty Sales Cost Profit Markdown Table 26 5 Selection Criteria Batch selected Sort Criteria Department Description Vendor number of the product Section assigned to the product Product UPC
353. h for a Vendor by MES Name ID City State Zip Phone Contact or Modified Date This form is displayed when the Find Vendor button is clicked in the Vendor Maintenance form All vendors matching the specified criteria will be displayed when the Em button IS clicked from the form the vendor selected and OK Vendor Name Vendor ID City State Zip Phone Contact clicked The vendor information will be displayed on the Vendor Maintenance form gt Ok Cancel RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 289 RETAIL 7 User Manual ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Vendor Maintenance continued Vendor Up charge The Vendor Up charge form is used to enter percentage up charge amount that will be applied to the Vendor Upcharge price data printed on purchase orders and invoices This Enter vendor Upcharge feature would be used only when up charges will be charged to customers at the checkstand The same up Lancel charge percentage charged to customers should be loaded here This will then ensure that the gross margins printed on the purchase orders and invoices poz correctly reflect the price that will be charged when the product is sold This form is displayed when the Setting button is clicked from the Vendor Maintenance form toolbar Click OK to apply the up charge to the purchases Vendor Report The Vendor Report function is executed by selecting or on the Vendor Maintenance form The Vendors Rep
354. hase Order form NEW PURCHASE ORDER FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Vendor Supplier P O No Date Acct Address PRODUCT INFORMATION UPC ltem Code Cost Description Case Cost Department Quantity GL Purchase Type Pack Size Allowances Salesman Buyer Adjustment Total The name of the vendor or supplier Existing P O numbers for the vendor or system assigns the next available purchase order number for entry The date of the purchase order This is usually the date on the purchase order is created Displays the vendor s account number as entered in the accounting module Displays the vendor s address as entered in the vendors form UPC or Item Code of the product being entered or modified Toggle between UPC and Item Code by clicking UPC button Displays unit cost of the product Displays the description of the product Displays the case cost of the product If no case cost exists the case cost is calculated based on units in a pack The calculation is unit cost pack units Displays the product s department Quantity ordered for the product If a pack size exists for the product then the default quantity ordered is in cases otherwise it is in units Precede the quantity ordered with a U to specify units instead of cases Displays the Account number not available in this version Purchase type that applies to the product Three choices are available Received Free Returned Rece
355. he checkstand This will usually only need to be done if the checkstand has been operating in stand alone for an extended period of time The processing date can be changed via the manager menu on the Pickup checkstand The Close Store button will 3 Check List become available for selection on the menu Select this option and a new processing date 4 Till Status can be entered The processing date will then be changed for the checkstand where the update is occurring This process will need to be completed for every checkstand Note transactions will be posted with the new processing date as soon as it is changed Make sure to only use this feature in the event that the network is inaccessible beyond the time that the store close process normally changes the processing date Back End Operation Store Close The store close process for a 24 Hour store E can be run at any time during the day The 9 y gt Checkstands s Donna steps are the same as a regular store close Mya ant nte ne am Dare daroe ba te aclaro agar except fo ran additional step that updates the If you answer Mo ou can attempt to do the Date Change again before proceeding with store close However For processing date on each of the checkstands those checkstands NOT listed Process Date s have already been changed to the new date the next day This update should occur without any user intervention except if a checkstand is in the middle of ringing up a transac
356. he coupon amount is tax exempted Apply Multiple MC Flag to indicate if coupon multiples should be applied to manufacturer coupons scanned or MC transaction key on Checkstanq Apply Multiple SC Flag to indicate if coupon multiple should be applied to store coupons ST transaction key on Checkstand Allow Multiple Discounts Flag to enable multiple discounts This will allow a product to be discounted multiple times For example line item discount customer discount and overall order discount Item Discount Sequence Allow item discounts to be rung up before or after scanning UPC Enable Electronic Coupons Flag to enable the electronic coupons feature These coupons are automatically applied when a customer ID is entered DEBIT DESIGN DELIVERY INFORMATION Enter the PLU that is used to print a delivery receipt INITIAL LOAN Amount to be loaned in at sign on Cash Starting drawer cash to be given as change Food stamp Starting drawer food stamps to be given as change TIME LIMITS SECONDS Configurable time limits Drawer Open Displays the number of seconds the drawer can remain open at the end of a transaction An alarm will be heard when the drawer has been open longer than this limit Clear Screen Displays the number of seconds before the program clears the screen between checkstand transactions TRANSACTION LIMITS Configurable transaction limits Max Checks Day Displays the maximum number of checks that can be written by a custome
357. he system information In either case you should look into the reason that the checkstand Is not recognized RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 293 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX A INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM Appendices Appendix A Initializing the System Introduction Now that you ve got the RETAIL system installed you ll want to initialize the system with critical data The purpose of this section is to give a good understanding of the sequence of tasks required to initialize RETAIL prior to use These steps are required in order to properly setup the data that is required to support RETAIL Note Failure to properly complete these steps will result in errors when using RETAIL The steps are listed sequentially and should be completed in the order they appear The steps refer you to the menu selection that is required to support the specific step Note RETAIL should be installed prior to completing these tasks Access the RETAIL Back End module and complete the following steps listed below You can use the default password Back End 19 Front End 13 to access the system Step 1 Setup System Setup Information You will find the tasks related to step 1 under the SETUP section of the Administration menu You will need to complete the following tasks in order to configure the system setup information 1 Setup System Information attributes that effect the Back End system e g 24 hour store 2 Se
358. he weighted item VD UPC ENTER Void key used to void a specific product VD ENTER VD ENTER Void key used to void last entry on order for example tender product VD scroll to item ENTER Void s item highlighted by scrolling on order WF ENTER Begins a Wic CVV order Cashier will be prompted to enter voucher dates and amounts before ringing up products Only Wic CVV items will be allowed WI WI ENTER WI ENTER Identifies a Wicable order Enter this command at the beginning of the order All products entered from this point forward must be WIC eligible products WV WV ENTER Used to tender a Wic CVV order The amount must be entered Use WNTL to obtain the Wic CVV amount and deduct the taxable amount Quantity being purchased 2 28 ENTER Multiply key used to enter multiple quantities of a given product UPC ENTER Total number of items in pack 3 2 28 ENTER Divide key used to divide multi pack items for purchasing a quantity less than the Number of items purchased amount in the pack In the example 2 items upc 28 are being purchased out of a UPC ENTER multi pack that contains 3 items Table 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 29 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Certain transaction codes can be combined with others to form a command sequence These include COMMAND SEQUENCE EXAMPLE DESCRIPTION FA TL ENTER FATL Will display the Flex Spending Account eligible amount FN
359. heckstand Customer data can be added from the Checkstand Enter the data for the customer and click OK button Pay special attention to and select the appropriate attributes for the customer Write Checks Charge Account Print Invoice not used at this time and Frequent Shopper Note The Add a Customer form is not available in stand de 2 Ey l e a pa A y EN alone mode olwje a rivjul1jojP Refer to the Customer Processing topic earlier in this A s D E G H K ma N section for more information on customers z x G v B N M BACK Note use the Tab Enter and Arrow keys to move between fields if a mouse is not available Posfront Add a Customer 0041234567890 ress ja Windy Lane as ress First MI Saa E i River Ciy sT MN zip 76677 6551234567 Wok E Frequent Shopper V OK Cancel Option 9 Maintain Data Add Product Products can be added from the Checkstand Type the data for the product and click OK button Products added on the UPA Uneven J i a A Description Unit Price A Checkstand are immediately available to all checkstands Bomba 5 ii OS DON i i u P E e UntotMeeswe a Products are added into the system in a Pending status alma Dic Pending products can be reviewed and changed to an Active status through the Product Maintenance function in En 2 3 es p pa pa EN e the Back End ailw ER TY U1 OP If you do want cashiers to be able to add products enter A S D F GH J K L g
360. ice Report and Print Register Productivity Report functions under the REGISTERS section of the Administration menu will allow you to print checkstand statistic reports These functions give you the option of reviewing the reports on line or of printing the reports Monitor Tills Monitor Tills m e o gso a x2 RETAIL also gives you the capability to view till m a AQ MA activity for each cashier in real time and also to ashier ctive econc Cash een Check Credit Card Debit Card Food Stamps Coupons InStore Charges WIC 3 retaG Yes o E 34 0 00 0 00 0 00 21 16 0 00 0 00 perform tender pickups from the tills from the esleH No No soo sao soo soo soo soo back office Select the Monitor Till function from Ee the Administration menu This form will display current tender totals for each cashier and whether the cashier is active or inactive Click the Time to configure the amount of time used to determine if a cashier is inactive To display active cashiers only select the Active Cashiers Only check box This form also allows pickups and loan ins to be done to the checkstand from the Back End system Highlight a cashier and click the Pickup Loan In from the toolbar When the Pickup Loan in form displays select Pickup or Loan In fill in the desired amount for each tender checks must be picked up in full pickup and press the Print amp Save this prints to a standard printer not a receipt printer N
361. ick to access the set up form to add additional customer numbers such as drivers license account number spouses account number etc etc for bad check checking Flag to enable or disable the active status of a customer If a customer is inactive sales is not captured for this customer on the checkstand Flag to enable or disable the customer s privilege to earn and accumulate frequent shopper points Flag to enable or disable customer to automatically receive store coupon discounts Flag to enable or disable the system to print invoices for the customer Product pricing level associated with this customer Product pricing levels are maintained for each product Refer to the Product Maintenance section Indicates if a finance charge will be applied to charge balances Indicates if the tax will be removed from the sales transaction via the Front end Balance of frequent shopper points earned by the customer Discount number to be applied to the current Customer discount numbers are maintained in the POS Information function under the Administration menu Customer s total amount of purchases stored in the system Number of people this customer shops for Flagged from Customer In Store Charge Attributes form of the In Store Charge AR Maintenance form to enable or disable customer s privilege to have a charge account MI tender and RA transaction key is allowed for this customer Maximum amount default amount is maintained in the POS Inf
362. ift RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 44 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Tendering continued Electronic Food stamps EBT Cash Tendering a Enter items and total order b To calculate food stamp balance press the Food Stamp Toggle key FN through the keyboard followed by the Total Key TL ENTER through the keyboard c The food stamp eligibility amount will be highlighted at the bottom of the form d A message box will appear prompting customer to slide card through the pin pad e A message box will appear prompting the customer to select a tender type The customer should select the EBT tender type f A message box will appear prompting customer to select either Food stamps or Cash Electronic Benefits The customer is prompted to enter his her pin number and click enter button on pin pad Note The customer does not have to wait until the cashier is finished to complete this step h Press the Electronic Tender tendering key ET ENTER through the keyboard If customer wishes to tender less than the total order the cashier should key in the desired tender amount and the Electronic Tender key 1 The customer is then asked to verify the amount and press enter on the pin pad to confirm the transaction J Once authorization is complete a message will be displayed Transaction Approved Note If the transaction has been denied or an error has occurred a message will be displ
363. ift DebitDes Discount Line Item Discount Removal J Department Store Debit D Discount Line Item Stamps Flowers Good Stuff Paid In 4 Paid In 5 Coupon No Sale Dania 298 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX A INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM Step 2 Setup Maintenance Information You will find the tasks related to step 2 under the MAINTENANCE section of the Administration menu The following tasks will need to be completed in order to complete the setup of maintenance information setup Tenders in order to support checkstand tendering of orders Setup Departments in order to classify the products that will be entered Setup Sections in order to classify products that will be entered Setup Vendors in order to correctly assign vendors to products Setup Employees and assign their security levels Se VS 1 Access the Tender Maintenance function under the MAINTENANCE section of the Administration menu and complete the following task An unlimited number of tenders can be supported by RETAIL A pre configured set of tenders is Soe asa a OOOO en ue az distributed with the system Only certain attributes Tenders ha A rere eaa will be available for edit in regards to these tenders oe a Oe However for all other tenders added to the system oe oe St enite rath T vad r all attributes are available for modification Tenders i i can be assigned to currencies entered in the ae
364. il 7 includes the option to read the MICR print the front of the check and frank the back of the check in a single pass In ros ini enter PrintCheckSinglePass 1 The check should be entered face up with the MICR to the right The MICR will be read and the front of the check will be printed if selected then the check franked If Electronic Check Conversion is used through MicroTrax and the check is converted then the check will be printed with Void to be handed back to the customer RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 42 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Tendering continued Paper Food Stamp Tendering a Enter items and total order b To calculate food stamp balance press the Food Stamp Toggle key FN through the keyboard followed by the Total Key TL ENTER through the keyboard The food stamp eligibility amount will be highlighted at the bottom of the form d Type the food stamps amount and hit the Food Stamps tender key FS ENTER through the keyboard e Any balance still due will be highlighted at the bottom of the form f Complete the sale by tendering the remainder of the order with a different tender Note balance due cash or food stamps to customer will be highlighted at the bottom of the order Credit Card Tendering a Enter items and total order Press the Credit Debit EBT key ET through the keyboard b A message box will appear prompting custo
365. ill be resumed Note An entry in the ros ini file will determine whether a manager s password will be necessary to suspend an order UseSecurityOnSU 1 To force a manager s password when resuming a transaction enter UseSecurityOnRE 1 Without the entry the cashier can suspend and resume an order without a manager override Note resumed orders can be configured to display all of the detailed transaction lines or a summary line through the POS Information function Transactions that have been suspended by the cashier and never resumed are captured during Store Close If Clear Suspended Transactions is set to Yes in System Information when the Store Close is run all suspended transactions including the details of the items that were rung up are stored in a table in POSTrans The table is named TTSArchive We have had reported instances of cashiers partially tendering an order sometimes with an electronic tender then suspending the transaction and never resuming it In Retail the transaction will not show up in Store Sales or in the Electronic Journal because it was never completed Some cashiers and customers think that because the transaction is suspended the charge will not be made to the card The card is charged immediately when the customer presses OK on the pin pad and it is not removed if the transaction is suspended The electronic card processor has a record but Retail does not show the corresponding record The new table is us
366. ill display when the checkstand logs on to the Concord EFT Manager Note If confirmation is not received by the Concord EFT Manager the transaction WILL NOT BE AUTOMATICALL Y REVERSED A manual reversal will need to be completed at the Concord Manager station RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 314 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX D EFT PROCESSIN Concord RETAIL Host Program The RETAIL Concord Host program is executed Concord Host lel ES by clicking on the Icon located ON yecsage Queues ooo the Windows desktop of the computer where the host program was installed _EFT Events Client Events Connections Settings The RETAIL Concord Host program acts as a go between for the RETAIL Front End system and the Concord EFT Manager system All EFT transactions flow to and from this host program The EFT Events tab is where transaction records will be displayed as they are passed from the checkstand to the EFT Manager Refer to the Concord Transaction Flow topic discussed earlier for record types displayed on this screen The Message Queues field displays the number of EFT transactions that are waiting to be processed The clear button will clear all data currently displayed on the screen The other tabs on the form are used to display client checkstand events status of current checkstand connections and system settings configuration properties This data should not be changed once initialized at
367. ime period for Batch No Description Stat Date End Date Priority Type A the priority one pricing has ended The scenario EX Soop 11 3 2007 12 31 2007 1 PB a i Soap 2 Soap 2 11 2 2007 12 31 2007 2 PB continues for batches with a priority greater than Book Sale Book Sale 10 29 2007 10 30 2007 1 PB i Sushi Sushi Sale 9 4 2007 9 4 2017 1 PB 2 select a batch from the list and enter the new Trial Trial 7 25 2007 11 30 2007 2PB H Grape Sale Grape Sale 6 13 2007 6 13 2017 1 PB priority in the Priority field Click Activate to Sax Sale Saxaphone Sale 6 7 2007 6 7 2017 1 PB activate the batch immediately as opposed to T re a letting it take effect as of the start date and click Delete to delete a batch Table 27 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Price Management form PRICE MANAGMENT FIELD DESCRIPTIONS BATCH INFORMATION Description Displays the current batch description Batch Displays the current batch ID batch number selected on the batch list portion of the form Priority Displays the priority of the current batch Type Displays the current batch type PB Product Batch PU Start Date Displays the start date when the current batch End Date Displays the date when the current batch ends Applied Displays the date when the current batch was applied Who Applied Displays the name of the person who applied this batch Created Displays the date when the current batch was created
368. in OSP This will stop the system from applying the ID to any transaction line following the entry of this command Any transaction lines before this command will still contain the salesperson ID Customer Search 1 Press the Customer Search key CS through the keyboard ENTER Note Refer to the Customer Processing topic in this section for more information on processing Customers Convert Amount to a Foreign Currency 1 Type the Currency ID of the currency desired 2 Press the Currency Conversion key CU through the keyboard ENTER Example from the keyboard 2CU ENTER Converts the total amount of the order into currency 2 Note Refer to the Foreign Currencies topic in the Appendices for more information Processing WIC Items 1 Type the WIC key WI through the keyboard This will edit that all items following this command are wicable Note this command must be entered at the beginning of the orden 2 The system will prompt for a WIC voucher ending date This date cannot be earlier than today an error message will appear meaning that the voucher cannot be expired 3 Process the items and total the order If a product is not flagged as WIC an error message will display 4 Tender the order with a WIC tender WC tender entered through the Tender Maintenance function Processing Wic CVV Items 1 Type the Wic CVV Start key WF through the keyboard This will open an entry form for start and end dat
369. ing a customer that is linked to another BackEnd customer a message box appears when saving the changes Clicking Yes results in the synchronization of the fields listed above for the two customers 3 j Update customer 1 with changes Mo RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 101 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Maintenance continued RETAIL Search The RETAIL Search form is used to search for a MEE customer by First Name Last Name Driver s License Card Number Birth Date City Zip Home Phone scan ee ee a a ye a i ast ame mi Write Checks Points Earned or Modified Date This ew z _ 7 form is displayed when the Find is clicked from the toolbar on the Customer form or the Bad Checks form All customers matching the Find criteria are displayed on the form Partial search criteria may be ENE wie entered When accessed from the Bad Checks form Smith Henrietta 11122233 in edit mode only the customers matching the criteria Seana ei entered and having bad checks in the system are Smith Henry 87788909 A i Smith Jonathan 56677543 displayed When the customer is selected and OK is Smith Gertrude 12211332 i 7 i i 7 Smith Eddie 12332112 clicked the customer information is displayed on the See asia TSO GS Customer form Smith Janet 203 203203203 Table 2 6 contains a description of each field contained in the RETAIL Search form Column Search field to find customers by last
370. intenance p Employee Print Employee U Department ploy Accounting G Ls Maintenance Report Maintenance Information Update Checkstands Departments View Accounting Employees Employee G Ls Report a E i View Employee Change Security ploy OUER E Levels Employee Report LI L Report O View Dept Department Report Report Checkstand 1 Checkstand 2 Checkstad n Section Vendor Maintenance Maintenance Tender Maintenance Templates Maintenance Vend Tender Templates Sections ENSAG Maintenance Maintenance Section View Section View Vendor Currency Currency l Report e F ro e Report ie ios Maintenance Conversion y y Tenders Tenders Report Report Vendor Report RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 2 1 RETAIL 7 r Manual ADMINISTRATION Employee Maintenance The Employees form is used to add edit and delete HAS S R ml gt employee information The employee information will be added directly into the system for use by the Back End Employee Number AEE Employes Name module Click the Security button to display the Enpleye 8 foe Im Front End and Back End security levels established in Last Name Chale Caster Seouiy 27 the system refer to the Secur
371. iod Items Total ltems purchased for the current period Gross Profit Sales minus Cost Gross Margin Price minus Cost divided by Price Table 10 1 Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on the Customer Focus form Button Description Exits the current window Prints a Customer Focus report Refer to Customer Focus topic in this section Displays the Customer Focus report on the screen Refer to Customer Focus topic in this section Groups customers Refer to Show Customer Sales Group Customers topic in POS Store Sales section Finds a customer by name or card number Shows times customer shopped in the store Shows customer s favorite cashiers Shows customer s favorite products Shows types of discounts customer was given for example coupons Shows the departments shopped by the customer e gt A E 0 E Shows customer s12 week department distribution Shows ranking of top 100 customers for the last 12 months Shows a graph of customer s activity for the last 12 months Shows Electronic Coupon Form Maintains notes about a customer k Activates the context sensitive help RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 135 RETAIL 7 User Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Focus continued Show Times Customer Shops the Store The Times Shop form can be accessed by clicking Times Shop Show Times Customer Shops the Store Ell This ShopDay Shop Time Shop Date Sales gt M
372. ion Text UPC UPC Text Description Product description Text Normal Cost Product cost Currency Normal Price Product price Currency Normal Gross Gross margin Percent Price Cost Price Special Cost Special cost for the product Currency Special Price Special price for the product Currency Special Gross Special gross margin Percent Special Price Special Cost Special Price FS Foodstamp flag Yes No Scale Scale flag Yes No DSD DSD flag Yes No Vendor Vendor for the product Number Section Section of the product Number Dept Department for the product Number Table 24 2 Selection Criteria Select from lists of all products for the selected product group on the Product Groups form RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 204 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Mass Product Changes The Mass Product Changes form is used Sugitani to complete various types of data changes to o a group of products at the same time Products for a specific department section Depatmens Fz Pe FOS Infomation Se Percent Zero Pricing vendor or product group other can be Section A Aa e selected for update Once a group of Vendor Unit Price Unit Price products has been selected price changes ores tt POS data changes and product attributes ay Pie Pay Piee sd can be immediately applied to the entire sap e Sd selection Special Price changes can also be scheduled for a later update by creating a Description
373. ion of each field contained in the Product Groups form PRODUCT GROUPS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS Group type Designates group type of product group either Report or Pricing Group ID Displays the product group Id assign to the current group can be Alpha Numeric Description Displays the description for the current group if not entered defaults to the Group ID Select Products Mfg Code The first five digits after the leading digit 0 1234567890 5 Mfg Code would be 12345 Size Used along with Mfg Code or Vendor etc to limit the items pulled up by size for example 12 oz soda UPC Allows for a selection of a UPC or a range of UPCs Column Used to select your search criteria for example Description or Section Operator Select the operator for your search Description might be Like Department would be Value Enter or select the value Press the ellipsis button to retrieve a list of Departments Sections or Vendors if selected in Column Or enter a partial description such as app Press the Find button after you have made your selections Product Group Displays a selection list of product groups that currently exist Products Displays a list of products matching the search criteria selected UPC Displays the UPC or PLU for each product within the selected criteria Description Displays the description corresponding to each UPC shown in the grid Product Group Displays a list of products that have been selected to be part of the product group
374. iple vendors Rebate ID Rebate identification number Rebate Amount Rebate amount per unit sold Bill Back Desc Enter description of the bill back Start Date Start date of the allowance Sugg Price Suggested price of the product while the allowance is in effect does not effect product pricing at the checkstand Quantity Quantity sold based on latest product movement figures available at the time the calculate button was clicked End Date End date of the allowance Status Status of the bill back 1 Received payment 2 Waiting payment Amount Due Amount due based on quantity sold quantity rebate amount Product Grid Displays a list of current bill backs in the system Sort this grid by any of the columns listed by clicking column heading Table 16 2 Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on the Allowance Bill Backs form Button Description Exits the current window Prints an Allowance or Bill back report Refer to the Allowance Bill Back Reports topic in this section Displays the Allowance or Bill Back report on the screen Refer to the Allowance Bill Back Reports topic in this section Saves your entries or changes for the current record Jumps to the Add mode from Edit mode Jumps to the Edit mode from Add mode Deletes the current allowance or bill back selected Recalculates the bill back quantity and amount due based on the most current product movement figures for the product Onl
375. is executed when or is selected on the Show Product Movement form RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 175 RETAIL 7 r Manual Show Customer Sales The Show Customer Sales form is used to display customer sales data for specified criteria Enter in the start and end dates for the Stat Date 10072007 Y EndDate 10 25 2007 time period to view Then select a specific category of data to view Categories available for selection are displayed on the left side of the do form e g UPC Department Enter the ae a selection criteria desired and click Execute Faas Customer Query in the toolbar The customer sales data POINT OF SALES STORE SALE Customer Sales UPC Total Profit Margin Department GROCERY Cost Include all products with the same item code for the time period will then be displayed as well as totals for the category selected A list of the customers included will be displayed in the grid at the bottom of the form Click on the Sales Customer Henry Luke Chen Rebecca Cool Jane Warty Doris Lee Sarah Grant B Grant T Zip HomePhone Total 587 53 475 28 15 99 2 95 109 35 6 00 18 00 Oty Profit 143 00 406 17 47 00 273 95 3 00 11 02 11 00 1 85 66 05 3 00 9 00 GM CardNo 69 14 1 57 64 100 68 92 1000 62 72 1001 60 41 101 50 00 102 50 00 103 Filter button to refine your selection anon da na m azn Henry Emily 6
376. is selected the top portion of the form will change as follows and the data for the product being entered will be displayed Pricing POS Information Attributes Sales Target 0 00 ida 1422 l Pah eiae Ad MisMatch T UFE Link Note POS Information cannot be changed using ad batch function The only field available for change is the Mix Match field Once the ad has expired the mix match field will be cleared from the product If the Sales tab is selected the top portion of the form will change as depicted on the right and sales and movement data for the time period of the batch will be displayed Click the Movement button to display the last 13 weeks of movement If the Attributes tab is selected the top portion of the form will change and the attributes for the product will be displayed Pricing POS Information Attributes Seles m Property r Tax Plan Food Stamp M DSO al Pla E a Fl E m Discount E E E Disco E 7 Allow Disc Note Product attributes cannot be changed using the ad batch function The only field available for change is the Allow Disc field The Allow Disc will indicate to the system that discounts will be allowed while the batch is in effect Pricing POS Information Attributes Sales Curent Sales lt _ 11 03 2007 10 27 2007 Previous Sales 10202007 10 06 2007 Ad Loss 091292007 O ee Ill 00000000 li 09401 42007 Ei Note Click
377. is will allow Select Type Prefered Customer 3 Es 1 1 Select a Coupon for the selection of a coupon to be assigned to ee Close the selected category of customers This is very PAE NOWICHES 138 Preferred Customer PS Crisps and Snacks y Help useful to apply a Target Coupon to your top customers Table 22 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer Group form Category Displays the Category querying in Customer Sales form From Starting date for the query To Ending date for the query Select Type Used to select the type of function to execute print Tank you letter print gift certificate or attach coupon to customer Select Type Preferred Customer Coupon Link Description Customer List Customer Group List Table 22 2 Coupon selected from the list Description of the coupon selected List of customers available for selection List of customers selected as part of the group Customer Group Buttons The following describes the functions supported by the buttons located on the Customer Group form Button Description Print Use this button to print and or preview the document selected thank you letter or gift certificate Samples of these documents are included in Appendix F Not available in electronic form Sort Use to sort the customers in the Customer List box Use to move a selected customer from to the customer list and customer group list boxes AEA a A Attach Use to move all custom
378. isplay the status of the backup Display the workstation ID from where the backup was executed Displays the date and time when the error was generated Displays the error number Displays the source of the error generated Displays the description of the error Displays the name of the employee who executed the user activity Displays the date and time of the activity Displays the workstations where the activity occurred Displays the activity performed For example delete customer delete product Key value of data affected For example UPC code Customer Displays other critical information contained in the record affected by the activity RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 RETAIL 7 r Manual Notify Checkstands with Server Information The Notify Checkstands with Server Information form is used to notify all the checkstands that the server is available The user can select which checkstands are to be notified by clicking in the checkbox to select or de select This feature would be used if the server becomes unavailable and the checkstands were operating in stand alone mode This function will broadcast a message to each checkstand informing that the server is available The checkstands would then switch back into regular mode ADMINISTRATION SETUP Checkstands Update Synchronization Options r Status Synchronization Done Verifying state for 2006TEST CheckStand 2006TEST OK Verifying state for LE
379. isplays the vendor s modem number DSD Flag to indicate if the vendor delivers products directly to the store Misc 1 Displays miscellaneous information for the vendor Misc 2 Displays miscellaneous information for the vendor Memo Displays miscellaneous information of the vendor Created Displays the date and time when this vendor was created Modified Displays the date and time when this vendor was last modified Modified by Displays the name of person who made the last modification Table 39 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 284 RETAIL 7 User Manual ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Vendor Maintenance continued Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on the Vendor Maintenance form Button Description Exit the current window Print a Vendor report Refer to the Vendor Report topic in this section Display the Vendor report on the screen Refer to the Vendor Report topic in this section Save your entries or changes for the current record Press to Add a Vendor Press to Edit a Vendor Delete the vendor currently displayed The system will only allow you to delete a vendor if the vendor has no associated POs Search for a vendor Refer to the Find Vendor topic in this section Enter a vendor up charge Refer to Vendor Up charge topic in this section Activates the context sensitive help a FRAP Ree a E Find Vendor The Find Vendor form is used to searc
380. isting Batch ID and re entering current start date and new end date RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 214 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Enter Prices for Ad Batch continued Review Related Batches The Review Related Batches function is used to view all the batches that contain the selected UPC Or PLU BatchNo Description Sanae na Prony a sea A SpecialGroupPrice antity selected from the Product Batches form This form is Steel wool 11 2 2007 12 31 2007 2l s1000 soot 280 Steel Wool 2 27 2007 4 14 2017 3 1 000 0 00 3 66 displayed when the Ed button is clicked from the Product Batches form This form can also be accessed from the Product Maintenance form Table 26 4 contains a description of each field contained in the Batches Affecting a Product form BATCHES AFFECTING A PRODUCT FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Current Batch Batch No Description Start Date End Date Priority Cost Price Method Special Price Special Group Price Special Quantity Table 26 4 Displays Yes on the batch whose special price is taken up in the Product Maintenance form otherwise the field is blank Displays the Batch ID No Displays the description of the current product Displays the start date of the ad batch For normal batch this field is blank Displays the end date of the ad batch For a normal batch this field is blank Displays the number of priority of the batc
381. it Card Electronic Food Stamps Gift Cards and Electronic Cash Microtrax Credit Card Debit Card Electronic Food Stamps Texas WIC Gift Cards Blackhawk Gift Cards Electronic Check Conversion and Electronic Cash In addition to an additional RETAIL program optional for Concord installs only Concord Ingenico and Microtrax require the installation of a separate program developed by their own companies Concord Web runs from each checkstand over the internet Information and documentation related to their programs are provided by their own organizations Listed below are instructions related to the RETAIL program required to interface to each processor RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 313 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX D EFT PROCESSIN Concord Introduction This section only applies to installations using Concord as their EFT processor This section documents the use of the RETAIL Concord Host software program This documentation should be used in conjunction with documentation supplied by Concord Concord EFT Processing requires the following configuration Concord EFT Hardware supplied by Concord Concord EFT Software supplied by Concord RETAIL Concord Host Software The interaction between the systems is as follows Checkstan Retail P Retail Concord gt Concord EFT Front End Host Manager
382. ity Displays the quantity received Displays the quantity sold Displays the ending quantity Displays the quantity lost RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 152 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Inventory Analysis continued Calculations The Inventory Analysis function reads and aggregates data from a number of areas The process to calculate inventory includes the following steps Get initial inventory count based on the Inventory Count entered for the start date selected Get the quantity sold based on Product movement during the time period specified Get the quantity received from invoices for the time period specified Get the quantity from inventory adjustments for the time period specified Calculate the ending inventory Initial Inventory Received Sold Adjustments The process to calculate shrink uses the same process as calculating inventory with the following changes 1 Get ending inventory from inventory count for the ending date specified 2 Calculate the shrink Initial Inventory Received Sold Ending Inventory Ola NS Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar on the Inventory Analysis form Button Description Exits the current window Prints an Inventory Analysis report Refer to the Inventory Analysis Report topic in this section Displays the Inventory Analysis report on the screen Refer to the Inventory Analysis Report topic in this section Calculates the
383. ity Levels topic below Fist Nane zZ o 2 This will allow the user to assign the appropriate security son ersa Bock nd Pte ens gt levels to the employee Passwords for the Checkstand Da eve F Cashier and Back End are maintained through this sia faao form as well If the Biometric option has been installed aaa See eee the employee s fingerprints can be added through this ene ji 10 Frnt r form BackEnd ee Back End r Remove BioMetric Data Note The Checkstands must be updated with the i E A Created 1 1 1993 10 00 00AM Modified 12713 2006 11 47 00AM_ Modified by EAN employee information once you have finished your sserdsecut w2 updates by using the Synchronize Checkstands with Employees This will ensure that the Checkstand database contains the most current employee data for use by the Front End module Note When deleting an employee an entry will be created in the user activity log in order to provide an audit trail of data deleted from the system Refer to the User Activity Tracking topic in the General Topics section Table 35 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Employees form EMPLOYEES FIELD DESCRIPTIONS Employee Number Drop down list to search for an existing employee record by employee number Employee Name Drop down list to search for an existing employee record by employee name Employee System generated employee number Last Name Employee s last name First Name Em
384. ived adds to the amount of the PO Free is a 0 00 amount and Returned reduces the amount of the PO Displays the pack units in a case Size displays the size of the individual products Allowance amount s applied to the PO Allowances are entered in the Allowances Bill Backs function Click the Allowances button to view the allowances applied The name of the sales person who sold the product s Displays the name of the employee who created the purchase order Displays the dollar amount of any adjustments made to the P O see P O Adjustments Displays the total amount of the purchase order Product Detail Flag to display product detail information Displays the inventory on hand for the product Memo Displays an X if a memo has been entered for this product On Order Displays the amount of previous ordered units or cases RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 143 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Open a New Review a Purchase Order continued FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION On Order Displays the amount of previous ordered units or cases Ad Displays an X if this product is an advertised product Min Rea Displays the minimum amount that you should have and the required amount Daily Average Displays the daily movement for the product this information is calculated from the product movement Last Week Move Displays the last week s movement for the product PRODUCT LIST Multiple occurrences of the following List all products being
385. k Cost Shrink Loss Shrink Act ANALYSIS LIST BOX UPC Description Beginning Received Sold Ending Shrink Table 14 1 Displays the start date for the current analysis Displays the end date for the current analysis Displays the category to be analyzed Press to clear the form before entering different criteria Displays the UPC or PLU to be analyzed Displays the department to be analyzed Displays the section to be analyzed Displays the vendor to be analyzed Display the DSD or Total Store to be analyzed Displays the initial quantity for the analyzed category Displays the quantity received for the analyzed category Displays the quantity sold for the analyzed category Displays the quantity related to inventory adjustments made during the time period Inventory adjustments are entered via the Inventory function in the Product Maintenance form Displays the ending quantity for the analyzed category Displays the total price for the analyzed category Displays the total cost for the analyzed category Displays the total profit for the analyzed category Displays the percent gross margin for analyzed category Displays the total price of item losses for the analyzed category Displays the total cost of item losses for the analyzed category Displays the count of item losses for the current category Displays the gross margin now including shrink Displays the UPC or PLU number Displays the product description Displays the beginning quant
386. k next to the months that you would like the reports sent Press the Add Trigger button to create the task Table 43 1 Table 43 2contains a description of each field contained in the Reporting Services Settings form Windows Account Windows Account for Scheduling Tasks User Name The name used to sign on to Windows when you first sign on to your computer Password The password used to sign on to Windows This field is encrypted E mail Settings User Information for the E mail that will be sent from Name Enter your name as you want it to appear on the E mail being sent E mail Address Enter the E mail address that the report will be mailed FROM Server Information SMTP Server Logon Information SMTP Requires Authentication Put a checkmark in this field if your SMTP server requires a name and password User Name Enter the User Name which is used for your email account Password Enter the Password used to access your email account Table 43 2 Enter the SMTP Server name For example smtp gmail com RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 291 RETAIL 7 User Manual ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Print Employee Report This function will produce an Employees report listing all employees that currently exist in the system The layout of this report is contained in Appendix F This function is executed when or is selected from the Employees form or when the Print Employee Report function is selected from the Administration menu
387. ks with any outstanding balances You can make the customer inactive if you cannot delete it Important Whenever you add or update customer information make sure you update the information to the checkstands using the Synchronize Checkstands with Customers function This ensures that the checkstands have the current customer data in the event that the checkstands need to operate in stand alone mode Customer Rewards RETAIL has various ways to reward your customers The following is a list of functions that can be used within RETAIL Customer Discounts Pricing Levels Frequent Shopper Points Electronic Coupons Customer Discounts Customers can be given discounts by establishing discount levels within RETAIL and then assigning those discount levels to customers The discount levels are entered using the Discounts tab in the POS Information function refer to the POS Information topic in the Back End Administration section of this manual When the discount levels have been entered assign the discount level to the customer s through the Discount field on the Customer Maintenance function When the customer Card Number is entered at the checkstand the discount is automatically applied to the customer s order The amount the customer saves is printed on the receipt Pricing Levels Customers can be assigned to different pricing arrangements by using the pricing level feature in RETAIL Ten different pricing levels can be supporte
388. l sales taxes collected from taxable sales Tax Exempt Taxes exempted from sales not including food stamp sales FS Tax Exempt Taxes exempted from food stamp sales Cpn Amount Manufacturer Coupon amount Discount Discounts deducted from sales including electronic coupons store coupons order discounts and coupon multiple amounts Table 19 5 Store Sales Tax Detail Report This function will produce a Store Sales Tax Detail report showing the taxable sales and the corresponding sales taxes collected by tax plans per department for the time period selected on the Stores Sales form This function is executed when the _ PiintRepor button is selected from the Stores Sales Tax form Table 19 6 contains a description of each field contained in the Store Sales Tax Detail report Reportfield ________Descriptin _________b Format _ Calculation Detail Tax ID Tax plan numbers by department Text Description Tax plans descriptions Tex Taxable Sales Sales taxable under specific tax plan of particular department Currency Taxes Sales taxes applicable to the above taxable sales Currency Sales Total Sales by department agreed to Sales reported in Store Sales Currency report Tax Exempt Sales Total tax exempt store sales Currency FS Tax Exempt Sales Total tax exempt store sales due to FS tenders received Currency Table 19 6 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL7 8 RETAIL 7 r Manual POINT OF SALES STORE SALE Show Store Sales continu
389. lag to indicate the savings messages will be displayed on the checkstand screen Pricing Level Best Price Flag to indicate the lowest price between normal special and pricing level will be used If not set the pricing level price will always be used if one exists for the product Display Weight Flag to indicate if the weight of weighted items is to be displayed in the weight field of the checkstand screen Display Weight Unit Displays the weight unit Selected from the drop down menu that will be displayed in the weight field of the checkstand screen Display Discounts Flag to indicate if the customer discount amount should be displayed on the Front end checkstand screen Food stamp Items Tax Flag to indicate if food stamp purchases are tax exempted Exempt Price Includes Tax Flag to indicate if the price in the products file includes tax Price Includes Tax Dept Indicates department where tax savings given to customers will be reported Only used if Price Include Tax is set to Yes Auto Sign Off Time Select the time the checkstands will automatically sign off Resume Trans Print Detail Flag if the user wants the detail do not flag if the user wants the summary printed when a transaction is resumed Check Printer Status Flag to indicate if the printer status For example out of paper should be checked at the beginning of every transaction Open Drawer on Sign Off Flag to indicate that the system should automatically open the drawe
390. lating inventory levels in the Inventory Analysis function When using the Inventory Analysis function the ending date can be used as a Start Date when calculating inventory or as a Start and End Date when calculating shrinkage You can access previous counts that you ve entered by clicking the down arrow next to the Category field This will bring up a drop down list of the inventory counts that currently exist in the system Select the one you desire and the information related to the inventory count will be displayed To delete an inventory count click Delete Aa in the toolbar RETAIL deletes the inventory count and all of the associated product entries RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 82 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manage Inventory continued Order Goods Ordering products is a critical function within the inventory system RETAIL supports the ordering of goods through the entry of purchase orders To enter a purchase order select the Open a New Purchase Order function of the Inventory menu Select the vendor supplier of the goods by MAMAS clicking the down arrow to the right of the Vendor 22 1 w field This will bring up a drop down list of all ves po oo P O No 0000000010 z Address VENDOR ADDRESS vendors in the system allowing you to select the 0 A one you desire Once you ve selected the ue A ae vendor the system will automatically generate gen A cam DE i se
391. lato ee eet 3 system in order to facilitate currency conversion at A UewsR P Ton T the checkstand Refer to the Foreign Currencies ey a E section contained in the Appendices Proper PrF aw setup of the Tenders will ensure that checkstand Nin OE veces 0000 tendering will function properly Negaive Amount Required 7 Modified 10 30 2007 11 52 00 AM Modified By Jane Smith 2 Access the Department Maintenance function under the MAINTENANCE section of the Administration menu and complete the following task Departments are the largest classification for a EV ysu product and are necessary before you start to build t aR ms your product file Determine the major ely ep Atributos Miscelaneous classifications of products in your store and enter in en F the departments under this tab Sub Departments 2 ooo O A m up to 9 per department can also be added This is o PRODUCE ReaueAuh T Sak r important to setup before you begin adding Ot WINE GUO ge ee Se z products so they are correctly classified as you add E NON Fon Saar them You cannot add an item in Product i Daly vaidage Maintenance without assigning a department Click 5 EES STANS Discount ey 15 0 DELIVERY SERVICE pissi a rd on the Add button Ef in the toolbar to add a t 0 PET SUPE opm department Enter in the department information i 3 MCE A and attributes Click on the Miscellaneous tab to E EOS eet are a enter additional data a
392. ld now be able to accept the check as the tender for the order RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 91 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manager Functions continued Option 6 Limit Override Function Overrides security to allow an in store charge to be accepted as the tender A manager message as depicted on the right will appear if there is a problem with the customer s in store charge account privileges The message numbers will change N OC h d rg e accoun t depending on the type of problem encountered The error p ri V1 e g es numbers are as follows 1 4 message Customer has no charge account privileges set through the Customer Maintenance function 2 5 message Customer s charge balance has exceeded the customer s limit set through the Customer Maintenance function To override the system and allow the in store charge to be tendered complete the following steps a The checker should now hit the Clear key or Type CL ENTER through the keyboard to clear the message b The manager can complete a in store charge override to allow the in store charge to be accepted for this transaction by following these steps 1 Access the Supervisor menu and choose 6 2 Click OK or ENTER to the message In store charge will now be allowed for the current transaction 3 Select 10 or enter 0 to exit 4 Press the Total key or Type TL ENTER as the transaction co
393. ld providing access to it ttemCode 2222 Half Case 0 000 itemcode cost casecost Splitcasecost Halfca 222 soo 40 HOLLAND AMERICAN 222 1 00 12 00 0 00 14 CERTIFIED 2222 0 75 1 50 0 00 42 BREAKFAST IN BED 2222 0 22 12 00 0 00 vendor_no Name RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 192 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Additional Vendors continued Table 23 4 contains a description of each field contained in the Additional Vendors form UPC Primary Vendor Vendor Displays the current item s UPC Displays the current item s primary vendor Defaults to the primary vendor but additional vendors can be selected or set up by using the drop down menu Defaults to the primary vendor s unit cost the field being grayed out but when other vendor is selected the user is able to enter the selected vendor s unit cost or may enter the cost through the cost calculator form Displays the case cost of the current item for the selected vendor Displays the cost for a split cost of the current item for the selected vendor Displays the cost for a half case of the current item for the selected vendor Unit Cost Case Cost Split Cost Half Cost Vendors list Grid Table 23 4 Product Inventory Click Inventory button from the toolbar to access the Inventory form This form maintains inventory data for the product The UPC Item Code and Stock on Han
394. le 10 5 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 137 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Focus continued Show the Departments Shopped by the Customer lists all the departments with the corresponding sales cost and gross profit figures attributable to the poa SS vam customer The data displayed are either by week 0 00 0 00 by month or by year as selected by the user This 399 4 70 form is accessed when Show Departments eat aa Shopped by the Customer 1 is clicked 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 BABY FOOD 0 00 0 00 BAKERY 0 00 0 00 BEVERAGES 0 00 0 00 BOTTLE RETURNS 0 00 0 00 BREAD 0 00 0 00 Bulk Food 0 00 0 00 CAND 0 00 0 00 CASH CARD 0 00 0 00 CHILDREN S SHOES 0 00 0 00 Table 10 6 contains a description of each field contained in the Department Distribution for a Customer form Department The Department as entered in Department Maintenance Sales The total sales contributed by the customer during the time period selected Cost The cost of goods in each department Gross Profit The gross profit contributed by the customer Sales minus Cost Table 10 6 Show Customer s 12 Week Department Distribution The Department Distribution History for a HON AAN Customer form lists the department sales Department Week 32 2007 Week 34 2007 Week 35 2007 Week 36 2007 Week 37 2007 We A segregated by 12 week period 12 month period sserrooo AAL or 12 year period This form is accessed when cas
395. le for specified date Mfr Coupon field from checker table for specified date Displays the total amount representing the non depositable departments or Hash Department Calculates the difference between previous day s Actual Safe Amount and current day s Actual Safe Amount and deducts it or adds it to the sales amount Total safe adjustments entered for the time period Calculation Total Sales Over Shorts Pdlns PdOuts Received on Acct ATM Mfr Coupons Non depositable Safe Adjustments Safe variance Sum of all deposits made for specified date Difference between Total from System Generated Deposit and Actual Deposit field This section contains the sum of each tender entered on the Till Statistics form for the specified date Difference between totals from Total Sales field and the Totals field in the Tills Section Sum of all Tenders above does not include Over Shorts RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 237 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Balancing Overview continued Tool Bar The following describes the tool bar displayed on the Balancing Overview form Button Description Exit the current window Print a Balancing Overview report Refer to the Balancing Overview Report topic in this section Display the Balancing Overview report on the screen Refer to the Balancing Overview Report topic in this section Print the Store Discount and Coupons Summary Report Refer
396. leting or increasing to the stock on hand e Enter product kits Enter in the products and quantities that make up the kit RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 74 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Maintain Products Data continued When you have entered all the information for the product click Save on the toolbar to save the information There are many other options accessible through the toolbar Refer to the Product Maintenance topic in the Back End Detail Documentation section for more information on all the options available Note Scan the product UPC codes to ensure they are entered correctly While in the Add mode and with the cursor in the UPC field scan the product and the UPC code should appear in the field If you type the UPC codes then follow the examples below UPC Code Type UPC Code Type E EANTS Code EAN Codo l Il M 1123456789012 1234567 Enter in the leading digit as Enter in the leading digit Enter in the leading digit Enter in the product the first character of the as the first character of as the first character of code only for this code UPC followed by the the UPC followed by the the UPC followed by the in this case 1234567 product code in this case product code in this product code in this 12345678901 case 0123456 case 123456789012 Products can also be added through the Front End module of RETAIL Any product added through the checkstand is flagged as
397. lick the next to the Cashier Security field Also make sure you enter the Front End password grants access to the Front End module and their Back End Password grants access to the Back End module The Birth Date of the employee will be used to verify the age of the employee when selling products that require age verification Select a Back End Profile only if the employee will have access to the Back End from the drop down list or press the ellipsis button to the right of the field to access Profile Maintenance Profiles are created in Profile Maintenance as a security measure Employees can view and access only forms that have been assigned to them via Profile Maintenance Click the Save in the toolbar to save the information To edit an employee click the Edit in the toolbar You can search for employees by employee number or by name To search by employee click the down arrow next to the Employee Number field A drop down list of employee numbers will be displayed for you to select To search by name click the down arrow next to the Employee Name field A drop down list of employee names will be displayed for you to select To delete an employee click the Delete in the toolbar You can also make an employee inactive by clicking off the Active check box When an employee is inactive access is denied to the Front End and or Back End systems Remember Whenever you add or update employee information make sure you
398. line CA First Written notification of Returned Check s 11 6 05 Jones Tina A8888888 Our records indicate that a check endorsed by you or your company has been returned by your bank unpaid after 2 deposit attempts Check number 1009 in the amount of 125 00 was accepted in our store A service charge of 30 00 for each returned check is applied Please pay the balance due of 155 00 immediately We must receive your check by Monday November 21 2005 Please contact me at the phone number above if you have any questions or concerns regarding this matter Respectfully yours Amount Due 155 00 Please make your check payable to Goodwin s Market RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 325 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Bad Checks Letter 2 Goodwin s Market 24089 Lake Gregory Drive PO Box 3269 Crestline CA Second Written notification of Returned Check s 11 6 05 Jones Tina A8888888 Our records indicate that a check endorsed by you or your company has been returned by your bank unpaid after 2 deposit attempts Check number 1009 in the amount of 125 00 was accepted in our store A service charge of 30 00 for each returned check is applied Please pay the balance due of 155 00 immediately We must receive your check by Monday November 21 2005 Because this is our second notification your company and or personal checks will be entered into our computer and you will be prohibited from further check cashing
399. ll the product The employee s date of birth entered through o the Employee Maintenance function in the SANET E See nee ai Back End will be used to calculate the age j l of the employee The employee s age will Manager override required then be compared to the required age for purchase on the product 3 Manager s Date of Birth The system will also check the manager s date of birth and will not allow an override if the manager is under the minimum age requirement RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 34 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Line Item Functions continued Repeating a Transaction a Press the repeat key RE ENTER through the keyboard Note only the following transactions can be repeated Scanned or entered products department items DP key section items SE key Received on Account RA key Paid Ins PI key and Paid Outs PO key Scanning a Product a Scan the product using the scanner b Amessage of Product not found will be displayed if product is not in the products file Note Press the Clear key CL ENTER through the keyboard to clear the message Keying in a Product a Key in the product code UPC see note on UPCs below or PLU code ENTER b Amessage of Product not found will be displayed if product is not in the products file Note Press the Clear key CL through the keyboard to clear the message Note Below are examples of f
400. ly Another task that could be done now is to setup your current customers within RETAIL using the Customer Maintenance function This is not a mandatory step since RETAIL will function without this data It s up to the user to decide if they d like to establish their customer file at this point RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 304 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX B RUNNING A 24 HOUR STORE Appendix B Running a 24 Hour Store Overview RETAIL supports the operation of a 24 Hour store which includes stores which operate under one of the following scenarios 1 A store which never physically closes 2 Astore that wishes to do a store close prior to actually physically closing the store 3 A store that operates passed 12 00 AM When a Store Close function is performed on a 24 Hour store the transactions processed up to that point will be posted against the day being closed All transactions processed after the store close is run will be posted to the following day During the Store Close process the front end checkstands can continue to function without signing off However they will be required to insert a new drawer and will be loaned in for the new processing day In a regular store RETAIL uses the calendar date as its processing date Each transaction is posted with the current date In a 24 Hour store RETAIL keeps its own processing date that is independent of the calendar date This processing date is
401. m RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 110 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Maintenance continued Customer In store Charge Attributes The Customer In store Charge Attributes form MZZ is used to set up customers who would enjoy oe aes a a i 7 ustomer nstore arge Y Save charge privileges This form is displayed when the Cado 22 Tes Le HE x z Close Customer Attributes is clicked from the toolbar oe O C EE Balance 6278 00 Finance Charge IV CardNo Name Terms Credit Limit Balance Finance Charge 111 Harrison Hortense 1 5 00 34 90 Yes 0047503463106 Hen Les O 1 000 00 0 00 Note Column headings can be toggled for desired Errar errores vor s yy aa Henry Emily 1 2 000 00 62 78 Yes data SO rti ng 3 Henry Kristin 1 1 000 00 113 42 Yes 1 Henry Luke O 2 000 00 12 33 Yes 24 Henry Riley 1 5 00 4 35 Yes 26 Henry Schmem 5 1 000 00 0 00 Yes 25 Henry Smiley 5 1 000 00 0 00 Yes 9 Hughes Howard 5 1 000 00 0 00 Yes Table 2 13 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer In store Charge Attributes form Card No Displays the current customer s card number User can also enter or double click grid row to display another customer s data Name Displays the name of the current customer Balance Displays the current outstanding balance of current customer In store Charge Box Flagged when customer is set up as charge customer Terms Displays
402. m Length Enter the minimum length of the password Optional DATA SYNCHRONIZATION Setup Synchronization Jobs Press to setup a job to automatically synchronize all of the tables on a set schedule QUANTITY HALO Halo Enter the maximum number of an item that may be keyed in on the Front End for example 10 UPC before a warning message is given to the cashier Used to prevent entry errors DATABASE TAB SQL Name The name of the computer hosting the SQL Server database User Name The login ID used to access the SQL database default sa Password The password to access the SQL Server Test Connection Press the button to test the connection from the checkstands to the server LICENSEE TAB Licensed Company Name Displays the name of the company to which RETAIL is licensed and which is contained in the license file Retail lic Changing the name will invalidate the License Company Logo Displays the path name where the company logo file exists C Retail logo bmp Preview Logo Displays the logo is it has been entered in CARetaillogo bmp CHECKSTANDS Name Displays the network name of the Checkstands Refresh Link Press to Refresh the information on the form Create Link Press to add a checkstand to the system information form Delete Link Highlight the name of the checkstand you would like to delete and press this button Deactivate Press to activate or deactivate a checkstand PNOTIFICATIONTABS JOO SSS Table 32 1 RETAIL U
403. m of the P O and press DELETE Adjusts a P O Refer to P O Adjustments topic in this section Shows the multiple vendors and the cost for the current item Refer to Multiple Vendor Cost topic latter in this section Shows all the P O s currently in the system Refer to Find P O topic in this section Jumps to the Show Product Movement function Refer to Show Product Movement topic contained in the Point of Sales section Maintains notes about a product on the purchase order Refer to the Product Memo topic contained in the Product Maintenance section Gives access to cost calculator The user must have a profile allowing him to access Product Maintenance in order to use this function Changes applied will update the product in the Product file Refer to Cost Calculator topic in this section Activates the context sensitive help Se le a Fe a Ble amp RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL7 o 4 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Open a New Review a Purchase Order continued P O Adjustments You can use the P O Adjustment form to enter KISTE adjustments to a P O This form is displayed when the P O Adjustments button is clicked from the New PO Number OO00000007 ProcDate 10 26 2007 Purchase Order form or from the Receive an icn PA Reductions Surcharges Adjust by Invoice form Adjustments can either be made for the Oey og see Purchase Order entire P O select Purchase Order or mad
404. mation stored in the various system logs ppa manii maintained by RETAIL The form displayed Store Close Y Update Checkstands T Time Activity At Status depends on the menu selection chosen from the Log odos 71 45 01 PM Update Products LESLIE 651 Updates 0 Add New 9 Deleted E Dias F 1 45 01 PM Update Products 2006TEST 651Updates 0 Add New 9 Deleted drop down menu on this form The menu selections E mien a 7 1 45 01 PM Update Products LESLIE 2Updates 0 Add New 0 Deleted i 7 1 45 01 PM Update Products 2006TEST 2Updates 0 Add New 0 Deleted include Store Close Log Update Checkstands Log 7 1 40 19 PM Update Customers 2006TEST 102Updates 0 Add New 0 Deleted i F 1 39 51 PM Update ECoupons 2006TEST OUpdates 1 Add New 0 Deleted H Isto ry Backup Log Database Error Log and Close F 1 11 32 PM Update ECoupons LESLIE OUpdates 1 Add New O Deleted RETAI L TM User Activit Lo eeen F 1 45 01 PM Update Products 2006TEST 1Updates 0 Add New 0 Deleted y g i Jane Smith 10 22 2007 1 45 01 PM Update Products 2006TEST Updates 0 Add New 0 Deleted Jane Smith 10 22 2007 11 40 38 AM Update ECoupons 2006TEST OUpdates 2 Add New O Deleted i f r 3 Jane Smith 10 22 2007 11 38 35 AM Update ECoupons 2006TEST OUpdates 2 Add New O Deleted Click the log you wish to view and the information Jane Smith 10 22 2007 11 27 42AM Update ECoupons 2006TEST OUpdates 2 Add New 0 Deleted Jane Smith 10 22 2007 11 27 42 AM Update ECoupons LESLIE OUpdates 2 Add New O Deleted
405. mber Customer Surcharge Msg Message printed on receipt for the total amount that applies to customer surcharges Frequent Shopper Message Message printed on receipt for frequent shopper points awarded to the customer Item Discount Message Message printed on receipt for the total amount that applies to customer item discounts Next use Coupon Desc1 Description 1 of electronic coupons generated for next use will be printed on receipt Next use Coupon Desc2 Description 2 of electronic coupons generated for next use will be printed on receipt Next use Coupon Desc3 Description 3 of electronic coupons generated for next use will be printed on receipt Next use Coupon Desc4 Description 4 of electronic coupons generated for next use will be printed on receipt Pricing Level Message Abbr Abbreviation displayed on the Front end checkstand screen and receipt preceding products discounted by a customer s pricing level Pricing Level Message Message displayed on the Front end checkstand screen and receipt when customers receive savings based on there assigned pricing level Savings Message Savings message text displayed on the Front end checkstand screen and receipt TOTALS Change Allows you to format the change as displayed on the checkstand receipt Non Taxable Allows you to format the non taxable amount as displayed on the checkstand receipt Subtotal Allows you to format the sub total as displayed on the checkstand receipt Tax A Allows you to f
406. me period and select which type of data week month and year you want to view A list of customer data is displayed at the bottom of the screen Double click a particular line to view the specific data for that customer including the customer s photo if a photo has been assigned to the customer in the Customer Maintenance form Table 10 1 contains a description of each field contained in Customer Focus form CUSTOMER FOCUS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Customer Information Customer Photo Name Phone Address Criteria Date Week Month Sales Information Gross Margin Total Sales 1 Dept Profits 1 Dept Sales Profit Contributions Statistics Amt Trip Profit Trip Shopped for Times Prd Trans Time Times Shop Favorite Products Favorite Cashier Department Distribution List Card Number Customer Name Photo assigned through the Customer Maintenance form Customers name set up through the Customer Maintenance form Customers phone set up through the Customer Maintenance form Customers address set up through the Customer Maintenance form Information is calculated from the Sunday previous to this date Information is displayed by the week from Sunday to Saturday of the week selected Information is displayed by the Month from the first to the current or last day of the month selected Information is displayed by the Year from the first to the current or last day of the year selected Total sales for the
407. mer to slide card through the pin pad c The customer should slide their card through the pin pad d A message will appear prompting customer to select a tender type on the MSR The customer should select a tender type Note The customer does not have to wait until the cashier is finished to complete this step As soon as the cashier begins ringing up items the customer can slide the card and select the card type from the pin pad Note If the magnetic strip on the card cannot be reader by the MSR the customer can click clear button on the pin pad and the checker can key in account number and expiration date e If customer wishes to tender less than the total order the cashier should key in the desired tender amount and the Electronic Tender tendering key For example 2000ET f The customer is then asked to verify the amount and press enter on the pin pad to confirm the transaction Note If the amount is not correct customer can click the clear button on the pin pad and checker can begin the electronic order again g A processing message will appear on the screen while the transaction is being processed Note Do not interrupt process once customer has accepted the transaction Interruption may prevent the transaction approval message from being displayed even though transaction has been approved h Once authorization is received a message will be displayed Approved i lf you are using a pin pad that accepts signatures the customer will be promp
408. mmary Total Store RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 333 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Gift Certificate Letter Tuesday December 06 2005 GOODWIN S MARKET 24089 Lake Gregory Dr P O Box 3269 Crestline Ca Gary or Diane Anderson 004099282762 P O Box 1234 76543 Crest Forest Drive 92311 We here at GOODWIN S MARKET want to express our sincere thanks for your faithful support of our store Our success depends greatly upon your continued patronage So to show our appreciation to you we would like to give you a gift certificate It s just our way of recognizing you our valued customer and saying Thank you for shopping at GOODWIN S MARKET sincerely Your Name Your Title The bearer of this certificate is entitled to 5 00 merchandise from GOODWINS Redeemer s Signature Corporate Seal RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 334 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E In Store Charge Activity Goodwin s Market Customer In store Charge Activity Start Date 10 15 2005 Date Activity 10 21 05 Charge 5 5 182 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0041000000128 10 16 05 Charge 1 1 263 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0041000000538 10 15 05 Charge 3 3 112 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0041000000545 10 28 05 Charge 7 7 66 10 19 05 Charge 6 6 42 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0041000000547 10 23 05 Charge 3 3 192 10 23 05 Charge 3 3 192 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0041000000548 10 30 05 Charge 4 4 163 100
409. mmed keyboard the transaction codes can be entered through a regular keyboard The following table defines the transaction codes used within RETAIL These transaction codes can be typed in through a regular keyboard on the Main Checkstand form command line or programmed into a POS keyboard For the examples included in the table the following data was used UPC product code 28 and in most cases 5 00 as the amount Note Refer to the Checkstand Functions topic in this section for more information on these transaction codes RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 23 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Keyboard Use with Regular Keyboard continued MAIN CHECKSTAND FORM COMMAND LINE TRANSACTION CODES or to apply discounts The system will prompt you to enter a customer ID Customer IDs can also be scanned bypassing this step KEYSTROKES CK Tender Amount CK ENTER 500CK ENTER Check Tender used to pay for the order The amount required is can be flagged CM CM ENTER CM ENTER Manual Electronic Tender used to pay for the order when the card cannot be swiped through the Pin Pad Also used for Checks when bypassing Electronic Cancels the entire order Applies discount to the entire order for all products categorized as A In the example a 5 1 4 discount is applied to the order Note that discounts are entered with a decimal point rf Applies discount to the entire order for all products ca
410. mount of pickups for the day Based on Till Statistics Displays the amount of loan ins for the day Based on Till Statistics Displays the reconciled amount entered in Till Statistics for each cashier for the day 229 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Safe Statistics and Balancing continued SAFE STATISTICS AND BALANCING FIELD DESCRIPTIONS CONTINUED FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Deposits Ending Totals BALANCE INFO TAB System Gen Deposit Total Sales Over Shorts Paid Ins Paid Outs Received On Acct ATW Credit Mfr Coupons Non Depositable Safe Variance Safe Adjustments To be Deposited Actual Deposit Variance Safe Contents Displays the deposits made for the day Calculated ending safe balance Calculation Opening Balance Adjustments Pickups Loans Reconcile Deposits Totals of detail lines Sum of sales amounts for the day Should balance to Till Statistics form Over Short variances from the Till Statistics for the day Sum of paid in amounts for the day Should balance to Till Statistics form Sum of paid out amounts for the day Should balance to Till Statistics form Sum of customers received on accounts payments for the day Should balance to Till Statistics form Sum of all ATM and Credit Card transactions taken at the checkstands for the day Sum of all coupons taken at the checkstands for the day Total of tenders not flagged as depositable e g In store Charge
411. mplete this step As soon as the cashier begins ringing up items the customer can slide the card through the MSR g Select the Electronic Tender tendering key ET ENTER through the keyboard If customer wishes to tender less than the total order the cashier should key in the desired tender amount and the Electronic Tender tendering key If the customer would like cash back for an amount different from the predefined amounts the cashier would key for cash back plus the total order and press the Electronic Tender tendering key h The customer is then asked to verify the amount and press enter on the pin pad to confirm the transaction i A processing message will appear on the screen while the transaction is being processed Note Do not interrupt process once customer has accepted the transaction Interruption may prevent the transaction approval message from being displayed even though transaction has been approved j Once authorization is complete a message will be displayed Transaction Approved Note If the transaction has been denied or an error has occurred a message will be displayed Transaction Declined and or an error code will be displayed k The customer and merchant copies of the receipt will print out I If you do not want to print a merchant copy enter SkipPrintMerchant 1 in the ros ini m The customer will keep the customer copy and the checker will save the merchant copy for balancing at the end of the sh
412. n Verify Age When flagged prompts the Checkstand user to enter the date of birth of the customer to an open section sale Displays the starting age of the customer allowed to buy to an open section sale Unit of measure assigned to products in this section Check if Category A and or B discounts will apply to this section Check appropriate tax tables assigned to this section Valid Age Unit of Measure Disc A B Tax A D Table 37 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAML Ze RETAIL 7 User Manual section Maintenance continued Toolbar ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on Section Maintenance Button Description Exit the current window Print the Sections report Refer to the Sections Report topic in this section Display the Sections report on the screen Refer to the Sections Report topic in this section Save your entries or changes for the current record Jump to the Add a Section function Ao E oe Jump to the Edit a Section function Sections Report The Sections Report function will produce a Sections report listing sections currently in the system This function is executed when or is selected from the Section Maintenance form Table 37 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Sections report Report field Description Format Calculation Section Name Department Modified Date Modified By Foo
413. n Mo longer used An entry will then be created in the User Activity Log capturing the person completing Cancel Help dl The change the date and time of the transaction the reason for the transaction and the contents of certain key fields for the record effected e g UPC for products Card Number for Customer Customer Name The contents of the log can then be viewed by using the View System Log Files function contained under the Administration menu RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 60 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Back End Functions How to Introduction This section of the manual provides an overview on how to complete certain key functions using the RETAIL Back End module The intent is to give the user a good overview on how to complete these specific functions The important functions supported in the Back End module are covered here The functions covered include Manage Customers Manage Employees Manage Products Bookkeeping amp Accounting Manage Inventory System Administration The On line Help within RETAIL and the Initializing the System section contained in the Appendix are also good resources to assist you in understanding the functions supported in the RETAIL Back End module RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 61 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Signing On Double click the RETAIL Icon to sign on to
414. n This number cannot be edited To change the order un flag the fields and select them in the correct order according to your preferences 3 After making your selections press OK 4 Now you can select the groups of products to edit 5 From the Column drop down select your first criterion for example Section Then select the Operator for example equals Next select the Value in this case by pressing the ellipsis button to the right of the field The list of Sections will be displayed enabling the user to select the section 6 To further filter the products to be edited flag the check box next to the second row and make your selections For example select Normal Price then gt greater than then enter the price 2 00 7 You may filter the products to be edited further by selecting the third check box When you are finished with your selections press the Find Button Product Power Edit Select Products Column Operator Value o AAA A El Find Fields and Sequence Setting Product Fields Select Fields i Description Disc A Disc B Long Description Max Discount Mixmatch Code Negative Price Eliqible Select Products Column Operator Value Section y E gt Search Results Section No Name Select a value from list 18 Blackhawk Gift Cards 50 Board Games 40 Bottle Water 19 Bread 30 Butter and Margarine 2 Camera 36 Canned
415. n triggers the coupon Trigger Qty The number of items that need to be purchased to trigger the coupon Trigger Amount The amount that must be purchased to trigger the coupon Table 4 2 Target Customers The Customer Coupons form is accessible through the Ellipse button next to the Coupon Method field for Target Coupons eae E au Enter one or more customers to which the Name CouporiD Multiples Delete coupon applies Only the customers entered Emily Heny 233 1 _ Cose will have the coupon available to them for use eer pie 223 Gilbert Armstrong 233 1 Donna Armstrong 233 1 Type a card number or search for a customer Thema Thomson 3 by clicking the down arrow next to the Card No Heite ze field Entries are displayed in the bottom portion Jessica Sandstrom 233 of the form as they are added You can also access Target coupons in Customer Focus and apply the coupon to your top customers Table 4 3 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer Coupons form CUSTOMER COUPONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTIONS Coupon ID Coupon ID of coupon being added edited Card No Type card number or click arrow to search for a customer Card No Card Number of customer assigned to the coupon Name Name of customer assigned to the coupon Coupon ID Coupon ID of coupon being added edited Multiples Number of times coupon has been used Table 4 3 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 120 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUST
416. n All abanl akanda bain hamin abaanl ad ard 1 Mi store close process select the Close Store 2 function of the Administration menu Click the Run Now button to start the store close process When the store close process is complete a message will appear informing you that it was completed successfully If you d like to see a log of the completed steps proceed to the View System Log Files task The Store Close can also be set up to run automatically every day at a specific time This function is set up in System Information From the Default tab under the Auto Store Close section press the Setup Store Close button Enter the time of day for the Store Close to occur using the AM or PM format For example 10 00 PM Press O K to save your selection The store close will then occur daily at the specified time After the store close has been set up the Date of the last successful store close will be displayed to the right of the Setup Store Close button Note If suspended transactions exist for the day being closed a message may be displayed requiring that the suspended transactions are cleared The options on how the system should handle suspended transactions at store close can be configured via the System Information function Note If the store close process does not complete successfully the next time you select this function a Store Close Recovery process will execute This will restart the store close process from the point it encou
417. n currencies all of the data within the system is tracked in the local currency This is done in order to ensure the integrity of the data in the system as it is processed and summarized The amount tendered in the foreign currency is tracked on the transaction detail for audit purposes Setup Currency Maintenance Each foreign currency that will be tendered in the ETM system must be entered into the system Via the Tender Maintenance function click on the Currency button 4 Currency coe ID Dollars 2 Pounds TTT Close i eso escription ttiti lt is sS _ ose to access the Currency Maintenance form The local A Descrip 7 i Pick2 Symbol po Value TCS Help currency is established as part of the setup process and is always assigned a Currency ID of 1 To add additional currencies click on the Add button and the next available ID will be assigned Enter in the description of the currency the symbol to be displayed e g and the value of the currency in terms of the local currency i e if one dollar is worth 8 pesos then enter 125 as the value of the peso in dollars Click on the Save button to save the currency Created Modified Modified By Add Tender Setup Once the currencies have been entered they will G S appear as entries in the Currency field on the 9 Tender Maintenance form In order for a render transaction to be tendered in a foreign currency a Teo iQ
418. n of the bill back Text UPC UPC of the product Text Item Code Item Code of the product Text Vendor Vendor that bill back applies to Text Start Date Start date of the bill back Date End Date End date of the bill back Date Amount per Rebate Rebate amount per unit sold Currency Suggested Price Suggested RETAIL price as entered on the bill back Currency Status 1 Received Payment 2 Waiting Payment Text Table 16 4 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 157 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Print Stock on Hand Report The function will produce a Stock On Hand report for Seen rarer products whose stock on hand is less than or equal to a specified threshold Enter the threshold desired and click OK The system will compare the stock on hand stock On Hand Threshold for each product in the system and list out products whose stock on hand is less than or equal to the Cancel threshold entered Help Table 17 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Stock On Hand report Reportfield Description _ __ Format Calculation _ Section Section name Text None UPC UPC of product Text None Description Product description Text None Stock on Hand Current stock on hand of product Numeric None Cost Product cost Currency None Extended Cost Value of inventory based on current cost Currency Stock on Hand Cost Table 17 1 Selection Criteria Any product whose stock on hand is less than or equal to threshold en
419. nance Evaluation Set Point Values Press the Settings button to establish the Evaluation Setting point ranges for your cashiers performance ee ho Dinon Ta Here you can set the dollar amount of Over or Short per day Enter the amounts and press Save Bi 1 00 2 00 Grading Grading You can also change the average Grading performance percentages This is the gt 0 50 employee s average using the means as gt 010 explained in the previous section Grading Grading an Grading Average Performance Percentage lt Grading lt Grading lt Grading lt Grading FEEL i Grading Grading Monitor Tills The Monitor Tills form is used to monitor the tills of the checkstands currently in use This form can be displayed by clicking the Monitor Tills button from the toolbar in the Safe Statistics and Balancing form or when you select the Monitor Tills function from the Point of Sales menu Various amounts are displayed for each cashier This data is refreshed every 10 seconds to provide up to date statistics If the Till Limit for a displayed tender has exceeded the information will be displayed in blue font color If the Mandatory Limit for a displayed tender has exceeded then the information will be displayed in red font color A pickup request covered later in this section can then be completed from this form The user can configure the tenders displayed on th
420. nance section of this manual e Manager function security refers to the Security Administration topic of the Back End Administration Maintenance section of this manual e Tender attributes and dollar limits refer to the Tender Maintenance topic of the Back End Administration Maintenance section of this manual Keyboard Use RETAIL will accept transaction codes from a programmed Point of Sales POS keyboard or by inputting the transaction codes directly on the command line of the main Checkstand form refer to the main Checkstand form depicted earlier The following is a POS keyboard layout depicting a sample keyboard supporting a grocery store that has been programmed with the RETAIL commands When a POS keyboard is programmed there is no need to enter transaction codes Pressing the programmed keys will do this for you Refer to the commands supported by RETAIL in the Command Line Transaction Codes table below Refer to the keyboard manufacturer s instructions in order to program your keyboard RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 22 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Keyboard Use continued J E ix Fx ri i T of pS ir Xx wn i m iv E lt al a ED NNOUNSDNE BORDES EENE Note The POS keyboard depicted is a POS Preh Keyboard 7 ine Liq BREN RSU enMe Keyboard Use with Regular Keyboard If you dont have a POS progra
421. nd 2006TEST still signed on il 11 2 2007 11 2 2007 8 56 58 4M 1 Store Close Store Close cannot continue 1 111 2007 1142 2007 8 50 28 AM 1 Store Close Recovery Store Close Recovery Finished Successfully for 11 014 9 111 2007 1172 2007 8 50 07 4M 1 Store Close Recovery All checkstands have been checked out 44 907 11 N NNN 0 FO 07 ARA 1 Charen Clann Danai imr alar tira Chara Calan 1 4 gt Once this button is clicked a message will be Retail displayed informing you that the program will update the dates on the checkstands Click on i This function will only change the Trans Date on the checkstand the Yes button to complete the updates and the You still need to run store close recovery as soon as possible program will change the processing date on each checkstand to the next day Note The store close process recovery will still need to be completed once the problem with the store close has been corrected RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 308 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX C FOREIGN CURRENCIE Appendix C Foreign Currencies Overview RETAIL supports the conversion of foreign currencies when tendering orders on the Front End system The functions required to support this include 1 Setup of currencies and their conversion value in the local currency 2 Setup of tenders assigned to the currencies 3 Conversion of tendered amounts on the checkstand Although RETAIL supports tendering in foreig
422. nd press ENTER or press the Add button in the toolbar The Create New Batch dialogue box pops up Select the Batch Type from the drop down and enter the start and ending dates and times for the ad batch For a Normal Price Change batch only enter the Start Date The dates cannot be selected for the Pull Shelf Tags batch Now you are ready to begin entering products Type the UPC code of a product for this batch and press ENTER Now type the pricing information related to this product for this batch Click the down arrow of the method field to produce a drop down menu of several different pricing methods Select the pricing method you wish and enter in the pricing information as it applies to this product Click the POS Information tab to view information about the product From this tab you can specify a Mix Match code that would be in effect while the product is on ad Note The Mix Match code for the product resets to spaces when the ad has expired Click Attributes tab and view attributes for the product From this tab you can indicate whether discounts should be allowed while the product is on ad by using the Allow Discount field Allow Discount may be set as the default from the System Information task Products you enter are listed in the bottom portion of the screen You can repeat this process for as many products as you like If a product you enter belongs to a Pricing Product Group the system prompts you to add all products belonging to th
423. nd press the Save button i e ICA 4 ae rise r ll To edit a department click on the Edit button cee a M E Select the department you want to edit by clicking on it from the list RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 299 RETAIL 79 r Manual APPENDIX A INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM Step 2 Setup Maintenance Information continued 3 Access the Section Maintenance function under the MAINTENANCE section of the Administration menu and complete the following task Sections need to be setup so products can be further classified into sections and subsections This is important to setup before you begin adding products so they are correctly classified as you add them Decide how you want the sections established and add the sections you desire To add a section click on the Add button 8 Enter the section number section name and department the section belongs to Enter section attributes and press the Save button To edit a section click on the Edit button Select the section you want to edit by clicking on a section from the list Edit Section Section Section Name Department Section Number Section Name 7 Pet Supplies 8 Sandwiches 9 Miscellaneous 10 Finest Selection 11 Cheese 13 CRY 14 Legos 15 Fly Swatters 16 Potted Plants 17 Wine Test 100 Bread 101 Doughnuts 102 Beef 103 Chicken 104 Fish 105 Vegetables Department Name GROCERY PHOTO BAKERY PRODUCE AAAMEAT WINE LIQUOR PET SUPPL
424. ndicate if the tender can be monitored through monitor tills function Accept for Change Flag to indicate if the tender can be given out as change It will then display as an option in the change tender field for itself and other tenders Use MSR Flag to indicate if a magnetic swipe reader can be used to gather information for the tender RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 279 RETAIL 7 User Manual ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Tender Maintenance continued TENDER MAINTENANCE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS CONTINUED FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Require ID Flag to indicate if an ID is required to accept the tender The cashier will be prompted to enter a customer id on the order Valid ID Flag to indicate if valid customer ID must be entered to accept the tender Secondary ld Flag to indicate is a secondary Id must be entered to accept the tender Secondary Id checks check writing privileges against the secondary id entered via the customer maintenance form Require Franking Flag to indicate if franking is required for the tender Open Drawer Flag to indicate if the cash drawer is to be opened when the tender is used Track Count Flag to indicate if tender counts should be tracked as well as the amount Allow Media Swap Flag to indicate if media swaps can be done for the tender at the Checkstand Print Tender Count Flag to print the number of transactions a particular tender has in the Front end till statistics Tender Amount Required Fl
425. ndn 102 Redeem Customers Frequent Shopper POINTS sccccccessssccsseesssccsssssssecessesssecsseessssecssesassecessesasseesssesaasess 102 IN STORE CHARGE MAINTENANCE esca adi ica 103 TOOR A A O 105 New Ea ISO CAI CS toi a 105 New CE OIE Fa Me Stata iio 107 New GIOIA CVO S starts tada 108 Instore GAGE FINANCE soc A heals 109 Customer In Slor Charge ADULTES id ii io 111 store Charge Te S 02 A A AA iS 112 COSO Mr Menta tata dt dias 113 BAD CHECK MAINTENANCE iaa doin ATE 114 TOON APORTO 115 CUSIOMEF DAC CHECKS iii cia hice a ev a ach diac Ns be Sythe a te Suse aeh alpaca tesNis te Cyst dedeusaess 116 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 5 RETAIL 7 r Manual TABLE OF CONTENT Set Check Return FCC oococicccicinininicicic 116 ELECTRONIC E OU ee pod cs ee et ae es add 117 E N LEST a ds e ed ve ee 120 Target CUS OMET vato docena ro Una Eon ni ae 120 TOUS O E E A AA eta daleR bata ane aeaen nea A 121 COUPON SCN srta IE e a EII 122 PADE COUPONS FEDON nesre ee TnT DA que Deacninebadde eTA eO 123 Delete Inactiv COUPONS crisser rerainan RE E AAA ADT AA IA 123 ELECTRONIC COUPON MOVEMENT ccc ccc o duda ee eth 124 HI A A 125 Electronic Coupon Movement REDOS ccccsccccescscsessccssccessscecssssecssssecsasessssesessesessesesseseasseseuseseesesesseseaes 125 FREQUENT CHOPPER RANGE ctas 126 RESET FREQUENT SHOPPER OINTS cerraran 127 SYNCHRONIZE CHECKSTANDS WITH CUSTOMERS ELECTRONIC COUPONS ccccccceeecececeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeeeee
426. ndow Prints a customer report Refer to the Print Customer Report section Displays the customer report on the screen Refer to the Print Customer Report section Saves your entries or changes for the current record Opens the Add a Customer form Opens the Edit a Customer form Flags the customer as deleted in the system The customer is physically deleted when the Synchronize Checkstands with Customers function is executed Redeems shopper points for customers that are flagged as frequent shoppers Refer to the Redeem Shopper Points topic in this section Helps to access the In Store Charge Maintenance function Refer to the In Store Charge Maintenance topic in this section Finds a customer by name or card number Refer to the RETAIL Search topic in this section Displays bad checks received from the selected customer Refer to Bad Check Maintenance topic in this section Maintains notes about a customer Refer to the Customer Memo topic in this section Activates the context sensitive help ARE Er Aa GE Customer Photo The Customer Photo form is used to select and save a photo saved in jpg or omp format to the selected customer Customer Photo Press Browse to search for the photo OK Clear Note Photos are used in the Customer Focus form Cancel Browse Table 2 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer Photo form CUSTOMER PHOTO FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRI
427. ne ummm smee PR no pm saagaa pcia 0000000000016 Flaming Doritos 200 400 300 600 600 50 00 1 12 00 your selection Click on the Include Related ae TEAT so sao 1000 2000 saoo sok 3 sao Products field to summarize data for products ang A CIO oe ee TO 0000000000025 Strawberry Jelly 1 00 250 163 00 163 00 244 50 60 00 3 407 50 y having the same item code Note The Sales amount displayed on this form is calculated as follows Total Sales excluding taxes amp coupons Department Level Sales Section Level Sales Electronic Coupons Note Number of items includes any UPC Links used by Electronic Coupons If UPCs have been entered into the system to track electronic coupons usage the UPCs will be included in the selection of data Table 20 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Product Sales form Start Date Displays the start date for the query End Date Displays the end date for the query UPC Displays the UPC or PLU to be queried for the selected time period Dept Displays the department name to be queried if UPC selected then displays the department name corresponding to the UPC Displays the section name to be queried if UPC selected then displays the section name for the UPC Displays the vendor name to be queried if UPC selected then displays the vendor name for the UPC Displays other options to be queried for the selected time period Displays the total sales amount of the selected category
428. ne Each template type from the drop down menu abra represents the functions for which templates T Label 99 can be defined Shelf Audit DSD Inv Count _ and Order are functions supported by SEE Ad Guckadd Add Product TM I l i 2 Edit Quick Edit Edit RETAIL p Wireless while Quick Add and 3 Update 1 Shelf Audit Update Update 1 Quick Edit are functions available in the Back 4 Update 2 Shelf Audit Update Update 2 5 Update 3 Shelf Audit Update Update 3 End 6 Update 4 Shelf Audit Update Update 4 To create and define a template Click the Add l button from the toolbar Select a template type from the Template Type list Type a name and a description Select fields that will be available on the template from the Products Field De select the product by clicking on the product Select the users that will be able to use this template from the list of Available Users The assigned template will be used based on the user s password when signing on to the Wireless or Back End modules 6 Click Save to save the information e PUNA O For the Shelf Audit templates the Update Type field will be available for use Shelf Audit will allow the user to update product information from a wireless device The Update Type determines how these updates will be completed either immediately or through a Batch Immediately indicates that changes will be updated immediately to the system Batch indicates that a product batch will be created with
429. nges to data the checkstand computers must be updated so they have the latest information Data may also be updated to the checkstands on a set schedule To set up a schedule go to the System Information task in the Administration Menu Press the Setup Synchronization Job button on the form Processing Restrictions Checkstands Update Synchronization All Tables Sta Exe ano chonization Procedures for Sections ERRE Synchronizing LLE with au oupon Getting last updat elie last uds for Electron ls pal pons c hae ed since 11 1 2007 11 38 37 AM Pari id ted n synch Synchronizing Employee Don as been synchroni 5 tei 2008TEST ride o onCodes data has been synchro peri SOOBTEST as nchronized success Synchronizing 2DOSTEST Synchronizin pees Sections data has been synchro No restrictions can be run at any time Checkstands will use updated information when next order is processed Processing Specifications 1 Select the Checkstands to be updated usually all by clicking in the 1 next to the Checkstand name Click OK to start the process 2 Thesystem connects to all Checkstands selected If an error occurs the system will prompt you Cannot connect to some of the Checkstands Do you still want to continue If you select NO the system will abort this function If you select YES then the system will continue this function However the checkstands that caused the error will not be updated with t
430. nic coupons that meet certain criteria for a specific i AE x start date Criteria can be specified based on Uno EIA trigger group and coupon type When the Mismatch as eE criteria are specified and OK is clicked Department z Target Customer Hee coupons matching the criteria are displayed in Secon the bottom portion of the Electronic Coupons Vendor a StatDate 8 26 2007 y form Table 4 4 contains a description of each field contained in the Coupon Settings form Display Filter UPC Used to select a specific UPC as the filter criteria Displays selected criteria when the Show Hide Coupons Lists button is toggled on Mix match Used to select a specific Mix match code as the filter criteria Dept Used to select a specific Department as the filter criteria Section Used to select a specific Section as the filter criteria Vendor Used to select a specific Vendor as the filter criteria Coupon Type Linked Coupon Used to select all Linked Coupons as filter criteria Preferred Customer Used to select all Preferred Coupons as filter criteria Target Customer Used to select all Target Coupons as filter criteria Misc Start Date Used to select a Start Date as a filter criteria Description Prefix Used to display as the default prefix for the descriptions of each coupon created Table 4 4 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 122 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Electronic Coupons continued Print Coupons Re
431. nic coupon Description Displays coupon description Coupon Link Coupon Link assigned to the coupon Start Start date of the coupon End End date of the coupon Priority Priority of the coupons Pricing Pricing methods of the coupon 0 Price Reduction 1 Specified Price 2 Reduction 3 Generate Coupon Amount Amount applied to product sale when coupon takes effect Type Customer type coupon applies to RG Linked Coupon PC Preferred Customer TG Target Customer Table 23 10 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 196 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Maintenance continued Tab Ordering Tab Order Setting Select Tab Ordering button from the toolbar to access the Tab Order Setting form This form lists all the fields Producte Field contained in the Product Maintenance form Put a check TT OF in the fields in the order you would like the cursor focus to Allow_Lookup move when tab or enter is pressed Press O K after Cancel making your selection or press cancel to exit the form CategoryB Cert_Code Department Description DSD Entorce_Oty Foodstarnp GrossMargin Label Line_ltem Max Discount MismatchCode Mismatch MormalPriceM ethod Cost Normal Price JOO OOO OOOO OOO 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Product Settings Click the Settings button from the toolbar of the METRES Product Maintenance form to access the Product KER Settings form The parameters entered on the fo
432. non sale related e g payment recd for bad check Paid Outs Amount paid by cashier that are non sale related e g payment made for products on consignment Recvd On Acct Amount of payments made to customers charge account Over shorts Total of over shorts from Till Balancing portion of the form Last Balanced Last date and time cashier s records were changed Coupons Amount of coupons redeemed by customers Coupon Count Number of coupons redeemed by customers Dbl Coupons Amount of doubled coupons redeemed by customers Visible if option to track double coupons is selected via the System Information function applies to double coupon count as well Dbl Coupon Cnt Number of doubled coupons redeemed by customers Table 29 1 Toolbar The following describes the tool bar displayed on the Till Statistics and Balancing form Button Description Exit the current window Print a Till Statistics and Balancing Report Refer to the Till Statistics Report topic in this section Display the Till Statistics and Balancing Report on the screen Refer to the Till Statistics Report topic in this section Save your entries or changes for the current record Refresh the till statistics for an employee for the selected time period Refer to the Select an Employee topic in this section Display the Currency Conversion form to convert amounts between different currencies Refer to the Foreign Currencies topic in the Appendices Previ
433. npaid Invoice vendor desired start and end dates and whether you aa Pint want Paid and or unpaid invoices Click Print to print a report of the data displayed on the form Invoice Date Vendor Dept Invoice No Total Cost Total Price Vendor 10 11 2007 14 CERTIFIED 7 100 244 65 621 11 22 10 11 2007 14 CERTIFIED 7 123 48 93 131 30 1 10 11 2007 14 CERTIFIED 7 1234 12 99 30 33 4 1 7 10 24 2007 17 ADELINA S PRODUCT S INC 2342 51 00 2112 42 E 10 24 2007 17 ADELINA S PRODUCT S INC 2334 36 00 198 04 Table 18 5 contains a description of each field contained in the Invoice Report form A printed Invoice Report is generated when the Print button is clicked Vendor Select a vendor or all vendors from the drop down menu Start Date Enter the beginning of the inclusive date desired End Date Enter the ending of the inclusive date desired Paid Invoices Flag to include paid invoices to the report Unpaid Invoices Flag to include unpaid invoices to the report Invoice Date Date of invoice Vendor Vendor name Dept Department of the items purchased Invoice No Vendor s Invoice number Total Cost Total amount net of adjustment if any of the purchase Total Price Total sales price of all the items purchased total up charged sales price when vendor has a set up up charge in the Vendor Maintenance form Vendor Total Total amount of purchases as stated in the vendor s invoice Paid Date Date the invoi
434. ns a description of each field contained in the Department Maintenance form DEPARTMENT MAINTENANCE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Dept No Sub No Dept Name Modified Modified By DEPARTMENT LIST ATTRIBUTES TAB Food Stamp Hash Dept Require Auth Negative Department Not Accumulate Unit of Measure Scale Gift Card Department Cash Card Department Verify Age Valid Age Disc A B Line Item Discount Percent TaxA D MIISCELLANEOUSL TAB Lalo Limit Halo Limit Coupon Link Electronic coupon Link Discount Link Aggregate Department Table 36 1 Displays the number of the department being added or edited Displays the sub number of the department being added or edited Up to 9 sub departments can exist for a department Sales are tracked to the department level but sub departments allow assignment of different attributes Displays the name of the department being added or edited Displays the last date and time when the current department was modified Displays name of person who last modified the department Displays department sub name and department names in the system Check if items can be paid with food stamps Flag to indicate if department is a non sale department For example postage stamps Flag to indicate authorization is required to ring into an open department Flag if open department rings should be negative for example Bottle Returns If items assigned to this department should also
435. ns fu Till Limit 3 000 00 the correct change in the local currency Mandatory Limit 5000 00 Enter in any additional data for the tender and press the save button Change Change Tender CA Meg Change hax 4150 00 Checkstand Operation Example 1 Now let s see how to tender the order in the foreign currency at the checkstand The following example will lead you through the steps involved in tendering the order Setup two currencies Local Currency US Dollars Currency 2 Pesos The value of the Pesos is 125 dollars e g 8 Pesos 1 Dollar CurrencyID__ Amount Description to o ot USDolas A PS Setup Peso Tender give change back in Pesos Tender ID Tender Code Tender Type Change Tender Tendering an order using a foreign currency involves a couple of steps 1 Convert the order total to the foreign currency using the Currency Conversion command CU The currency command is used as follows lt Currency ID gt CU Example The order total is currently 200 00 and the order is going to be tendered in Pesos Enter in 2CU and the system will convert the 200 00 into Pesos P 1600 00 2 Now that the value of the order in Pesos is known tender the order in Pesos Example Tender the order with P 2000 00 by entering in 200000PS The system will display the value of the tender in the local currency as well in this case 250 00 US Dollars 3 The system will compute the amount of change
436. nt areas to give you a summary of the financial data Once the form is displayed information for the previous day will be displayed on the form if you are balancing for the current day enter the current day s date The information on this form includes Store Sales data System Generated Deposit data from the Safe Statistics form and Till Statistics totals from the Till Statistics and Balancing form PHOTO BAKERY PRODUCE ABAMEAT WINE 7 LIQUOR GENERAL MERCHANDISE DELI NON FOOD CANDY DAIRY BEVERAGES SWEETS PET SUPPLIES TOYS Tax Total Sales 373 60 231 48 170 29 290 45 8 00 758 20 4 40 0 00 0 00 473 61 44 40 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 304 46 0 00 8 00 2 50 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 473 61 44 40 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 304 46 0 00 8 00 2 50 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 Canadian Credit Card Check Coupons Debit Card Elec Cash Elec Foodstamps Gift Card Food Stamps InStore Charges Peso Pound Pick2 Pickup 519 02 Paid Ins Paid Outs Received On Acct 214 06 20 00 0 00 44 40 Electronic Tenders 1 00 10 50 518 13 144 50 Mfr Coupons NonDepositables 1 319 96 20 35 Safe Adjustment 0 00 240 22 50 00 v 183 56 0 00 0 00 0 00 v System Deposits 7 644 81 7 457 81 Actual Deposits 8 641 89 Till Totals 3 004 17 9 00
437. nt date range Note Checkstand Transaction history is archived automatically by the system The amount of data maintained on the system is defined via the Defaults tab of the System Information function The archived data is stored in a directory defined via the Archive Data File field of the System Information function Note Canceled Transaction amounts are captured in the Electronic Journal Select Cancel as the Type You will need to scroll over to the right to view the amount of the order before the cashier canceled it The amount will not be displayed on the report RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 202 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Electronic Journal continued Canceled Transactions The amount of the order is captured when a HT i transaction is cancelled The amount of the 2 canceled order is shown in the new field Cite Fite Cancel Amount The user will be able to see aa A A o E the amount of the order before the cashier EndDate 1 26 2010 y amot O E ED canceled Cashier Trans No i Dictwe Note The amount of the canceled transaction Tender Stat Upe Fiter will not show up on the Electronic Journal w EE End Upe Cen Report used to reprint receipts O DD vi Saree Employee TransactionNo Line No Total Trans Transaction Date Transaction Lane Nol disc3 Type Disc3 Cancel Amount 1 3 000 C 1 26 2010 12 53 00 0 38 60 15 2 0 00 C 1 26 2010 12 54 00 39 00
438. nt remaining after previous discounts are applied Discounts are applied in the order in which they are entered Example a 10 Line Item discount is taken on a 100 00 item 10 00 and then a 5 Customer Specific discount is applied The 5 discount is only applied to the balance of 90 00 resulting in a discount of 4 50 and a total overall discount of 14 50 Discount and surcharge amounts are summarized within the system by department You can track the discounts by department by using the Discount Link field in the Department Maintenance function The discount link is simply a UPC setup in the product file using the Product Maintenance function These UPCs should not be UPCs that can be sold at the Checkstand rather they are simply dummy products that are used to track these discount amounts The same dummy product can be assigned to all departments or a separate dummy product can be assigned to each department depending on how the data needs to be tracked Using the dummy products you can view the discount information using the Product Sales Function They can also be viewed in the Store Sales function if the dummy products have been assigned to a dummy department that is setup a department called Department Discounts and then assign the dummy UPCs to this department on the Product Maintenance function The Department Discounts will then display on the Store Sales form Note The discount and su
439. ntained in the Till Status Report Employee Name Name of employee Text None Tender Name Tender name that totals apply to Text None Count No of times tender was used for the time period Text None Actual Amount Actual countdown amount entered Currency None System Amount System calculated amount Currency None Balance Difference between actual amp system amounts Currency Actual System Table 29 3 Selection Criteria Data for the selected time period on the form Sort Criteria Employee Name RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 228 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Safe Statistics and Balancing The Safe Statistics and Balancing form provides the ability to monitor and audit safe balances make safe adjustments make bank deposits review and balance system deposits and enter daily countdown safe amounts Under the Current Safe tab current safe amounts for each depositable tender Depositable attribute for the Tender set to M in the Tender Maintenance function are displayed These amounts are system generated and based on various data entered in the system It provides an up to date total of the contents of the safe showing an opening balance all of the transactions for the day and a computed ending balance Previous day s totals can also be viewed from this form Safe Statistics and Balancing BIR alas Balancing Date 10 30 2007 wl lt li gt Current Safe Balance Info Ending A
440. ntered the error If the automatic store close has failed for example due to suspended transactions then store close recoveries will begin to run For this reason you should regularly view the store close form to make sure the normal store close is running 24 HOUR STORE Refer to the Store Close topic in the Administration section of this document and the Running a 24 Hour Store topic in the Appendices RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 93 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO View System Log Files RETAIL gives you the ability to review various system log files These log files contain a history of when certain functions were performed Information on who performed the function when it was performed and other descriptive information are captured in the log files The log files that are available to view are Update Checkstand Log displays a history on the Update Checkstand process Store Close Log displays a history on the store close process History Backup Log displays a history of when historical transaction data was backed up RETAIL Error Log displays a history of errors that have occurred within the RETAIL system User Activity Log displays a history of certain user activities including deleting customer data deleting products data deleting employee data deleting customer coupons mass product changes as well as other activities The View System Log Files form is used to view infor
441. nth or year or a custom range of dates Begin by entering Windows task and E mail information in the Reporting Services Settings form accessed by pressing the Settings button in the upper right of the toolbar Enter the Windows User Account information This is the User Name and Password This must be the Retail Tasks user name and password that were created when Retail was installed Enter the E mail settings This is the account information used to send the reports by E mail that is the E mail from information After entering all the information in the settings form you can create tasks Return to Reporting Services to create tasks to schedule reports Create Tasks to generate reports Enter the Task Name such as Daily Store Sales The Enabled field should be checked If you want to disable this task so that it will not run un flag the checkbox Choose the Report that you want created from the drop down Enter the E mail Information Begin with the E mail address that the report will be sent to Separate multiple addresses with semi colons Enter the Subject that will appear in the subject line of the E mail RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE e fel S Task Task Name Store Sales E mail Information E mail to janedoe hotmail com Subject Daily Store Sales Report Report Parameters y Day s j Schedule Report Previous Dayls
442. nts Report Dept No h CO N O o Bb OO N 10 21 Sub No O O O O O O O O O O Name GROCERY GROCERY TAXABLE PHOTO BAKERY PRODUCE MEAT WINE LIQUOR GENERAL DELI GIFTS BAD CHECK Tuesday November 01 2005 05 51 PM Page 1 Date Modified 06 24 99 06 24 99 02 19 00 06 12 00 12 04 01 06 24 99 06 24 99 06 24 99 06 24 99 02 19 00 04 26 02 Modified By 26 26 32 7 26 26 26 26 32 2 Goodwin s Market Food Stamps Hash Discount A B Departments Unit of Measure Coupon Link DEPTCOUPONO01 DEPTCOUPONO01 DEPTCOUPONO02 DEPTCOUPONO03 DEPTCOUPONO04 DEPTCOUPONO05 DEPTCOUPONO06 DEPTCOUPONO07 DEPTCOUPONO008 DEPTCOUPONO10 DEPTCOUPONO21 Discount Link DEPTDISCNT001 DEPTDISCNT001 DEPTDISCNT002 DEPTDISCNT003 DEPTDISCNT004 DEPTDISCNTOO5 DEPTDISCNT006 DEPTDISCNT007 DEPTDISCNT008 DEPTDISCNTO10 DEPTDISCNTO21 Halo Limit 30 00 30 00 20 00 15 00 100 00 20 00 20 00 20 00 30 00 20 00 10 00 Lalo Limit 0 05 0 05 0 05 0 03 0 05 0 05 0 05 0 05 0 05 0 00 0 00 Tax A BC D Departments 342 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUA
443. nts coupons and verifies check writing privileges based on the card number entered Created Modified Modified By Enter all the applicable data on the form Select the Card Type Regular or Preferred The customer must be a PC Preferred Customer in order to get Electronic Coupons Pay special attention to the Store Coupons Discount and Pricing Level fields The store coupons in conjunction with the PC card type field allows the customer to receive electronic coupons at the checkstand The discount field allows you to assign a particular discount arrangement to a customer while the pricing level allows you to assign a specific product pricing level to the customer refer to the Customer Rewards section below These tools are useful to reward your best customers You can also indicate if the customer can have charge account privileges and establish the customer s credit limit Specify if the customer can Write Checks and what if any cash back is allowed when the customer writes a check By clicking the Customer Photo field you can select a photo file for example jog file to assign to the customer Click Customer Address field and a form pops up allowing you to enter the customer s mailing address billing address and e mail address When you have entered an e mail address click Customer e mail and the program automatically takes you to your e mail program and loads the customer s e mail address When you have finished enterin
444. o automatically generate an email to notify the user of low disk space Note Refer to the Running a 24 Hour Store topic contained in the Appendices RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 261 RETAIL 7 r Manual ADMINISTRATION SETUP System Information continued Table 32 1 contains a description of each field contained in the System Information form DEFAULTS Transaction History Backup How often transactions are to be archived from the system and written to archive files 24 Hour Store Flag to indicate if the store is operating as a 24 hour store System Log History How long to keep system log files displayed in the View System Log Files function Auto Sign Off after minutes Enter the number of minutes the Back End will be allowed to stay idle until automatically closing down Default Credit Limit for Customer Default customer credit limit This limit is displayed on the Customer Maintenance form when a customer who has charge account privileges is being added Clear Suspended Transactions Indicates how suspended transactions should be treated during store close Options available are Clear Clear suspended transactions without prompting Review Allow user to review suspended transactions and proceed with the store close Resume User must resume all suspended transactions from the checkstand before proceeding with the store close Track Weighted ltems Count Indicates if weighted items should be tracked based on a count of i
445. od you want Then either click the down arrow next to one of the selection s for example Dept Section Vendor Other to select from a list of items or select a specific product by typing the UPC code in the field to the left of the UPC When you have selected the category you wish press the Execute Query button in the toolbar Product Sales Upe ltem Code Description 0000000000001 Cinnamon Raisin Swirl 1 35 4 40 0000000000007 Coca Cola 2 00 4 00 0000000000008 Sprite 2 00 4 00 0000000000009 Root Beer 2 00 4 00 0000000000011 Cheddar Cheese 1 22 4 00 0000000000013 Green Soup s 0 15 9 00 0000000000014 Pesto Sauce 1 33 300 0000000000016 Flaming Doritos 2 00 4 00 0000000000017 Cool Doritos 2 00 4 00 0000000000018 Hot Doritos Red 2 00 4 00 0000000000019 Beef Broth 0 15 9 00 0000000000023 Bazooka Gum 1 00 1 55 0000000000100 Macadamia 1 00 1 52 e Start Date B41 2007 v End Date 10 21 2007 x UPC r Total Profit Department GROCERY z Cost Margin Section o o Quantity 1047 00 Wendor e Transactions 67 Others e Include products with the same item codes Zero movers only Qty TotalCost Profit GM Customer Revenue 4 573 00 450 90 707 66 61 09 421 1 158 56 77 00 5090 8272 61 91 35 133 62 38 00 3 00 44 14 93 64 33 47 14 61 00 141 40 280 00 66 45 23 421 40 40 00 8000 11 27 12 35 20 91 27 57 00 15 08 3959 72 43 34 54 66 39 00 11 48 33 74 74 62 28 45 21 28 00
446. ohibited from further check cashing privileges in our store until this matter is resolved In addition we are taking the following actions if we do not hear from you immediately 1 Proceed in the manner prescribed by state law which entitles us to collect THREE 3 TIMES the amount of the returned check We will file this claim with the Local Small Claims Court to collect this amount 2 File your check with the local police department for such action as they deem appropriate Please contact me personally at the phone number above if you have any questions or concerns regarding this matter Respectfully yours Amount Due 155 00 Please make your check payable to Goodwin s Market RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 327 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Balancing Overview Goodwin s Market Balancing Overview Balance Date 10 31 2005 807 65 Total Taxes Tax A 807 65 This Deposit 14 220 09 Over Shorts 7 00 e Variance 1 20 Totals 31 706 31 TaxD O Cis Actuaty posit GROCERY 19 766 94 Cash 9 078 32 Total Sales 31 706 31 PHOTO 25 65 Credit Card 6 030 74 Over Shorts 7 00 BAKERY 643 20 Check 5 142 97 Paid Ins 0 00 PRODUCE 2 009 67 Coupons 42 67 Paid Outs 0 00 MEAT 2 968 73 Debit Card 11 248 30 Received On Acct 0 00 WINE LIQUOR 1 351 28 Elec Cash 61 58 ATM Credit Cards 17 279 04 GENERAL 1 979 80 Elec Foodstamps 83 95 Mfr Coupons 42 67 DELI 1 352 15 Food Stamp
447. oice Total Report DSD and Non DSD 350 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E In Store Charge Statement GOODWIN S 24089 Lake Gregory Dr P O Box 3269 Crestline Ca 909 338 1705 Ship to S B COUNTY REGIONAL PARK 0049093382233 Bill to IN STORE CHARGE Period Current Balance Terms 11 1 2005 11 1 2005 67 35 NET 30 DAYS Statement Beginning Balance 38 71 Date Activity Reference No Amount 11 01 05 Charge 05111 220 2 2 12 28 64 Statement Ending Balance 67 35 Please send your payment with this note RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 351 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Loan In and Pickup Slip Cashier Linda Harrison Manager Lori Miller Lane 4 Till 4 Tender Name Cash Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Check Tuesday November 29 2005 02 29 PM Page 1 Goodwin s Market Pickup Slip Cashier Signature Manager Signature Amount 600 00 SubTotal 600 00 Total 23 32 75 55 22 38 25 44 137 21 144 50 56 11 151 82 109 67 SubTotal 746 00 Total 1 346 00 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Customer No 0049989989231 0043987677874 0045677834238 0049877891225 0046788766652 0049887822877 0047225511662 0048773377228 0046787655467 Pickup Slip 302 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Mass Product Changes Report Upc 0003200000146 0004138070095 0004240001363 00
448. om the toolbar to access MaS the Product Kit form Product kitting allows assignment of multiple products to make up a product kit The UPC som ea ae E entered on the main product form is the main UPC and ee Y identifies the kit This UPC will be sold at the Checkstand loo Help When a product kit is sold the product movement and inventory for the main UPC as well as all UPCs assigned to the kit through the kit item tab will be updated The quantity entered for each UPC will be used when updating product movement and inventory Use the Add button to add additional UPCs to the kit Use the Delete button to remove UPCs from the kit 0000000009967 Note When a product kit is sold the product movement and stock on hand for each product in the kit will be updated as well as the movement and stock on hand for the product kit UPC itself Table 23 6 contains a description of each field contained in the Product Kits form PRODUCT KITS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION UPC Displays the assigned UPC or PLU to a kit Description Displays the kit description Kit UPC Type the item to be included in the Kit in terms of Kit Description Displays the description of the selected UPC included in the Kit Kit Qty Type the UPC included in the kit in terms of quantity Product List Table 23 6 Lists all UPCs and the quantity of every item included in the Kit RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 194 RETAIL 7 Us
449. omer has paid on the bad check Date of the bad check Date the customer paid the bad check and fee amount Amount of the bad check Total amount on the bad check including fee Fee charged to customer for writing a bad check Remaining balance due on the bad check Miscellaneous notes about a customer s bad check Flag to indicate customer has been called Date when call made is system generated Flag to indicate 1 notification letter sent Date when letter sent is system generated Flag to indicate 2 notification letter sent Date when letter sent is system generated Flag to indicate 3 notification letter sent Date when letter sent is system generated Flag to enable or disable customer s privilege to write checks updates customer table Click to show the name and card number of a linked customer if any Multiple occurrences of the following The date of the bad check The check number of the bad check The amount of the bad check The fee amount charged by the store for the bad check RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAMA RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Bad Check Maintenance continued BAD CHECK FIELD DESCRIPTIONS CONTINUED FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION BAD CHECK LIST cont Total The total amount of the bad check Paid The amount paid on the bad check Paid Date The last date that a payment was received against the bad check Balance The balance due on the bad check Called Date customer was called in regards to the bad ch
450. on e Security Features e Keyboard Use e Transaction Discounts e Customer Processing e Checkstand Functions e Manager Functions e Loading Pictures and Videos e Retail System Manager e Credit Debit Processing Important Note f you plan on using the RETAIL Credit Debit module to process credit and or debit cards you need to ensure that it is running all the time while you are processing Checkstand transactions Refer to the Credit Debit Processing section found later in this manual Important Note Use of a mouse is not required to use the Front End Use of the tab enter and arrow keys are permitted to maneuver through fields and buttons on the forms RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 16 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Signing On Double click on the RETAIL Professional Icon to sign on to the RETAIL Front End module The Splash form will then display While this form is displayed the system is initializing itself and checking to make sure it can connect to the server If any problems occur messages will be displayed Once the system has completed its initialization the Front End desktop form will display To log on to the Front End type your password in the box If you are using touch screen touch in the Password box to open the touch pad Enter the password and press OK or Enter Employees are setup using the Password Note To enable the prompt for a User Name chan
451. on can be used in an order Min Order The minimum amount of the order before the coupon is awarded This field is also used for Total Order coupons RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 69 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Electronic Coupons continued UPC Link The UPC Link field can be used to track the losses generated by a coupon When a coupon is applied the amount lost is tracked against the Department assigned to the UPC Link UPC Links for electronic coupons are assigned at the Department level In the Department Maintenance function the UPC Link for electronic coupons is entered in the Electronic Coupon Link field under Miscellaneous tab The UPC Link is an actual product setup in the Product Maintenance function where it is assigned a department to which you would like the coupon loss reported When the coupon is added or the trigger criteria are changed the UPC Link is automatically assigned to the electronic coupon The UPC link assigned is based on the Department of the trigger criteria entered for example if you enter UPC 1 as the trigger the department assigned to UPC 1 is used to determine the UPC Link Thus separate departments can be set up to track coupon losses One or more UPC Links can be set up in the system and assigned to these coupon loss departments The coupon loss departments are then displayed in the Store Sales function reporting the losses due to electronic coupons Cli
452. on of customer numbers when the coupon type is Target To select the coupon method Price Reduction Amount to be subtracted from the price of the product Specified Price Price that overrides the price of the product Reduction Percent reduction to be applied to the price of the product or Generate Coupon Minimum quantity or amount required to trigger this coupon Specifies the amount deducted at the time of sale as long as all the criteria has been met Coupon ID of linked coupon Used for Generate Coupons only This UPC is used to absorb the loss generated by this coupon The dollar amount is tracked against this UPC code Links are assigned in the Department Maintenance form Only used for Generate Coupons Indicates if the generated coupon is used in the current customer transaction or will be used in a future next use customer transaction Not used Other description lines for this coupon Displays on checkstand if coupon is a generated coupon Displays the employ who last modified the selected coupon Displays the date the coupon was last modified Lists all coupons currently in the system Criteria defining coupons listed are defined in the Coupon Settings form Note If a coupon is generated for the same customer multiple times then the field Multiples in the Customer Coupons table is incremented by 1 for each occurrence As the coupon is used on the Front End system Multiples are reduced by 1 for each occurrence RETAI
453. on receipt for in store charge Balances transactions Till Information Indicates where the till information Date Time Cashier Name will be printed in the header or footer Print Non Taxable Amount Flag to indicate if the total amount NOT taxed should be printed as separate line on the receipt following the taxable totals Suppress Receipt Printing Flag to suppress receipt printing On the Front End receipt can be printed by press RP Item Sequence Indicates whether Quantity or Description will print on first line of double line printing CHECKSTAND RECEIPT Buffered Receipt Flag to buffer not print the receipt until the end of the transaction Receipt Consolidate Flag to consolidate data when receipt is buffered Receipt Sort by Alphabet Flag to sort the items alphabetically when receipt is buffered Receipt Sort by UPC Flag to sort the items by UPC when receipt is buffered CHECKSTAND SCREEN Ask for Card Flag to indicate Card Number must be entered at Front End Ask for Salesperson ID Flag to force cashier to enter ID number before transaction Used for Sales Person Productivity Report Display Customer Name Flag to indicate Customer Name will be displayed on the checkstand screen Display Customer Card No Flag to indicate Card Number will be displayed on the checkstand screen Display Charge Balance Flag to indicate the customer s in store Charge Balance will be displayed on the checkstand screen Display Savings Messages F
454. onday TSB AM shopped in the store the first time the customer shopped to current date This form is not subject to fe a Ses the parameter of dates selected by week by month b or by year Thursday AB BE PM Note This form lists only one entry per day It picks i i OPNE Je UE A O ONE EPDE CU g any given day It totals the sales and number of items of al all the times the customer shopped in that one day Table 10 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Times Customer Shops form TIMES SHOP COLUMNDESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Shop Day Days the customer shops Shop Time Latest time the customer shopped in one day Shop Date Dates the customer shops Sales Net Sales Items Number of all the items Table 10 2 Show Customer s Favorite Cashiers The Favorite Cashiers for a Customer form Favorite Cashiers for Luke Henry 5 displays when the Show Customer s Favorite Cashiers 44 is clicked This form lists the 20 Cashier Prequency n cashiers the customer visits most often Ie Jane Smith Go _ Janelle Morgan Evan N aught Table 10 3 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer Favorite Cashiers form FAVORITE CUSTOMER COLUMN DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Displays the name s of the cashier s that the customer visited Frequency The number of times the customer visited that cashier during the time period selected Tabl
455. onize Checkstands With Employees Synchronize Checkstands With All Tables 3 43 PM 6 17 2005 CAPS NUM SCRL INS A start gt E Main Checkstan O CIT Retail 1TRetall_UserMa Y untitled Paint S RETAIL for Micro ES RETAIL Logo lt Gh 3 43PM 62 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manage Customers Customers are an integral part of RETAIL Customer data needs to be set up to track information by customer for example sales data bad checks and charge accounts This section steps the reader through the basic functionality within RETAIL to assist in managing customers Maintain Customer Data The first step in managing customer data is to PET enter the customer information into RETAIL YN Hita 7 svam To do this select the Customer Maintenance Gar function on the Customers or Administration menu Customer Photo Expiration Date 7 Customer Address To add a customer click Add EA from the aa a a toolbar The Card Number field is an important ses A Ee piece of information for customers This is the cae rs Bie ee a number that will be entered on the Main ear e Caren Balrce S000 Alowed Purchasers Checkstand screen of the Front End module to paa ite Checks F enable the system to track sales to a customer ee ee care ii E The system tracks the customer sales applies Po NA frequent shopper poi
456. onononononononnncnnnnnnnnn nn rann nn nana n anar a rara na rare nnnanos 294 O MONNAIE e Eee oa EOR EEE 295 Sep Reca BINNE ir e aaa e a e e Eta 295 Setup Savings MESSI in A A AAA A A A AAA 296 A sce E ace abe Sere at bac E E E 296 oo O evo O eee eee 296 SS 297 SOTO DIS CONS A AAA AAA A 298 Step 2 Setup Maintenance INfOrMatiON ssccccscsccssssccsessecsessesscssesscssessnsesensesesuscseauscsesuecsusuecsesuessuanesseanesseas 299 DIED a SOLU Frodu IMNONAMON soca ener nat esse bees AA E ee 301 DIED 4 SCIUD Sale Dl ri A A AAA E 303 ICO Oi OOO COSC ti A eae eae eee ee 304 PIAS A APA ae Acie ct sent ne atc a et A A ert a seek are ch tea eps Faas oe eens ce taut 304 APPENDIX B RUNNING A 24 HOUR STORE ccccccccescssseecseeeeseeecseeeeseeeeseeesseeeeseeeeseeeseessseeesseeesseeesseeesseeess 305 NOIE W A A ee er ee eer eee 305 SY a 0 A aE ce ane eT ee ERAT he eer aE Ae NIN ne A E een ee ane er AAT 305 Pecado iaas 305 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 9 RETAIL 7 r Manual TABLE OF CONTENT e Sci he Ac cli iN tac cAI A ee te ea Ak Oe tert oan cea de ee eee Mecca atiee coca 305 GIECKSIQING ODIO ais 306 A A 306 AE A E O A EO ee aD 306 IS O A dat odesceaenhtoaes 307 BACK ENO ODIN a 307 O oe RICE Err De oP en eR rE OER re DP RR COD Oe Oe eT 307 Manually Changing the Processing Date cscccccscccsssccssscssseesaeecssseesessecsauecsseessaeessasscsneessaeecssusesaneesseeeesensesseeseseeessas 308 APPENDIX C FOREIGNCURR
457. ons Default Credit Limit for Customer A Clear Suspended Transactions resume Track Weighted Items Count Track Scaled Items by each y 24 Hour Store E Auto Sign Off after 0 minute s Products Allow Alpha Updates ltem Codes Vv Allow Discount While on Sale lv Allow Zero Prices Iv Apply Best Allowance Only Iv Require Vendor a Track Double Coupons lv Auto Store Close Setup Store Close Last Store Close 11 4 2007 Files Archive Data File CAPOSServeri rchiver Cost Changes File Admin Expire Days 0 0 0 Data Synchronization Quantity Halo Setup Synchonization Jobs Halo 200 294 RETAIL 7 r Manual Step 1 Setup System Setup Information continued APPENDIX A INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM Click on the Checkstands tab to add all of the pois checkstands to the system Press the Create Link button and enter the Name User Name default sa and password of the checkstand Press OK If the server cannot connect an error message will display Continue to add all of the checkstands to System Info rm ation Checkstand Information SOL Information Defaut Databases Checkstands Notification Name LANE 2 UserName sa assword e ee eese Refresh Links Delete Link ivate let Deactivat 2 Access the POS Information function under the SETUP section of the Administration menu and complete the following tasks Setup POS Information Point of Sale tab is wh
458. ons category accepts negative amount In this case the adjustment is added Surcharges Select from Shipping and Other This accepts positive amount only Adjust by Purchase Order If selected the adjustments are made pro rated to all products on the P O Adjust by UPC If selected the adjustments are made to the product selected PRODUCT LIST Multiple occurrences of the following UPC Displays the product UPC or PLU Description Displays the product description Adjust Type Displays the type of adjustment Details Displays a brief description about the adjustment Amount Displays the dollar amount of the adjustment Table 12 2 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 145 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Open a New Review a Purchase Order continued Purchase Order Document This function will produce a Purchase Order document for the selected purchase order on the New Purchase Order form A layout of this document is contained in Appendix F This function is executed when or is selected Table 12 3 contains a description of each field contained in the Purchase Order document Reportfield Description Format Calculation Comp name Company name Text None compadd1 Company Address Text None comadd2 Company Address Text None compadd3 Company Address Text None compadd4 Company Address Text None name Customer name Text None add1 Customer Address Text None add2 Customer Address Text None add3 Customer Address Text None
459. ordered on the P O UPC Displays the UPC or PLU of the product Description Displays the description of the product Item Code Displays the item code of the product Cost Displays the unit cost of the product Price Displays the sales price per unit from the Product Maintenance form Case Cost Displays the case cost of the product Qty Displays the units ordered of the product if product ordered in units Qty Case Displays the cases ordered of the product if product ordered in cases Unit Displays the unit of measure for the product pieces if ordered in units unit of measure of the product if in cases Type Displays purchase type that applies to the line item Total Displays the extended amount for the product of units unit cost or of cases case cost For purchase type Free the extended amount will be 0 00 For purchase type Returned the extended amount will be negative Table 12 1 Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on New Purchase Order form Button Description Exits the current window Prints a Purchase Order Document Refer to the Purchase Order Document topic in this section Displays the Purchase Order Document on the screen to preview before printing Refer to the Purchase Order Document topic in this section Saves your entries or changes for the current record Deletes the current P O To delete an item from the P O select the item in the list at the botto
460. ore through To Proc Date entered Due Date Entered From date has grid display charge customers transactions with the From Due Date entered and From onward To Entered To date has grid display charge customers transactions with dates before through To Due Date entered Payments Applied Flag to include or exclude charge customers applied payments from the grid list Unapplied Flag to include or exclude charge customers unapplied payments from the grid list Partial Applied Flag to include or exclude charge customers partially applied payments from the grid list Table 2 8 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 103 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Maintenance continued In store Charge AR Maintenance continued IN STORE CHARGE AR MAINTENANCE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD Credit Memos Applied Unapplied Partial Applied Charges Paid Charges Unpaid Charges In store Charges Misc Charges Financial Charges Refresh Button Grid Columns Card No Name Balance Proc Date Type Amount Terms Due Date Status Ref No Memo Trans No Table 2 8 DESCRIPTION Flag to include or exclude charge customers applied credit memos from the Grid List Flag to include or exclude charge customers unapplied credit memos from the Grid List Flag to include or exclude charge customers partially applied credit memos from the Grid List Flag to include or exclude charge cus
461. ormat the tax as displayed on the checkstand receipt TaxB Allows you to format the tax as displayed on the checkstand receipt Tax C Allows you to format the tax as displayed on the checkstand receipt Tax D Allows you to format the tax as displayed on the checkstand receipt Tender Amount Allows you to format the tender amount as displayed on the checkstand receipt Total Allows you to format the total as displayed on the checkstand receipt RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 265 RETAIL 7 r Manual ADMINISTRATION SETUP POS Information continued DISCOUNTS TAB Discount Threshold The amount the customer has to purchase before the discount will be applied Discount Category Number The Discount number used to apply to a customer via Customer Maintenance Product Category A Flag if the discount applies to products flagged as category A products Product Category B Flag if the discount applies to products flagged as category B products Discount Days Flag each day that discount can be used Discount Percent Displays the discount percentage to be applied TAX TAB Tax Plan Displays the selected tax plan Description Displays the description of the tax plan Identifier Displays the identifier code that will be printed on the checkstand receipt in the Front end system Using Tax Rate If selected the system will use the specified tax rate Tax Rate Displays the tax rate used by the selected tax plan Using Tax Table If selected the
462. ormation function under the Administration menu extended to the current Customer Displays the number of days before a finance charge is accrued as entered in In store Charge Customer s outstanding credit balance stored in the system Flag to enable or disable customer s privilege to write checks at the checkstand Maximum amount of cash back customer can receive when paying by check Customer s weekly check count Date and time stamped by system when the current Customer was first entered in the system Date and time stamped by system of the last modification Person who last modified the customer s information Displays only while Show Hide Bad Check History is toggled on The date of the bad check The check number of the bad check The amount of the bad check The fee amount charged by the store for the bad check The total of the bad check plus the bad check fee The amount paid on the bad check The last date that a payment was received against the bad check The balance due on the bad check Date customer was called in regards to the bad check Date the first notification letter was sent Date the second notification letter was sent Date the third notification letter was sent Displays any notes on the bad check RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 98 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the tool bar located on the Customer form Button Description Exits the current wi
463. ort form will display allowing selection of ae on types of vendors to print on the report DSD Non DSD ps OK Vendors Report Only or both Ded Only e Table 39 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Vendor report layout of which is contained in Appendix F Reportfield__ Description_____ Format Calculation Vendor ID Vendor Number Name Vendor name Text Phone Vendor phone Text Address 1 Vendor Address Text Address 2 Vendor P O Box Text City Vendor city Text State Vendor state Text Zip Code Vendor zip Text Discount Vendor Discount Number percentage Table 39 2 Selection Criteria Selection criteria consist of all vendors that currently exist in the system Sort Criteria DSD Non DSD Vendor No Ascending RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 286 RETAIL 7 User Manual ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Templates Maintenance The Templates Maintenance form is used to RETRATA set up templates used by the RETAIL Wireless module and the Quick Add Edit function in the Back End Templates are used to define the fields that will be displayed on the CN Display Only First Name Last Name En 7 CaseCos 99 i o form used in a specific function This provides a On a hen an 1 Ini l Cost 99 l Sherlock Holmes very flexible way of defining the look and use of e o T ajsa ds a screen 7 Description 99 I Texas Longhorns FT DSD 99 I Janelle Morgan 7 e Coupons 99 i sa
464. ote The Monitor Till screen refreshes the data every 10 seconds Note If the Till limit for a tender displayed has been exceeded the information will display in blue If the Mandatory Limit for a tender displayed has been exceeded the information will display in red RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 88 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manage Employees continued Monitor Checkstands RETAIL gives you the ability to monitor checkstand transactions as they are occurring This function will also give you a current till status for the employee Select the Monitor Checkstands function from the Administration menu Select a checkstand from the checkstands drop down box The cashier s name will display in the lower left corner The current order being rung up on the checkstand displays under the POS portion of the screen Till Status information Void and Refund information displays on the right portion of the screen Note The Till Status information shows the total as of the time you enter the form This data is not refreshed until the current order is tendered RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Monitor Checkstands Ly LESLIE 0000000000001 000000000002 000000000003 000000000004 0000000000005 0000000000123 0000000000234 0000000000345 0000000000111 0000000001111 000000000222 0000000001122 0000000001123 0000000001122 0000000001122 0000000000008 OO00000000009 Cinnamon
465. ount Amount of each check Currency None Total Sum of all checks deposited Currency Sum of detail Table 30 5 Selection Criteria Data selected on the form Sort Criteria None RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 235 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Make Review a Bank Deposit continued Find Deposit The Find Deposit form allows the user to select a desired deposit to be reviewed or changed This form is displayed when the find button is clicked on the toolbar on the Deposits form After a selection has been made the selected deposit will be displayed on the Deposits form Find Deposit Deposit E E Cancel 1042322007 1072672007 1042522007 1042422007 1042322007 1042222007 1042222007 1 1 1 1 1 1 Table 30 6 contains a description of each field contained in the Find Deposit form FIND DEPOSIT FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Deposit Displays the deposit number Table 30 6 Deposit Memo The Deposit Memo form allows entry and maintenance METSI of notes associated with a deposit This form is displayed when the user clicks on the Memo button on the tool Date 10 30 2007 eee Ok bar from the Deposits form Memo Created 10 31 2007 8 31 37 pas Modified 10 31 2007 8 31 By Jane Smith Table 30 7 contains a description of each field contained in the Deposit Memo form DEPOSIT MEMO FIELD DESCRIPTIONS Date Displays the date of pro
466. ounts 3 Press the DR discount removal key DR ENTER through the keyboard Example from the keyboard DR Discount Removed off the entire order for all products Order Level Discounts and Surcharges Order level discounts and surcharges are applied in two ways based on the categories selected on products A B or both Products are categorized through the Product Maintenance function as either category A category B or as both category A and B Discounts and surcharges can then be applied to either the category A products or category B products This gives the user capability to discount products in different ways Order Level discounts are reflected after the final sub total on the Checkstand receipt in the same fashion as customer discounts The message that prints on the receipt for customer discounts and surcharges can be configured through the POS Information function in the Back End Entering a Discount for entire order for products categorized as A 1 Ring up the item either a product department or section transaction 2 Key in the percentage discount for example 5 25 5 25 Discounts must be keyed in with decimal points 3 Press the DA Discount key DA ENTER through the keyboard Example from the keyboard 5 25DA 5 25 discount off of the entire order for all Products Departments or Sections with Category A selected Entering a Discount for entire order for products categorized as
467. ounts the Total Dimes amount should equal the ending amount in your safe The numbers entered in the Safe Quarters Contents section are not counted in the Half Dollars Balancing Ones Fives Tens Twenties Fifties Checks Description 12 Description 13 Description 14 Description 15 Safe Statistics Format RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 303 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX A INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM Step 5 Store Close If running a normal store you should set up a EA store close job that will run automatically every ap Opti day at a specified time From the System a ox Information fo rm l press Setup Store Close Set Auto Store Close Everyday at fi 1 59 Pm Cancel Auto Store Close a and enter the time of day you would like the store close to run If running a 24 hour Store you must run a store close before beginning operation You cannot run an automatic store close but instead need to run Store Close manually from the Operations menu In order to establish the correct processing date BALS ales in the system K a Store Close m ust be a Timestamp Emp Activity Description tep A Run Now completed at the end of the first business day If a ca there is a chance a sto re close can not be 11 4 2007 112422007 Saka 94M 1 E aoe Stone Liesa iS for 11 04 2007 10 d S Cl h h E o a 7 ee checked out i E completea execute a store ose the nignt 11 4 2007 11 4 2007 915 04AM 1 Store Close
468. our safe in order to balance the safe at the end of the first business day The starting balance needs to be entered into RETAIL prior to the first business day Access the Safe Statistics and Balancing function under the REGISTERS section of the Point of Sales menu To enter the starting safe balance press the ESA Safe Audit button in the toolbar and answer yes to the prompt Do you want to perform a safe audit now Enter the date for the audit to take effect Answer yes to the prompt Would you like to enter your balances now After you cee a ad ad enter your new safe balances for Cash Food 0 00 0 00 000 9524955 5 249 55 0 00 stamps etc press the save button in the 0 00 0 00 0 00 317 22 317 22 0 00 toolbar 0 00 000 000 2099 20 99 0 00 g js 0 00 0 00 0 00 2 50 0 00 2 50 Note Make sure to include any till amounts in me wun Saas seen fee lo your safe count Whatever money you have set aside for the tills for the first day need to be included otherwise your safe count will be out of balance Totals 0 00 182 00 0 00 5 611 26 5 795 76 2 50 Click on the Labels button in the toolbar and enter the currency levels into the appropriate Rows as you will want them to be displayed Press the Save button to save the information Pemes SS Safe Contents allows you keep a record of the Ok contents of your actual safe on a daily basis Nickels ua Once you ve entered all the am
469. our types of UPC codes supported by RETAIL UPC A UPC E EAN13 and EAN E UPC Code Type A UPC Code Type E EANTS Code EAN Codo 11234567 89012 134 967 129430 FaFO 2 D 123616 5 Enter in the leading digit as Enter in the leading digit Enter in the leading digit Enter in the product the first character of the as the first character of as the first character of code only for this code UPC followed by the the UPC followed by the the UPC followed by the in this case 1234567 product code in this case product code in this product code in this 12345678901 case 0123456 case 123456789012 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 35 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Line Item Functions continued Keying in a Price and Department a Key inthe price b Press the Department key DP through the keyboard c Followed by a department and sub department number ENTER Example from the keyboard 500DP10 ENTER 5 00 for department 1 and sub department 0 Note The department number is set up in the Department Maintenance task See the Department Maintenance function under the Administration menu Note You can bring up a list of departments to choose from by using the OD key Instead of keying in the price followed by the DP key enter the price and type in OD and press ENTER A list of departments will then be displayed to select Example from the keyboard 5000D ENTER then
470. oyee number listed on this screen and then signing off will clear the entry Reset Product Movement Reset Product Movement function is used to clear product movement entries from the product movement table only on specific dates when the store close process does not finish properly while executing step 4 Creating Daily Product Movement last entry written to Store Close Log is step 3 for the day The store close date s affected will automatically load to the drop down selection list This function must be completed in order to execute a store close recovery for the affected date Reset Product Movement StoreClose Date Cancel I E Help Note Time to complete this process is dependent on the volume of data processed RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 208 RETAIL 7 r Manual ADMINISTRATION SETUP POS Partitioned Display Dimensions The POS Partitioned Display Dimensions task MES gives the user the ability to manipulate the Split i i Name ront End Form w InternalName imPOSFront Screen Display which can be used at the Front canines al i Save End Font f Close Name MS Sans Serif Text y an 7 E Size E y Important Note The POS Partitioned Display 4 T Fie Name Position Left Top Height p ida fo Sample Template form is intended for use by the reseller and fields should not be modified unless necessary Any changes made to the split screen especially to the alignment ma
471. p and a slip will be printed ALL of the checks must be picked up For cash tenders tender type CA type in the amount then pick CA CASH from the drop down Click OK to complete the pickup When you have finished select Cancel to exit Note The Pick Up Slip prints on the receipt printer RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Enter Pickup amount Entry Entry EK CHECK al CHECK 41233221256 CHECK 41233235609 CHECK 41233252369 CHECK 41233221445 CHECK 41234599877 CHECK 41233221785 Total 208 87 200 00 CA CASH CK CHECK WC WIC WV WIC CVV VOUCHER steseenvensensensnsenscesensensnsensenen x Cancel Denominate Ok Cancel Denominate Denominate 50 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manager Functions continued Option 3 Check List Function Run a list of checks accepted by the checkstand a Choose no 3 from the Supervisor Menu b This will run a list of checks for the checker s countdown c Select no 10 or enter O to exit Note The checklist prints on the receipt printer Option 4 Till Status Function Runs a till status report for the checkstand a Choose no 4 from the Supervisor Menu b This will run a till status report for the checker s countdown reflecting the statistics for the checkstand c Select no 10 or enter O to exit Note The till status r
472. pending in the system This allows reviewing and finalizing the product on the Back End To view a list of all of the pending products in the system click Get E on the toolbar The bottom portion of the form now lists all pending products that have been added from the checkstand but have to be finalized Either finalize each product individually by clicking the product in the list or finalize all pending products at one time by clicking Set on the toolbar The Set function will only be accessible if a vendor is not required to enter in products Peai a Vendor option is set through the System Information function To edit a product click Edit on the toolbar Type a specific UPC or search for a product by clicking Ellipse next to the UPC field When a product is selected the information related to that product is displayed To display a list of products click Hide Show Product List iS on the toolbar A list of products is displayed in the bottom portion of the form You can scroll through the products by using the scroll arrows located to the right of the list Select a product to edit from the list by double clicking the product Click Settings E on the toolbar to type the criteria affecting the products that is displayed in the product list View all of the electronic coupons entered for the product batches to which the product belongs product movement and pricing history by clicking the appropriate on the toolbar RETAIL USER R
473. ployee s first name SSN Employee s social security number Optional D L Employee s driver license number Birth Date Employee s date of birth Used to verify age on products that must be verified such as alcohol Job Title Employee s job title Cashier Security Assign a Checkstand security level to this employee Admin Security Assigns a Manager security level to this employee Back End Profile Select a profile to allow access to back end screens Purchases Employee s year to date amount of purchases from the store Currently not available Active Flag to indicate employee s status Set active Not Set inactive If it is set to inactive the employee will not be able to access the RETAIL system User Name Enter the User Name the cashier will enter to sign on to the system Setup Biometric Data Press to capture the employee s fingerprint to use to access the front and back end Remove Biometric Data Press to remove employee s fingerprint from the system Front End Password Employee s password for the Checkstand POS portion of the system Back End Password Employee s password for the Backend portion of the system Created The employee record creation date Modified The date the record was modified Modified By The name of the employee who last changed the information Memo Miscellaneous notes entered for the employee Back End Security Level Displays the back end security level Table 35 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RET
474. port This function produces an Electronic Coupons report listing all electronic coupons currently listed on the Electronic Coupons form The layout of this report is contained in Appendix F This function is executed when or is clicked from the Electronic Coupons form Table 4 5 contains a description of each field contained in the Coupon Report Reportfield Description Format Calculation Coupon ID Coupon ld Number Description Description which is printed on receipt Text Trigger Type Trigger type for the coupon Text Amount Price strategy amount Currency Coupon Link Coupon ID of linked coupon Number Trigger Trigger UPC or trigger group Text Trigger Amt Qty Trigger of product or trigger amount of purchase to trigger coupon Currency Min Purchase Minimum purchase required to trigger coupon Currency Limit Limit per order Number Next Use Coupon is for next visit Yes No No Purchase Req Displays if coupon requires a purchase Used with generating coupons Effect Coupon effective date Date Time Expir Coupon ending date Date Time Priority Priority of coupon Number Multi Use Can coupon be used multiple times Yes No UPC link The default Electronic coupon link for the dept or a typed in UPC Text set up for the coupon loss Table 4 5 Selection Criteria Select coupons matching criteria specified in the Coupon Setting function of the Electronic Coupons form Sort Criteria Coupon ID Ascending Delete Inactive Coupons
475. quantity for all the products individually or if you d like to update the received quantity with the quantity ordered for all products click Receive as Ordered on the toolbar Refer to the Cost Calculator function described in the Order Goods topic in the previous section Once you have entered all of the received quantities enter other information pertaining to the invoice that is Date Invoice Number As a last step to update the received goods into inventory click Mark Invoice as Received in the toolbar RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 84 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manage Inventory continued Analyze Inventory Inventory Analysis Once you ve used RETAIL to establish your beginning inventory and to receive and sell E da aa bil goods you will want to analyze your inventory as on ae To do this select the Inventory Analysis ena EE oT n 3 function of the Inventory menu ue TF PR he id Rec vd Cost Cost Sold Profit Loss Adit GM Actl GM Select a start date by clicking the down arrow next to the Start Date field these are the dates of inventory counts that currently exist in the system Enter an ending date or select one from the list by clicking the down arrow next to the End Date field Select a particular product by entering in the UPC of the product in the UPC field and press ENTER If you d like to select a category of products for example ven
476. r r Multimedia Type None r Screen Lock Auto Sign Off Wait e000 seconds to E pee eo Comm Info Checkstands The Checkstand tab is used to configure the printer settings multimedia options and screen lock feature The Till and Lane print on the receipt and must be unique for each checkstand The Screen Lock is the number of seconds of inactivity allowed before the system locks the checkstand the cashier s password is then needed to unlock the checkstanad 57 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACKEND FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW Back End Functional Overview Introduction This section of the manual will describe the Back End module in detail and provide How To guidelines As pictured in the Back End functional overview diagram the Back End module has four menu icons including Customers Inventory Point of Sales Administration The following is a representation of the menu used in the Back End module 2 RETAIL Log on as LH Main Menu i x File Windows Help Retail PROFESSIONAL Administration Inventory Close Store System Information OPERATIONS SETUP View System Log Files POS Information Point of Sale Notify Checkstands with Server Information POS Partitioned Display Dimensions Clear Checker Login Entries security Administration A A Synchronize Checkstands With Setup Administration Reset Product Movement chronize Checkstands With Setu Get Unloaded Transactions MAINTENANCE
477. r 11 5 2007 1125 2007 2 45 01 PM 0 Store Close Cashier 1 on checkstand 2006TEST still signed on 1 1 l 11 5 2007 1125 2007 2 45 01 PM 0 Store Close Store Close cannot continue 1 selectio n via th e Sto re C lose fo rm wh e n th e 11 4 2007 1124 2007 9 15 19 4M 1 Store Close Store Close Finished Successfully for 11 04 2007 0 d 11 4 2007 1124 2007 9 15 04 4M 1 Store Close Connecting checkstands 1 syste m detects th at a sto re close ope ratio n has 1124 2007 1124 2007 9 15 04 AM 1 Store Close All checkstands have been checked out 1 11 4 2007 1124 2007 9 15 04 4M 1 Store Close Calculating Store Sales 1 fal led C ick O n th e Chan ge Date butto n to 117322007 117 372007 9 02 40 4M 1 Store Close Store Close Finished Successfully for 11 03 2007 0 O a 11 3 2007 11 3 2007 9 02 24 AM 1 Store Close Connecting checkstands 1 initiate the process of changing the processing 11 3 2007 11 3 2007 9 0224AM 1 Store Close Al checkstands have been checked out 1 11 3 2007 11 3 2007 9 02 24 AM 1 Store Close Calculating Store Sales 1 d ate O n th e ch eckstands 1142 2007 1142 2007 8 57 55 4M 1 Store Close Store Close Finished Successfully for 11 02 2007 0 11 2 2007 11222007 8 57 35 AM 1 Store Close All checkstands have been checked out 1 11 2 2007 1172 2007 8 57 35 AM 1 Store Close Calculating Store Sales 1 11 2 2007 1172 2007 8 57 35 4M 1 Store Close Connecting checkstands 1 1142 2007 11 2 2007 8 56 58 4M 1 Store Close Cashier 1 on checksta
478. r 29 2005 01 12 PM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Count Till Status 3 208 94 End Date 11 29 2005 Actual Amount 1 008 99 271 46 746 00 17 98 181 24 299 15 191 28 474 14 18 70 APPENDIX E Till Status System Amount 1 010 56 271 46 746 00 17 98 181 24 299 15 191 28 474 14 18 70 3 210 51 Balance 1 57 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 1 57 Till Status 377 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Transactions by Reason Cashier Number and Name 42 Deli 216 Brent Parker 219 Vicki Parks 43 Bakery Dept 220 Ashley Francis 172 Laura Hallston Goodwin s Market Transactions by Reason Start Date 10 31 2005 End Date 10 31 2005 Sorted by Cashier Name Trans Reason Transaction Key Num No Divider between orders Void 24 No Divider between orders Void 50 Employee error Void 50 Employee error Void 50 Employee error Void 50 Credit Card Decline Cancel Transaction 30 Customer Return Explain Refund 237 Customer Return Explain Refund 165 Shelf Price Discrepancy Void 152 Shelf Price Discrepancy Void 152 Customer did not have enough Void 223 Customer did not have enough Void 4 Employee error Void 108 Employee error Void 250 Customer Return Explain Refund 88 Customer did not have enough Void 203 Customer did not have enough Void 84 Customer did not have enough Void 104 Employee error Void 145
479. r Keyboard continued MAIN CHECKSTAND FORM COMMAND LINE TRANSACTION CODES iim KEYSTROKES Amount PO ENTER 500PO ENTER Paid Out key used for non product items for example lottery ticket winnings Five hassle additional Paid Out functions can be sen via the Security Administration screen The additional Front end keystrokes are O1 02 O3 04 and O5 information is entered in Product Maintenance via the Product Info button PV UPC ENTER PV28 ENTER Price verify Product verify used to verify a price or to identify a product by viewing PV Product Description PVapp ENTER the product s picture Enter in a portion of the product description ENTER Amount RA ENTER 500RA ENTER Received on Account key used to apply payments to customer charges on the Checkstand RA transaction must be the only item on the order No other transactions can be rung up on the same order RE eae RE ee Repeats previous line item Only applies to the following types of transactions A ee or entered product DP SE RA Pl and PO transaction keys am ar Refund key used to refund a product In the example a 5 00 refund is being ENTER applied to department 1 sub dept 0 main dept Product UPC or section no can also be entered PRP RP ENTER S RP ENTER Reprints receipt for previous transaction O Applies surcharge to the entire order for all products categorized as A In the example 5 1 4 surcharge is applied to the order Note
480. r Manual APPENDIX E Electronic Journal Processed 11 01 2005 Cashier 27 Trans Total 20 61 Customer 0040000404434 Total Tax A 0 00 Points Total Tax B 0 00 Trans Date 11 01 2005 Total Tax C 0 00 Trans Time 4 07 00 pm Total Tax D 0 00 Trans 3 Tax Type Sub Type Status Dept__Qty__ UPC Amt A B C D FS 5 1 60 0026163100000 6 38 ne ne ee ee ee ee ee ee ee eee eee FRYER BRST BNLS 5 1 62 0026163100000 646 0 0 OO O T FRYER BRST BNLS 1 1 00 0007313000732 3 29 A ee ee ee ee eee OROWEAT POT BREAD 1 1 00 0004139001185 2 29 A ee ee ee eee KIKMN TRIYK HNY PNAPL 1 1 00 0004138085005 2 19 A ee ee ee eee 7 GC HOMO MILK HF Total Debit Card 0 1 00 60 61 Card type Card 4820XXXXXXXX7909 Expires 0703 Auth 138096 Ref Total Cash O 1 00 40 00 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 32 PM Page 8 Electronic Journal RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 345 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Employees Employee 27 29 30 33 34 37 40 41 42 43 97 109 115 117 128 130 140 141 Cashier Password 13 1
481. r by UPC or by Item Code Click UPC button to toggle between Item Code and UPC Click Product Detail field to display order and movement data related to the UPC entered Note To delete an item from the PO select the item in the list and press DELETE New Purchase Order e SIR als Vendor P O No Address P O DRAWER L Acct Date 10 26 2007 w MESILLA NM 88046 Product Detail v Upe 0000000005895 Cost 1 220 x Description Dog Food Case Cost 12 200 E Department GENERAL MERCHANDISE Purchase Type Received v GL Quantity Pack Size 10 fi O case Allowances 0 00 Po Description Cert_Code Unit Cost Price Case Cost Q ase Type PType 0000000000012 Alberto YO5 Conditioner 4405 1 23 7 00 14 76 13 12 case Received 191 88 0000000000034 Dog Brush 3350 1 08 5 00 2 16 0 34 2 case Received 73 44 Science Diet Senior Dog 2334 2 25 12 20 0 33 10 case Received 402 60 Earrings 1 00 2 00 12 00 0 23 12 case Received 276 00 95 Dog Food 1 221 2 25 12 20 ol 34 10 case Received 474 80 0000000098765 Junior Dog Food 1 88 2 99 18 80 0 2 10 case Received 37 60 ty yC 0 Salesman Harrisorl Buyer LeslieHenry Adjustment 0 00 Total 1 396 32 Note Cost and pricing data can be updated from this form by using the Cost Calculator function Refer to the Cost Calculator topic in the Product Maintenance section Table 12 1 contains a description of each field contained in the New Purc
482. r maintain different currencies for currency o l No Description em eae conversion purposes Currencies are then assigned to EE Close Description Lose the tenders The local currency is always represented as currency ID 1 with a value of 1 00 This form is a ee Help Created ani displayed when you click the Currency button 4 on the toolbar in the Tender Maintenance form Modied AT Modified By Add Table 38 3 contains a description of each field contained in the Currency Maintenance form No Displays the list of all ID numbers of the set up currencies in the system Description Displays the names of all the currencies in the system ID Displays the ID number of the retrieved currency or the ID number assigned by system sequentially in Add mode Description Displays the name of the retrieved currency or the currency name entered by user in Add mode Symbol Displays the symbol assigned by user of the retrieved currency Value Displays the current value of the denomination in the local currency conversion rate Created Displays the date and time the currency was created Modified Displays the date and time the currency was last modified Modified By Displays the name of the employee who set up the currency and or last modified the currency Table 38 3 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 282 RETAIL 7 User Manual Tender Maintenance continued Tenders Report ADMINISTRATION MAIN
483. r per day Max Checks Week Displays the maximum number of checks that can be written by a customer per week Transaction Max Amount Displays the limit for amounts entered on the checkstand Used to prevent data entry errors Transaction Max Digits Displays the designated number of keyed digits including decimals that the system will accept This will affect the numbers of digits entered for amounts accepted by the checkstand to prevent data entry errors Level 1 Check Msg Message on the Front End when customer does not have check writing privileges Level 2 Check Msg Message on the Front End when number of checks per day is exceeded Level 3 Check Msg Message on the Front End when number of checks per week has been exceeded Level 4 Check Msg Message on the Front End when customer does not have in store charge account Level 5 Check Msg Message on the Front End when account balance has been exceeded RECEIPT BANNER Check Franking Displays the Check Franking information Credit Card Header Displays the Credit Card information Deposit Information Enter your bank s deposit information Header Displays the information that appears on the top of the receipt and checkstand screen Trailer Displays the information that appears on the bottom of the receipt and checkstand screen SAVINGS MESSAGE Customer Discount Msg Message printed on receipt for the total amount that applies to customer discount Customer ID Displays the customer ID nu
484. r to extend the batch end date Refer to Create New Batch topic later in this section Find all the batches containing the selected UPC Refer to the Display Batch Numbers topic later in this section Opens the Show Product Movement form Refer to Show Product Movement topic contained in the Sales Tab section Calculate the ad loss for the batch Apply the batch to the products file Refer to the Apply Batch topic later in this section Print Ad Labels for all products in the current batch The labels will be displayed on line prior to printing Export data for all the products in the batch This data can then be imported into a label program that supports data import The product data will be exported to a text file BatchLabels txt Maintain notes about a product Refer to the Product Memo topic in the Product Maintenance section Display other batches that contain the product you are entering editing Print an ad markdown report for the batch Refer to the Print Ad Batch Markdown Report section Activates the context sensitive help RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 212 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Enter Prices for Ad Batch continued Print Product Batches Report The Print Product Batches Report function will produce a Product Normal Batch or a Product Ad Batch report listing all products that exist in the selected batch The layout of these reports is contained in Appendix F
485. r when the cashier signs off Show Food stamp Total Flag to indicate the system should display the current food stamp total Static Product Pricing Indicates if product prices will remain static during a transaction Cashier Override No Sale Indicates that the cashier will be able to override No Sale security Force Resume Transactions Flag to indicate if the system should force the cashier to resume all Suspended transactions before cashier signs off Force Countdown Indicates if blind till balancing should be enforced at sign on Show Item Count Flag to indicate if the system will display the item count on the screen and on the receipt Track Scanned Items Only Flag to indicate if a scanned item is an item that is scanned through the scanner Otherwise a scanned item is an item scanned or entered through the keyboard This is used to track items in order to calculate checker percentage correctly Continuous Transaction No Flag to indicate if checkstand transaction numbers will be continuous from one day to the next If not set the system will reset checkstand transaction numbers daily Max Transaction Number Maximum transaction number allowed before being reset to 1 Used in conjunction with Continuous Transaction No THE NUMBER OF TRANSACTIONS PROCESSED IN ONE DAY SHOULD NOT EXCEED THAN THE MAX TRANSACTION NUMBER OTHERWISE DUPLICATE TRANSACTIONS WILL BE CREATED IN THE SYSTEM Customer Card Prefix Prefix used to identify scanned customer
486. rated by the system Used to select a specific UPC as the trigger criteria The field next to the UPC field allows for a UPC search by description or Item code Used to select a specific Mix Match as the trigger criteria The field next to the mix match field allows for a mix match search Used to select a specific Department as the trigger criteria Used to select a specific Section as the trigger criteria Used to select a specific Vendor as the trigger criteria Used to select a specific Product Group as the trigger criteria Main description for this coupon Displays on the checkstand for all coupons By default this is filled in with a prefix set in the Coupon Settings and the product s description from Product Maintenance Date when this coupon is in effect Expiry date of the coupon if no Date entered the coupon does not expire Check the box if coupon can be used multiple times Only accessible when coupon is for Target Customer To limit the number of times this coupon is triggered in the same order Minimum purchase required to trigger this coupon To set the priority for this coupon in case multiple coupons are triggered at the same time Active if this coupon is still active in the system Used to select the type of customer that coupon applies to Preferred Target specific customer card number required or Link used when the coupon is created as the link to a generated coupon Ellipse button appears to allow selecti
487. rcharge category for a product can be printed on the Checkstand form and Checkstand receipt Refer to the Main Checkstand form topic earlier in this section Line Item Discounts Two types of line item discounts are supported deduction and amount deduction Two different transaction codes are used to apply these discounts DT deduction DN deduction Note products for an entire department can be discounted by entering a percentage discount for the department through the Department Maintenance function in the Back End If a percentage is entered for the department then all product sales will have line tem discount automatically applied this will also apply to any open department or open section sales for the department Line item discounts are reflected after the final sub total on the Checkstand receipt The message that prints on the receipt for line item discounts can be configured through the POS Information function in the Backend Entering a Discount for an Item 1 Key in the percentage discount use decimal point for example 5 5 5 25 5 25 2 Press the Discount key DT through the keyboard 3 Ring up the item either a product department or section transaction ENTER Example from the keyboard 5 25128 5 25 discount off product 28 Entering a Dollar Amount Discount for an Item 1 Key in the dollar discount for example 500 5 00 2 Press the Discount key DN EN
488. reach the qualifying quantity of items Qty then the item s price is adjusted to reflect the Group Price All subsequent items will ring at this price Example Normal Welcome to Total Foods Pricing Method GroupAdjusted Your Total Grocery Solution Unit Price Cost 0100 Price 0 25 EN Group Deal Price Tomatoes 0 25 E Aty 5 Price 0 20 Tomatoes 0 25 F Tomatoes 0 25 F Target Margin 0 00 Tomatoes 0 25 F Gross Margin Pp BE Volume Discount Included below Tomatoes 0 00 F Product Group 50 00 Disc RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 188 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCT Product Maintenance continued Product Pricing Methods continued 5 Limited Limited Quantity Discount Pricing The first items are purchased at a limited usually discounted price then all subsequent items are sold at the regular price For example the first 4 items at 0 25 each all subsequent items at the normal price of 0 29 each For this example enter as follows In the Unit Price fields enter the normal cost and unit price 0 29 In the Group Deal fields enter 4 in the Qty and 25 in the price field a Unit Price Regular Price post limited discount b Qty number of units to be sold at limited price c Group Deal Price limited quantity unit price Example ieee f Welcome to Total Foods Pricing Method Limited Pricing Your Total Grocery Solution Unit Price Cost 0130 Price 029 G
489. reason codes From the list displayed select the reason code desired and the reason will be captured with the transaction Select Reason Code Unwanted Gift Spoiled Broken when purchased Customer changed mind Note a report of transactions by reason code is available through the Print Transactions By Reason Report function Overall Order Functions This section will describe the various functions that can be used that affect the entire order Tax exempt an entire order 1 Enter items and total the order 2 Press the Tax Toggle key TE through the keyboard 3 Press the Total key TL through the keyboard ENTER Example from the keyboard TETL ENTER RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 32 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Overall Order Functions continued Entering a Salesperson ID 1 Key in the Employee setup through the Back End of the Salesperson 2 Press the Salesperson key SP through the keyboard ENTER Example from the keyboard 1SP ENTER Assigns salesperson 1 to the order or transaction line Note A salesperson ID can be entered at any time during the order The ID will be applied to each transaction line following the entry of the ID You can configure the system to automatically prompt for an ID at the beginning of each order Refer to POS Configuration topic in this section Note You can cancel the assignment of the salesperson ID by keying
490. rewards the customer with an additional coupon instead of an instant discount The coupon generated as the reward could be applied to the current customer s order or to a future order If the option is grayed out the method cannot be used The Description is used to enter the description of the coupon Description 1 prints on the checkstand receipt for non generated coupons Description 2 4 prints on the receipt for generated coupons By default the Description is taken from the Product Maintenance file preceded by a prefix see Coupons Settings below Note When deleting an electronic coupon an entry is created in the user activity log in order to provide an audit trail Refer to the User Activity Tracking topic in the General Topics section Refer to the Electronic Coupons discussion in the Manage Customers topic in the Back End How to section of this document for a detailed description on electronic coupons RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 117 RETAIL 79 r Manual If Pick Quantity is chosen as the Coupon Type the form will change to display the Trigger Price From and Trigger Price To From the Group Name select lt Add New Group gt An item can only belong to one coupon group and a Coupon Group can only have one coupon On the right side the field Free Item appears Free items can be applied to Pick Quantity or Total Order coupons You will need to create a Coupon Group for Pick Quantity coupons Add
491. rge 2 2 8 0 10 4 09 10 19 05 Charge 1 1 61 9 58 13 67 10 18 05 Charge 3 3 103 29 14 42 81 BOOSTERS RIM BAND 0041000000170 Current Balance 0 00 uesd i RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 taii RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E In Store Charge Balance Summary Goodwin s Market Card Number 004000000030 0041000000028 0041000000108 00410000001 14 0041000000127 0041000000128 0041000000130 0041000000131 0041000000135 0041000000137 0041000000138 0041000000142 0041000000144 0041000000528 0041000000529 0041000000531 0041000000534 0041000000535 0041000000536 0041000000539 0041000000540 0041000000541 0041000000545 0041000000548 0041000000549 0041000000550 0040200000141 0040200000004 0040200000007 0040200000015 004020000001 7 0040200000018 0040200000020 0040200000102 0040200000103 0040200000104 0040200000105 0040200000106 0040200000108 0040200000109 Customer In store Charge Balance Summary Customer Name 100 00 Crestline Card 100 00 Crestline Card 100 00 Crestline Card 100 00 Crestline Card 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD
492. ria Lists customer transaction amounts meeting selection criteria Lists individual transaction or customer term of transactions meeting selection criteria Lists customer transaction due dates meeting selection criteria Lists customer transaction status Not Paid Paid Not Applied Applied or Partial Transactions originating from the checkstand this number is made up the Till No Checkstand No Transaction Number For transactions originating from Backend displays the entered reference number for example check number Entry is optional Displays the entered detailed reason of the recorded transaction Lists the unique transaction number sequentially assigned by the system RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 104 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Maintenance continued Toolbar The following describes the functions supported by the toolbar located on the In store Charge Maintenance form Description U O Exits the current window Access New In store Charges form Refer to the New Edit In store Charge topic in this section Access New Payment Payments form Refer to New Edit Payments topic in this section Access In store Charge Finance form Refer to the In store Charge Finance topic in this section Access Customer In store Charge Attributes form Refer to the Customer In store Charge Attributes topic in this section Generates an In store Charge Aging Report Summary or Detail
493. ring up negatively then enter NegativeltemslfDepartmentNegative 1 in the ros ini Flag to indicate that this department or items in this department will not collect Frequent Shopper Points Unit of measure assigned to products in this department Flag to indicate products in this department need to be weighed on the Front End Flag if using Gift Card software Flag if using Cash Card on the front end When flagged prompts the Checkstand user for the date of birth of the customer to an open department sale Displays the minimum age of the customer allowed to buy an open department Check if Category A and or B discounts will apply to this department Check if a line item discount can be applied to items rung up in this department Displays the discount that applies to a department and all sections and all products under this department This is not dependent upon any discount categories that may or may not be assigned Check appropriate tax tables assigned to this department Specifies the minimum amount of transaction that can be rung up directly to the department Specifies the maximum amount of transaction that can be rung up directly to the department Assign product UPC to be used to track coupon department coupon and mfg double coupon amounts deducted from sales Assign product UPC to be used to track electronic coupon amounts deducted from sales Assign product UPC to be used to track discount amounts deducted from sales Displays the assigne
494. rk 172 1 13 24 32 93 29 31 54 5 75 8 51 11 26 0 28 3 968 85 Marianne Roberts 217 2 00 17 50 93 93 20 23 0 00 11 31 1 20 0 04 3 219 36 Roseanne Smith 206 0 15 17 58 94 38 29 18 1 00 14 51 0 00 0 00 3 394 30 Supervisor1 40 0 15 17 76 94 63 25 01 10 00 15 71 22 98 3 152 70 Vicki James 219 0 35 17 27 92 44 34 41 12 03 107 86 9 95 3 960 51 Total 7 00 15 38 22 54 42 67 246 61 31 706 31 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 331 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Coupon Movement Detail Goodwin s Market Coupon Movement Detail Total Store Start Date 12 12 2004 End Date 11 1 2005 Trigger Date Date ProcDate Customer Movement Price Price Loss Loss GROCERY1 2 PS KRFT DLX MC amp CZ 01 15 01 06 05 05 Donna Anderson 1 00 2 79 2 54 0 25 0 25 01 15 01 04 15 05 Doris Peterson 1 00 2 79 2 54 0 25 0 25 2 00 0 50 Subtotal 0 50 Total 0 50 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 48 PM Page 1 Coupon Movement Detail Total Store RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 332 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Coupon Movement Summary Goodwin s Market Coupon Movement Summary Total Store Start Date 12 12 2004 End Date 11 1 2005 les Start End Coupon Tota CouponID Description Trigger Date Date Movement Price Price Loss Loss GROCERY1 2 PS KRFT DLX MC amp CZ 01 15 01 2 00 2 79 2 54 0 25 0 50 0 50 Total 0 50 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 48 PM Page 1 Coupon Movement Su
495. rm IN STORE CHARGE TERMS FIELD DESCRIPTIONS Terms ID Number assigned sequentially by the system starting from number 1 This number displays on the Terms column of Customer In store Charge Attributes form Period Number of days paired with the Terms ID being set up This number is used in determining the default due date of the charge transactions in the New In store Charge form This number displays on the Terms column of the In store Charge AR Maintenance form Description Displays the description of the set up term This description is used on the Terms field of the New Edit In store Charges form Terms ID Column Lists all the current terms ID Terms Period Column Lists the various number of days assigned to each Terms ID s Term Description Column Lists the descriptions corresponding to the different Terms ID s Table 2 14 Processing buttons The following describes the buttons used to process finance charge calculations on the In store Charge Terms form Button Description Type desired data on Terms and Description fields o d Adds new term When clicked a system assigned number is displayed in the Terms ID field _ Save Saves the new term that is added Use this button to save changes made to a term Dele Deletes a retrieved term Cancel Exits the form RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 112 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Maintenance continued Customer Memo ST The Customer Memo form is u
496. rm Saar cera E ok controls the data displayed on the grid of the product Cancel maintenance form Control of automatic updates for AE products with the same item code is controlled through US B this form as well Product Display Options tn tdt y Number of Products to display 1100 C All products in the same product groups or with the same item codes C All products with the same item code Y Automatically update all products with the same Item Code Table 23 11 contains a description of each field contained in the Product Settings form Search Product by UPC This is the Default setting and cannot be un checked Search Product by Item Code Flag to enable the system to search by Item Code When the user enters the item code in Product Maintenance the system will search for the item and populate the fields Product Limitation Maximum Price Enter the maximum price of products An error message will appear when a higher amount is entered in the products file Limited number of products Flag to have product form grid display a range of products after the selected UPC Number of product display Number of products in range that will be displayed All products in the same product group or Display all products which have the same product group or item code assigned as the product with the same item codes being edited All products with the same item code Display all products which have the same item code assigned as the product
497. rocess 1 The system connects to all checkstands selected If an error occurs the system will prompt you with a message Cannot connect to some of the checkstands Do you still want to continue a If you click NO the system will abort this function b If you click YES then the system will continue this function However the checkstands which caused the error will not be updated with the products information c In either case the system is having a problem connecting to the checkstands and corrective action should be taken Either there is a network problem in connecting to the checkstand or the checkstand name is incorrect in RETAIL see the System Information section under the Administration Menu for more information RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 221 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Power Edit Power Edit is a customizable form to support editing of groups of products This form can be accessed from the main menu under Products or in Product Maintenance from the toolbar From the Point of Sale Icon select the Power Edit task from the Products section of the menu 1 From the toolbar press Select Fields and Sequence 2 Select the fields you want to be able to edit You must select them in the order that you want them to appear on the screen For example Description Price Disc A and Tax A UPC is displayed by default The order number will appear to the right of your selectio
498. roduct code ENTER Note If this is the only transaction press the Total key TL through the keyboard key in 0 and press the Cash key CA through the keyboard to clear the transaction Example from the keyboard RF028 ENTER Refund for product 28 Refunding a Product through Scanned Entry a Press the Refund key RF through the keyboard b Scan the product Note If this is the only transaction press the Total key TL through the keyboard key in 0 and press the Cash key CA through the keyboard to clear the transaction Refunding Multiple Quantities of a Product a Press the Refund key RF through the keyboard b Followed by the quantity of the product c Followed by an Press the key d Followed by the product code either scan or keyed in ENTER Note If this is the only transaction press the Total key TL through the keyboard key in 0 and press the Cash key CA through the keyboard to refund the amount in cash If the refund will be applied to an electronic tender enter TL then ET ENTER The customer will be prompted to slide the card through the MSR and follow the prompts on the pin pad Example from the keyboard RF5 028 ENTER Refund for quantity of 5 for product 28 Refunding a Product to a Section a Press the Refund key RF through the keyboard b Followed by the product pric
499. roducts that would be in effect for a period Pull Shelf Tags is used to print labels for items when the sale has expired RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Product Batches Al SB tal citen Ble 22 BatchID NNP_0925141409 003 New Items and Non Price Changes Starts 10 10 2007 10041 End 10 10 2007 UPC a AA Pricing POS Information Attributes Sales Desc Special Normal Method x Method y ItemCode Unit Price Unit Price Cost Price Cost Price a Depts Group Deal Price Case Cost SS Section Oty E Price Group Deal Price Oy Price Vendor 10 Items Status Applied Mee Upe 0000857700154 0003574214042 Description ltem Code Cost BUTERNUT GRD 4 DRK 0 00 HY RANCH CRKS 0 0 HLTH VAL GAR HERB CF 0 0 NAPOLEON TERIYAKI OY ED SONS BOUL KETTLE HAZELNUT BUT C GEYSER POMEG LEM 10 59 12 89 232 89 21 79 12 59 37 99 13 39 11 29 11 29 12 79 0003574214072 0004125300310 0004318200893 0008411402730 0065487104608 0070887590007 0070887590010 0072811906100 ERIN BAKER DBL CHOC ERIN BAKER OATMEAL F PASSPORT ARTICHOKE e SASSSS o 505000500000 Price Margin Vendor Quantity Profit Modified Fields From Corporate 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 00 79 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manage Products continued Enter Product Batches continued To create a batch type a batch ID in the Batch ID field a
500. rolOsl Ol O Ol Ol Ol Ol O Ol O Ol Ol O OS I O O O O O OJ OJO O O OIHNOlJ OJOJ O Actual Deposit 13 159 86 Variance 10 40 Starting Tender Name Safe Adjustments Cash 298 367 61 0 00 Check 409 871 14 0 00 Food Stamps 14 056 16 0 00 Total 125 559 69 0 00 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 25 PM Page 1 Misc Checks Bad Checks Total Safe 15000 00 Total Ending Pickups Loans Reconcile Deposits Safe 0 00 2 995 00 10 839 17 7 854 57 298 357 21 0 00 0 00 5 305 29 5 305 29 409 871 14 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 14 056 16 0 00 2 995 00 16 144 46 13 159 86 125 570 09 Safe Statistics 368 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Safe Contents Miscellaneous Food Stamps 50 00 Coin vault tray Pennies 50 00 Nickels 100 00 Dimes 350 00 Quarters 1200 00 Ones 2000 00 Fives 1000 00 Tens 1000 00 Tills Cash 4165 00 Tills Food Stamps 85 0 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Sales Person Productivity Report Goodwin s Market Sales Person Productivity Start Date 11 29 2005 End Date 11 29 2005 Employee Sales Costs Profit Sales Profit Items Customers Avg Price Avg Order Bob Jones 2 627 87 219 69 408 18 39 82 41 51 40 5 15 70 125 57 Katy Harris 6 10 00 5 30 4 70 0 63 0 48 1 1 10 00 10 00 Linda Morris 1 749 30 303 83 445 47 47 53 45 30 65 7 11 53 107 04 Sarah Parker 5 144 50 44 80 99
501. rom the drop down menu Select a transaction level via the drop down menu Select a discount type via the drop down menu Data in the electronic journal report are listed in the display grid columns Electronic Journal Report This function will produce an Electronic Journal Report listing all the transactions matching the selected criteria This report is displayed when the Search button Search on the Electronic Journal form is clicked Table 30 18 contains a description of each field contained in the electronic journal report REPORT FIELD FORMAT CALCULATION Processed Cashier Customer Points Earned Trans Date Trans Time Trans Trans Total Total Tax A Total Tax B Total Tax C Total Tax D Type Sub Type Status Dept Qty UPC Amt Tax A B C D FS Date report processed Cashier No Customer No No of points earned by customer if applicable Date of transaction Time of transaction Transaction No assigned by system by cashier Transaction total amount Total amount for tax schedule A Total amount for tax schedule B Total amount for tax schedule C Total amount for tax schedule D Type of detail line Tender key amp applicable message Sub type of detail line Transaction key description Status of the detail line Transaction type Product department Quantity recorded Product UPC Product Description when requested Amount purchased Checked if tax rate used Checked if food stamp product Date Tim
502. roup Deal Price rime SR 0 25 F ay lief ns E nE Lime Gelatin 0 25 F Target Margin 0 00 Lime Gelatin 0 25 F ioes Ma 51 85 Limit of Reduced Price Items Exceeded Lime Gelatin 0 29 F Product Group 1 29 TOTAL RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 189 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Maintenance continued Product Grouping Updates Updates made to one product can automatically be propagated to a group of products with pricing product groups and item codes Pricing Product Groups When a product is assigned to a pricing product group any change made to one of the products in the group can be propagated to all products in the group The system will confirm if all products in the pricing product group should be updated The following fields will be updated for all products in the pricing product group e Pricing Data Normal Pricing Method Unit Cost Unit Price Normal Group Deal Qty and Price Target Margin Case Cost Special Pricing Method Special Unit Cost Special Unit Price Special Group Deal Qty and Price Note Unit cost and case cost will only be updated for the Primary Vendor e Pricing Levels Pricing Level Price Start and End Item Code If the Automatically Update All Products with Same Item Code flag is checked in the Product Settings function refer to the topic later in this section the system will confirm if all products belonging to the same item code should be update
503. rt topic in this section Hoe oe Save your entries or changes for the current record Gl m Pull all Checks for the current date and any check that has not been deposited from previous dates E ap Find deposits for a particular date Refer to Find Deposit topic in this section Display the Currency Conversion form to convert amounts between different currencies Refer to the Foreign Currencies topic in the Appendices a la sl Maintain notes about the deposit Refer to the Deposit Memo topic in this section Activate the context sensitive help in this dialogue Deposit Report This function will produce a Deposit Slip Report for the bank deposit currently displayed on the Deposits form This function is executed when E or is selected from the Deposits form Table 30 5 contains a description of each field contained in the Bank Deposit Slip report Time Report time Date Time None Your Bank Information Bank information Text None Process Date Date of deposit Date Time None Deposit ID Deposit ID Date Time None Total Amount Total deposit amount Currency None List of all Deposits Type Tender names description Text None Amount Total Amount of each tender deposited Currency None List of Checks Date Check date Date Time None D L D L No of customer Text None Employee Employee No who accepted the check Text None Ref Info Message written by the employee who Text None accepted the check Am
504. rt Date 10 1 2007 v EndDate 10 26 2007 w V Include Hash Department P Include Non Movers Select the following options o a Include Hash Departments Click this if a E you d like data for the hash non sales geo oox 40 sao ADO E departments to be included GENERAL MERCHANDISE Husa 155 821 00 5 04 15 91 260 Include Non Movers Click this if you d like E a a a T E y DARY Mear 70k BDO 3 72 28 display data for departments that had no sales BEVERAGES 289 00 1 09 4 00 72 25 72 25 4 f SWEETS 40 70 0 15 12 00 3 39 3 39 12 for the time period you select POSTAGE STAMPS 11 00 0 04 1 00 11 00 11 00 1 DELIVERY SERVICE 2500 0 09 1 00 25 00 25 00 1 The sales data for the time period by me SA em SaO BO department will be displayed on the form with jawe Sw oa mo s2 ses overall totals displayed at the bottom of the a a BRET Le form A graph of the store sales is also TN Y E available for viewing from this form by clicking on the graph button lg Detailed tax inform ation can be displayed for the department sales by using the button on the toolbar refer to the Store Sales Taxes topic covered later The amount of Open Department and Section sales and the Cost Of Sales will be reported on the Store Sales report accessible via or the A buttons on the toolbar Total Sales 26 533 20 100 00 5519 05 4 51 16 72 Note The Department Sales amount displayed on this form is calculated as follows Total Sales
505. rtain Checkstand features can be configured using the POS Information function in the Back End system These include Printing of a logo on the receipt Loan in amounts for specific tenders Layout of main Checkstand form including fields displayed Prefixes used to identify Random Weight Items 002 Customer Card Numbers 004 and Manufacturer Coupons 005 Contents and format of messages displayed on the Checkstand form and printed on the Checkstand receipt Transaction limits on checks per day week and data entry error checking Coupon days limits and multiple applied Time limits cash drawer open clear screen jumping to stand alone Prompt displayed on credit card pin pad eS gi 100 OS Refer to the POS Information topic contained in the Back End Administration Maintenance section of this manual for more information Security Features Checkstand security features within RETAIL are powerful and easy to use Detailed thought needs to be given on setting up and testing the security features prior to using the Checkstand in a live environment Security can be configured at the following levels e Secured access by employee number and security level Refer to the Employee Maintenance topic of the Back End Administration Maintenance section of this manual e Transaction Key security including dollar limits by security level Refer to the Security Administration topic of the Back End Administration Mainte
506. s Displays the difference between the Opening and the Ending Safe Balances Total safe adjustments entered for the time period Displays the calculated amount to be deposited Calculation Total Sales Over Shorts Pdlns PdOuts Received on Acct ATIMCredit Mfr Coupons Non Depositable Safe Adjustments Safe Variance Any deposits made for the day See Make Review Bank Deposit section Displays the difference between the To be Deposited and Actual Deposit amounts Left field is the safe contents label and the right field is the actual countdown amount The safe contents labels can be configured see toolbar section Table 30 1 Toolbar The following describes the tool bar displayed on the Till Statistics and Balancing form Button Description c ll Al E ENE E a e E Exit the current window Print a Safe Statistics report Refer to the Safe Statistics Report topic in this section Display the Safe Statistics report on the screen Refer to the Safe Statistics Report topic in this section Save your entries or changes for the current record Create or edit a Bank deposit Refer to the Make a Bank Deposit topic in this section Display the Monitor Tills form Refer to Monitor Tills topic in the Administration section Find records for a particular date Refer to Find Records topic in this section Change the safe statistics labels displayed under the B
507. s 0 00 NonDepositables 170 31 GIFTS 801 24 Gift Certificates 10 42 Safe Variance 1 20 In Store Charges 14 36 Safe Adjustments 0 00 Store Coupons 0 00 To be Deposited 14 221 29 Actual deposits 14 220 09 Variance 1 20 Total 30 898 66 31 713 31 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 27 PM Page 1 Review and Update G L RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 328 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Bill Backs Report Bill Back RebatelD Description 8778 Sale 766 Rebate Monday November 14 2005 02 36 PM Page 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Goodwin s Market Bill Backs ltem Start End UPC Code Vendor Date Date 0000000000009 4 8 24 2005 9 7 2005 0000000000123 123 1 8 24 2005 9 7 2005 Rebate Amount 0 15 0 30 Suggested Price 0 40 2 00 Status W W Bill Backs 329 Tuesday November 01 2005 05 34 PM Page 1 RETAIL 7 User Manual APPENDIX E Checkstand Productivity Report RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Hour 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 11 11 12 12 13 13 14 14 15 15 16 16 17 17 18 18 19 19 20 20 21 21 22 22 23 Goodwin s Market Checkstand Productivity Report Sign on Hours 0 65 1 05 1 27 1 08 1 46 2 06 1 76 1 95 2 61 2 40 2 38 1 28 1 20 1 00 Start Date 10 31 2005 Sales Amount 659 27 1 236 49 1 471 99 1 189 71 1 932 27 2 912 15 3 053 98 2 582 77 4 476 40
508. s Report cccccccceccccsacccsserecesererssarenenencnesenerenanerenenesencsenescssnsnctensacsensncsessacseavaracevararsuerers 170 SFOW PRODUCT OALE Gai ann ee ee ee ee eee eee eee ran eee eee 171 A E E E E A 172 Product Sales REDOM errena dia 173 SOTI ECO E E A A saeeteennaanes Secuaae 173 SHOW PRODUCT MOVEMENT session 174 sn A 175 Product Movement Repott 1 ccsscccesssccesssesesssesssssesssssesesusesssssesesuscsesusesensscsessscsesseeseasecsesssssesussseaseeseasesseaseneaas 175 SHOW CUSTOMER SAUES iio cios O 176 A A A RET mor Ree 177 O EEE EE EIE AEE EEE A EEE O E AAE E ANE EA id 177 A aca aac Aaa dan oe AE TEE E aa ac ES AE E A td 178 Customer GIOUD DUO Sl aae a A A A A A 178 CUSIOMEISGICS ROD A AA A AA AA atedeaa ideals 179 WEEKLY BALANCE SUMMARY A 179 PRODUCT MAINTENANCE sedal did ceda 182 TOO Ad ida 184 Frout Prong WIGU OOS A dt di bc 186 Fraue GrP NI EOC GIO S td te di eb 190 FINN I OIC Sad dd li dls 191 PIOOUCL GIOUDS dd io ee a Md 191 PYOOQUCL PAGING ECV ONS EE E 2 A oe Mi E cia al E A EE E T E E T E O E E 192 Pocu AOGINON Al VENIS a a e a E a A a 192 A PER EE PEE ee E Mi EA E E TE A EE E ales ic E E P E at E E E 193 PIO 67 Al US o o it a COR RET COOP 194 EXPOR LADOS E 195 OS AA PP O ancoucee acid tas dedta 196 EOUPORS TUTO A A A A eel A aide wat bance 196 PODAT ACI A Retr E mn A ae mn Peo 197 A EA 197 RETAIL Si A E 198 COL G7 61 fe 6 amare ptr eer oe rere rete eee ee ee ee a teen eee Yee ee eer eee meee ee ne
509. s Total Sub totals by customers by age groups grand total of all age Currency Add amounts in groups columns Table 9 2 Selection Criteria Shows unpaid charges partially paid charges unapplied payments and credits Sort Criteria Age current to latest Customers alphabetical RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 130 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Charge Activity Report The In Store Charge Activity Report function produces a report listing all customers or a selected customer having Instore Charge Report Activity charge activities within the period selected This report is f Preview E Print generated from the In store Charge Maintenance toolbar iagort ma Select records inclusive of the Start Date and End Date Start Date 8 28 2007 xl M entered in the In store Charge Report Activity access EndDate 0207 v form Besides date selection the report also selects records either by customer Card No or All Customers as AA Customers EN Help shown in the form Table 9 3 contains a description of each field contained in the In store Charge Activity report Reportfield Description_________ Format __ Calculation Columns Date Charge activity date in descending chronological Date Time order Activity Charge activity short description Text Reference No Till No Checkstand No Transaction No when Text activity originated at the checkstand Backend entry reference is the text input by the user Memo D
510. s after making changes to your data This process will update all of your checkstands immediately and the changes will take effect for the next transaction Wireless Settings The Wireless Settings form is used to maintain settings that affect the use of the RETAIL Wireless program The settings are defined as follows Wireless Settings Update Stock On Hand lv Update Stock On Hand Indicates if stock on hand should be Play sound on Errors and Messages m updated immediately when using the Inventory Count ana z function If set to blank then the stock on hand will be updated e id from the Inventory Count function in the Backend module Maximum Log Size Po Play sound Indicates if a sound will be played when an error message is displayed Use Cases as Default Indicates that cases will be the default unit of measure of goods received or ordered in the DSD and Ordering module If set to blank then units will be the default unit of measure for received or ordered goods Display Names Indicates that department section and vendor names should be displayed on the screen If it is set to blank then department section and vendor numbers will be displayed Maximum Log Size Type maximum size of log file In MB Mega Bytes The Log file will not exceed this size and will open a new file RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 2 0 RETAIL 7 r Manual ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Administration Ma
511. s sae aa payment is applied and all unpaid and 10 6 2007 NotPaid 9 21 2007 Charge 5 00 5 00 1 1 356 329 partially paid invoices Front End returns RF made by customer and OMI tender are also reflected as In Store Charge credit memos Use this form to apply payments made by credit memos Table 2 11 contains a description of each field contained in the New Edit Credit Memos form In store Charge box Displays whether a customer in the Customer Attributes form is set up as charge customer or not Charge activities can still be processed but a reminder This is not a charge customer is always encountered until a customer is set up Card No Displays the card number of the current customer Name Displays the name of the current customer Balance Displays the current outstanding balance of the current customer Trans ID Displays either New Trans when on add mode of the system assigned sequential number of the retrieved credit transaction Proc Date Displays the effective date of the credit In New Credit Memos form the field defaults to current date but then allows user to enter other dates back date or future date Amount Displays credit amount Ref No Displays the entered reference number for Back End originated credit Available Displays the amount available for application to invoices Click Reset to apply credit automatically to charges from earliest to latest Memo Displays the entered reason of th
512. s the Description of the products Department Displays the Department assignment of the products listed Items The number of times the customer bought each favorite item is displayed Sales Displays the total sales price of the favorite items Table 10 4 Show Customer s Discounts The Discounts History for a Customer lists Discounts History for Donna Armstrong discou nt savings enjoyed by a customer The Department Coupon Multiple Department Discounl Electronic Coupor Manufacture Coupo A A New Departr discounts are categorized as es 700 e Coupon Multiple DELI i GENERAL ME 206 31 Department Discounts GROCER YS 29 25 198 99 30 75 e Electronic Coupons MEAT e Manufacturer s Coupons sale Ae 17 50 This form is accessed when Show Customer s Discounts is clicked Table 10 5 contains a description of each field contained in the Discount History for a Customer form Department Displays the department the coupon is assigned to Coupon Multiple The coupon multiple amounts that the customer accumulated For example a doubled manufacturer coupon will display the amount that was doubled Department Discount Displays department discounts for example Discounts A or B assigned to the customer and the department Electronic Coupon Displays the discounts received on electronic coupons Manufacturers Coupon Displays the total amount of discounts received on manufacturers coupons not including multiple amounts Tab
513. s to display a list of electronic coupons that product is assigned to Refer to the Coupons Triggered topic in this section Helps to access list of batches which contain the current UPC Refer to Review Related Batches topic in Enter Prices for Ad Batch section Press to set the Tab Order for the Product Maintenance form This allows the user to select the most commonly used fields to tab to when entering products Opens the Maintain Seafood COOL country of origin labeling form to enter seafood s place of origin and production method farm raised wild caught etc This information is used for seafood labels Opens PLUM Item Maintenance Requires additional software and license PLUM is used to synchronize pricing ingredient nutrition and other label information with your scales Opens Power Edit Used to edit groups of products by user configurable criteria Refer to Power Edit in the Products section Opens the Product Settings form This enables the user to select criteria for the Show Hide Product List such as number of products viewed in the grid This also controls the Automatic Update of Products with same Item Code and price limitation to prevent data entry errors Activates the context sensitive help RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 185 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Maintenance continued Product Pricing Methods IT Retail supports 2 categories of pricing a Re
514. s together for use in applying price changes to a group of products reporting a See se T 7 F roup ype roup escription o group of products and performing analytical functions For example show product sales e eee analyze product categories The product nam Penson e SCS groups will appear under the Other category on oS mnt the respective forms This function allows the Mig Code i Ln ome nt user to select products for grouping using Bae E Find different criteria Enter the Group ID Description and Group Type Use a Group ID that best describes the product group for easy reference Enter the product criteria for the group for example UPC Item Code Manufacturer Code or Product Group Or you can search for products by using the Retail Power Search Column and Operators Once the criteria has been entered one many or all of the products displayed can be added to the product group by clicking on the arrow fields located in the center of the form Products Product Group UPC Description UPC Description Note A product can only belong to one pricing product group but to many reporting product groups Note A pricing product group effects the way pricing updates are completed When a cost orice change is made to a product belonging to a pricing product group the system will allow the changes to be propagated to all products in the pricing product group Table 24 1 contains a descript
515. scription Till tender breakdown Text None Tills Amounts Amount for till breakdown Currency None Table 30 9 Selection Criteria Where date processed the selected date Sort Criteria Department number Ascending RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 238 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Balancing Overview continued Bookkeeping Memo The Bookkeeping Memo form allows entry and EER maintenance of notes associated with the Balancing Overview information This form is displayed when the Proc Date io 31 2007 user clicks on the memo button on the tool bar on the Balancing Overview form lerno Created 1175 2007 1 45 00 P Modified 11 5 2007 1 43 00 Ey Jane Smith Table 30 10 contains a description of each field contained in the Bookkeeping Memo form BOOKKEEPING MEMO FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Proc Date Date specified on the Balancing Overview form Memo Memo information entered Created Date and time memo entry created Modified Date and time entry was last modified By Employee who made the last modification Table 30 10 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 239 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Balancing Overview continued Discount amp Coupon Summary A Discount and Coupon Summary Report is produced for a specified date when the Print button IS clicked from the Balancing Overview form Table 30 11 contains a description of each field
516. sed to maintain MME miscellaneous information about a customer The customer s card number stores the data This form Luke Henry is displayed when the Memo is clicked from Created 8 2 2007 11 3659A Cancel the toolbar on the Customer form Numerous bad checks writer Modified i 0 24 2007 10 28 28 By GretaG arbo Table 2 15 contains a description of each field contained in the Customer Memo form CUSTOMER MEMO FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Name Displays the Customer s first and last name Created Date the memo was created Memo Miscellaneous information entered for the customer Modified Date of last modification By Person who last modified the information Table 2 15 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 113 RETAIL 7 r Manual Bad Check Maintenance The Bad Check Maintenance form is used to add and maintain bad check information for customers Management of bad checks is a critical function that should be managed Closely This function does not only allow the user to maintain bad checks written by a customer but also provides a good audit trail for tracking purposes A customers check writing privilege can also be maintained from this form by updating the Write Checks box resulting in an update to the customer s data Clicking one of the letter fields triggers the generation of a bad check letter to the customer The system makes the letter available for editing and printing through Microsoft
517. select a department Keying in a Price and Section a Key inthe price b Press the Section key SE through the keyboard c Followed by a section number ENTER Example from the keyboard 500SE100 ENTER 5 00 for section 100 Note The section number 100 is set up in the Section Maintenance task See the Section Maintenance function under the Administration menu Note You can bring up a list of sections to choose from by using the OS key Instead of keying in the price followed by the SE key type in OS and press ENTER A list of sections will then be displayed to select from Example from the keyboard 5000S ENTER then select a department Manually Overriding a Price a Type the new price and press the Price key PK through the keyboard b Followed by the product code PLU or UPC ENTER Example from the keyboard 500PK028 ENTER 5 00 for product 028 Overriding a Price on a Scanned Product a Type in the new price of the product b Press the Price key PK through the keyboard c Scan the product Example from the keyboard 500PK Scan the product 5 00 for the product scanned Entering Multiple Quantities for Keyed Items a Type the quantity being purchased of the product b Followed by an Press the key c Followed by the product code ENTER Example from the keyboard 5 028 ENTER Quantity of 5 for product 28 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL
518. sensesessnsasessessnsenes 274 DEPARTMENT MAINTENANCE vtec scusscecceuni nena R N E 275 TOON OA Saphira O A A con aeeceees 276 DIODOS Ab ad 276 SECTONIMAINTENANCE oia aaa 277 a A erty ro eRe nc ne OE MSE TIE ccm Om Or tes Ee RC A ee er e wer ee 278 DCCIONS RED A A a 278 TENDER MAINTENANCE correran a td anos 279 AS A A er ee er 281 Seniat kane ne eee ene da 281 Selecta Tened 282 C neney Maintenance RON id sb 282 TOTO CTS CO db dad tada aid ees 283 VENDOR MAINTENANCE sccscccsssesscessceessceessceessceessceensceessceessceessceesscesesceessceessceessoeessaeessaeessoeesseeeesaeessaeensaeesas 283 TOODI aio cate seas cd dicta a ciclo Goi ei an hd eed st cade Bie ani ode dn eae gti 285 FINO CTA OM arc asa acct esgic tl id dit cto 285 vendor UNER AT A ld 286 Vendo REPO e ed 286 TEMPLATES MAINTENANCE ti 287 PROFILE MAINTENANCE cost dci 288 Assigning Protiles O BaCk End Menus id dd didas 288 SOHEDULE MAINTENANCE aa 288 REPORTING SERVICES cas 289 PRINT EMPLOYEE REPORT ui tdlas a a taut tial estutadya alia Galea lial e 292 SYNCHRONIZE CHECKSTANDS WITH CUSTOMERS EMPLOYEES sccceseeeeeeeeeceeeeeceeneeeseneeceeaeeeseneeeseaeeeseneesneneessnees 292 SYNCHRONIZE CHECKSTANDS WITH ALL TABLES ca lcd 293 APRRENDIC E S maranan a a a a teat aee dec cuade ea ebonceacaseeeaecuneccdseasbetetaes ecaeee 294 APPENDIX A INITIALIZING THE SYSTEM suis tape 294 lc A Po 294 Step 1 Setup System Setup Information coccococococonoconononanonononon
519. ser Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS synchronize Checkstands with Products The Synchronize Checkstands form is used to update the ESTARAS checkstand databases with the latest products information After Options adding editing or deleting products the checkstand computers Use Sinai Unde ar Products and Cisoner should be updated so they have the latest information When pene deleting products this function will physically delete the products Lally lalallala lalallala from the Back End products database You may also set up all EIA of the tables to be synchronized at a scheduled time and day ree from System Information e A eee cnnio anne me Sycteing 206TEST wih Pio oducts Note The checkstand databases are only used when the Front O ce 11 5 2007 748 4584 End checkstands are running in stand alone mode e pr ected dle ucts D ay sa ii Synchronizin ee with Products Ge ati tingle ip for rodu a Loa chan dis ce 11 5 2007 7 48 45 AM Processing Restrictions No restrictions It can be run at any time Processing Specifications This function will update all checkstands with product information that has changed since the last update was completed To update checkstands with all of the products un flag the field Use Smart Update for Products and Customers Select the checkstands to be updated usually all by flagging the check box next to the Checkstand name by default all checkstands are updated Click OK to start the p
520. ssaceaeseseeceauecsueeeseecseeeeeeseaeeeseas 38 Togog er Products Tata e cacao 38 Scanning a Coupon WITT A BACA srein ik tual dev autecesuebelnchweseauccuaeed nleceukesestdestecauesiauciuaesaleceukesescenstecauesenecckt 38 Keying IN a Department COLON ose ates iii laico 39 Entering a Paid Out that is miscellaneous payment from the till for example lottery winnings o ccoccncoccncnoooo 39 Entering a Paid in that is Non Product Sale for example Postage StaMpS oocccocccccocccccoooncncooanonooonononocnonanannnnnnos 39 Entering a Received on Account that is Payment on Customer Charge ccccccccccssceccssssecsssseeceseecesseeeeeseeeessseeeesses 39 Verid te Pricer a Produc WU O a 40 Verifying the Price of a Product Description ccococonoccconoocconooccnononnconnoronononnnnononnnnnnnnnonannnnnnarnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnarnrnnnnnnnos 40 TA O A SP Pe ee eC eT Se 41 Si A E A nese recon teed 41 Check Tendering applies to any tender that has a CK tender tyPe ccccsssecsssseeessseeeesseeeesseeeesseeessseesesseeesesanees 42 Food Stamp TSUNA cea Soares cs asec as emcee esses E 43 CreditCard e dd dd ids 43 Debit Cara Tendennd sita il cis 44 Mantal Electronic nde 46 ESTOS CARTE SMC MG 1 A a eee aces 46 VOIBINGAND REFUNDIN CG aca eice cirio tic italia idad 47 MOIGING Me Previos CM ista sii iii 47 VOI AR E PO lo 47 Voiding an Earlier Product by Scrolling oooococococoncocnnononcoonononn
521. ssign the product to a product group Refer to the Product Groups topic in this section Press to set up different pricing levels for the current record Refer to the Product Pricing Levels topic in this section Press to add other vendors as well as the primary vendor Refer to the Product Additional Vendors topic in this section Press to maintain the product s inventory count and to complete inventory adjustments Refer to the Product Inventory topic in this section Accesses the Allowance and Bill Backs form Refer to Allowance Bill Backs topic in the Inventory section Opens the Product Kits dialogue to maintain UPCs assigned to a product kit Refer to the Product Kits topic in this section Opens the Product Information sheet used to enter additional information about the item which may be viewed on the front end by entering PS Allow Lookup must also be flagged Press to view and assign serial numbers to a product Refer to the Serial Tracking topic in this section Opens the Select a Label dialog box Refer to the Print Labels section Helps to export product data for importing into a label making program Refer to the Export Labels topic in this section Press to jump to the Show Product Movement function Refer to Show Product Movement topic contained in the Store Sales section View a history of price changes made for this product Refer to the Price History topic in this section Help
522. stment HRE ltemCode ReasonCode Quantity EffectiveDate Applied 0000000001122 2 123 11 5 2007 11 5 2007 10 Note The grid displays a history of the adjustments previously entered for the product 193 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Product Inventory continued Table 23 5 contains a description of each field contained in the Product Inventory form PRODUCT INVENTORY FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION UPC ltem Code Stock on Hand Stock Min Stock Max Reorder Point Adjustment Quantity Reason Effective Date Adjustment Grid Reason Codes Transaction Key Description Reason Code Current item s UPC Current item s item code assigned Displays the quantity on hand with adjustments being considered Displays minimum quantity to have on hand Displays maximum quantity to have on hand Displays threshold used for re ordering Enter the correct quantity needed to adjust the stock on hand of the current item Enter the desired reason code number selected from the drop down menu Defaults to current date but user can select an earlier date Displays all the adjustments created for the current item with all the data related to each adjustment Inventory Adj Inventory Adjustments Lists the set up and available reason code numbers Description Lists the set up and available reasons for an adjustment Table 23 5 Product Kits Click Product Kits button EEltr
523. stomer or company responsible for charge statements E mail Customer s or companies e mail address Show this again when address is Flag to force entry of data in every field on the form This causes the system to edit all fields filled in with incomplete or unclear data Table 2 3 Customer Area The Geographic Code Maintenance form is used a a to categorize customers into different geographic areas for example city county and province This form is displayed when the Area field ga within odifie 5 1431 2200017 Cancel the Customer form is clicked Click Add to add new i codes to the list Select a code in the list using the 3 92508 10 24 2007 1 Add g2501 10 24 2007 mouse and click OK TERE Delete Help Table 2 4 contains a description of each field contained in the Geographic Code Maintenance form CUSTOMER AREA FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Definition Number sequentially assigned by the system starting from number 1 Geographic Description Free format description of the area Modified Date and time stamped by the system Modified By Number of the employee who made the last modification Table 2 4 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 100 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Maintenance continued Customer Category The Category Maintenance form is used to group customers into different categories as defined by the user This form is displayed when the Category field La
524. sults may be filtered further by entering addition EARTH BST APPLE CINN STK GRAHA 0002392320303 CERTIFIED criteria Flag the Checkbox in the second row then Del Monte Pineapple 0002400000036 CERTIFIED GEN SENECA APPLE JCE TIN WIC 0003710000314 CERTIFIED make further selections For example you may want to Apple Juice 00341 29055311 CERTIFIED search for items that have app in the description only in the Produce Department E Be Once the product is selected and OK is clicked the product information will be displayed on the Product Maintenance form Table 23 12 contains a description of each field contained in the RETAIL Search form RETAIL SEARCH FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Column Select the search criteria from the drop down Operator Select the Operator such as Equal or Like Use Like to enter partial search criteria Value Type in the search criteria or select from the Ellipsis button when searching by Department Section or Vendor Find Button Press Find after selecting all of the search criteria Description The name of the products meeting the criteria UPC UPC of the items Item Code The product s item code if it exists Size The size of the item such as 12 oz Vendor The primary vendor of the item Table 23 12 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 198 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Cost Calculator The Cost Calculator form allows the user to calculate th
525. system will use the tax table Repeat Range Displays the amount of the repeat range of the tax table Repeat Tax Displays the tax amount for the given repeat range of the tax table Tax Table Displays the tax table entries for the tax table selected Table 33 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 266 RETAIL 7 r Manual security Administration ADMINISTRATION SETUP The Security Administration form supports the assignment of security levels and limits to checkstand transaction keys checkstand manager functions and Back End functions This form also allows for the entry and assignment of reason codes to checkstand functions and manager functions Note The setup of this data is critical to the security of the entire system Checkstand Functions The Checkstand Functions tab supports entry of attributes and limits for checkstand transaction keys used in the Front End program discussed in detail at the Checkstand Functions section of this manual The General tab allows the user to specify a mininum and maximum amount that can be entered for the transaction key This specifies whether to require a manager override when the minimum is not met and whether or not a reason is required when using the transaction key The Security Levels tab allows entry of maximum limits by security level for a transaction key Click Add to add an entry for the next security level Type the maximum amount allowed for the security level
526. t Displays the entered reference number for Backend originated payment or a system assigned number for Front end originated payment Displays the amount available for application to invoices Click Reset to apply payment automatically to charges from earliest to latest Displays the entered reason of the recorded transaction Click Applied boxes to apply payment to specific charges Lists the due dates of charge transactions Lists the status of the charge transactions Lists the effective dates of the charge transactions Lists the type of the charge activities Charge Finance Charge or Misc Charge Lists the original amount of the charge transactions Lists the current balances of the partially paid charge transactions Lists the amount paid or amount being applied to the payment Lists the reference numbers of the charge transactions Lists the sequentially assigned trans ids of the charge transactions RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 107 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Customer Maintenance continued Processing buttons The following describes special notations on the buttons used to process payments on the New Edit Payments form Button Description Add When grayed out the form is on new add a payments mode From Edit Payments form click this button to change to New Payments form for new payment transaction entry Save Saves edited applied and new payment transactions Payment sav
527. t AllAddProducts 0 in the ros ini Z X C V B N M sack Note The Add a Product form is not available in stand alone mode Add a Product Note use the Tab Enter and Arrow keys to move between fields if a mouse is not available UPC PLU Price Method Unit Pricing z Description Unit Price y Qty Deal Price E E Allow Zero Price Scale r B Foodstamp E Req Price Prompt M imase H r Allow Neg Price 7 Only Scanne d E E E Allow Line Disc 7 Department Tax A 334 x Xx x onoo RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 55 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manager Functions continued Training Mode Function Puts the checkstand into Training Mode Press the Training button when logging onto the main Checkstand form b The system will prompt you for your manager s password Type it in and press enter Click OK or ENTER to the message Training mode is now on This will now put the Checkstand into training mode d Tosign off press the Sign Off key or Type SO ENTER as the transaction code and Click OK or ENTER to the message Training mode is now off Note the screen will change to a different color blue or green when the system is in training mode The color is configurable through the ros ini file Refer to the RETAIL Installation manual for more information Loading Pictures and Videos RETAIL supports multimedia capa
528. t Batch Changes List Product Mass Product Groups Changes v Product pa Misc Data Memo Select Label Type RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 180 RETAIL 79 r Manual Point of Sales Products Enter Prices for Ad Batch Price Management Product Product Batches Batches Management pie Cost oe i Analyze Item Calculator AN Movement Numbers ca y Create New Product ne Batch Ad Vacon Ad Labels Batch Memo epon epon Reports Print Labels Serial Tracking Mix Match OA Reports Report o 4 on Select Label On hand View Mix Product T Sold by product Match R i Report ype Sold by customer atcn mepor Te Product Product Serial Tracking Mix Match Reports Labels Reports Report RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Ad Markdown POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Edit Wholesaler Cost Changes Y View Price Ad Batch Gnanace Markdown i Ad Batch Product Markdown Select Product Report sore co ts a Sales y y i Product l A Labels Memo Update Checkstands with Price Changes Report Products Information v N a v b View Price Update Changes Checkstands ye Ng A Price Changes a Report gt Checkstand 1 Checkstand 2 Ch
529. t is on the P O you wish to receive Once you ve selected the vendor select a P O by clicking the down arrow next to the P O No field A drop down list of P O s for the vendor will appear that you can select from If you d like to receive goods without a P O simply enter in the first UPC or Item Code toggle by clicking the UPC and the program will prompt you to create a P O Once a PO has been selected the information related to the purchase order will be displayed Receive an Invoice e SIR y xlama aladel Ll Vendor BUTTONWOOD FARM P O No foooo000010 Address VENDOR ADDRESS Acct Date 1072272007 SOLVANG cA 93463 UPC Pack Size Oty Ordered Description Unit Purchase Type Received X Department GROCE RY Oty Received UP Description _ Cert_Code CaseCost Cost Price Quantity UnitOfMeasure Received PType Dif o Total 0000000000001 Cinnamon Raisin Swirl 32 40 1 35 4 40 10 24 case 10 Received 0 324 00 Invoice 324 00 0 00 Total 324 00 324 00 Date 10 22 2007 y Number Shipped By Received By Greta Garbo Paid Date Mi Gross Total Adjustment Wendor Total Enter the UPC or Item code of the product in the UPC ltem Code field for which you want to receive goods You will then be able to enter a received quantity for that product refer to the Order Goods topic in the previous section in regards to Purchase Types that can be selected Enter the received
530. tate Zip Code Discount DSD Vendors 117 AMSCAN 800 444 8887 P O BOX 71603 CHICAGO IL 60694 1603 0 00 119ALPINE WEST 800 366 6113 445 CONEY ISLAND DR SPARKS NV 89431 0 00 1200BR FOO OBRIEN 805 642 5263 1932 EASTMAN AVE 112 VENTURA CA 93003 0 00 161 NATURE S BLESSINGS 805 646 3225 P O BOX 395 OJAI CA 93024 0 00 235 QUPE VINEYARD 805 937 9801 PO BOX 440 LOS OLIVOS CA 93441 0 00 300 DPI WEST 909 975 1019 601 ROCKEFELLER AVENUE DPI WEST FILE ONTARIO CA 91761 0 00 330 GBL DISTRIBUTING 805 964 2571 PO BOX 6130 SANTA BARBARA CA 93160 6130 0 00 349 HAPPY DOG ALL 831 726 7198 2935 REA COURT AROMAS CA 95004 0 00 360 HOSTESS 323 753 3521 FILE 55263 LOS ANGELES CA 90074 0 00 6005 BACCALA 760 564 6146 79 725 MANDARINA LA QUINTA CA 92253 0 00 6036 PRINCESS OF YUM 805 466 3655 PO BOX 1202 SAN LUIS CA 93406 0 00 6052 KASILOF FISH CO 800 322 7552 3912 134TH ST NE MARYSVILLE WA 98271 0 00 6073PICNIC AT ASCOT INC 310 676 9266 3237 131st STREET HAWTHORNE CA 90250 0 00 6115BO DEREK S BLESS THE 805 688 4243 P O BOX 1940 SANTA YNEZ CA 93460 0 00 6116AMBERLAND FOODS INC 701 324 4804 P O BOX 185 HARVEY ND 58341 0 00 6117LA PICCOLINA 404 296 1624 2834 FRANKLIN ST AVONDALE GA 30002 0 00 6118EMPIRE INTERNATIONAL 909 392 1396 294WEST BONITA AVE POMONA CA 91767 0 00 6123 ZYLISS USA CORP 949 699 1884 19751 DESCARTES FOOTHILL CA 92610 2620 0 00 6124G amp G FOODS 805 898 3819 2403 DE LA VINA 8 SANTA BARBARA CA 93105 0 00 6125MJL GOURMET 310 663 7167 17
531. tatistics Gross Sales Avg Order Customers Items Items Scanned Scanned Rings Min Refunds Voids Paid Ins Paid Outs Recyd On Acct Over Shorts Last Balanced Coupons Coupon Count Dbl Coupons Dbl Coupon Count Till Statistics Gross Sales Avg Order Customers Items ltems Scanned Scanned Rings Min Refunds Voids Paid Ins Paid Outs Recvd On Acct Over Shorts Last Balanced Coupons Coupon Count Dbl Coupons Dbl Coupon Count 6 176 42 14 78 418 1 672 00 1 612 00 96 41 81 37 240 55 484 32 0 00 0 00 20 00 0 00 10 31 2007 8 24 08 4M 45 22 22 61 2 11 00 11 00 100 00 73 80 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 45 22 11 5 2007 1 08 15 PM 0 00 0 0 00 0 Note Use the Get button to re calculate the till totals for the current day before store close This will insure that all transactions for the day have been accounted for by the system This option can be used to re calculate totals for a start and end period however this option should be used sparingly and for small time periods preferably one day Note The Gross Sales amount displayed on this form is calculated using the same calculation as Show Store Sales except that sales tax is added to the total Total Sales including taxes amp excluding coupons Coupon Multiples e g double coupon amounts Discounts customer line item amp order level Electronic Coupons RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL
532. te the over shorts variance and display it in the gray column labeled O S Totals for each column will be displayed on the bottom portion of the form When you are satisfied with the data you ve entered click the Save in the toolbar to save the information Remember Till balancing data for the current day is updated based on a specified interval default is 10 minutes If you need to re enter cashier information press the Get in the toolbar This will reload cashier information for the selected cashier Safe Statistics RETAIL also provides you with the ability to iggeusiree neti balance the safe and balance the total store Wi Sal mlel Select the Safe Statistics and Balancing a E function under the REGISTERS section of the 12 Point of Sales menu The system will display Curent Safe Balance Into current information on the form The form IS Opening Adjustments Pickups Loans Reconcile Deposits Ending divided into two tabs Current Safe and Cash 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 6 924 85 6 924 85 0 00 Balance Information Check 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 47361 473 61 0 00 WIC 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 59 35 59 35 0 00 The first tab Current Safe displays what is in your safe at any given time The Ending Safe amount is calculated as follows Opening safe balance Pickups checkstands Loans checkstands Reconciled Till Statistics Deposits Make a Deposit Totals 0 00 0 00 0 00 0 00 7 457 81 7 457 8
533. ted number of product categories 1 Gioca poea 1 E Attributes entered for the section will only effect 4 Produce PRODUCE Unitof Measure gt transactions that are rung up to the section from Cie WNE UQUOR Foodstamp I the checkstands on When adding a section the attributes for the a SWEETS Deon Pan department selected will automatically be 100 Breod BAKERY ree applied to the section In edit mode if the ea ee a department of the section is changed the 105 Vegetables PRODUCE is a 106 Fruit PRODUCE system will prompt as to whether or not the 107 Dried Nuts PRODUCE a n attributes for the new department should be mE DAY S applied to the section 111 Yoghut DAIRY Tih bee Modified Modified By Table 37 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Section Maintenance form SECTION MAINTENANCE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Section Displays the number of the section being added or edited Section Name Displays the name of the section being added or edited Department Displays the department name to which this section belongs Modified Displays the last date when the current section was modified Modified By Displays name of person who last modified the section SECTION LIST Displays section name and department of sections in the system Schedule Product Schedule assigned to this section Limits when products can be purchased Unit of Measure Unit of measure assigned to products in this sectio
534. ted to each of the Front End checkstands selected Note When deleting customers or electronic coupons these functions physically delete the customers and coupons from the Back End and checkstand customer databases Note The checkstand databases are only used when the Front End checkstands are running in stand alone mode Processing Restrictions No restrictions can be run at any time Processing Specifications Checkstands Update Synchronization Coupons Options 7 Rae Close M Update Checkstand 2006TEST IV Update Checkstand LESLIE Y Update Checkstand ITROTPOSO1 Checkstands Update Synchronization Coupons Options as e Close Synchronization Done Verifying state for 2006TEST CheckStand 2006TEST OK Verifying state for LESLIE CheckStand LESLIE OK Verifying state for ITRO1POSO7 CheckStand ITROIPOSO1 OK Synchronizing Coupons Synchronizing 2006TEST with ECoupons Getting last update Getting last update for Electronic Coupons Loading Electronic Coupons changed since e 10 24 2007 2 18 48 PM espe Coupons in Progress e 1 record s acon in 0 minute s and O second s anaes SLESLIE w ith ECoupon Getting last update Getting last update for Electronic Coupons Loading Electronic Coupons ali since 10 24 2007 2 18 48 PM aa tonic Coupons in Progre e 1 record s affected in 0 minutts and 0 second s Synchroni 2 A ITROTP an Rag ECou Getting last up Ge
535. ted to sign the pin pad after the transaction has been approved Note If the transaction has been denied or an error has occurred a message will be displayed and or an error code will be displayed j The customer copy of the receipt will print out k The merchant copy of the receipt will print If you are using signature capture you can skip the printing of the merchant copy l The customer will keep the first receipt and the checker will have the customer sign the second receipt m Checker will save the merchant receipt for balancing at the end of the shift RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 43 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Tendering continued Debit Card Tendering a Enter items and total order b Amessage box will appear prompting customer to slide card through the pin pad The customer should slide his her card through the pin pad c A message box will appear prompting customer to select a tender type The customer should select a tender type d The customer is prompted enter his her pin number and click enter button on the pin pad e Amessage box will appear prompting customer if he she would like cash back Enter Yes or No f If Yes a message box will appear prompting customer to select an amount from the predefined amounts or press the Other key and enter an amount whole dollars only Note The customer does not need to wait until the cashier is finished to co
536. ted when the coupon it is linked to is triggered Instead of the customer receiving a discount on the item being purchased the customer would receive a coupon for a different product either being purchased in the same order or purchased in the future BOGO Buy One Get One Free This type of coupons allows any customer to purchase one selected item and get the second item free This type of coupon is not dependent on a customer card number Pick Quantity Pick a specified quantity and receive all for a reduced price This type of pricing is commonly used for random weight meat items buy 5 packages of meat for 20 00 Or a free item may be rewarded after the quantity has been purchased Total Order A dollar amount or percentage off the order after the Minimum Order is reached Or award an item free after the minimum order is reached 2 2 Se 309 SA BS and Trigger Price To From the Group Name tmnt select lt Add New Group gt An item can only belong a renta to one coupon group and a Coupon Group can gt aaa RT only have one coupon MPS ne On the right side the field Free Item appears Free items can be applied to Pick Quantity or Total Len yes Order coupons You will need to create a Coupon Group for Pick Quantity coupons Add a coupon group Description Tanti s bog and press Save Select the products you want in diets Posner eacn fi the group by entering the UPC code items code ited Petal man
537. tegorized as B In the example a 5 1 4 discount is applied to the order Note that discounts are entered with a decimal point DG DG ENTER or Amount 2000DG ENTER DG ENTER is used to bring up options for using gift cards for example E am APRENER deactivate re load view balance Amount DG is used to initially activate or ourchase the gift card DN Amount DN UPC ENTER 100DN28 ENTER Discount amount applied to a product In the example a 1 00 discount is rf if applied to product 28 Discount can also be entered for a section or department transaction gt ae a Se E a L ENTER department 1 main department 0 sub department DR DR ENTER DR ENTER Discount removal Removes any customer discount from the order DT Percentage DT UPC 5 25DT28 ENTER Discount percentage applied to product In the example a 5 1 4 discount is ENTER applied to the product 28 Note discounts are entered with a decimal point Discount can also be entered for a section or department transaction FN UPC ENTER Food stamp no Food stamp used to enable or disable the food stamp eligibility for a product ID ENTER Customer identification key used to request the customer ID number for checks Coupon key to manually enter a manufacturer coupon In the example a 50 cent ENTER coupon is being applied to department 1 sub dept O main dept Coupon usage is tracked to the Coupon tender CP Manager Function used
538. tems sold or total weight sold in product movement For example a whole chicken can be tracked as 3 5 lbs or as 1 chicken Allow Alpha Updates A flag in this box allows the entry of alpha and or numerical characters in the Item Code Allow Discount While on Sale Flag this field to allow additional discounts to be applied to an item while the product is on ad Allow Zero Prices Flag to allow product prices to be set at zero The cashier can enter the price on the Front End Apply Best Allowance Only Flag to indicate if best allowance is to apply when a vendor s product has two or more effective allowance set up When not set all existing effective allowances would apply Require Vendor Flag to indicate if a vendor is required when adding or editing products in the Product Maintenance function Track Double Coupons Flag to indicate whether or not double coupon counts and amounts are to be tracked and displayed on the Till Statistics form Auto Store Close button Press to set up the time of day for the automatic store close to run Archive Data File The path name where the archived transaction data files is created Cost Changes File No longer used PASSWORDS Cashier Expire Days Enter the number of days for the cashier password to remain valid after which a new password must be selected Optional Admin Expire Days Enter the number of days for the Back End password to remain valid after which a new password must be selected Optional Minimu
539. tender Flag to indicate the product can be purchased with Wic CVV tender FS will automatically be flagged A flag will indicate if the product is currently advertised Flag to indicate if the product is delivered directly to the store For example bread vendor beer vendor Flag to indicate if the quantity must be entered at the Checkstand Flag to indicate if a label needs to be printed for this product Flag to allow cashiers to do price verification PV or product search PS on the product This must be flagged to allow the user to search by picture on the front end entered via the Picture button or to search for additional information about the product if entered using the Product Info button in the toolbar DISCOUNT Category A Flag this product as belonging to Category A to enable Category A discounts to be taken on the product Discounts are maintained as part of the POS Information function of the Administration menu Flag this product as belonging to Category B to enable Category B discounts to be taken on the product Discounts are maintained as part of the POS Information function of the Administration menu Flag to allow a line item discount Maximum discount allowed to an item limits the total discounts Dept discounts DA DB DT DN and customer discounts applied to a product FSA Eligible Flag to indicate product can be purchased with Flex Spending Account Select the category from the drop down to the right None
540. tered Sort Criteria Department Name RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 158 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Setup Reason Codes You can use the Setup Reason Codes form to enter reason codes for functions supported by the Wireless module Wireless functions that use a reason codes include Purchase Order entry and 095 Pte Save DSD receiving Reason Codes can be Reason Code Description Delete established for Close e Cre dits Debit Reason e Debits e Rebates Select a transaction key from the drop down list Reason Codes will be displayed in the bottom of the form To edit a reason click a reason code from the list To add additional reason codes click Add Table 18 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Setup Reason Codes form Transaction Key Transaction keys available are Credits Debits and Rebates Description Transaction key description Reason Code System generated number Description Reason description that will appear for selection Table 18 1 Print Total Invoices by Department The Print Total Invoices by Department function will Hi by Department Report produce a list of all invoices by departmenis for all or specific vendors for a desired time period pes ox Department All Departments Cancel Vendor Al Vendors Help Date Ranges From 1026 2007 y To 10 26 2007 x e DSD Only Ww Non DSD Only Table 18 2 contains a descrip
541. that surcharges are entered with a decimal point Applies surcharge to the entire order for all products categorized as B In the example 5 1 4 surcharge is applied to the order Note that surcharges are entered with a decimal point ENTER SC ENTER Manually ring up scaled items to a department or section 100DP10 Enter in price per unit weight for example price per pound followed by 100SE100 department or section In the example price per pound is 1 00 multiplied by weight Amount SE Section 5005E600 Assigns dollar sales to a selected section In this example 5 00 is rung up to ENTER ENTER section 600 used to toggle off the salesperson for items on the order Store coupon key to manually enter a store coupon In the example a 50 cent ENTER coupon is being applied to department 1 main department 0 sub department Coupon usage is tracked to the Store Coupon tender SN Enter in this command after you have totaled the order TN Tax Table y TN ENTER 1TN ENTER Tax No Tax used to add or subtract tax to a product In the example tax table 1 UPC ENTER 28 ENTER tax criteria are being applied to product 28 TW ENTER or TW ENTER Place the empty container on the scale and press the TW key The weight of the item will be reduced by the tare weight TW weight ENTER TW100 ENTER If a weight is manually entered the amount of the weight entered will be deducted from t
542. the No Sale key NS ENTER through the keyboard System will prompt for a password Canceling a Transaction 1 Press the Cancel Transaction key CN through the keyboard 2 Depending on level of security enter a manager s password in the Managers Security Code form Example from the keyboard CN ENTER The entire order will be cancelled RETAIL will then be ready to start the next transaction Line Item Functions This section will describe some of the various line item functions that can be used through the Front End module of RETAIL Age Verification a Age verification will be required on any product that has been flagged as requiring age verification in the Back End Product Maintenance function Two types of age verification will be completed on a product 1 Customer s Date of Birth The system will prompt for the date of birth for the customer Enter the birth date in mm dd yy or mmddyy format note if no slashes are used you must enter six digits for the date for example 050198 The system will calculate the 120381 customers age based on the date of birth entered and compare to the required age for purchase on the product If the customer is not old enough to purchase the product an error message will be displayed On the touch screen an Age Override button can also be used 2 Employee s Date of Birth The system will also check to make sure that the cashier is old enough to se
543. the Cost field In the Group Deal Price field enter 3 in the Qty and 1 00 in the price field Example Normal Welcome to Total Foods tii Splt Package y Your Total Grocery Solution Unit Price Cost 50 150 Price E Group Deal Price Mini Pecan Pie 0 34 E ty 3 Price 1 00 1 3 1 00 Mini Pecan Pie 0 34 E Target Margin 0 00 1 3 1 00 Gross Margin 35 00 Mini Pecan Pie 0 32 F Product Group i 3 1 00 TAX 0 00 TOTAL 1 00 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 186 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCT Product Maintenance continued Product Pricing Methods continued 3 Group Threshold The unit price is paid until the specified quantity is reached which will then adjust the qualifying items price to reflect the Group Price For example Normal price 0 89 buy 2 get 1 free for a total of 1 78 The customer must purchase the specified quantity to get the deal which is reflected when the final item in the deal is scanned If the customer buys more than the deal the sequence will start over For this example enter as follows In the Unit Price fields enter the normal cost and unit price 0 89 In the Group Deal Price fields enter 3 in the Qty and the total price of 2 of the items in the price field 1 78 The price you enter is the total deal price a Unit Price price the first or more items scans at b Qty qualifying quantity of items for the special group price c Group Deal
544. the Inventory Count form Table 11 2 contains a description of each field contained in the Inventory Count report Report field Description Format _ Calculation UPC UPC Text None Description Product description Text None Quantity Quantity entered Number None Unit Cost Unit cost for the product Currency None Total Cost Total cost for the inventory entered Currency quantity cost Unit Price Unit price for the product Currency None Total Price Total price for the inventory entered Currency quantity price Dept Department Number None Section Section Number None Vendor Vendor Number None Pack Pack size Number None Size Size of the product if a pack Text None Count Date Inventory count date Date Time None Applied On Date inventory count applied Date Time None Applied Qty Quantity applied Number None Table 11 2 Selection Criteria All products in the inventory count currently displayed on the Inventory Count form Sort Criteria None RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 142 RETAIL 79 INVENTORY Open a New Review a Purchase Order You can use the New Purchase Order form to create new and review existing purchase orders by vendor A Purchase Order is required prior to receiving goods in RETAIL Select a vendor from the list and the next available PO number will be displayed New Purchase Order or a list of PO numbers will be available for selection Review a Purchase Order Products can be entered on the PO eithe
545. the ellipse button next to the unit price field to generate the sales data RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 209 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES PRODUCTS Enter Prices for Ad Batch continued Note If a product belongs to a pricing product group the system will prompt if all other products belonging to the group should be added to the batch If the user responds by pressing OK then each product in the product group will be added to the batch with the same pricing changes applied Refer to the Product Maintenance section for more information Table 26 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Product Batches form PRODUCT BATCHES FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION PRODUCT INFO Batch ID Starts Ends UPC Description Item Code Depts Section Vendor SPECIAL PRICING Pricing Method Unit Price Cost Unit Price Price Grp Deal Price Qty Grp Deal Price Price Print Shelf Label NORMAL PRICING Pricing Method Unit Price Cost Unit Price Price Grp Deal Price Qty Grp Deal Price Price Print Shelf Label POS INFO TAB Target Pack Size UPC Link Mix Match Ad Mix Match ATTRIBUTES TAB Discount A B Allow Disc Tax A B C D SALES TAB Current Sales Previous Sales Ad Loss Product Movement Date Qty Sold RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Displays the batch Number it can be aloha numeric Displays the date and time when the current batch st
546. the time of installation Refer to the RETAIL Installation manual The RETAIL Concord Host Program should be left running at all times while checkstand transactions are being processed Closing of this program will terminate all EFT processing for the store Concord Response Mapping Response codes returned from the Concord Host are translated by the Concord EFT Manager The translated code is then displayed at the checkstand by the RETAIL Front End program Listed below is a mapping of the Concord error codes RETAIL will process the errors as follows 1 Approvals RETAIL will display the word Approved on the screen and complete the transaction 2 Denials Errors RETAIL will do one of the following a Display the error code and description if a RETAIL description has been defined for the code in the RETAIL Error Text field in the Concord Response Table below b If a RETAIL description does not exist the program will display the word Declined or Error and the Error Code received from Concord The word Declined or Error will display depending on the RETAIL Error Type assigned to the code D Declined E Error refer to the Concord Response Table below C Denials Errors will display and remain on the screen until the cashier hits a key Examples Conversion Code Received by Message displayed on checkstand RETAIL TM BA 08 Worn Card Manual Entry Declined 11 12 Bad Pin RETAIL USER
547. the total dollar amount of adjustments Total Displays the net total amount for the invoice sum of total adjustment s Vendor Total Enter the net total amount for this invoice as copied from the vendor s actual invoice Paid Date Enter the date this invoice is paid Table 13 1 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 149 RETAIL 79 r Manual INVENTORY Receive an Invoice continued Toolbar The following describes the functions of the buttons on the Receive an Invoice form s toolbar Button ce gt lol a a E E e 3 Ed Description Exits the current window Prints an Invoice Document Refer to the Invoice Document topic in this section Displays an Invoice Document on the screen Refer to the Invoice Document topic in this section Press to make adjustments to an invoice Refer to P O Adjustments topic in the Open a New Review a Purchase Order section Receives the invoice as ordered This will set the quantity received on all line items to the amount ordered Marks the invoice as received The invoice will no longer be available for modification Creates a product batch for this invoice Apply the batch using the Enter Prices for Ad Batch function Refer to Create a New Batch topic in Enter Prices for Ad Batch section Finds all invoices for the current vendor Refer to Select an Invoice topic in this section Deletes the current invoice Press to access cost calculator The us
548. this section Save your entries or changes for the current record Add an Employee Function Edit an Employee Function SRAM ae Flag the employee as deleted in the system The employee will be flagged deleted and inactive when the Synchronize Checkstands with Employees function is executed The employee s name will still remain in the Employee table in the database in order to preserve the audit trail Activates the context sensitive help ES RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 273 RETAIL 7 User Manual security Administration e Assigning security to Front End Transaction keys e Assigning security to Front End Manager functions ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Access the Security Administration function under the SETUP section of the Administration menu and complete the following tasks The setup of this data is critical to the security of the entire system Assigning security to Front End Transaction Keys Establish security levels limits and reason codes for the Front End functions For each Front End Function designate an overall minimum and maximum amount that can be completed at the Front End as well as a limit for each security level Indicate if reasons are required when using the function and enter the reason codes for the Blind Tils ee i i Cancel Transaction Require Mar function by pressing the Reason Code button a a a DB Discount Category B DG Department Gift DebitDes DN Discount Line Item
549. this data is critical to the security of the entire system Assigning Profiles to Back End menus The Profile Maintenance form is used to assign menu EME profiles to employees to control the Back End menus gt u l 22 each employee may view and access Profile 1D Ta Profile Description Default Admin Profile Select All 4 Menu Profiles are assigned to each employee in the Menu Heading Menu Desoipton __ Seeced _ s Employee Maintenance form ee 3 DENT 2 Example a menu profile could be created for a Pricing nae cee o Coordinator that allow access to the Product on Maintenance Enter Prices for Ad Batch Product sytroioeChekstand wth Ets Movement screens but prohibits access to Accounting Bpen Nen Puchase Drda information INVENTORY Receive an Invoice Y az 2 Table 41 1 contains a description of each field contained in the Profile Maintenance form PROFILE MAINTENANCE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Profile ID Displays the name of the profile used in assigning profiles in Employee Maintenance Profile Description Displays a more detailed descriptive name of the profile Select All Flag this field to select all of the forms within the RETAIL Back End Menu Grid Lists all of the forms in the Back End select by clicking in the box next to the form name Table 41 1 Schedule Maintenance The Schedule Maintenance form is used to enter maintain product schedules These schedules can
550. tion In this case the processing date cannot be modified and a message will be displayed as depicted on the right displaying the name of the workstations that are currently processing transactions Clicking on the Yes button will instruct the store close to attempt to change the date again The message will be continue to be displayed until the store close process is successful in changing the processing date on all checkstands NOTE Under normal circumstances you should continue to press the Yes button until all checkstands have been successfully updated Clicking on the No button will stop the store close process which can be re started at a future time NOTE The processing date for those checkstands NOT listed will already be changed to the next date leaving some checkstands with the old processing date and some with the new processing date RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 307 RETAIL 7 r Manual APPENDIX B RUNNING A 24 HOUR STORE Manually Changing the Processing Date The processing date on each of the BZ checkstands can be manually changed in the ec 2 E hat t t b Th Tae 11 6 2007 1 ere uni ae R eae R Finished Successfully for 11 05 E gt event t a a S O re C ose can No e ru A e 115 2007 11 6 2007 12 51 26 PM 1 Store Close Recovery All checkstands have been checked out 15 11 5 2007 11 6 2007 12 51 26 PM 1 Store Close Recovery Calculating Store Sales Chan ge Date butto n WI beco m e aval lab e fo
551. tion of each field contained in the Invoice Total Report Reportfied Description Format Calculation Invoice Date Date of invoice Text None Invoice Number Vendor s invoice number Text None Total Cost Total net of adjustment amount of the invoice Currency None Total Price Ext retail amount total reflected in the invoice Currency None Gross Margin Percentage of Gross Profit to Total Price Percent Gross Profit Total Price 100 Gross Profit Difference between Total Price less Total Cost Currency Total Price Total Cost Table 18 2 Selection Criteria Criteria entered by user Sort Criteria Non DSD DSD followed by Department and Vendor Name RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 159 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Print Allowances by Vendor The Print Allowances by Vendor function will produce a EA list of all allowances or specific allowances by vendor for a desired time period ee ox Cancel Vendor THE PAPER COMPANY Help Date Ranges From hovar2007 To 10 26 2007 y Table 18 3 contains a description of each field contained in the Allowance Report The layout of this report is contained in Appendix F Report field o Description S Foma Calculation UPC UPC of product Text Description Product Description Text Item Code Item code of product Text Amount Allowance amount for the item Currency Start Date Allowance start date Date End Date Allowance end date Date Table 18 3 Selection Crit
552. tions listed above Option 1 Loan Function Loan in cash to a drawer a Choose 1 from the Supervisor Menu b A message box will prompt you to Type the amount to be loaned in the amount must be entered in whole dollars for example enter 20000CA for 200 00 Click OK c Select number 10 or enter 0 to exit Note The Loan In Slip prints on the receipt printer Enter Amount to be loaned Cancel moo RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 49 R ETAIL 7 r Manual Option 2 Pickup Function Pick up cash from drawer a b f Choose no 2 from the Supervisor menu on Normal Screen or press Pickup on the Touch Screen For check tenders for example Check Wic or Wic CVV or charge tenders tender type CH the entire amount for the tender must be picked up On the Touch Screen highlight the tender and press OK The Amount field is grayed out so that the manager cannot enter an amount All of the checks must be picked up and the Pick Up Slip will print out on the receipt printer with the details of the checks To pick up other tender types for example Cash enter the amount and press OK The receipt printer will print out the Pick Up Slip If using Normal Screen mode select the tender type from the drop down If picking up a tender with the type CK for example Check Wic or Wic CVV the list of the checks will be displayed Press OK and all of those checks will be picked u
553. to and select the pictures If the Back End is installed on the Server you can browse to the default folder RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 56 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO RETAIL System Manager The RETAIL System Manager form is used to setup all the system parameters to configure the Front End module of RETAIL This form is only accessible to supervisors having the proper security levels This is accessed from All Programs gt Retail v 7 gt Configuration Tools gt Setup Front End Typically this information is setup one time during the installation process However if there is a need to re initialize this data be very careful in its use The General tab displays product information and licensee information regarding the Front End system Checkstand Retail FrontEnd Professional Edition for Microsoft Windows Version 2010 1001 288 2 IT Retail Inc Copyright 1993 HTXU 600 937 Mfg 4 1 Goodwin and Son s Inc 1T Retail Inc All rights reserved Warning This program is protected by copyright law and international treaties Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this program or any portion of it may result in severe civil or criminal penalties and will be prosecuted to maximum extent possible under the law Model ROS Serial Number 1 Licensed to f Gened Patabaso MSR Setup Test Status Mx800 Series y a Scale PSC Magellan Scanner Scale
554. to the department Flag to indicate if department is a non sale department For example postage stamps Indicates if discount A applies to this department Indicates if discount B applies to this department Unit of measure to be used on manual weight items rung into the department UPC number where coupons used are tracked for the department UPC number where discounts availed are tracked for the department Maximum amount a transaction can be rung to the dept Minimum amount a transaction can be rung to the dept Indicates if Tax schedule A applies to items rung to this dept Indicates if Tax schedule B applies to items rung to this dept Indicates if Tax schedule C applies to items rung to this dept Indicates if Tax schedule D applies to items rung to this dept RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Number Text Date Time Number N A N A N A Text Number Number Amount Amount 2 6 RETAIL 7 User Manual ADMINISTRATION MAINTENANCE Selection Criteria Selection criteria consist of all the departments that currently exist in the system Sort Criteria Department Ascending Sub Department Ascending Section Maintenance The Section Maintenance form is used to enter maintain data related to sections An Edit Section v SQ als unlimited number of sections can be added into Section Section Name Departmen Atibutes RETAIL providing the ability to establish an a TOER unlimi
555. toes Grape 7 The order of the pictures changes with the most i l commonly looked up items appearing first N Note To enable the product lookup on the Checkstand mark the Allow Lookup flag for each product you wish to display Note Refer to the Loading Pictures and Videos topic for information on loading product pictures RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 40 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Tendering This section will describe some of the various functions that can be used when tendering an order through the Front End module of RETAIL Various tender attributes security levels and limits can be configured through the Tender Maintenance function in the Back End An example of this is whether an amount must precede the entry of a Tender Code that is tender as ordered An unlimited number of tenders can be entered into RETAIL Tenders can be entered to meet different needs for example gift certificates WIC tender stand aside credit card Foreign currencies and tenders can also be setup refer to the Foreign Currencies topic in the Appendices la When tendering an order the system can be configured to prompt for information This information will be tracked with the transaction Example uses of this feature include prompting for a check when tendering with a check prompting for information about the customer for example zip code for survey purposes prompting for
556. tomer In store Charge Balance Summary report Report field Description Format Calculation Card Number Card ID Number Text Customer Name Charge customer name Text Home Phone Charge customer phone number Text D L Charge Customer driver s license Text Current Balance Charge customer outstanding balance owed Currency Also shows customers with negative balances Table 9 5 Selection Criteria Select all charge account customers outstanding balances Sort Criteria By customer in alphabetical order In Store Charge Statement statements for all customers or a selected customer This report is generated from the In store Charge Maintenance fe Preview C Print toolbar This report serves as a Customer s Statement of meper Ire account that can be mailed to the customer for payment oa ie 0 1 2007 End Date 10 26 2007 Close Type the start date and end date for the statement period lomo The End Date selected is limited to be within 30 days from A Al Customers Bl Help current date Statements can be printed for all customers or fora specific customer Zero balance with activity No activity with 05 balance Table 9 6 contains a description of each field contained in the In store Charge Statement Reportfield__ Description Format Calculation Customer Data Customer name ID Number and address Text None Period Displays the selected dates Date None Statement Ending Displays the outstanding balance at ending dat
557. tomer to select a tender type The customer should select the tender type Follow the prompts according the tender type t The customer is then asked to verify the amount and press enter on the pin pad to confirm the transaction u Once authorization is complete a message will be displayed Transaction Approved Note If the transaction has been denied or an error has occurred a message will be displayed and or an error code will be displayed v The customer copy of the receipt will print out w The merchant copy of the receipt will be printed x The customer will keep the customer copy and the checker will save the merchant receipt for balancing at the end of the shift Nr Note Electronic tender transactions are processed through an interface to a specific EFT processor that is Concord Microtrax Mercury Refer to Appendix E for information on EFT processing In Store Charge Tendering a Enter items and total order b Scan the customer s card number or Type the card number followed by the ID key ID ENTER through the keyboard or Press the ID key ID ENTER through the keyboard and Type the customer card number when prompted Key in the total and press the In Store Charge Tender key MI ENTER through the keyboard First copy of the receipt will print out When the first copy is finished press ENTER to print a second copy of the receipt The customer will keep the first one and the checker will have th
558. tomers paid charges for example In store Charges Misc Charges and Financial Charges from the grid list Flag to include or exclude charge customers unpaid charges for example In store Charges Misc Charges and Financial Charges from the grid list Flag to include or exclude customers paid or unpaid Front end originated checkstand charges Flag to include or exclude customers paid or unpaid Backend originated charges Flag to included or exclude customers paid or unpaid recorded finance charges Click to refresh grid information based on the above listed from Card Number to Financial Charges flag field selection criteria Click any column heading to sort data on the grid in ascending or descending orders Lists customer card numbers meeting selection criteria Clicking a customer row once or twice writes the customer s card number in the Card No field and refreshes grid to display this customer s data only Lists customer names meeting selection criteria Clicking a customer row once or twice writes the customer s card number in the Card No field and refreshes grid to display this customer s data only Lists customer balances meeting selection criteria Clicking a customer row once or twice writes the customer s card number in the Card No field and refreshes grid to display this customer s data only Lists customer transactions with process dates meeting selection criteria Lists customer transaction types meeting selection crite
559. ton x is selected from the Safe Statistics and Balancing form Table 30 3 contains a description of each field contained in the Safe Audit Report Date Date of audit Date Time None Time Stamp Time of audit Date Time None Tender Tender names Text None Safe Amount Original safe amount Currency None Audited Amount Audited amount entered Currency None Safe Change Difference between original amp audit amounts Number Safe Amount Audited Amt Manager Name of manager performing audit Text None Table 30 3 Selection Criteria All Safe Statistics data Sort Criteria None RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 232 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Safe Statistics and Balancing continued Safe Adjustments The safe adjustments form supports the entry of adjustments to the tenders listed on the Safe Statistics form This form is accessible by clicking on the Safe Adjustments button in the toolbar This function would be used anytine amounts need to be added or subtracted from the safe e g cash is added to the safe Select a tender from the Tenders field Enter in the Adjustment amount positive or negative and type in a memo describing the adjustment Click on the Save button to save the entry All entries will be displayed at the bottom of the form w Safe Adjustments 21xj Tenders y Adjustment 0 00 Memo Close Help Tender Adjustment Memo Modified By Date Modified
560. tore the number from the check as the user s account number Show Check Memo Indicates if the memo field will be displayed CHECKSTAND RECEIPT Configurable attributes effecting the checkstand receipt Print Employee Name Flag to indicate if the employee name should be printed on the checkstand receipt Print Front of Check Flag to indicate if front of check should be printed This option only works with tenders having the Require Franking option set Print Receipt Logo Flag to indicate if the company s Logo should be printed on the checkstand receipt Logo must be in the logo bmp file in the CAPOS directory on the checkstand computers RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 263 RETAIL 7 r Manual ADMINISTRATION SETUP POS Information continued POS INFORMATION FIELD DESCRIPTIONS FORM FIELD DESCRIPTION Print Authorization Code Flag to indicate if authorization code will be printed on receipt Split Tax Total Flag to print taxes separately on the checkstand receipt Print Zero Tax Flag to print tax total even if no tax Print UPC Flag to print the UPC code on the checkstand receipt in addition to the product description Print Customer DOB Indicates if customer s date of birth should be printed on receipt Print Discount Category Indicates if the discount category A B C if product has A and B should be printed on the transaction line Suppress Customer Flag to indicate if customer balances should be suppressed from printing
561. tting last pares for Electronic Coupons Loading Electronic Coupons changed since 10 3 2007 7 23 41 AM Electronic Coupons in Progress 1 Select the checkstands to be updated usually all To de select click in the box next to the checkstand name to remove the M Click OK to start the process 2 By default Use Fast Update for Customers and Products is selected Only the new and updated products will be updated to the checkstands To de select click in the box to remove the checkmark which will cause all the products in the database to be updated 3 The system connects to all Check Stands selected If there is an error the system prompts you with Cannot connect to some of the checkstand Do you still want to continue a If you choose NO the system aborts this function b If you choose YES then the system continues with this function However the checkstands that caused the error is not updated with the customer information c In either case the system is having a problem connecting to the checkstands and action should be taken Either there is a network problem in connecting to the checkstand or the checkstand name is incorrect in RETAIL see the System Information section under the Administration Tab for more information RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 128 RETAIL 7 r Manual CUSTOMERS Print Customer Report The Print Customer Report function accessed from the Administration Menu or the
562. tup POS point of sale Information which includes system limits tax tables discounts receipt banners and savings messages 3 Setup Security Administration data which includes security levels for both Checkstand and Back End functions 1 Access the System Information function under the SETUP section of the Administration menu and complete the following tasks Click on the Defaults tab to setup various system Bsssulusliumisn parameters used by the Back End Under the Tr Databases Licensee Checkstands Notification Defaults section transaction history backup archival and system log files history time frames are entered as well as configurable attributes used in the Back End system Under the Licensee tab the licensee name used by the system is displayed as well as the contents of the logo file Changing the name will invalidate the license The logo is a bitmap file accessible by Microsoft Paint that can be easily modified The logo file is used by the Back End and Front End systems to print on reports and receipts respectively The logo file must exist in the C Program Files Retail Backend directory on the Back End computer s and in the C Program Files Retail POS directory on the Checkstand computers Note Refer to the Running a 24 Hour Store topic contained in the Appendices RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 Backups Defaults Transac tion history 2 day s System log history Ew days Transac ti
563. ty Reference No Memo Amount Balance 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0041000000128 Current Balance 0 08 10 16 05 Charge 1 1 263 8 22 8 30 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0041000000538 Current Balance 0 00 10 15 05 Charge 3 3 112 24 15 24 15 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0041000000545 Current Balance 20 75 10 28 05 Charge 7 7 66 8 21 28 96 10 19 05 Charge 6 6 42 71 04 100 00 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0041000000547 Current Balance 0 00 10 23 05 Charge 3 3 192 1 00 1 00 10 23 05 Charge 3 3 192 99 00 100 00 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0041000000548 Current Balance 88 71 10 30 05 Charge 4 4 163 11 29 100 00 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0041000000549 Current Balance 39 86 10 31 05 Charge 7 7 137 14 36 54 22 10 30 05 Charge 6 6 156 45 78 100 00 100 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0041000000550 Current Balance 64 23 10 30 05 Charge 4 4 191 35 77 100 00 250 00 CRESTINE CARD 0046990000045 Current Balance 0 00 10 28 05 Charge 6 6 23 83 72 83 72 250 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0042500000018 Current Balance 0 00 10 20 05 Charge 3 3 206 2 36 2 36 250 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0046990000044 Current Balance 0 00 10 19 05 Charge 5 5 61 43 03 43 03 50 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0040500000124 Current Balance 33 06 10 23 05 Charge 6 6 57 11 58 44 64 10 21 05 Charge 4 4 55 5 36 50 00 250 00 CRESTLINE CARD 0046990000050 Current Balance 0 00 10 25 05 Charge 2 2 7 3 99 3 99 10 25 05 Cha
564. uction This section only applies to installations using Ingenico as their EFT processor This documentation should be used in conjunction with documentation supplied by Ingenico Processing Ingenico EFT Processing requires the following configuration Ingenico Software installed on Windows 2000 Server supplied by Ingenico Connection from the checkstands to the Ingenico Software The following entries must be added to the Ros ini file on each front end machine Section of Ros ini AllowEBT Indicates that EBT Electronic Benefits Transactions will be supported CdHostType Indicates that Ingenico is being used for EFT processing EFTName ROSEFTING Indicates the ROSEFTING adIl is called HostIP TCP IP Address TCP IP address where Ingenico Software resides HostPort 9001 Local port where Ingenico Software resides Make sure port IVI is consistent on all front ends HostLog 1 Logerrorstoalog file Note Consideration should be made in the event the store loses connection to the web This can be accomplished with either a standalone unit purchased from Ingenico or a router can be purchased with an automatic backup dial system Note Some type of Web security such as a file wall should be setup prior to processing transactions RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 317 RETAIL 79 r Manual Appendix E Report Samples APPENDIX E REPORT SAMPLE This appendix contains a list of most of the reports used within RET
565. ufacturer code or selecting the product group we Or you can use the Retail Power Search part of the form to look for products by description department or price for example Press the arrow buttons to send the Products you want to the Product Group side You can flag one or more of the products in the group to be Required by pressing the Show Required Product button This will enforce that the customer buys the item flagged Required RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 67 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Electronic Coupons continued Coupon Method Amount The Coupon Method field defines to the system what coupon reimbursement method is given to the customer The available methods are defined as follows Price Reduction reduces the price of the item by a set amount Reduction reduces the price of the item by a set percentage Specified Price replaces the price of the item with the price specified Generate Coupon generates a coupon for use in the current order or a future order The Coupon Method options that are available depend on the type of trigger selected for the coupon Trigger Type Coupon Methods Available UPC Mix Match Price Reduction Specified Price Generate Coupon Department Section Vendor Price Reduction Reduction Generate Coupon Product Group Price Reduction Generate Coupon The Coupon Amount field defines to the system the amount of the disco
566. ule D Currency Amount of tax applied using Tax D Total Total taxes Currency Total of tax amounts Table 19 7 RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 170 RETAIL 7 r Manual Show Product Sales POINT OF SALES STORE SALE Product Sales The Product Sales form is used to display product sales data for specified criteria Enter in the start and end dates for the time period to view Then select a specific category of data to 815 10 18 2007 v 10 25 2007 v Start Date End Date A otal Profi view Categories available for selection are e 0 la 5 Department GROCERY X re rar displayed on the left side of the form e g _ mis dor a ection X a UPC Dept Enter the selection criteria desired D ial endor v i and click on the appropriate button The a irc a thers v product sales data for the time period will then E ss hclude products wi e same tem codes ero movers on be displayed as well as totals for the category Upe ltem Code Description Cost Price Qty TotalCost Profit GM Customer Revenue A i 0000000000001 Cinnamon Raisin Swirl 1 35 440 168 00 226 80 51240 69 32 108 739 20 selected A list of the products included will be 0000000000007 Coca Cola 200 4 00 1300 1300 1300 50 00 6 26 00 disolaved in the arid at the bottom of the form ae ST eS a E E E ISp aye 9 i 0000000000011 Cheddar Cheese 122 400 600 732 1868 63 50 5 24 00 Click on the Sales Filter button Eg to refi
567. ule Maintenance in the Administration Menu Indicates if the age of the customer and cashier must be checked in order to purchase sell the product Age required to purchase sell product UPC code of a linked product Provides ability to link two products together for the purposes of pricing When product is rung up at the checkstand the linked product will also ring up Flag to indicate if this product is joined to another UPC link when using a store coupon Type packaging breakdown if product is packaged with one or more units and the size of the units Show case cost for this product for the selected vendor from the vendor list In add mode allows entry of the quantity on hand for the product In edit mode displays the current quantity on hand for the product Flag to indicate that the product requires a scale to determine price Enter the weight to be deducted for packaging when the product is rung up at the Checkstand Select the unit of measure of this product For example lb ft and in Use this field to group multiple like products together for pricing purposes Date and time of last modification Name of the employee who last modified the form Display the Product s UPC or PLU Display the Product s Description Display the Item Code used by the wholesaler to identify the product Displays the product group that product is assigned to Displays the product group type RP Reporting Group PR Pricing Group Displays the
568. um of the items scanned divided by the sum of the total items 10 Rings per Minute Total rings per minute 11 Average Tender Time in Seconds The average time of each transaction including tender time that is the time that the customer takes to pay for the transaction 12 Idle Hours The total time during which the cashier was not involved in a transaction RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 241 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Cashier Performance Evaluation The Cashier Performance Evaluation task consolidates the information from the Cashier Analysis amp Cashier Performance ae forms and will generate a report that is useful e ME as an incentive to reward your cashiers pecar 000 000 Cashier Analysis performance or improvement Each cashier is rewarded points on a scale of 1 5 The amounts used to reward points are user configurable via the Settings button When calculating the averages the system will disregard the highest and lowest amounts and average the remainder of the amounts Example You have 10 cashiers The highest and lowest amounts are disregarded The 8 remaining amounts are added and then the sum is divided by 8 This gives us the means Subtract the means from each cashier amount then divide by the means and that gives us the cashier s percentage The percentage is a measurement of the cashier s performance based upon the average This percentage
569. unt that is given when the coupon is triggered The coupon amount is dependent on the Coupon Method selected Trigger Qty Amount Each coupon must have a trigger quantity or amount defined This indicates to the system the quantity or amount that must be purchased in order for the coupon to be triggered The entry of a quantity or an amount is dependent on the trigger type of the coupon Trigger Type Quantity or Amount UPC Mix Match Product Group Quantity of product which must be purchased before coupon is triggered Department Section Vendor Amount that must be purchased before the coupon is triggered Coupon Link Next Use Coupon Link and Next Use fields are only used for Generated Coupons When you select Generate Coupon as the coupon method you must specify which coupon coupon link should be generated when the coupon is triggered To select a Coupon Link either type in the Coupon ID or click ellipse button to display a list of coupons to select from only coupons with a Coupon Type of Linked Coupon can be specified as the Coupon Link The Next Use field indicates to the system if the coupon being generated can be used immediately on the current customer order or for use on customer s next visit Leave the field blank if the coupon is to be used in the current order or check M the field if the coupon will be available for use on a future order RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 68 RETAIL 7 User Manual BAC
570. update the information to the checkstands using the Synchronize Checkstands with Employees function RETAIL prompts the user to synchronize checkstands each time an employee has been added or modified RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 87 RETAIL 7 User Manual BACK END FUNCTIONS HOWTO Manage Employees continued Review Checker Statistics RETAIL also gives you the capability to review checker statistics for a particular time period Select the Till Statistics and Balancing function Stat Date 10722 2007 y EndDete fiovz2 007 y lt under the REGISTERS section of the Point of ae A sl Bl oe Mi balancing I atistics SES ME w iy oc a Check 0 00 f Customers 384 7 Credit Card soo Items 1 601 00 Once the form is displayed enter or select the Debit Cad Ed sm start date and end date for the time period you a A ea a wish Data for the first cashier for the time period OS esas 9000 ae Paid Outs 0 00 selected will now be displayed on the form You Store Coupons ReevsOnc mz lec Foodstamps ver orts FBS can display information for other cashiers by a ta a clicking the left or right scroll arrows next to the er aen ie Cashier field This will allow you to scroll through e A O otaona Totals 0 00 6 768 77 6 768 77 the statistics for the various cashiers that exist in the system Reports are also available to assist you in monitoring checker performance The Print Front End Serv
571. ve selected the field select the filter criteria using a Sort By combination of the operators and criteria a displayed Select the sort option desired from Tatal eee the list displayed and whether you want the sort Cost seeng order in descending or ascending sequence a Click OK and the filter will be applied to the data Gross displayed on the Customer Sales form RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 177 RETAIL 79 r Manual Show Customer Sales continued Customer Group The Customer Group form is used to group customers into a specific category Thank you letters coupons or gift certificates can then be printed for each customer in the specific category The criteria used in the Show Customer Sales form are the same criteria used on this form to display the customers that can be categorized This form is displayed when the Group Customers button POINT OF SALES STORE SALE Customer Group Category Department GROCERY Select Type Thank You Letter From 10 18 2007 To 10 25 2007 Close Help Customer i Home Phone 4 Customer Henry Luke J y Chen Rebecca Chen Rebecca i J Henry Luke Cool Jane Lee Sarah Varty Doris Lee Sarah Grant B Grant T pressed from the toolbar on the Show Customer Sales form Harrison Hazel lt Customer Group If the Preferred Customers option is selected as the Select Type then the top of the form will change as depicted to the right Th
572. verview of the technical composition of RETAIL RETAIL is a client server based system developed using Microsoft development tools The Front End and Back End modules were developed using Microsoft Visual Basic version 6 0 The database system supporting both modules is Microsoft SQL Server The diagram shows the interfaces supporting both modules The following table gives a brief description of each interface Description Interface Module ipti Scanner Scale Front End Product scanning and weighing Front End Prints customer receipts and register reports Other Serial Devices Front End Other devices for example gas pump ATM Credit Card Credit Debit ATM credit card and EBT transactions Wholesaler Cost Back End Download of product changes from a wholesaler this is Changes supported by your reseller RETAIL Wireless Back End Wireless functions including Shelf Audit Inventory Count DSD Purchase Order RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 12 RETAIL 7 r Manual VERALL FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW High Level Functional Overview Diagram Customer Purchases Serial Device RETAIL Register Interfaces FRONT END Management Store RETAIL Personnel Management BACK END Management System Administration Store Trends RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 13 RETAIL 7 r Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONAL OVERVIEW Front
573. via the RETAIL Wireless module A discrepancy is created for any invoice TE SS eS CE where the extended calculated total of the invoice varies from the vendor s total This form contains two tabs General Displays summary level data for each DSD Discrepancy Details Displays details for a specific invoice selected from the General tab Click an entry PeReciAS listed on the General tab and then click Details cea CESE tab OK Close Help Invoice Date Wendor Total Invoice Number Retail Total PO Number Wendor Name UPC ltem Description C Cost Received C Total Pack Size 0000000000007 Coca Cola 1200 18 216 00 6 12 0000000000008 Sprite 48 00 21 1 008 C 24 12 oz 0000000000088 Rattle 1 23 34 41 82 1 0 Table 15 1 contains a description of each field contained in the DSD Discrepancies form DSD DISCREPANCIES FIELD DESCRIPTIONS General Tab PO Number Purchase Order number of the listed invoices with discrepancies Invoice Date Date invoice received Invoice Number Invoice number Name Vendor name from invoice Total Vendor Vendor total as entered via the hand held device Store Total System calculated total based on products received RETAIL Total System calculated total based on quantity received x unit price listed in the Product Maintenance form Details Tab Summary Data Summary data from the General tab for example invoice date Multiple occurrences of UPC UPC o
574. w EndDate 11 5 2007 HA contained in Appendix F The EFT Charges Report form will be o pare displayed when the Print EFT Charges Report function is Ee RSN selected from the Point of Sales menu This form will accept sm sane a_i entry of a start and end date for selection on the report 3 Holes Shetek Y When the report first opens up the summary for each day for 5 Cassidy Butch Y every card type will be displayed To view the details for the aaa 2 8 Under Twenty one ES day for a particular card type double click on the card name for example VISA A new tab will open up showing the details Note This report can only be run for previous day s sales It is available to print current day sales after a store close is run Table 30 12 contains a description of each field contained in the EFT Charges Report as well as the database fields used by the report Start Date Start date for the period selected Date Time End Date End date of the period selected Date Time EFTCardNo Customer s EFT card number Text Card No Customer s ID number Text EmpNo Employee ID number who processed the Text transaction TilINo Till number where the transaction was Text processed TransNo Transaction number of the processed EFT Text Amount Amount of the EFT transactions Currency Table 30 12 Selection Criteria Data for the selected time period on the form Sort Criteria Date Card Type e g debit credit electronic food stamp
575. w the steps below to complete a media swap a Type the Transaction of the transaction where the tender was entered transaction s are printed on the Checkstand receipt refer to the Checkstand Receipt topic earlier in this section Transaction is an optional field If it is entered then the media swap will be written to the electronic journal using the transaction otherwise new transaction will be used b Highlight the From Tender from the list of tenders displayed In Normal Screen mode if swapping from a CK tender type highlight Check and press OK The Check List will be displayed and you can choose the CHECK 524 43 Apply check to swap from The amount will be filled in automatically Cancel c Highlight the To Tender In Normal Screen mode select the To Tender from the drop down d Type the Amount of the swap e Click Apply button to accept the media swap or click OK button to accept the media swap and exit the Transaction _ Amount form From Tender To Tender e a e Media Swap Check List Card No Amount Check No OK 4 40 103 06 328 99 Apply 8 99 78 99 Cancel f Transaction Amount 23 From Tender To Tender RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 54 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Manager Functions continued Option 9 Maintain Data Add Customer Function Allows adding of a customer from the Front End c
576. where a salesperson number was entered will display on the report To require cashiers to e REINE MERN enter their employee number before each transaction ok select Ask For Salesperson s ID in POS Information StattDate 11 6 2007 y Cancel The layout of this report is contained in Appendix F The EndDate 11 6 2007 Checkstand Sales Person Productivity form is displayed when the Print Sales Person Productivity Report function is selected from the Point of Sales menu This form will accept entry of a start and end date for selection on the report Help Table 30 16 contains a description of each field contained in the Sales Person Productivity Report Start Date Start date of selected period Date Time N A End Date End date of selected period Date Time N A Employee Name Employee No and name of the active cashiers Text None Sales Total sales of an employee for the selected time period Currency None Cost Total cost of items sold Currency None Profit Gross Profit on items sold Currency Line Item Sale Cost of Items Sold Sales Percentage of an employee s sale to total sales for the Percent Line Item Sale Total Sales selected time period Profit Gross Profit on items sold Percent Gross Profit Cost of Items Sold Items No of items sold by the signed on employee Number None Customers No of customers Number None Avg Price Average price of items sold Currency Line Item Sale No of items Avg Order Average order si
577. y B selected RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 30 RETAIL 7 User Manual FRONT END FUNCTIONS HOW TO Customer Processing Tracking Customer Transactions RETAIL provides the capability to track sales for customers Customers are entered into the system through the Customer Maintenance function in the Back End Once customers have been setup the card number of the customer can then be tracked against their transactions Customer sales can then be viewed using the Customer Sales function in the Back End Scan a customer card number refer to the note below on scanning a customer ID or use the ID command on the Checkstand form to enter a customer card number When the ID command is entered the Customer ID form will be displayed allowing the user to enter in the Please Enter Customer ID customer card number If the Customer ID is not known for the customer you can search by driver s license last name or telephone number oo Note you can bypass this form by entering in the _1 2 3 4 5 6 7 s 9 customer ID followed by ID on the command line for owl E R T Y veeo example 123456789ID ENTER Scanning a customer SS and card also bypasses this step Note to scan a customer number the card number J NM used must be 13 digits in length beginning with lt E i 004 for example 004123456789 or 004000000123 CLEAR j The leading prefix 004 can be configured through the POS Information function in the
578. y Received Quantity received for the product Enter in the quantity and press the ENTER Purchase Type Purchase type that applies to the product Three choices are available Received Free Returned Received adds to the amount of the invoice Free is a 0 00 amount and Returned reduces the amount of the invoice PRODUCT LIST UPC Displays the UPC or PLU number of the product Description Displays the description of the product ltemCode Displays the item code of the product CaseCost Displays the cost of the products if the product is in cases UnitCost Displays the cost of the products if the product is in units Unit Price Displays the sales price per unit of the product Ordered Displays the quantity ordered for the product Unit Displays units for the product as ordered either pieces or unit of measure for the product if received in cases Rec d Display quantity received for the product Type Displays purchase type that applies to the line item Diff Displays the difference between ordered and received Total Displays the extended amount for the product of units unit cost or of cases case cost For purchase type Free the extended amount will be 0 00 For purchase type Returned the extended amount will be negative INVOICE INFO Date Invoice receipt date Number Invoice number assigned to P O Shipped By Name of the person who delivered the product Received By Name of the person who received the product Adjustment Displays
579. y applies to Bill Backs Applies a filter to the allowances or bill backs listed in the grid This filter can help isolate the allowances or bill backs for edit eo Behe H wee Maintains notes about an allowance or bill back Jumps to the Show Product Movement function Refer to Show Product Movement topic contained in the Store Sales section Deletes expired deals Activates the context sensitive help Ed RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 156 RETAIL 7 r Manual INVENTORY Allowance Bill Backs continued Allowance Bill Back Reports The Allowances and Bill Backs reports are produced when or are clicked from the Allowance Bill Backs form Table 16 3 contains a description of each field contained in the Allowances Report Report field po Description Format Calculation UPC of the product Text rides Code Item Code of the product Text Product Description Description of product Text Allowance Description Description of the allowance Text Start Date Start date of the allowance Date End Date End date of the allowance Date Vendor Vendor that allowance applies to Text RETAIL Price Suggested RETAIL price as entered on the Currency allowance Amount Amount of the allowance per case Currency Table 16 3 Table 16 4 contains a description of each field contained in the Bill Backs Report Report field Description Format Calculation Rebate ID Rebate id of the bill back Text Bill back Description Descriptio
580. y have a negative effect on the appearance Color Font Color 16711680 Back Color 16512 E Control Attributes Alignment TopLeft y MultimediaT ype None vw BackGroundType ColorOnly v ControlStyle Attributes The Split Screen is used to display a video avi file and the store logo on the right hand side The products which are being rung up discounts totals and all other Front End information are displayed on the left side of the split screen By default normal screen is selected when signing on to the Front End To select partitioned display sign on to the Back End then check the box for Front End Administrator From the Retail System Information screen click the Checkstand Tab In Mode select Split Screen from the drop down box Note The reseller or experienced user may create a logo for the Upper Right and Bottom Right areas of the screen These must be named botright jog and topright jog and placed in the directory C Program Files Retail POS BMPfiles The dimensions must be 442x152 for the bottom right logo and 461x159 for the top right logo Videos may be added in C Program Files Retail POS Videos RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 209 RETAIL 7 r Manual ADMINISTRATION SETUP POS Partitioned Display Dimensions continued Table 31 2 lists all of the fields on the POS Partitioned Display Dimensions form Name Displays the name of the field the changes are being applied to Internal Name Displays the
581. ze sold to customers Currency Line Item Sale No of customers Total Fields Total of details Text Sum of detail Fields Table 30 16 Selection Criteria Based on selected dates entered on form Sort Criteria None RETAIL USER REFERENCE MANUAL RETAIL 7 201 RETAIL 7 User Manual POINT OF SALES REGISTERS Electronic Journal The Electronic Journal form is used to search for and report on detailed checkstand transaction activity This function will search the entire checkstand transaction T w SIR Ble al history and match records to the criteria specified creas DSR Different types of search criteria can be specified Casier z e Date range nets i Specific cashier CardNo En ane No View Signature j Specific tender Product Date Employee Transaction No Line No Card No epartment Quanti otal Transaction Subtype Tra A e Specific transaction types STE 2 STARTUP 0000000000001 e Specific Customer Card A secondary criteria can be added to the search E parameter e atime range e a minimum and maximum transaction 0000000000002 0000000000003 0000000000004 0000000000005 00000000001 23 0000000000234 a U3 M9 OD OT Be W M mt N amount e atransaction range BackEnd e arange of UPC codes e a specific register Number of transactions to view e tax status Cancel e transaction level cea e discount type

Goodwin`s Market Aggregate Store Sales

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents